You are on page 1of 695

Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Guide
Document Number DPDS3-PB-200034A DPDS3-PB-200034B Version PDS 7.1 PDS 7.2 Date April 2002 February 2003 Pages 1-684 685-694

Warranties and Liabilities


All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies.

Trademarks
CLIX, Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. DBACCESS, DesignReview, DIALOG, EE Raceway, FrameWorks, Project Engineer, and SEE are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright
1984-2002 Intergraph Corporation All Rights Reserved Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization. RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

_ _______________
If You Need Assistance
Intergraph Online
Our web site brings you fast, convenient, up-to-the-minute information about Intergraphs products, services, and direction. Our web address is: http://www.intergraph.com.

If You Need Assistance

Support
For the lasest Support Services information, use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.intergraph.com/ppo/services/support.asp. If you are outside of the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www.intergraph.com.

Intergraph Directory
The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. If you are outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office.

Intergraph General Information


All countries 1-256-730-2000

Training Registration
1-800-766-7701 (U.S. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.S.)

Mailing Address
Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison, Alabama 35758 U.S.A. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.com.

_ _______________
Documentation Contacts
We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed, let us know. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison, AL 35758

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 1.1 1.2 Project Organization ............................................................................................................ Reference Data Overview ................................................................................................... 1.2.1 Piping Job Specification Introduction ..................................................................... Graphic Commodity Data Introduction .............................................................................. Material Description Data Introduction .............................................................................. Standard Note Library Introduction .................................................................................... Label Description Library Introduction .............................................................................. Piping Assembly Library Introduction ................................................................................ 1.3 1.4 1.5 2. Reference Database Introduction ........................................................................................ Delivered Reference Data ................................................................................................... Reference Data Setup ..........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

3 3 15 17 18 19 21 22 23 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 31 32 33 34 37 37 40 41 43 45 46 47 48 53

PDS Environment ........................................................................................................................ PD Shell ....................................................................................................................................... PD_Shell Form Conventions .............................................................................................. Common Tools on the PD Shell Forms .............................................................................. Batch Processes ................................................................................................................... Help ..............................................................................................................................................

3.

Reference Data Manager .............................................................................................................. 3.1 3.2 Data Security ....................................................................................................................... Reference Data Archival .....................................................................................................

4.

Reference Data Location .............................................................................................................. 4.1 4.2 Reference Database Management Data ............................................................................... Default Project Control Data ...............................................................................................

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 5. Piping Job Specification ............................................................................................................... 5.1 5.2 Material Reference Database Structure ............................................................................... Neutral File Input ................................................................................................................ 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.3 Piping Materials Class Data (201) .......................................................................... Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) .......................................................... Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) .............................................................. Instrument Component Specification Data (204) ................................................... Tap Properties Data (205) ....................................................................................... Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) ....................................... Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) .................................................... Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) .......................................................... Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) .................................................................. Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) .......................................... 55 56 59 62 67 77 81 85 88 91 95 98 101 103 105 113 114 117 119 126 128 129 130 133 134 137 138 140 141 144 145

Spec Writer .......................................................................................................................... 5.3.1 5.3.2 RDB Options File .................................................................................................... Piping Materials Class Data Command .................................................................. 5.3.2.1 5.3.3 Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data ..............................................

Piping Commodity Data Command ........................................................................ 5.3.3.1 5.3.3.2 5.3.3.3 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data ............................. Implied Data ............................................................................................. Add Entry to Material Description Library ..............................................

5.3.4

Piping Specialty Data Command ............................................................................ 5.3.4.1 Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data .................................

5.3.5

Instrument Data Command ..................................................................................... 5.3.5.1 Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data ..........................................

5.3.6

Tap Properties Data Command ............................................................................... 5.3.6.1 Create/Revise Tap Properties Data ..........................................................

5.3.7

Commodity Implied Data Command ...................................................................... 5.3.7.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data .......................

5.3.8 5.4

Table Checker .........................................................................................................

Piping Job Specification Manager ......................................................................................

_ _______________
5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5 Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset Options ....................................... Delete Option .......................................................................................................... Report Option .......................................................................................................... Piping Job Spec Report Manager ........................................................................................ 5.5.1 5.5.2 Using the Report Commands .................................................................................. Report Format Form ................................................................................................ 5.5.2.1 5.5.2.2 5.5.3 Format Creation/Revision Form .............................................................. Format Deletion Form ..............................................................................

Table of Contents

148 151 152 154 155 157 159 161 163 165 167 169 171 173 175 178 181 183 184 186 189 190 191 194 197 200 203 204 208 212 214 215 216 219 221

Report Discrimination Data Form ........................................................................... 5.5.3.1 5.5.3.2 5.5.3.3 5.5.3.4 Discrimination Data Creation Form ......................................................... Search Criteria Form ................................................................................ Discrimination Data Revision Form ........................................................ Discrimination Data Deletion Form .........................................................

5.5.4

Report Form ............................................................................................................ 5.5.4.1 5.5.4.2 5.5.4.3 5.5.4.4 5.5.4.5 Report Creation Form .............................................................................. Revise Report Form ................................................................................. Report Deletion Form .............................................................................. Report Approval Form ............................................................................. Report Multiple Submit Form ..................................................................

5.5.5 6.

Report Management Defaults Form ........................................................................

Piping Job Specification Tables ................................................................................................... 6.1 PJS Tables and Functions ................................................................................................... 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.1.5 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table ..................................................... Nominal Piping Diameters Table ............................................................................ Thickness Data Tables ............................................................................................ Materials Data Table ............................................................................................... Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations ........................................... Delivered Equations ........................................................................................ 6.1.6 6.1.7 6.1.8 6.2 Branch Insertion Tables .......................................................................................... Gasket Separation Table ......................................................................................... Fluid Code Table .....................................................................................................

RDB Tables ......................................................................................................................... 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 Commodity Item Name Table (G02) ...................................................................... Bend Deflection Table (G04) .................................................................................. Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06) .................................................

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 6.2.14 6.2.15 6.3 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07) ....................................................................... Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11) ......................................................................... Weld Type Table ..................................................................................................... Weld Clearance Table ............................................................................................. Weld Graphics Dimensions Table .......................................................................... Bolt Commodity Code Table .................................................................................. Gasket Diameter Table .......................................................................................... Field Fit Length Table ........................................................................................... Component Mirror Table ...................................................................................... Operator Mirror Table ........................................................................................... Default End Preperation Table .............................................................................. MTO Tables and Functions ................................................................................... 222 223 226 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 236 237 239 240 242 242 242 243 244 245 247 248 250 251 253 254 256 258 259 263 266 267 268 270 270 271 272 273 275

Piping Job Specification Tables Command ........................................................................ 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 6.3.10 6.3.11 Options .................................................................................................................... Create Library ......................................................................................................... Compress Library .................................................................................................... Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... Create/Interactive Spec Tables ................................................................................ Create/Batch Spec Tables ....................................................................................... Revise Spec Tables ................................................................................................. Delete Spec Tables .................................................................................................. Report on Spec Tables ............................................................................................ List Spec Tables .................................................................................................... Extract Spec Tables ...............................................................................................

7.

Graphic Commodity Data ............................................................................................................ 7.1 Graphic Commodity Library ............................................................................................... 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.2 Symbol Processors .................................................................................................. Sub-Symbol Processor ............................................................................................ Physical Data Definitions ........................................................................................ Parametric Shape Definitions ..................................................................................

Physical Data Tables ........................................................................................................... 7.2.1 7.2.2 Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library ....................................................... Example of Physical Data Look-Up .......................................................................

7.3

Notes for Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................... 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 Connect Point Data ................................................................................................. Bends and Branches ................................................................................................ Bolts, Gaskets, and Flanges .................................................................................... Pipe, Tubing, and Hose ...........................................................................................

7.4

Graphic Commodity Library Manager ................................................................................

_ _______________
7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 7.4.8 7.4.9 7.4.10 7.5 Create Library ......................................................................................................... Compress ................................................................................................................. Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data .......................................................... Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................. Revise Graphic Commodity Data ........................................................................... Delete Graphic Commodity Data ............................................................................ Report Graphic Commodity Data ........................................................................... List Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................ Extract Graphic Commodity Data .........................................................................

Table of Contents

277 277 277 278 279 281 283 284 285 286 287 290 290 290 291 292 294 296 297 299 300 303 304 304 304 305 305 306 308 309 309 310 313 314 315 315 316 317 318

Physical Data Library Manager ........................................................................................... 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5.5 7.5.6 7.5.7 7.5.8 7.5.9 7.5.10 Create Library ......................................................................................................... Compress ................................................................................................................. Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data ......................................................... Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data ................................................................. Revise Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... Delete Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... Report Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... List Physical Commodity Data ............................................................................... Extract Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................

8.

Table Formats and Naming Conventions ..................................................................................... 8.1 Table Conventions .............................................................................................................. 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.1.7 8.1.8 8.1.9 8.1.10 8.1.11 8.2 Table Names ............................................................................................................ Comments ............................................................................................................... Revision Markers .................................................................................................... Component Tables .................................................................................................. Units ........................................................................................................................ Fields (Input/Output Columns) ............................................................................... NPD Values ............................................................................................................. Rating ...................................................................................................................... Schedule/Thickness ................................................................................................. Weight Tables ....................................................................................................... Abbreviations ........................................................................................................

Table Requirements ............................................................................................................ 8.2.1 Tables Required for Piping Components ................................................................ 8.2.1.1 8.2.1.2 8.2.2 Fittings (6P2C, 6P3C, 6Q2C and 6Q3C) ................................................. Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C) ....................................

Tables Required for Instrument Components .........................................................

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 8.3 Generic Tables .................................................................................................................... 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 8.4 Variables for Generic Tables ................................................................................... Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10) ..................................................................... Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12) ................................... Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T) ................. Generic Table for Male Ends (G20) ........................................................................ Generic Table for Female Ends (G30) .................................................................... Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50) ......................... 319 320 324 326 328 330 332 333 334 336 339 341 342 344 345 347 348 350 351 352 354 355 355 358 361 366 367 372 374 376 378 378 379 380 381 382 383

Piping Component Tables ................................................................................................... 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 Variables for Specific Tables .................................................................................. Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A) .......................................... Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B) ............................... Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A) .................................................................. 8.4.5 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Overflow Data (P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B) ............................................................................. 8.4.6 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A) .............................. 8.4.7 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B) .... 8.4.8 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data (P51,P52,P59) ......................................................................................................... 8.4.9 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves (P60A) ............................ 8.4.10 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves, Overflow Data (P60B) ................................................................................................................... 8.4.11 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65) ......................................................................................... 8.4.12 Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components ..........................................

8.5

Instrument Component Tables ............................................................................................ 8.5.1 8.5.2 Instrument Body (I80 and P80) ............................................................................... Instrument Operator (I81 and P81) .........................................................................

9.

Material Description Data ............................................................................................................ 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 Material Data in the Material Reference Database ............................................................. Short Material Description Library ..................................................................................... Long Material Description Library ..................................................................................... Specialty Material Description Library ............................................................................... Material Description Library Manager ............................................................................... 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 9.5.6 9.5.7 Create Library ......................................................................................................... Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... Load/Revise Interactive .......................................................................................... Load/Revise Batch .................................................................................................. Replace Interactive .................................................................................................. Replace Batch .......................................................................................................... Report Option ..........................................................................................................

10

_ _______________
10. Table Checker ............................................................................................................................ 10.1 Table Checker Form ........................................................................................................ 10.1.1 10.1.2 Using the Report Commands ............................................................................ Report Format Form .......................................................................................... 10.1.2.1 10.1.2.2 10.1.3 Format Creation/Revision Form ...................................................... Format Deletion Form ......................................................................

Table of Contents

385 389 390 392 394 396 398 400 402 404 406 408 411 414 416 418 420 422 437 438 440 440 440 441 442 444 445 446 447 449 453 455 455 455 456

Discrimination Data Form ................................................................................. 10.1.3.1 10.1.3.2 10.1.3.3 Discrimination Data Creation Form ................................................. Discrimination Data Revision Form ................................................ Discrimination Data Deletion Form .................................................

10.1.4

Report Form ...................................................................................................... 10.1.4.1 10.1.4.2 10.1.4.3 10.1.4.4 10.1.4.5 Report Creation Form ...................................................................... Revise Report Form ......................................................................... Report Deletion Form ...................................................................... Report Approval Form ..................................................................... Report Multiple Submit Form ..........................................................

10.1.5 10.2 11.

Report Management Defaults Form ..................................................................

Sample Table Checker Output ........................................................................................

Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager ................................................................................ 11.1 Support Tutorial Definition Manager .............................................................................. 11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3 11.1.4 11.1.5 11.1.6 11.1.7 11.1.8 11.1.9 Create Library ................................................................................................... Compress ........................................................................................................... Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. Create Data ........................................................................................................ Revise Data ....................................................................................................... Report Data ....................................................................................................... List Data ............................................................................................................ Delete Data ........................................................................................................ Extract Data .......................................................................................................

12.

Standard Note Library ................................................................................................................ 12.1 Standard Note Library Manager ...................................................................................... 12.1.1 12.1.2 12.1.3 12.1.4 Create Library ................................................................................................... Compress ........................................................................................................... Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. Create Standard Note Type ...............................................................................

11

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 12.1.5 12.1.6 12.1.7 12.1.8 12.1.9 12.1.10 13. Revise Standard Note Type ............................................................................... Report Standard Note Library Contents ............................................................ List Standard Note Data .................................................................................... Delete Standard Note Data ................................................................................ Extract Standard Note Type .............................................................................. Load Database ................................................................................................. 457 459 460 461 462 463 465 466 466 466 466 467 467 468 468 471 472 472 472 473 475 478 484 485 487 489 495 495 497 497 497 497 497 498 499 499 499

Label Description Library .......................................................................................................... 13.1 Label Types ..................................................................................................................... 13.1.1 13.1.2 13.1.3 13.1.4 13.1.5 13.1.6 13.1.7 13.2 Displayable Attribute Labels ............................................................................. Alphanumeric Labels ........................................................................................ Displayable Attribute Message ......................................................................... Commodity Code Attribute Message ................................................................ Isometric Drawing Labels ................................................................................. Report Labels .................................................................................................... Clash Management Labels ................................................................................

Label Description Library Manager ................................................................................ 13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 13.2.4 Create Library ................................................................................................... Compress Library .............................................................................................. Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. Create Label Data .............................................................................................. 13.2.4.1 13.2.4.2 13.2.4.3 13.2.5 13.2.6 13.2.7 Create Label Graphic Data ............................................................... Create Label Attribute Data ............................................................. Mass Annotation Options .................................................................

Revise Label Data ............................................................................................. Delete Label Data .............................................................................................. Report Label Data .............................................................................................

13.3

Label Library Merger ...................................................................................................... 13.3.1 Label Library Merger Interface ......................................................................... 13.3.1.1 File Menu ......................................................................................... 13.3.1.1.1 13.3.1.1.2 13.3.1.1.3 13.3.1.1.4 13.3.1.1.5 13.3.1.2 Open Source Label Library 1 ....................................... Open Source Label Library 2 ....................................... Open Destination Library ............................................. Information ................................................................... Exit ...............................................................................

Edit Menu ......................................................................................... 13.3.1.2.1 13.3.1.2.2 Select All ...................................................................... Unselect All ..................................................................

12

_ _______________
13.3.1.2.3 13.3.1.2.4 13.3.1.2.5 13.3.1.2.6 13.3.1.2.7 13.3.1.2.8 13.3.1.2.9 13.3.1.2.10 13.3.1.3 Invert Selection ............................................................ Edit Label Number ....................................................... Edit Label Description ................................................. Delete ........................................................................... Validate ........................................................................ Compress Destination Library ..................................... Copy to Destination ..................................................... Clear Error Messages .................................................

Table of Contents

499 499 499 499 499 500 500 500 501 501 501 502 505 506 506 520 521 525 525 527 527 527 528 529 530 532 533 534 535 537 540 546 551 551 555 561

Help Menu ........................................................................................ 13.3.1.3.1 13.3.1.3.2 Contents ....................................................................... About Library Merger ..................................................

13.3.2 14.

Workflow ..........................................................................................................

Piping Assembly Library ........................................................................................................... 14.1 Piping Assembly Language ............................................................................................. 14.1.1 14.1.2 14.1.3 14.2 PAL Keywords .................................................................................................. Placing Taps in Assemblies .............................................................................. Sample Piping Assembly Files .........................................................................

Piping Assembly Library Manager ................................................................................. 14.2.1 14.2.2 14.2.3 14.2.4 14.2.5 14.2.6 14.2.7 14.2.8 14.2.9 14.2.10 14.2.11 Options .............................................................................................................. Create Library ................................................................................................... Compress ........................................................................................................... Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data ......................................................... Create/Batch Assembly Data ............................................................................ Revise Piping Assembly Data ........................................................................... Delete Piping Assembly Data ........................................................................... Report Assembly Data ...................................................................................... List Assembly Data ......................................................................................... Extract Assembly Data ....................................................................................

15.

Reference Database Revision Manager ...................................................................................... 15.1 15.2 15.3 Reference Data Conflict Report ...................................................................................... Table Change Report ....................................................................................................... Reference Data Impact Report ........................................................................................ 15.3.1 15.4 Examples ...........................................................................................................

Proposed RDB Changes Report ......................................................................................

16.

Verify RDB Library ...................................................................................................................

13

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Appendix A: Appendix B: B.1 B.2 Reference Data Manager Error Messages .................................................................. Codelists ..................................................................................................................... 565 567 569 569 667 675 General Comments .................................................................................................................... Comments Specific to Units of Measure Codelist Sets .............................................................

Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... Index ....................................................................................................................................................

14

_ _______________
Preface
Document Purpose

Preface

This document is a reference guide for the Reference Data Manager module of the PDS 3D products. PDS 3D uses interactive graphics and database management techniques to integrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design. The Reference Data Manager module is one part of the overall Plant Design System. It is specifically designed to define and modify the reference data for the PDS 3D modules. It enables you to control and standardize the PDS 3D tasks. You can also modify the reference data to reflect company practices and standards. This document is designed as a reference; it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific Reference Data Manager function.

Document Prerequisites / Audience


This document is intended for project managers who have a working knowledge of the PDS 3D Modules. Knowledge of relational database systems and basic file manipulations is recommended. You should also be familiar with a text editor, such as Notepad, vi, or EMACS.

Related Documents/Products
Intergraph Corporations Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate PDS 3D, along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. Currently, these include Informix, Oracle, and Ingres. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide For more information on related aspects of the PDS 3D products, consult the following documents: Project Administrator Reference Guide Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide Equipment Modeling Reference Guide

15

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Report Manager Reference Guide

About this Document


This document contains front matter, numbered sections, appendices, a glossary, and an index. Much of this document is devoted to a description of the forms used to setup and maintain reference data. Section 1 Provides an overview of the product. It describes general information, terms, and work flow. Describes the product environment. This includes information on accessing the product and common conventions for working in the PDS 3D modules. Describes the main Reference Data Manager form used to access the product. Describe the individual libraries and managers which make up the Reference Data Manager including operating steps for each form within the manager. Provide additional information related to the Reference Data Manager such as error messages, and file listings.

Section 2

Section 3

Sections 4-16

Appendices

Additional Information
The following informational files are delivered with the software in the directory. File Name readme.txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. For a fixes release, the fixes are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed. Provides special notices to the customer. Lists any exceptions made to the certification.

16

_ _______________
General Conventions
This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words, phrases, or groups of related information.

Preface

Typefaces
Italic Indicates a system response, which is an explanation of what the software is doing. For example, The text is placed in the viewing plane. Bold Indicates a command name, parameter name, or dialog box title. Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example, Choose File > Open to load a new file. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message, which requires an action be taken by the user. For example, Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in. For example, Key in original.dat to load the ASCII file. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. For example, The ASCII report is stored in the layout.rpt file.

17

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Symbols
This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note Important supplemental information.

Warning Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed.

Technical tip or information provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information. Map or path shows you how to get to a specific command or form.

More information indicates there is additional or related information.

Need a hint used with activities and labs, provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises.

Keyboard Conventions
The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators, which map menu selections to key combinations. ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC,k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z. To press the Escape key, then K.

18

_ _______________
Terminology
Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. For example, Click Apply to save the changes. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor. Selecting does not initiate an action. After selecting an item, you click the action you want to affect the item. For example, Select the file original.dat from the list box, then click Delete to remove it from the directory. In addition, you would select items to define parameters, such as selecting toggle buttons. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file. For example, Select the line string to define the graphic template. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. If you are using the CLIX operating system, you tentative-select by double-clicking with a mouse or pressing <T> on a hand-held cursor. If you are using the Windows NT operating system, you tentative-select by pressing a left-button, right-button chord. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action. For example, Double-click on the file original.dat to load it into the new surface. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. To key a character string into a text box. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. In a dialog box, pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field.

Preface

Double-click

Type Key in

19

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

20

_ _______________
1. Introduction

Introduction

1. Introduction

Welcome to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) module of the Plant Design System of software. Intergraphs plant design software can be used to design any type of plantfrom petrochemical plants, offshore platforms, chemical and pharmaceutical plants, consumer products (food, beverages, cosmetics, soap, paper, and so forth), to power plants, waste water treatment plants, and cogeneration facilities. Specifically, the Plant Design System (PDS) integrates many discipline-specific software modules; these modules automate the many phases of a plant design project. Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is one of these modules. In PDS, placement of piping components is driven by the specification. The PDS reference data provides the selection criteria for the piping commodity items that are found in the piping job specification and the piping commodity libraries that are delivered with the product. This data is contained in the reference database (RDB) and can be used by other projects. The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is specifically designed to define and modify the reference data for the PDS 3D modules. This reference data ensures consistency in the definition of piping specifications and commodity libraries. It is used to control and standardize the PDS 3D modules to reflect company practices and standards.

21

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

1.1

Project Organization
Since a process plant such as a refinery can be extremely large, PDS uses the following organization to break the plant into smaller pieces that can be handled more easily. A project is a convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. The project is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. Each project contains all the information required to work in a PDS task. The Project Administrator controls the creation and modification of Piping projects. Each Piping project consists of a project control database, project design database, piping and equipment models, reference models (structural, HVAC, and electrical raceway), a set of drawings, and a collection of reference data. The reference data may be specific to one project or shared by more than one project. A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator before you can use any of the other 3D PDS modules. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on setting up a project.

22

_ _______________
1.2 Reference Data Overview
The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) enables you to define and modify the reference data for the PDS 3D modules. This reference data is used to ensure consistency in the definition of piping specifications and commodity libraries. It enables you to control and standardize the PDS 3D tasks. You can also modify the reference data to reflect company practices and standards. The Reference Data for PDS 3D is composed of the following basic components:

Reference Data Overview

1. Introduction

Spec/Material Database
Table 201 - Piping Material Class Data Table 202 - Piping Commodity Specification Data Table 203 - Piping Specialty Specification Data Table 204 - Instrument Component Specification Data Table 205 - Tap Properties Data Table 211 - Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table 212 - Piping Commodity Implied Material Data Table 231 - Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table 232 - Flange Insulation Exclusion Data

Practice Specific Reference Data


Physical Dimension Tables Piping Job Specification Tables Short Material Descriptions Long Material Descriptions Specialty Material Descriptions

23

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Practice Independent Reference Data


Graphic Commodity Data Standard Note Library Label Description Library Piping Assembly Library The Reference Data Manager supports both approved and unapproved reference data for a project. The Project Control Database contains complete file management data for both an approved and unapproved version of each type of reference data such as the Piping Job Specification or the Graphic Commodity Library. This allows revisions to take place in unapproved files while other processes read the approved files. Once the information in the unapproved files has been verified, it can be posted to the approved reference data files. The following figure illustrates the various pieces of reference data required to place a 6" gate valve in a piping model and report on the placed component. It depicts how the various parts that make up PDS work together. Whenever possible, this placement example will be used throughout the rest of this document. For example, the discussion of the physical dimension tables will use the tables called to place the gate valve as examples.

24

_ _______________

Reference Data Overview

1. Introduction

25

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

26

_ _______________
1.2.1 Piping Job Specification Introduction
The Piping Job Specification (PJS) provides selection criteria for piping commodity items, piping specialty items, and instruments. The information for the Piping Job Specification is contained in the following files: Specification/Material Reference Database - database containing the definitions for piping materials classes, commodity items, specialty items, and tap properties tables. Spec Table Library - library containing the specification tables referenced in the PJS. The information in the Specification/Material Reference database and Spec Table Library tables is also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can extract and modify. The Piping Job Specification Manager enables you to create or revise the specificaton data in the Material Reference Database. You can use the interactive (forms-driven) specification writer or define/revise the data using ASCII neutral files. The Piping Job Spec Tables command enables you to create, revise, and delete tables in the Spec Table Library.

Piping Job Specification Introduction

1. Introduction

Graphic Commodity Data Introduction


The graphic commodity data is used to define commodity items, specialty items, and instruments. The Graphic Commodity Library contains the parametric symbol definitions required to place piping and instrument components in a 3D model. When you place a component the system uses the Piping Job Specification to select the appropriate component from the parametric symbol definition library which then accesses the component dimensional data. The graphic commodity data is contained in the following object libraries: Graphic Commodity Library - contains the parametric definitions for the commodity items. Physical Dimension Libraries - contains dimension data for the commodity items. (A different Physical Dimension Library is required for each type of practice such as, U.S., DIN, or British Standard) Spec Table Library - contains the specification tables referenced in the PJS. The parametric descriptions and dimension tables are also delivered in the form of text libraries which you can extract and modify using the Graphic Commodity Library Manager and Physical Data Library Manager.

27

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Material Description Data Introduction


The Material Description Data is accessed for Material Take-off (MTO) reporting from the Design Database Other miscellaneous reporting Interfaces to the material control system Stress analysis Isometric drawing extraction. The Material Description Data consists of the commodity item data which is not stored in the Design Database, which is not required for the creation of graphic symbologies, and which is not part of the geometric data. This data is contained in the following files: Material Data in the Specification/Material Database - database tables containing definitions for commodity items, criteria for implied material, and weld data. Short Material Description Library - contains the short material descriptions for commodity items and taps. Long Material Description Library - contains the long material descriptions for commodity items. Specialty Material Description Library - contains the material descriptions for specialty items. The material descriptions are also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can modify and post to the libraries. The Material Description Library Manager enables you to create, revise, and delete data in the Material Description Libraries. You can use the Piping Job Specification Manager to load the material data tables in the Specification/Material Database.

Standard Note Library Introduction


The text for code-listed attributes and standard notes is stored in the Standard Note Library. All attributes identified as code-listed are actually stored as integer values. The code list text associated with the integer is stored in the Standard Note Library. Information in the Standard Note Library is identified by note number and note type. Output from the library consists of free-format text which forms the standard note.

28

_ _______________
Label Description Library Introduction
The Label Description Library contains the definitions for the following label types used in PDS 3D: Orthographic drawing view specific labels Orthographic drawing view identification labels Orthagraphic drawing - user input Displayable attribute messages Commodity code attribute messages Isometric drawing labels Report labels Clash management labels These labels are intelligent graphics with links to the material database. The Label Description Library Manager enables you to define the graphic parameters for a label (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label (what information comprises the label.)

Piping Job Specification Introduction

1. Introduction

Piping Assembly Library Introduction


The Piping Assembly Library contains the piping assembly definitions which define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. A Piping Assembly object library and text library which contain the definitions for basic assemblies are included in the product delivery.

29

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

1.3

Reference Database Introduction


A database is a collection of formatted data which conforms to a set of predefined rules. The Specification/Material Reference Database is composed of a set of tables (entities) which represent categories of data. A table is a defined set of attributes which describe an item, such as the Piping Commodity Data table. An attribute is a single type of information to be stored about an item, such as nominal diameter or end preparation. Each attribute has a column number in the database table and a name which describes the piece of information to be stored. The actual information stored in the database is referred to as the attribute value. This value is a fixed data type; it can be either numeric, alphanumeric, or code-listed. numeric data types can be either real (decimal) or integer. These attributes are used for quantitative values such as pressure or temperature. alphanumeric data types (also called character) are used for textual information such as component names or descriptions. code-listed data types are a special integer values which help standardize and speed up data entry. A code list is a set of acceptable values for a particular attribute which can be referred to by an index number. A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value is defined using one of the selections from a particular code list set.

30

_ _______________
1.4 Delivered Reference Data
The following reference data is delivered in the reference database products for the corresponding practices (such as RDUSRDB or RDDINRDB). Library File Description Physical Dimension Table Library Piping Job Specification Table Library Short Material Description Library Long Material Description Library Specialty Material Description Library Object us_pcdim.l us_pjstb.l us_shbom.l us_lgbom.l us_spbom.l Text us_pcdim.l.t us_pjstb.l.t -

Delivered Reference Data

1. Introduction

For the DIN RDB substitute din_ for us_ in the listed library file names. The following reference data, which is not unique to any specific practice, is delivered in the PD Shell product in the \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib directory. Library File Description Graphic Commodity Library Piping Assembly Library Label Description Library Standard Note Library Object pip_gcom.l assembly.l labels.l std_note.l Text pip_gcom.l.t assembly.l.t std_note.l.t

31

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

1.5

Reference Data Setup


A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator before you can use the Reference Data Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on Loading PDS 3D products. Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data. Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas. Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS. In addition to the information specified in the Project Administrator Reference Guide, you should complete the following steps before using the Reference Data Manager. Load the appropriate Reference Data product (such as RDUSRDB for U.S. Practice or RDDINRDB for DIN Practice). Edit the pds.cmd file to identify the text editor to be used when revising reference data through the Reference Data Manager forms. You can specify any text editor that has been loaded on the workstation. The default setting for Windows NT systems is Notepad.
$ENV {PD_EDITOR} = <absolute path to preferred editor executable>;

Edit the pds.cmd file to define PD_COMMIT_INTERVAL to control the commit interval for use in loading specification data into the Material Reference Database. This has the same impact as adjusting the -c option in a risload command line. The default commit value is 25. Increasing this variable may improve performance. Identify the location of the Reference Data files as described in Reference Data Location, page 47.

32

_ _______________
2. PDS Environment
The PDS 3D software supports a variety of applications. All the supported applications use a common interface that is controlled by the PD Shell program. This ensures consistency across applications and minimizes the amount of time required to learn the product. The PDS 3D modules provide a simple user interface through extensive use of forms. The modules also provide an on-line Help capability for easy access to information while working in the product. The PDS 3D software uses available nucleus tools such as MicroStation and FORMS. It supports standard software such as NFS, NQS, and RIS required to set up data across a network. This design facilitates the use of non-PDS tools such as relational databases and third party software. The PD_Shell Environment and all batch jobs in the PDS 3D products interface to Intergraphs Network Licensing System.

PDS Environment

2. Environment

33

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

PD Shell
The PD Shell program provides access to the various functions that are associated with the PDS 3D Modules. You can access the Plant Design System Environment form by Double-clicking the PD_Shell icon on Windows NT workstations. This executes a control script that defines all of the environment variables that are needed to run the product, and it identifies the location of the product files. These files can be located on the workstation or a server on the network. See pds.cmd in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on this file. The script also activates the Plant Design System Environment form.

This form identifies the active project(s) and provides access to all the PDS functions.

Options
Schematics Environment Provides access to the PDS 2D modules that are used to create and modify piping and instrumentation diagrams, process flow diagrams, and instrumentation database records. Equipment Modeling Provides access to the Equipment Modeling module, which provides an interactive graphics environment that is used to create and revise equipment model graphics and database information. FrameWorks Environment Provides access to the FrameWorks module, which provides an environment that is used to create and revise structural models, create and revise structural drawings, and propagate structural models.

34

_ _______________
Piping Designer Activates an interactive command environment that is used to create piping and in-line instrumentation in the model; revise existing model graphics and database information; and verify the integrity of the data in the model. Electrical Raceway Environment Provides access to the Electrical Raceway module, which provides an interactive environment that is used to create and revise raceway models and access raceway utilities. Piping Design Data Manager Provides access to a set of options that are used to verify the integrity of the graphic and database information that is associated with a model. Piping Model Builder Enables you to create piping graphics from a nongraphics environment. This module is used with PD_Design to create an accurate 3D model of the piping network. Pipe Support Designer Activates an interactive command environment that is used to create pipe supports in the model, and revise existing pipe support model graphics and database information. Pipe Stress Analysis Activates a set of forms that are used to extract information from piping models for input to third-party pipe stress analysis products. Interference Manager Activates a set of forms that are used to check for interferences among project models and to control approved interferences. Isometric Drawing Manager Activates a set of forms that are used to extract isometric drawings from piping models and to review or plot the created isometric drawings.

PD Shell

2. Environment

Drawing Manager Activates a set of forms that are used to create and manipulate drawings and drawing views; provide access to the interactive graphics environment for drawings; and provide access to a plot manager and vector hiddenline manager. DesignReview Integrator Activates a set of forms that are used to extract information to form label files for use in DesignReview and to review data from a DesignReview session. Report Manager Activates a set of forms that are used to create and revise report format files and report on information in a project including Material Take-Off reports. Project Administrator Provides access to a set of forms that are used to create a project, create and revise project files, define project seed data, and control the project. Reference Data Manager Provides access to a set of forms that are used to control the reference data for a project including Piping Job Specification data, Graphic Commodity Data, Alphanumeric Commodity Data, Standard Note Library, Label Description Library, and Piping Assembly Library.

35

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Other Fields
User ID Used for access control. This field also sets the Review User ID for use in the Interference Manager module. If access control has been defined, you must key in a valid user ID as defined by your system manager to gain access to the projects. Refer to the Access Control Manger in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide, for more information on using access control. If access control has not been defined, no entry is required for this field. Password Key in the password for the specified user ID. Project List Field Displays the defined projects for the network and allows you to select the active project. The system lists all the defined PDS projects (2D-only, 3Donly, and 2D & 3D). An error is displayed if you select an option that is incompatible with the active project. For example, if the active project is a 2D-only project, you cannot access the the Interference Manager module. If access control has been defined, only those projects for which you have some level of access are displayed. Message Area Displays prompts and messages that are associated with the active process. Error messages are displayed in red.

36

_ _______________
PD_Shell Form Conventions
The following Conventions describe how to respond to the various buttons, lists, and prompts that make up the environments. The display size of forms and dialog boxes in the nonMicrostation graphics environment are independent of the size of the workstations display system. Most forms contain the same basic features: buttons, fields, text, and other gadgets. In general, anything you find on a form is called a gadget.

PD_Shell Form Conventions

Selecting Options
You move through the PD Shell forms by selecting function buttons or other gadgets from the form. Select means to place the screen cursor (which appears as an arrow) on top of a screen gadget and press <D>. For most of the forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and accept the data in that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and then selecting the Accept button. You use the select action to select functions, access other forms, activate data fields, toggle buttons, select from lists, scroll through data displayed on the screen, and so on. The following summarizes other basic actions you use in the environments: Enter When keying in any data in a key-in field, press the <ENTER> or <Tab> key for the data to be entered into the system. You can also press <ENTER> or <Tab> to move through a set of key-in fields. Delete If you make a mistake while keying in text, press the <Delete> key to erase character(s) to the left of the cursor.

2. Environment

Common Tools on the PD Shell Forms


There are many gadgets in the environments that are common to most or all of the forms. The following describes these tools.

Standard Commands
The PD Shell forms have a set of standard buttons in the upper right corner of most of the form windows. The available commands vary from form to form depending on the type of operation. The Help button activates on-line Help for the active form. Help remains active until you delete the Help window.

37

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 The Shell button exits the active form and returns control to the base manager that is associated with the active form. For most forms this returns to the Plant Design System Environment form. The Top button exits the active form and returns control to the top form of the active branch. The Cancel button cancels or exits from the active form. Control returns to the immediately preceding form in the hierarchy. The Accept button accepts a selection or operation. Depending on the active form or option, the active form remains active so that you can repeat a similar operation or control returns to the preceding form. The Restart button clears any key-in fields on the form that have values you can modify. Scrolling List Some screen menus have a scrolling list of projects or applications. You need to scroll a list only if more options are available than can be displayed in the window. To scroll a list, select the arrow buttons on the side of the list. The list scrolls up or down depending on which arrow you select. The scrolling list has an arrow pointing up and an arrow pointing down. These arrows scroll lists line by line. There is a button that slides between these two arrows to indicate your position on the list. To page through the list, select the space above or below the sliding button. The list pages up or down accordingly. You can also select the slider and, while pressing <D>, slide the button up or down the bar. The items scroll through the window as you move the button. The size and position of the button on the scroll bar is an indication of the number of lines and the relative position within the list. All commands that display a list of design areas or models order the list alphanumerically by the design area number or model number in ascending order. In some forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and accept the data in that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and then selecting the Accept button.

38

_ _______________
Key-in Fields

PD_Shell Form Conventions

Screens that accept keyboard input have key-in fields. These fields are boxshaped and dark gray. You can select a key-in field and key in a new value. A bar cursor appears in the active key-in field. Key in your input, and press <Return>. To change a field, reselect the field and key in the new information. Key-in fields have a maximum number of characters depending on the item that is being defined. If you select a key-in field for a code-listed attribute, the system activates a form that lists the code list values for the selected field. MicroStation requires lowercase characters for the file specification and path name of all design files. Therefore, the system automatically converts any input for the file specification and path name of a design file (such as a model or drawing) to lowercase before loading into the Project Control Database. Display-List Boxes A display-list box is located at the end of some key-in fields. It lets you select data from a list instead of keying in information. For example, there is a display list associated with the Authorization key-in field shown. At the end of the field, there is a small box with horizontal dashes. When you select this display list box with the screen cursor, an associated list of valid input values displays. Select an item from the list to enter its value into the field. Shift Left and Shift Right buttons At the bottom of some key-in and display fields, there are two buttons marked with arrows. These buttons are called shift left and shift right buttons. Often, you can key in more characters than a field display shows. Shift Left moves the text display to the front of the field; Shift Right moves the text display to the end of the field. Toggle A toggle field on a screen menu enables you to select one of two possible choices, one of which is always displayed. Place a data point on the toggle field to toggle between the two choices. Roll-Through List A roll-through list shows one choice at a time of a list that can be several items long. Place a data point on the roll-through list to scroll through the available options. The option displayed is active.

2. Environment

39

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Standard Window Icons When using this software in the CLIX environment, you can press <D> along the edge of a form or any area not occupied by a button, key-in field, or other gadget, to display a box of icons. You can manipulate form windows just like any other workstation window. The following list defines the available window icons. Collapse/Restore Repaint Pop-to-bottom Modify/Resize Pop-to-top Restore Size

Batch Processes
When you install the PDS 3D applications, the system creates the necessary batch queues for that application. Refer to Loading PDS Products in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for a listing of the batch queues. PDS 3D uses these batch queues to allow you to continue working in the environment while the system processes a request. Many of the batch processes can be delayed for submission at a specified time. When you submit a batch process the system sends an electronic mail message to the mail path of the default login reporting the jobs completion status. The mail message also includes any error log information.

40

_ _______________
Help
On-line Help is a special feature of your application software. Help provides instant access to information from the application reference documents, such as command descriptions and explanations, prompt sequences, and much more. There are several avenues you can take to find information about a command or subject. For instance, Help provides A table of contents that lists subjects by topic and subtopic (in a hierarchy). An alphabetized index of every command or subject that has been documented for the software. A glossary to help you become familiar with product-specific terms. The ability to move up, down, back, and forth through Help by using cross-references and links to primary and secondary commands. The ability to quickly search through Help for information on a specific subject or command.

Help

2. Environment

When you first select Help, the Help Table of Contents is displayed in a pop-up window. Select a topic from this list or select a command from the menu to display an article in the pop-up window. Whenever possible, PDS Help is context sensitive. For example, if you select the help icon for a given form, Help that is specific to that form is displayed. The Help window has buttons that you can use to manipulate either Help or the window itself as follows:

41

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Scroll Bar Moves up or down in an article that is displayed in the Help window. Help Command Buttons Enable you to move around in the Help file. Cancel or File > Exit exits Help and closes the Help window.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Help button from the command window or form. If you select Help while using a command, help on the active command is displayed. If no command is active, the table of contents is displayed.

2.

Use the command buttons or scroll bar to move around in Help. OR Exit Help.

42

_ _______________
3. Reference Data Manager
The Reference Data Manager provides access to the various functions associated with the PDS 3D Reference Database. Select the Reference Data Manager option from the PD Shell form.

Reference Data Manager

3. Reference Data Manager

Select the option to be performed. Spec Writer Used to create, modify, and delete information in the Material Reference Database using a forms interface. See Spec Writer, page 103. Piping Job Specification Manager Used to create, modify, and delete information in the Material Reference Database using neutral files. See Piping Job Specification, page 55 and Piping Job Specification Manager, page 145. Piping Job Specification Tables Used to create, modify, and delete information in the Piping Job Spec Table Library. See Piping Job Specification Tables, page 189 and Piping Job Specification Tables Command, page 239. Piping Job Spec Report Manager Used to define and generate reports of data in the Material Reference Database. See Piping Job Spec Report Manager, page 154. Graphic Commodity Library Manager Used to create, modify, and delete graphic commodity library data (Eden modules). See Graphic Commodity Library, page 254 and Graphic Commodity Library Manager, page 275. Physical Data Library Manager Used to create, modify, and delete physical data (dimension tables) in object and text libraries. See Physical Data Tables, page 266 and Physical Data Library Manager, page 287.

43

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Material Description Library Manager Used to create and modify alphanumeric commodity data. See Material Description Data, page 361 and Material Description Library Manager, page 376. Support Tutorial Definition Manager Used to create, revise, and delete data in the Tutorial Definition Library. See Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager, page 437. Standard Note Library Manager Used to create, revise, and report the code lists and standard notes associated with the PDS 3D modules. See Standard Note Library, page 449 and Standard Note Library Manager, page 453. Label Description Library Manager Used to define the graphic parameters for a label (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label (what information comprises the label). See Label Description Library, page 465 and Label Description Library Manager, page 471. Piping Assembly Library Manager Used to create, revise, and delete piping assembly definitions in the Piping Assembly Library. The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. See Piping Assembly Library, page 505 and Piping Assembly Library Manager, page 525. Table Checker Used to verify that all the commodity spec tables, entries, and Eden modules for a piping materials class exist in the graphic data libraries for the project. See Table Checker Form, page 389. Reference Database Revision Manager Used to create a set of reports for coordinating revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which are required in the model. See Reference Database Revision Manager, page 537. Reference Database Management Data Used to define the filenames for Reference Database Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item. See Reference Database Management Data, page 48. Default Project Control Data Used to define the default location for the source files used to load the RDB files (such as neutral files, program files, and report files). See Default Project Control Data, page 53.

44

_ _______________
3.1 Data Security

Data Security

The Reference Data Manager provides data security features for the following reference data libraries in the event of accidents such as, electrical power surges and network failures. These features also protect the libraries in the event that a library is being shared by multiple projects, and different users in different projects mistakenly attempt to revise one of the libraries simultaneously. Graphic Commodity Library Physical Data Library Piping Job Specification Table Library Short Material Description Library Long Material Description Library Specialty Material Description Library Standard Note Library Label Description Library Piping Assembly Library When you enter the Reference Data Manager to create, revise, or delete data in any of the these libraries, the system creates a temporary file for that library. This temporary file is named <library_specification>.c and will be created in the same directory location as the object libary. Once you successfully exit the applicable library manager, the system deletes the temporary file. If a PDS user is unable to exit the Reference Data Manager for any reason (such as a power failure), the system displays a dialog box when the next user enters the Reference Data Manager to revise that library. You must decide which of the following situations applies and respond accordingly. If you are certain that the warning results from a previous unusual exit, make one of the following decisions. If a corrupted library (including the corresponding source library and revision library) has been restored from a backup, select the accept option. If you are concerned with the integrity of the library for any reason, select the exit option. Then restore the library, the corresponding source library, and the corresponding revision library to their previous state (before the last revisions). If you are aware that a different user may be revising that library within a different project, select the exit option. This feature requires that PDS users have write access to the directory in which the libraries reside. The Reference Data Manager will display an error message, if the user does not have privileges for write access to the applicable directory and the user will not be able to revise that library. When a PDS user exits a data creation or revision session, the Reference Data Manager verifies the integrity of the binary tree structure within the library. The system displays an error if the Reference Data Manager determines that an error exists in the binary tree structure. In this event, you should contact Intergraph immediately for assistance in repairing the library.

3. Reference Data Manager

45

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

3.2

Reference Data Archival


PDS includes a Project Archival Manager to provide archival and retrieval facilities for projects, including reference data. For more information about the Project Archival Manager, see Project Archival Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide. For specific information about archiving reference data, see Reference Data in the Project Administrator Reference Guide.

46

_ _______________
4. Reference Data Location
This section describes the options used to define the location of the Reference Data files on the network. Reference Database Management Data Defines the location for Reference Database Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item. See page 48. Default Project Control Data Defines the default location for the source files used to load the RDB files (such as neutral files, language files, and report files). See page 53.

Reference Data Location

4. Reference Data Location

47

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

4.1

Reference Database Management Data


This option activates the Reference Database Management Data form used to define the filenames for Reference Database Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Reference Database Management Data from the Reference Data Manager form.

2.

Select RDB File Type Select the RDB file from the list of files. You can use the scroll arrows to scroll through the listed files. The system identifies the file for the selected field in the fields at the bottom of the form. There are no default settings for these files; you must define the applicable file locations before you can continue. Material/Specification Reference Database This field identifies the Material Reference Database for the project. Refer to the Project Setup Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on this database. Piping Job Specification Table Library This field identifies the location of the Piping Job Spec Table library.

48

_ _______________
Short Material Description Library This field identifies the library which contains the short bill-of-material description for all piping commodity items and the BOM description addenda for taps. Long Material Description Library This field identifies the library which contains the long BOM description for all piping commodity items. The long BOM description is only used for requisitions. Specialty Material Description Library This field identifies the library which contains the BOM description for engineered items, in-line instruments, and pipe supports. This library tends to be customer-specific. Standard Note Library This field identifies the location of the standard note library. Label Description Library This field identifies the location for the label description library. Piping Assembly Library This field identifies the location for the Piping Assembly library. This library contains the symbol definitions for assemblies. Graphic Commodity Library This field identifies the library which contains the Eden modules used to place components in the model. Physical Data Library These fields identify the library files which contain the physical data tables for a range of geometric industry standards. Commodity Synonym Library This field identifies the user-defined library which contains the map for translating the default piping commodity names used in the P&ID Task to names specified by the user in the Piping Job Specification.

Reference Database Management Data

4. Reference Data Location

Orthographic Drawing Borders This field identifies the drawing border files to be used when creating drawings. A set of border files are delivered to the directory win32app\ingr\pddraw\border. You must specify which style of borders is to be used. 3. Key in any changes to the selected RDB files. Refer to Delivered Reference Data, page 31, for a listing of the delivered reference data files. If you specify an unapproved file, the system will use the unapproved file for all Reference Data Manager operations (such as revising entries in a library.) Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting the choice of data for a model file or drawing. 4. You can select Approved > Not Approved to copy the approved definition of the selected RDB file to the Not Approved fields. Select confirm to update the information.

49

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Refer to the individual managers for information on posting the unapproved information to the approved files. 5. You can select Default All Library Locations to define a default location for all approved and all unapproved library files. You can select Copy All Standard Libraries to copy the delivered library files to a specified location. Select Accept following each change to the reference data to accept the specified file location. THEN Select Cancel to exit the form. 6.

7.

Options Default All Library Locations


This option assigns a default network address, pathname, and file specification to the various Reference Database libraries for both the approved and unapproved libraries. You can override any of these default specifications by selecting the appropriate library and keying in the file information. Specify Default Nodename Key in a default network address and pathname to be used for all approved Reference Database libraries and a network address and pathname to be used for all unapproved libraries. The file specifications for all libraries are determined automatically on the basis of the industry practice and the following naming convention. When copying the Not Approved library to the Approved library, the copy will not occur if the approved library is the most recent or has the same date as the unapproved library.

50

_ _______________
Library Graphic Commodity Library Label Description Library Standard Note Library Piping Assembly Library Piping Spec Table Library Short Material Description Library Long Material Description Library Specialty Description Library Physical Data Library Filename pipe_gcom.l labels.l std_note.l assembly.l pjs_tbl.l short_bom.l long_bom.l spclty_bom.l <standard>_pcdim.l

Reference Database Management Data

The text to be used for the <standard> is determined in the following manner. Practice U.S. Practice European - DIN European - British Standard European - Practice A European - Practice B International - JIS International - Australian International - Practice A International - Practice B Company Practice Prefix us din bs eua eub jis aus ina inb cmp

Copy All Standard Libraries


This option copies the delivered Reference Database libraries from the applicable product directories to the disk locations specified in the Reference Database Management data of the Project Control database. This option provides a new user with a simple method to create a Reference Database using RDB products delivered by Intergraph. This is not intended for use in a production environment. The following Reference Database libraries are copied from the PD Shell product. Graphic Commodity Library Label Description Library Standard Note Library Piping Assembly Library

4. Reference Data Location

The following Reference Database libraries are copied from the applicable Reference Database product (such as, rdusrdb or rddinrdb). Physical Data Library Piping Spec Table Library Short Material Description Library Long Material Description Library Specialty Description Library

51

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 The system also copies the applicable Table Revision Management Libraries for the Piping Spec Table Library and Physical Data Libraries. The text to be used for the standard is determined in the following manner. Practice U.S. Practice European - DIN European - British Standard International - JIS International - Australian Prefix us din bs jis aus

The list of available products is determined from the list of exported variables as specified in the pds.cmd shell script. Therefore, this command presently searches for the following exported variables: Product RD_USRDB RD_DINRDB RD_BSRDB RD_JISRDB RD_AUSRDB Practice U.S. Practice DIN British Standards JIS Australian

The file specification recorded in the Project Control Database, and not that of the library in the delivered product, will be used for the destination library. If the RDB product resides on a remote server (or workstation), you must manually mount the directory that includes the RDB product and change the exported variable in the pds.cmd shell script accordingly. The system will display an error message for any of the following conditions. Any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project are in use (locked). None of the libraries are copied. The network address for any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project are undefined. None of the libraries are copied. The network address and path name for any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project cannot be mounted. None of the subsequent libraries are copied.

52

_ _______________
4.2 Default Project Control Data

Default Project Control Data

This option defines the default location for common reference files used by the project (such as neutral files, report files, and library files). You can also change these file locations during the operation of the applicable managers.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Default Project Control Data from the Reference Data Manager form to define the default location for the RDB source files.

4. Reference Data Location

2.

Select the field to be defined and key in the location of the source files and the associated node name. Piping Eden Path / Node The default location for the Eden source files. Dimension/Spec Table Path / Node The default location of the Dimension Table and Spec Table source files. Piping Spec Path / Node The default location for the neutral files to be used to load the Specification/Material Reference Database and Material Description Libraries. Assembly Path / Node The default location for the Piping Assembly Language source files. Standard Note Library Path / Node The default location for the Standard Note (code list) source files.

53

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Equipment Eden Path / Node The default location for the Equipment Eden source files. TDF Table Path / Node The default location for the Equipment table definition files. Model Builder Path / Node The default location for the model builder language source files. 3. Accept any changes to the Project Control Data.

54

_ _______________
5. Piping Job Specification

Piping Job Specification

The Piping Job Specification (PJS) defines the characteristics, properties, design standards, and company practices associated with piping commodity items, piping engineered items, and instruments. When you select an item for placement in the model, the system uses the active parameters (such as piping materials class and nominal diameter) to search the Piping Job Specification for the selected item. Then the system reads the PJS for the parameters required to define the item.

5. Piping Job Specification

55

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.1

Material Reference Database Structure


The Material Reference Database contains a set of tables which define the Piping Job Specification data. The numbers in parentheses indicate the database table number. Piping Materials Class Data (201) - see page 62. Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) - see page 67. Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) - see page 77. Instrument Component Specification Data (204) - see page 81. Tap Properties Data (205) - see page 85. Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) - see page 88. Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) - see page 91. Reference Database Revision Management Data (213) Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) - see page 95. Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) - see page 98. Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) - see page 101. The Piping Commodity Specification Data is linked to the Piping Materials Class Data. The Reference Database Revision Management Data table is totally systemdefined. It stores the revision dates for the other database tables in the Material Reference Database. The revision dates are updated automatically when you use the Piping Job Spec Manager to load, revise, or delete data in these database tables.

Attribute Types
The following conventions are used to designate the field type for database attributes. character(n) integer short alphanumeric field n characters in length long (double word) integer short integer

56

_ _______________
double standard note nnnn real (floating point) value Standard Note Type for code-listed attribute

Material Reference Database Structure

Code-Listed Attributes
A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value must be defined using one of the selections from a particular code list in the Standard Note Library. In the following database descriptions attributes which are code-listed are identified by a standard note number at the end of the line following the field type description. For example, the line 6. fluid_code , character(6) , SN 125

indicates that fluid_code is defined in terms of code list numbers belonging to Standard Note 125, Fluid Code/Connector Type. A possible entry for this attribute would be 197 for chlorine gas (GCL). Refer to Appendix B for a listing of the code list sets associated with PDS 3D.

Connect Point Data


The Piping Commodity, Piping Specialty, and Instrument database tables classify connect point dependent data about a component in terms of green and red connect points. The following conventions are used to coordinate the two sets of data: If data is only shown under the green connect point, it applies to all ends of the component. If a component has ends with different nominal diameters (regardless of other end properties) the larger nominal diameter is designated as the green connect point. If a component has ends with the same nominal diameter but other end properties which differ, the following rules apply: If the ends have different termination types (regardless of the values for schedule/thickness) the end(s) whose end preparations have the lowest codelist number are designated as the green connect point. If the termination types are the same but the values for rating, schedule, or thickness differ, the "stronger" ends(s) are designated as the green connect point.

5. Piping Job Specification

57

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

NPD Units
Nominal piping diameter is defined as a special coded number (NPD units) with the following formula. For metric units, the coded number equals the size (in millimeters) For English units, the coded number equals the size (in inches) times 32 plus 5000. This allows nominal piping diameter to range from 1 mm to 5000 mm in 1 mm increments for metric units, and to range from 1/32" to at least 200" in 1/32" increments for English units.

58

_ _______________
5.2 Neutral File Input
A neutral file is an ASCII text file used to load information into the the Material Reference Database. The neutral file must conform to the following rules:

Neutral File Input

There must be an entry for each user-defined parameter in the Material Reference Database. For certain attributes you can use a dash (-) to indicate that a default value be used. The SEQUENCE statement can be used to define the order of entries in the neutral file. The system_unique_no attribute is never user-defined. Therefore, it should not be included in the neutral file data or in the list of attributes defined by the SEQUENCE statement. Each entry (attribute) can begin at any point along the input. You can set the spacing between each entry by specifying SINGLE_SPACING or DOUBLE_SPACING as the first item in the file. If you do not define the spacing, double spacing is used. For single line comments, place an exclamation point (!) at the beginning of the line. All comments are disregarded by the system. You can place blank lines anywhere in the file for readability. These lines do not effect the information being copied. You can use any of the three PDS conventions to enter fractional Nominal Piping Diameters. The entries 2-1/2 2.5 2 1/2 are all equivalent ways of entering the same figure. If you use the SINGLE_SPACING option 2 1/2 can be used only if enclosed by single quotes (2 1/2) You can use both metric and English units. The default system of units must be declared once in the beginning and each time the default system is changed. Entries are automatically interpreted as English. To declare the system of units add the appropriate units marker to the entry:

5. Piping Job Specification

mm for metric " for English The Tap Properties Table must include the Table Name along with other data by using the TABLE statement.

59

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

SEQUENCE Statement
The SEQUENCE statement is an optional statement which can be used to define the order of the parameters in the neutral file. If the SEQUENCE statement is used it must be placed before any entries. The SEQUENCE statement can only be used once per file. If the SEQUENCE statement is omitted, it is assumed that the parameters appear in the order defined by PDS. Format SEQUENCE= P1 P2 P3 P4 ... Pn where: SEQUENCE= P1,P2,...Pn keyword which can be entered in either upper or lower case letters. parameters 1 through n. The values of P1...Pn are the parameter numbers assigned by PDS, and their position tells the system the order in which to enter them. At least two spaces must separate the keyword and each parameter.

Examples
SEQUENCE= 5 3 4 1 2

The first parameter read corresponds to PDS parameter #5, the second to PDS parameter #3, the third to PDS parameter #4, the fourth to PDS parameter #1, and the fifth to PDS parameter #2. You can use the convention *Pn to indicate an attribute that is not defined in the neutral file. All of the *Pn attributes should be placed at the end of the SEQUENCE statement following the list of included attributes. For example, SEQUENCE= 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 *4 *5 *21 *22

ORDER Statement
Neutral files translated from VAX PDS data may contain an ORDER statement rather than a SEQUENCE statement. This statement performs the same function as the SEQUENCE statement except that it lists the order of the attributes as they were defined in the VAX Piping Job Specification Database.

60

_ _______________
TABLE Statement
The TABLE statement defines a table name to be associated with a particular set of data. The active table name remains unchanged until another TABLE statement is encountered. The TABLE statement can be used more than once in a neutral file. Format TABLE= table_name where TABLE= table_name keyword which can be entered in upper or lower case letters. the name of the table associated with the following data.

Neutral File Input

There must be at least one/two spaces (depending on the default spacing selected) between the keyword and the table_name. For example, the Tap Properties Table below defines two tables (C001, and C002) by using the Table keyword to segregate the data for each table being defined.
Double_Spacing Order= 2 3 5 4 6 7 ! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW

Rev=2

Date=12-May-1995

Table= C001 ! Description= SWE CL3000 default taps ! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code 0.375 691 591 NREQD E$37591XXX > 0.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064 0.5 691 591 NREQD E$50591XXX : : 30 691 591 NREQD E030591XXX 32 691 591 NREQD E032591XXX 34 691 591 NREQD E034591XXX 36 691 591 NREQD E036591XXX 42 691 591 NREQD E042591XXX 48 691 591 NREQD E048591XXX Table= C002 ! Description= SWE CL6000 default taps ! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code 0.375 691 591 NREQD E$37591XXX > 0.5 1 CL6000 421 NREQD E$50421072 0.5 691 591 NREQD E$50591XXX : : 34 691 591 NREQD E034591XXX 36 691 591 NREQD E036591XXX 42 691 591 NREQD E042591XXX 48 691 591 NREQD E048591XXX

5. Piping Job Specification

61

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.2.1

Piping Materials Class Data (201)


The piping materials class data is independent of nominal piping diameter and commodity item. A piping materials class defines a classification of components based on design data and service limits. Much of the design data is stored in tables so that common information can be accessed by more than one piping materials class. The Piping Materials Class Data table contains 23 attributes. 1. 2. system_unique_no , integer

piping_mater_class , character(16) This attribute identifies the service number, spec class, spec name, or spec number.

3.

revision_no

, character(2)

This attribute identifies the revision number for the data in the piping materials class. It is user-defined and is not updated automatically when the piping commodity data for that piping materials class is revised. The revision number of the unapproved Material Reference Database is incremented only, when you specify a new revision number in the neutral file. The revision number of the approved Material Reference Database is updated to that of the unapproved Material Reference Database, when the unapproved data is posted to the approved Material Reference Database. 4. version_no , character(2)

This attribute represents the version number, as determined by the system, for the data in this piping materials class (including the Commodity Item data). The version number starts with A and is incremented (B,C,D,...) when you revise the piping materials class. This attribute is under the complete control of the system. The Piping Job Spec Manager increments this attribute when the piping commodity data for that piping materials class is revised or reloaded. When that piping materials class is posted from the unapproved to the approved Material Reference Database, the version number for that piping materials class is reset to A in the unapproved Material Reference Database. 5. revision_date , character(10)

This user-defined attribute can be used to define a date for the latest revision to the data in a piping materials class. 6. fluid_code , character(6) , SN 125

This attribute can be used to define the type of fluid for which the piping materials class is intended.

62

_ _______________
You can specify a single fluid code value (such as 521 for process) from code list set 125. the name of a fluid code table to define a set of fluid code values. Refer to Fluid Code Table, page 214, for more information. To use the specified fluid code(s), you must also set the Fluid Code Control toggle to Yes on the Piping Data Control form of the Project Data Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information on this form. 7. mater_of_construct , character(6)

Piping Materials Class Data (201)

This attribute defines the materials of construction class for the piping materials class. This code has a detailed definition outside the scope of PDS that represents the decision of the Project Metallurgist regarding the piping system. It is required for reporting and making matches and comparisons with values for this parameter from the Piping Design Database. This parameter includes the material code. 8. corrosion_allow , double

This attribute defines the corrosion/erosion allowance that applies to the piping materials class. It is required for reporting and to calculate the wall thickness of piping components whose thickness is not specifically included in the piping materials class. 9. mat_description , short , SN 148

This code-listed attribute is a generic description of the materials used for this piping materials class (such as carbon steel). This attribute is only used for reporting. 10. service_lim_table , character(6)

This attribute identifies the table used to determine maximum pressure as a function of temperature. This table includes the pressure and temperature sets that form the boundary for which the commodity items, engineered items, and instruments included in this piping materials class are suitable (unless you define a lower maximum temperature limit for a specific commodity item). You must insure that all commodity items within the piping materials class are acceptable within the boundary of this table. Refer to Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table, page 191, for more information on this table. 11. diameter_table , character(6)

5. Piping Job Specification

This attribute identifies the nominal piping diameter table used to verify valid nominal piping diameters in this piping materials class. Refer to Nominal Piping Diameters Table, page 194, for more inforamtion.

63

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 12. thickness_table , character(6) This attribute identifies the thickness data table used in piping wall thickness calculations for this piping materials class. Refer to Thickness Data Tables, page 197, for more information. 13. materials_table , character(6)

This parameter defines the materials data table used to determine the material properties required for piping wall thickness calculations in the piping materials class. Refer to Materials Data Table, page 200, for more information. 14. thickness_equation , character(6) This attribute identifies the default piping wall thickness equation to be used for this piping materials class. If a schedule/thickness parameter for an item specifies the default calculation, then this equation is used to perform the piping wall thickness calculation. Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations, page 203, for more information. 15. branch_table , character(6)

This attribute identifies the branch insertion table used to determine the name of the branch commodity item to be used for tee and lateral branches. The item name is determined as a function of branch geometry, run size, and branch size. The output of the branch table is the item name of a commodity item (AABBCC code). Refer to Branch Insertion Tables, page 208, for more information. 16. tap_data_table , character(6)

This attribute defines the name of the tap properties table which includes those parameters required to define a tap on a specific commodity item. Refer to Tap Properties Data (205), page 85, for more information. 17. vent_drain_macro , character(6)

This attribute is not currently used by the PDS software. Several vent and drain definitions are contained in the delivered Piping Assembly Library. 18. gasket_separation , character(8)

This attribute is used to determine the actual gap that is assumed between seating surfaces of two mating bolted ends. It can coincide with, but is not necessarily the compressed gasket thickness. You can override this value during a design session by changing the type of gasket that applies to the joint. (You cannot override this value by defining a specific gasket gap override value.) This attribute exists as alphanumeric data.

64

_ _______________
A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a gasket separation value in the physical subunits specified for the model.

Piping Materials Class Data (201)

All other values are assumed to identify a table name for gasket separation data as a function of nominal piping diameter in the Piping Graphic Commodity Library. Refer to Gasket Separation Table, page 212, for more information. Refer to the description of gaskets in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more details. 19. 20. standard_note_no_a , short standard_note_no_b , short , SN 499 , SN 499

These code-listed attributes provide the index numbers to CL499 for notes that apply to this piping materials class. The input to the Standard Note Library is the note number. The output is the free- format text which forms the standard note. In the delivered data, note numbers 1 through 199 are allocated for defining the PJS. 21. revision_mngt_date , integer This system-defined attribute identifies the date of the latest revision for the data in this piping materials class. 22. bend_deflect_table , character(6) This attribute identifies the Bend Deflection Table to be used for this piping materials class. This attribute is useful for defining specs for underground piping. If this column is undefined (blank), the system will use the default Bend Deflection Table specified in the Type 63 data through the Project Data Manager. Therefore, you need not define a Bend Deflection Table for each piping materials class in the Material Reference Database. Likewise, you need not revise any existing neutral files to include this column. Note that the Bend Deflection Table name in the Piping Materials Class data is limited to 6 characters to be consistent with the other tables referenced in this data. The maximum length of the default Bend Deflection Table name, as specified with the Project Data Manager can be as many as 20 characters. Refer to Bend Deflection Table (G04), page 219, for more information. 23. pipe_length_table , character(6)

5. Piping Job Specification

This attribute identifies the Pipe Length Threshold Table to be used for this piping materials class. This attribute is useful in defining specs for underground piping. If this column is undefined (blank), the system will use the default Pipe Length Threshold Table specified in the Type 63 data through the Project Data Manager. Therefore, you need not define a Pipe Length Threshold Table for each piping materials class in the Material Reference Database.

65

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Note that the Pipe Length Threshold Table name in the piping materials class data is limited to 6 characters to be consistent with the other tables referenced in this data. The maximum length of the default Pipe Length Threshold Table name, as specified with the Project Data Manager can be as many as 13 characters. Refer to Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07), page 222, for more information.

Neutral File Format


The following is a sample neutral file for the Piping Material Class database table. Entries in this table should be sorted alphanumerically by Piping Materials Class. The Sequence= keyword in a piping materials class data neutral file does not require *21 for the revision management date. Any previously created piping materials class data neutral files will not require any revision as a result of this change.

Sample Files
A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\classes.pmc. A set of sample files depicting various options are delivered in the \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory. bend_tbl.pmc equiv_npd.pmc fluid_code.pmc fpipe.pmc gasket.pmc gskt_tbl.pmc metric_npd.pmc pharm.pmc piplen_tbl.pmc thickness.pmc

66

_ _______________
5.2.2 Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)
The Piping Commodity Specification Data defines all the components, pipes, bolts, and gaskets associated with a particular Piping Materials Class. It defines the standard components found in a manufacturers catalog (commonly referred to as off-the-shelf components). Because the Piping Commodity Specification Data is linked to the Piping Materials Class, a separate set of commodity items must be defined for each Piping Materials Class.

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)

Information for connect point data is defined in terms of two types of connect points known as green and red connect points. Refer to Connect Point Data, page 270, for more information on green and red connect points. The Piping Commodity Specification Data table contains 28 attributes: 1. 2. system_unique_no , integer , index 1

piping_mater_class , character(16)

This attribute identifies the Piping Materials Class for the piping commodity. 3. commodity_name , character(6)

This attribute identifies the commodity item name. This can be a PDS commodity item name. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more information on item names. a Piping Job Specification access name. If you do not use the AABBCC code, you must define a Commodity Synonym Library for proper communication with the P&ID Task. The PDS commodity item names are also used with the delivered Place Component forms. If you use a different code, you should create a forms customization file as defined in the Piping Designer. 4. option_code , short , SN 400

This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary commodity item, a secondary commodity item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification.

5. Piping Job Specification

This parameter is used as a commodity override in Piping Design. You can select the unique options (as defined in CL400) from a form. If no option is specified at placement, this attribute defaults to option 1 (primary commodity item). Option 2 is reserved as the secondary commodity item. Option codes 4001 to 4010 are used to specify manual input of bend data for pipe bends.

67

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Option codes 4500 to 4999 are reserved for company practice (user-defined). Option codes 5000 to 5999 are used to refer to implied components. 5. maximum_temp , double This attribute is used if the commodity item is temperature dependent. It represents the maximum temperature for which this commodity item is acceptable. When a commodity item is retrieved from the Piping Job Specification, the system verifies that the normal operating temperature, the alternate operating temperature, the normal design temperature, and the alternate design temperature are less than this maximum allowable temperature. If this maximum is exceeded by any of these temperatures, the system automatically searches for another occurrence of the same commodity item. For gaskets, to help determine the gap thickness at bolted joints, the maximum temperature value is used as an input to the Gasket Gap Table. Proper entry of temperature values in the PJS assists the definition of gap thicknesses when gaskets with different gap thicknesses are used in the same piping materials class. If you specify the default value (-9999), no test is performed. Any reports created from the Piping Job Specification depict this default value as alphanumeric blanks. The order in which entries of the same piping commodities with different maximum temperature values are made in the PJS (PDtable_202) is not considered by the system; however, these entries must have the same option code in order to be considered by the commodity selection in the Place Component command. When you do define the piping commodity, a maximum temperature value must be defined for each entry or an error message is displayed. To define the highest maximum temperature for the same piping commodity, set the maximum temperature equal to or greater than the maximum temperature of the spec limits table for the applicable piping materials class instead of using an undefined value (-). 6. 7. gcp_from_nom_diam gcp_to_nom_diam , short , short (NPD Units) (NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point (first size) in NPD units. The to value must equal or exceed the from value. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in Tables 211 and 212. The applicable NPD value specified at placement is used to search for the suitable component in the Piping Job Specification. The default system of units (" for inches, or mm for millimeters) must be declared once in the beginning and each time the default system is changed. If no units are given, the value is automatically interpreted as inches. 8. gcp_end_prep , short , SN 330

68

_ _______________
2 - 199 bolted terminations 300 - 399 male terminations 400 - 599 female terminations You can define end compatibilities by using the End Preparation Compatibility Table. (Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide.) 9. gcp_rating , character(8)

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)

This code-listed attribute identifies the end preparation for the green connect point. The system determines the termination type based on the range of values

This attribute identifies the pressure rating for the green connect point. This parameter exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. Ratings can be expressed in any of the following formats: CLxxxx, xxxx#, or OTxxxx. However, table entries and file names representing the rating exclude the CL, #, or OT characters. This enables the same table to be used regardless of how the rating is defined. In the delivered PJS, these rating formats are used in accordance with the following criteria: CLxxxx refers to an ANSI or API pressure rating xxxx# refers to a pressure rating defined by an organization other than ANSI or API. OTxxxx refers to the rating of a connect point that meets the applicable ANSI or API rating geometrically but not from a pressure carrying standpoint. An example is a valve supplied with flanged ends that meets the bolting pattern of ANSI CL150 pressure rating but has pressure carrying characteristics different from those of that ANSI rating. For bolts and gaskets, you must use a numeric pressure rating (do not use the characters CL, #, or OT). If any character entries are encountered, the system will be unable to locate the proper information.

Female ends for plastic pipe are usually defined in terms of schedule/thickness and not in terms of rating. To make female ends for plastic pipe follow the rules for other female ends, the applicable schedule/thickness is used as the value for rating. If such rating values consist of alphanumeric characters, the system strips all alpha characters from the rating value and uses only the numeric values in accessing the applicable tables. If the rating in the PJS is expressed in terms of alphabetic characters only, the system uses the characters in accessing the data tables. The names of the data tables include all the alphabetic characters included in the PJS. GRAVHD can be used to identify the rating for components rated to sustain a nominal fluid head. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.

5. Piping Job Specification

69

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 OTHER can be used to identify a non standard rating value. NONE can be used to identify the rating for components whose ends would normally require the attribute rating as part of the table name, but for which a rating does not apply. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables. 10. gcp_sch_thk , character(8)

This attribute identifies the schedule thickness value for the green connect point. This parameter exist as alphanumeric data. (Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations, page 203, for more information on this attribute.) In order of preference, schedule and thickness are expressed in terms of: A generic schedule such as S-STD, S-XS and S-XXS. If a schedule name exceeds the provided field length (for example S-SDR13.5) it is defined in terms of its wall thickness. A specific schedule such as S-40, S-40S and S-80. NREQD is used in cases where all of the following conditions apply: The thickness value is not required in purchasing the component. Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values. Either stress analysis is not applicable or, if applicable, the component is to be considered infinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations. A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a wall thickness value in the same physical units as nominal piping diameter. To insure compatibility between the PJS, data tables, and wall thickness calculations, thickness is expressed in the form: .xxxx if the thickness is less than 1 inch x if the thickness is an even inch x.xxx if the thickness is 1 inch or larger Trailing zeroes are not included. Decimal points are not included for numbers without decimals. An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations, page 203 for a more detailed description of the naming conventions for these calculations. MATCH indicates the need to match the thickness of a component to that of the pipe of the same diameter and of option 1. 11. gcp_table_suffix , short , SN 576

70

_ _______________
This code-listed attribute is used to further reference the source of the generic dimensional data, such as flange data or piping outside diameter data. This attribute is also referred to as the table suffix. For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the green connect point. For DIN standards, it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihe number) for pipes and fittings. 12. 13. rcp_from_nom_diam rcp_to_nom_diam , short , short

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point (second size). The to value must equal or exceed the from value. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in Tables 211 and 212. For a full size component, you should set these parameters to - (hyphen). In cases such as a concentric reducer or weldolet, this value must be less than the corresponding green value. 14. rcp_end_prep See gcp_end_prep. 15. rcp_rating See gcp_rating. 16. rcp_sch_thk See gcp_sch_thk. 17. rcp_table_suffix , short , SN 577 , character(8) , character(8) , short , SN 330

This attribute is used to further reference the dimensional data for a specific component. For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the red connect point. For DIN standards, it represents the built-in length selection flag (or reihe number) for valves and wall thickness selection flag for pipes and fittings. A parametric definition is used when connection graphics are required in the model and orthographic drawings. 18. commodity_code , character(16)

5. Piping Job Specification

The commodity code is a user-assigned code that together with the NPD and schedule/thickness uniquely defines the component. It defines the customers commodity code (or part number). This attribute is the index into the Material Data Tables and the Material Description Library. The commodity code can be defined in one of three ways:

71

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Commodity codes with neither an * or a + prefix, indicate a commodity item that has no associated implied components. Commodity codes prefixed by an *, indicate a commodity item (primary component) which has one associated implied component (such as a lap joint flange and stub end). For more information on defining * implied items, refer to the PD_Report Users Guide. It is not recommended that specification implied (*) items be generated by size change components (i.e. reducers, reducing flanges, etc.) as the NPD assigned by the system for the implied component can be either the larger or smaller (green or red) NPD of the implying item based on how the system traces the line. Commodity codes prefixed by a +, indicate a commodity item (primary component) which has one or more associated implied components as defined in Table 212. The default length for a commodity code is 16 characters, but you can modify this length if needed. This value is specified in two files: design.ddl and reference.ddl. To customize the character length, modify the design.ddl file as follows: In table 34 (Piping Component Data), modify the value in column 8. In table 50 (Piping/Tubing Data), modify the value in column 12. Modify the reference.ddl file as follows: In table 202 (Piping Commodity Specification Data), modify the value in column 18. In table 211 (Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data), modify the values in column 2 and column 7. In table 212 (Piping Commodity Implies Material Data), modify the values in column 2 and column 7. When you modify these values, set the character limit to be one more than the number of characters you actually want in the commodity code. This is necessary for you to add a * or + prefix if needed. For example, to create a 20-character commodity code, set the specified values to 21. You must make these modifications before the project is created. For valves, the commodity code also defines the name of the dry weight table (required for stress analysis). For large diameter valves (25"+) it is used to build the name of the operator dimension table.

72

_ _______________
19. model_code , character(6) This attribute identifies the specific item name for generic bends, spec flanges, or spec valves. Each model code is classified by Item name option size ranges end preparations ratings

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)

The model code includes the definition of the graphic representation of the component in the piping model. Depending upon the circumstances: One or more model codes can be assigned to to a single Item Name (for example, GAT, GATR, and GATF are all used for 6Q1C01). The same model code can be assigned to different Item Names. For gaskets, this attribute can be used to prioritize gasket entries in the Piping Materials Class. The priority is set with a numeric value (integer or decimal) greater than zero. Non-numeric values are ignored by MTO and not considered to be a priority selection. The smaller the value the higher the priority. A value of 999999 is interpreted as an undefined priority. 20. PDS_sort_code , character(6)

This field can be used to specify the length (in subunits) for Purchased length pipe, or to specify the gasket diameter for gaskets. The gasket diameter table is used if the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to _GKT. The system uses the NPD to determine the gasket inside and outside diameters. If the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to "_GKT", the gasket outside and inside diameters are generated using the table gasket_commodity_code_GKT.TBL. If the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is not "_GKT", the gasket outside diameter is equivalent to the NPD of the rated component and the gasket inside diameter is undefined. 21. modifier , double

5. Piping Job Specification

This attribute is used for pipe bends, elbows, miters, and valves. It has various uses depending on the type of commodity item as defined below. For pipe bends, it defines the bend radius of the pipe in terms of the numeric factor by which the nominal diameter of the pipe is to be multiplied to obtain the bend radius. For pipe, it defines the joint quality factor (E) times 100 to be used during branch reinforcement calculations in those cases where the wall thickness is not calculated.

73

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 For orifice flanges and drip ring tees, it defines the number of taps to be provided. A value of 1 defines a single tap. A value of 2 defines 2 taps, 180 degrees apart. A value of negative 2 (-2) defines 2 taps, 90 degrees apart. For nippolets and nipples, it defines the length of the component. For reinforcing pads and welds, it defines whether data about the component is to be derived from tables in the system (0) or from the user by prompting (1). For gaskets, it defines the gasket thickness to be used in procuring the gasket. This is the actual gasket thickness for MTO reports - not the compressed gasket thickness (gasket separation), which is derived from the Piping Materials Class data. For bolts, it defines whether the bolt is a stud bolt (0 or positive), or machine bolt (negative). The absolute value of this modifier, which ranges from 0 to 5, determines the applicable bolt extension. For valves, it represents the code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator type) which defines the symbol description and the source of the physical data for the valve operator. If this value is a negative number (such as -3) the operator is not displayed when placing the component. 22. geometric_standard , short , SN 575

This code-listed attribute identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industry standard, such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN, or a company standard) from which the specific geometry of the commodity item can be deduced. This parameter represents the vendor or industry standard, and the material if either affects the dimensions of the commodity item. Code list numbers 2-6999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply to US piping practices. Numbers 7000-27999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply to European piping practices. Numbers 28000-31999 are reserved for specific company practices. 23. weight_code , short , SN 578

This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the component. It determines the table to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. It is required for those cases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ for a specific geometric industry standard. 24. fabrication_cat , short , SN 180

This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example, Shop Supplied, Field Fabricated). 25. materials_grade , short , SN 145

74

_ _______________
This code-listed attribute identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, and joint efficiency for the component. This data is used in wall thickness calculations. It can also be used to access physical data in the Physical Data Library. 26. 27. standard_note_no_a , short standard_note_no_b , short , SN 499 , SN 499

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)

These code-listed attributes provide index numbers to standard notes in standard note type 499 that apply to this commodity item. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. The output is the free- format text which forms the standard note. In the delivered data, note numbers 200 through 599 are allocated for piping commodity items. 28. input_form_type , short , SN 990

This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data with the Spec Writer command.

Neutral File Format


The following is a partial listing of the sample neutral file for the Piping Commodity Specification Data. Entries in this table should be sorted alphanumerically by commodity_name. The Sequence= keyword in a piping commodity data neutral file does not require the *2 for the piping materials class name. Any previously created piping commodity data neutral files will not require any revision as a result of this change.

5. Piping Job Specification

75

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Sample Files
A set of neutral file for US practice are delivered in the files \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\*.pcd (one for each piping materials class specified in the classes.pmc file). A set of sample files depicting various options are delivered in the \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory. bend_tbl.pcd equiv_npd.pcd fluid_code.pcd fpipe.pcd gasket.pcd gskt_tbl.pcd metric_npd.pcd pharm.pcd pharmf.pcd pharmk.pcd piplen_tbl.pcd thickness.pcd

76

_ _______________
5.2.3 Piping Specialty Specification Data (203)
This database table contains data for a specific specialty item. It is used to define those specialty items which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. The specialty items are defined for the entire project, they are not partitioned by Piping Materials Class. The Piping Specialty Specification Data table contains 26 attributes. You can also place specialty items interactively in the model by defining the necessary parameters at the time of placement. No entries in the PJS database are required for these interactive definitions. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing specialty items.

Piping Specialty Specification Data (203)

1. 2.

system_unique_no piping_comp_no

, integer , character(20)

This attribute uniquely identifies the specialty component number. It is sometimes referred to as Item Number. 3. model_code , character(6)

This attribute identifies the piping specialty name. This can be a Piping Job Specification access name or a PDS commodity item name. 4. option_code , short , SN 400

This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item, a secondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. You can select the unique options (as defined in standard note 400) from a form. If no option is specified at placement, the primary item is used. Option 2 is reserved as the secondary item. This parameter is used as a component override in the Piping Designer. 5. 6. gcp_from_nom_diam gcp_to_nom_diam , short , short (NPD Units) (NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point. 7. gcp_end_prep , short , SN 330

5. Piping Job Specification

77

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 These attributes identify the end preparation for the green/red connect point. This value is an intelligent code list. The system determines the termination type based on the range of values 2 - 199 bolted terminations 300 - 399 male terminations 400 - 599 female terminations 8. gcp_rating , character(8)

These attributes identify the pressure rating for the green/red connect point. This parameter exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the description of pressure rating under Piping Commodity Data for more information on standard formats.) 9. gcp_sch_thk , character(8)

These attributes identify the schedule or thickness value for the green/red connect point. This parameter exist as alphanumeric data. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for more information on standard formats.) 10. gcp_table_suffix , short , SN 576

These code-listed attributes identify the source of the generic dimensional data, such as flange data or piping outside diameter data. For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the connect point. For DIN standards, it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihe number) for pipes and fittings. 11. 12. rcp_from_nom_diam rcp_to_nom_diam , short , short (NPD Units) (NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point. For a full size component, these values are set to zero. 13. rcp_end_prep See gcp_end_prep. 14. rcp_rating See gcp_rating. 15. rcp_sch_thk , character(8) , character(8) , short , SN 330

78

_ _______________
See gcp_sch_thk. 16. rcp_table_suffix , short , SN 577 See gcp_table_suffix 17. physical_data_id , character(8)

Piping Specialty Specification Data (203)

This parameter can be used to identify the name of the physical dimension table in the Physical Data Library to be used for this engineered item. 18. PDS_sort_code , character(6)

This attribute can be used to define an arbitray index to a geometric data table for piping specialties. This is an optional input. 19. modifier , double

This attribute is used for pipe bends, elbows, and miters. It represents the bend radius in terms of the nominal piping diameter. 20. geometric_standard , short , SN 575

This attribute provides a reference to the source of the data (which is usually an industry standard, such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN, or a company standard) from which the specific geometry of the commodity item can be deduced. 21. weight_code , short , SN 578

This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the component. It determines the table to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. It is required for those cases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ for a specific geometric industry standard. 22. fabrication_cat , short , SN 180

This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example, Shop Supplied, Field Fabricated).

5. Piping Job Specification

23.

materials_grade

, short

, SN 145

This code-listed attribute identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, and joint efficiency for the component. It can be used to access physical data in the Graphic Commodity Library. 24. standard_note_no_a , short , SN 499

79

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 25. standard_note_no_b , short , SN 499 These attributes provide index numbers to standard notes in 499 that apply to this specialty item. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. The output is the free-format text which forms the standard note. In the delivered data, note numbers 600 through 799 are allocated for piping specialties. 26. input_form_type , short , SN 990

This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data with the Spec Writer command.

Neutral File Format

Sample Files
A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\specialty.data. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical specialty items is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharms.data.

80

_ _______________
5.2.4 Instrument Component Specification Data (204)
This table contains the data for a specific instrument item. It is used to define the instruments which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. The instruments are defined for the entire project, they are not partitioned by PMC. The following data exists in the Instrument table. The Instrument Component Specification Data table contains 26 attributes. You can also place instruments interactively in the model by defining the necessary parameters at the time of placement. No entries in the PJS database are required for these interactive definitions. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing instruments. 1. 2. system_unique_no , integer

Instrument Component Specification Data (204)

instrument_comp_no , character(20) This attribute identifies the tag number for the instrument item. You can modify the character length for this attribute.

3.

model_code

, character(6)

This attribute identifies the specific item name for generic bends, spec flanges, or spec valves. This can be a Piping Job Specification access name, or a PDS commodity item name. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more information on item names. 4. option_code , short , SN 400

This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item, a secondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. You can select the unique options (defined in a standard note) from a form. If no option is specified at placement, the default option 1 is used. Option 2 is reserved as the secondary item. This parameter is used as a component override in Piping Design. 5. 6. gcp_from_nom_diam gcp_to_nom_diam , short , short (NPD Units)

5. Piping Job Specification

(NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (low bound to high bound) for the green connect point. 7. gcp_end_prep , short , SN 330

81

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 These code-listed attributes identify the end preparation for the green/red connect point. The system determines the termination type based on the range of values 2 - 199 bolted terminations 300 - 399 male terminations 400 - 599 female terminations 8. gcp_rating , character(8)

These attributes identify the pressure rating for the green/red connect point. This parameter exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the description of pressure rating for more information on standard formats.) 9. gcp_sch_thk , character(8)

These attributes identify the schedule thickness value for the green/red connect point. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for more information on standard formats.) 10. gcp_table_suffix , short , SN 576

These code-listed attributes reference the source of the generic dimensional data, such as flange data or piping outside diameter data. For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the connect point. For DIN standards, it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihe number) for pipes and fittings. 11. 12. rcp_from_nom_diam rcp_to_nom_diam , short , short (NPD Units) (NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (low bound to high bound) for the red connect point. For a full size component, these parameters are set to zero. 13. rcp_end_prep See gcp_end_prep. 14. rcp_rating See gcp_rating. 15. rcp_sch_thk See gcp_sch_thk. , character(8) , character(8) , short , SN 330

82

_ _______________
16. rcp_table_suffix , short , SN 577 See gcp_table_suffix. 17. physical_data_id , character(8) This parameter can be used to reference the set of physical data from the Physical Data Library to be used for this instrument item. 18. PDS_sort_code , character(6)

Instrument Component Specification Data (204)

This attribute can be used to define an arbitrary index in the geometric data table for instruments. This is an optional input. 19. modifier , double

This parameter, if applicable, is used to determine the type of valve operator for instrument valves. It specifies the identification of the symbol description and the source of the physical data for a valve operator. 20. geometric_standard , short , SN 575

This code-listed attribute identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industry standard such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN; or a company standard) from which the specific geometry of the commodity item can be deduced. 21. weight_code , short , SN 578

This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the instrument. It determines the table to be used in finding the dry weight of the instrument. It is required for those cases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ for a specific geometric industry standard. 22. fabrication_cat , short , SN 180

This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example, Shop Supplied, Field Fabricated). 23. materials_grade , short , SN 145

This code-listed attribute identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, and joint efficiency for the instrument. It can be used to access physical data in the Piping Graphic Commodity Library. 24. 25. standard_note_no_a , short standard_note_no_b , short , SN 499 , SN 499

5. Piping Job Specification

These code-listed attributes provide the index number to standard notes in NL499 that apply to this instrument. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. The output is the free- format text which forms the standard note.

83

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 In the delivered data, note numbers 800 through 999 are allocated for instruments. 26. input_form_type , short , SN 990 This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data with the Spec Writer command.

Neutral File Format

Sample Files
A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\instrment.data. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical instruments is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharmi.data.

84

_ _______________
5.2.5 Tap Properties Data (205)
This table contains the tap properties data that is a function of the tap properties table name and the nominal piping diameter. These tables define the piping taps which can be added to any of the components included in a piping materials class. The system uses the information in these tables and the nominal diameter to provide values for rating, end preparation, schedule/thickness, and tap code. Tap tables do not allow a NPD range; there must be an individual entry for each tap diameter. The NPD entry in the tap table should be either imperial units or metric units depending on the NPD requirements of the project. For imperial units, enter the specified NPD, such as 0.375. The software will provide a default unit of inches when the value is loaded into the project. For metric NPD units, enter the units after the value on the first NPD entry. For example:
! Diam 10mm 20 Opt 1 691 Rating Prp 591 591 SC/Th NREQD NREQD Tap Code E$37591XXX E$37581XXX

Tap Properties Data (205)

The Tap Properties Data table contains 8 attributes. The following kinds of taps may be defined in this table: No-hole taps that permit the subsequent placement of a pipe support trunnion. For example, a no-hole tap may be placed on an elbow or tee to allow the subsequent placement of a pipe trunnion for a pipe support; the diameter of this no-hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the component part on which placed. Hole taps that permit the subsequent placement of piping, piping components, and instrument components. For example, a hole tap may be placed on a cap to allow the subsequent placement of a reducing component such as a flatolet; the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the component part on which placed. A hole tap can also be placed on a blind flange to allow the placement of plain piping; the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the plain piping. Hole taps that permit the venting or draining of a piping and/or instrument component. For example, a hole tap can be placed on an elbow downstream of a relief valve; the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the desired drain hole. Component taps that represent a tap connection, rather than a hole. For example, a socketwelded component tap may be placed on a gate valve to represent a socketwelded connection furnished by the valve manufacturer. The diameter of this component tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the desired connection. 1. system_unique_no , integer

5. Piping Job Specification

85

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 2. tap_table_name , character(6) This attribute identifies the name of the Tap Properties Data Table. These tables use the following naming conventions: first character: C next three characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique. The combination of the tap properties table name, the tap NPD, and the tap option, must be unique. 3. nominal_piping_dia , short This attribute defines the value for the nominal tap diameter. 4. option_code , short , SN 400

This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item, a secondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. If no option is specified at placement, this attribute defaults to option 1 (primary item). This parameter is used as a component override in Piping Design. 5. end_preparation , short , SN 330

This code-listed attribute identifies the end preparation. The system recognizes a certain range of values as being flanged termination types, another range as being butt welded termination types, etc. 6. rating , character(8)

This attribute exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the description of pressure rating for Piping Commodity Data for more information on standard formats.) 7. sched_thick , character(8)

This attribute identifies the generic or specific schedule, a thickness value, or a calculation. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for Piping Commodity Data for more information on standard formats.) 8. tap_material_code , character(10)

This optional attribute can be used to access the Material Description Library for the taps material description addendum. It must be a unique reference to the Material Description Library, including material descriptions for commodity items. In reporting or isometric extraction, this text can be appended to either the short or long descriptions of the component to which the tap applies.

86

_ _______________
This attribute is also referred to as the Tap Code. Refer to the listing of the tap descriptions in the Short Material Description Library, page 367, for more information on the tap commodity code.

Tap Properties Data (205)

Neutral File Format


Double_Spacing Sequence= 3 4 6 5 7 ! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW 8 Rev=2 Date=12-May-1988

Table= C001 ! Description= SWE CL3000 default taps ! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code 0.375 691 591 NREQD E$37591XXX > 0.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064 0.5 691 591 NREQD E$50591XXX > 0.75 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$75421064 0.75 691 591 NREQD E$75591XXX > 1 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E001421064 1 691 591 NREQD E001591XXX > 1.25 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$2421064 1.25 691 591 NREQD E1$2591XXX > 1.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$5421064 1.5 691 591 NREQD E1$5591XXX > 2 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E002421064 2 691 591 NREQD E002591XXX 2.5 691 591 NREQD E2$5591XXX > 3 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E003421064 3 691 591 NREQD E003591XXX 3.5 691 591 NREQD E3$5591XXX > 4 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E004421064 4 691 591 NREQD E004591XXX 5 691 591 NREQD E005591XXX 6 691 591 NREQD E006591XXX 8 691 591 NREQD E008591XXX 10 691 591 NREQD E010591XXX 12 691 591 NREQD E012591XXX 14 691 591 NREQD E014591XXX 16 691 591 NREQD E016591XXX 18 691 591 NREQD E018591XXX 20 691 591 NREQD E020591XXX 24 691 591 NREQD E024591XXX 26 691 591 NREQD E026591XXX 28 691 591 NREQD E028591XXX 30 691 591 NREQD E030591XXX 32 691 591 NREQD E032591XXX 34 691 591 NREQD E034591XXX 36 691 591 NREQD E036591XXX 42 691 591 NREQD E042591XXX 48 691 591 NREQD E048591XXX

Sample Files
A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\taps.data. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical tap properties is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharm_tap.data.

5. Piping Job Specification

87

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.2.6

Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211)


The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item that is dependent on the commodity code, nominal piping diameter, and schedule/thickness. This table is used for miscellaneous batch reporting, such as construction cost reports and requisition orders, and interfaces to material control, stress analysis, and isometric drawing extraction. There are multiple occurrences for a specific commodity code and a specific pair of green and red nominal piping diameters in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data table because schedule/thickness is not included in the commodity code. The Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data table contains 10 attributes. 1. 2. system_unique_no , integer

sys_commodity_code , character(16) This parameter identifies the customers commodity code (or part number). You can modify the character length for this attribute.

3. 4.

gcp_nom_diam rcp_nom_diam

, short , short

These coded attributes identify the nominal piping diameter for the green/red connect point in NPD Units. 5. 6. gcp_sch_thk rcp_sch_thk , character(8) , character(8)

These attributes identify the schedule thickness value for the green/red connect point. This parameter exist as alphanumeric data. A generic schedule such as S-STD, S-XS and S-XXS. If the schedule name exceeds the provided field length it is defined in terms of its wall thickness. A specific schedule such as S-40, S-60 and S-80. NREQD is used if the thickness value is not required in purchasing the component, empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values, stress analysis is not applicable. A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a wall thickness value in the same physical units as nominal piping diameter.

88

_ _______________
An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. 7. commodity_code , character(16) , index 1 This attribute identifies the customers commodity code or vendors part number. It is not required for the customers commodity code, if the customers commodity code is not dependent upon nominal piping diameter or thickness. 8. weld_weight , double

Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211)

This parameter represents the total weld required at all welded ends of the commodity item. 9. unit_price , double

This attribute identifies the unit price (materials cost) for the commodity item. 10. manhours , double

This attribute identifies the unit manhours associated with the commodity item.

Neutral File Format

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pcd_size.data.

5. Piping Job Specification

Data Retrieval
The data retrieval from the Size-Dependent Data table involves data for a commodity item that is dependent upon nominal piping diameter and schedule/thickness. This form of data retrieval is used during the MTO report creation process.

89

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

inputs (search criteria)


pointer to the commodity item dependent data NPD green - first size NPD red - second size schedule/thickness - green connect point schedule/thickness - red connect point

outputs
customers commodity code or vendors part number weld data price data (materials cost) - unit price labor data - unit manhours

90

_ _______________
5.2.7
The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specific commodity item that is dependent on both the Piping Commodity Library code and nominal piping diameter range. This data is used strictly for generating implied material for MTO reporting and material control. It is reserved for spec implied material, such as caps or stubs, for a specific commodity item. It is also used for reporting the implied components of a commodity item (for example, cap screws). The Piping Commodity Implies Material Data table contains 10 attributes. The entries in this tables should not be confused with mating implied items (such as welds, bolts, nuts, or gaskets) which are generated automatically by the system. Refer to the Report Manager (PD_Report) Users Guide for more information on implied items.

Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)

Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)

A unique commodity code must be defined for each commodity definition. For example, if a commodity code is defined for gate valves from 2" to 14", but you want a different description for an 11" gate valve, you must assign a new commodity code to the 11" valve. 1. 2. system_unique_no , integer

sys_commodity_code , character(16) This parameter identifies the customers commodity code (or part number), if it is not dependent upon nominal piping diameter. You can modify the character length for this attribute.

3. 4.

gcp_from_nom_diam gcp_to_nom_diam

, short , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters for the green connect point in NPD units. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in the Piping Job Specification. NPD is defined as a special coded number with the following formula. for Metric units, the coded number equals the size (in millimeters) for English Units, the coded number equals the size (in inches) times 32 plus 5000. coded number = 32*diameter + 5000 (in) This allows nominal piping diameter to range from 1 mm to 5000 mm in 1 mm increments for metric units, and to range from 1/32" to at least 200" in 1/32" increments for the English System of Units.

5. Piping Job Specification

91

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 5. 6. rcp_from_nom_diam rcp_to_nom_diam , short , short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters for the red connect point in NPD units. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in the Piping Job Specification. For a full size component, these parameters should be set to -. 7. commodity_code , character(16) , index 1

This attribute identifies the Piping Commodity code of the implied material. It is used to generate an MTO line item as a result of a piping commodity item in the Piping Design model. The implied material is generated by accessing the Piping Commodity Library - not by accessing the Piping Design database. 8. quantity , double

This attribute identifies the quantity of the implied material. 9. fabrication_cat , short

This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example, Shop Supplied, Field Fabricated). 10. standard_note_no , short

This code-listed attribute provides index numbers to standard notes in CL499 that apply to this implied material.

92

_ _______________
Neutral File Format

Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)

Sample Files
A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\implied.data. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical gasket data is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharm_212.data.

5. Piping Job Specification

Data Retrieval
Data retrieval from the Implied Material Data table involves implied material data for a commodity item that is dependent on nominal piping diameter range. This form of data retrieval is used during the MTO Report Creation process and Material Control.

93

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

inputs (search criteria)


pointer to the commodity item dependent data

outputs
Commodity code of the implied material Quantity of the implied material Fabrication category of the implied material Standard note for the implied material

94

_ _______________
5.2.8 Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231)
The Component Insulation Exclusion Data is used to completely or partially exclude the insulation of components on insulated lines with respect to interference checking.

Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231)

For each piping component, piping specialty, or instrument component (excluding pipes) on an insulated line, the Piping Envelope Builder will search the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table on the basis of the following data to determine whether or not insulation should be completely excluded from that components interference envelope. green nominal piping diameter of the component (range search) red nominal piping diameter of the component (range search) heat tracing requirements (range search) insulation purpose (range search) normal operating temperature (range search) For piping commodities, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the components commodity name in the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data. If the piping commodity is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the components interference envelope. If the commodity name is not specified in the exclusion table for those conditions, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the components model code using the same data. If a match for those conditions is found on the basis of model code, the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the components interference envelope. Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in the components interference envelope. For piping specialties and instrument components, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the components model code in the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data. If the component is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the components interference envelope. Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in the components interference envelope.

5. Piping Job Specification

The piping segment data (heat tracing requirements, insulation purpose, and normal operating temperature) are determined on the basis of the piping segment that is associated with the first connect point of the applicable component. The Component Insulation Exclusion Data table contains 13 attributes. 1. system_unique_no , integer

95

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 2. commodity_name , character(6) This attribute identifies the commodity item name of a piping component as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 3). If this attribute is blank, the system will search for a match by model code. 3. model_code , character(6)

For piping commodities, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 19). For piping specialties, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Specialty Specification Data (Table 203 attribute 3). For instruments, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Instrument Component Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 3). 4. 5. gcp_npd_from gcp_npd_to , short , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. 6. 7. rcp_npd_from rcp_npd_to , short , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. For full size components use a dash (-) for these attributes. 8. 9. heat_tracing_from heat_tracing_to , short , short , SN 200 , SN 200

These code-listed attributes identify the range of heat tracing values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from code list set 200, Heat Tracing Requirements. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that heat tracing requirements are not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. 10. 11. insul_purpose_from , short insul_purpose_to , short , SN 220 , SN 220

These code-listed attributes identify the range of insulation purpose values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from Standard Note type 220, Insulation Purpose.

96

_ _______________
A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that insulation purpose is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. 12. 13. nor_oper_temp_from , double nor_oper_temp_to , double

Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231)

These attributes identify the range of temperature values (lower bound to higher bound) for the component or instrument. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that temperature is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. The system of units for the temperature range is the same as the system of units for the maximum temperature in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table. Note that normal design temperature, alternate operating temperature, and alternate design temperature are not considered.

Neutral File Format


! DEFINE COMPONENT INSULATION EXCLUSION DATA Single_Spacing Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 6Q2C76 I15AS REDE 4 4 4 12 12 12 2 10 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 150 150 150 200 200 200

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\component.data.

5. Piping Job Specification

97

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.2.9

Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232)


The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data provides for partial exclusion of flange insulation thickness from the generation of interference envelopes. This is an optional data table; if no data is defined for this table the Piping Envelope builder will continue to function as it has in previous releases of PDS. The Piping Envelope Builder searches for matching data in this table for each bolted end of each piping component or instrument component on an insulated line that are determined to be insulated. The system only searches for components that passed the component insulation exclusion test, as described in Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231), page 95. The Piping Envelope Builder searches for matching data on the basis of the following data to determine whether or not insulation should be excluded from the flange outside diameter of that bolted end of the component. nominal piping diameter of the bolted end (range search) heat tracing requirements (range search) insulation purpose (range search) normal operating temperature (range search) If matching criteria is found in the exclusion table for these conditions, the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the flange outside diameter of the bolted end of that components interference envelope. Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in the components interference envelope. The piping segment data (heat tracing requirements, insulation purpose, and normal operating temperature) are determined on the basis of the piping segment associated with the first connect point of the applicable component. The Piping Eden modules for the interference envelopes that are to consider the partial exclusion of insulation from the flange outside diameter of a bolted end, must be revised to accommodate this option. If you do not change any or all of the Piping Eden modules for the interference envelopes, this table will have no impact and the interference envelopes will include complete insulation, when applicable. For example, the required modification to the interference parametric for the weldneck flange (FWN) is as follows:
!FLANGE - Interference Module Interference_Parametric_Shape_Definition F1A Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( LINEAR ) Thickness_1 Thickness_2 !Original Line ! Facing_OD_1 !Modified Line Facing_OD_1 Facing_OD_2 = Thickness_1 + CP_Offset_1 = Thickness_2 + CP_Offset_2 = Facing_OD_1 + Insulation * 2 = Facing_OD_1 + Insulation_1 * 2 = Facing_OD_2 + Insulation * 2

98

_ _______________
Call Draw_Cylinder ( Thickness_1, Facing_OD_1 ) Call Draw_Cylinder ( Thickness_2, Facing_OD_2 ) RETURN END

Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232)

The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data table has 9 attributes. 1. 2. 3. system_unique_no bolted_npd_from bolted_npd_to , integer , short , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the bolted end of the component or instrument in NPD units. 4. 5. heat_tracing_from heat_tracing_to , short , short , SN 200 , SN 200

These code-listed attributes identify the range of heat tracing values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from code list set 200, Heat Tracing Requirements. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that heat tracing requirements are not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. 6. 7. insul_purpose_from , short insul_purpose_to , short , SN 220 , SN 220

These code-listed attributes identify the range of insulation purpose values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from Standard Note type 220, Insulation Purpose. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that insulation purpose is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. 8. 9. nor_oper_temp_from , double nor_oper_temp_to , double

5. Piping Job Specification

These attributes identify the range of temperature values (lower bound to higher bound) for the bolted end of the component or instrument. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that temperature is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. The system of units for the temperature range is the same as the system of units for the maximum temperature in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table. Note that normal design temperature, alternate operating temperature, and alternate design temperature are not considered.

99

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Neutral File Format


! DEFINE FLANGE INSULATION EXCLUSION DATA Single_Spacing Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 4 4 12 12 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 150 150 150 200 200 200

100

_ _______________
5.2.10 Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233)
The Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data can be used to completely or partially exclude construction tolerance from the generation of interference envelopes. This feature only applies to Piping vs. Piping construction tolerances.

Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233)

This is an optional data table; if no data is defined for this table the Piping Envelope builder will continue to function as it has in previous releases of PDS. For each piping or instrument component, excluding pipes, the Piping Envelope Builder searches Table 233 on the basis of the following data to determine whether the Piping versus Piping construction tolerance should be excluded from that components interference envelope. green NPD of the component (range search) red NPD of the component (range search) For piping commodities, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the components commodity name in the Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data. If the piping commodity is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the components interference envelope. If the commodity name is not specified in the exclusion table for those conditions, the Piping Envelope Builder will search for the components model code using the same data. If a match for those conditions is found on the basis of the model code, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the components interference envelope. Otherwise, the construction tolerance will be included in the components interference envelope. For piping specialties and instrument components, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the components model code in the Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data. If the component is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the components interference envelope. Otherwise, the construction tolerance will be included in the components interference envelope.

5. Piping Job Specification

101

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 The Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data table has 7 attributes. 1. 2. system_unique_no commodity_name , integer , character(6) This attribute identifies the commodity item name of a piping component as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 3). If this attribute is blank, the system will search for a match by model code. 3. model_code , character(6)

For piping commodities, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 19). For piping specialties, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Specialty Specification Data (Table 203 attribute 3). For instruments, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Instrument Component Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 3). 4. 5. gcp_npd_from gcp_npd_to , short , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. 6. 7. rcp_npd_from rcp_npd_to , short , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. For full size components use a dash (-) for these attributes.

Neutral File Format


! PIPING CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCE EXCLUSION DATA Single_Spacing Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 6Q2C76 I15AS REDE 4 4 4 12 12 12 2 10

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\constol.data.

102

_ _______________
5.3 Spec Writer
This command provides a forms interface for interactively creating, revising, and managing the following specification data. This interface provides more simplicity and flexibility to a beginner or a casual user, than defining specs with their respective neutral files: Piping Materials Class Data (PDtable_201) Piping Commodity Specification Data (PDtable_202) Piping Specialty Specification Data (PDtable_203) Instrument Specification Data (PDtable_204) Tap Properties Data (PDtable_205) Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (PDtable_212)

Spec Writer

Features
5. Piping Job Specification
The Spec Writer provides the following general features: User-specified options for customizing the input of data (RDB_options). A direct interface to the unapproved Specification Material Reference Database. On-line validation for the existence of a material description, once the commodity code (or component number) has been defined.

103

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Optional on-line Table Checker validation using pre-defined Table Checker reports. Automated selections from the Standard Note Library for code-listed data. The approved Standard Note Library must have been defined to include the correct data for use in the Material Reference Database. Selectable list of acceptable model codes for a specified commodity name. Context-sensitive user interface. The form options will vary depending on the item being defined. For example, the creation (and revision) of specification data for bolts and gaskets, will display only those inputs relevant for bolts or gaskets. Context-sensitive on-line help that is linked to the Component Data Reference Guide and the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide.

104

_ _______________
5.3.1 RDB Options File
The RDB Options File allows you to customize the data input operations for the Interactive Spec Writer. You should define an RDB options list, named RDB_options in the project directory. A default RDB options list is included in the PD_Data sample/data/ directory.
! RDB_options ! ! general items = three main toggles ! SHORT_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF LONG_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF SPECIALTY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF ! ! PDtable_201 items ! SERVICE_LIMITS_TABLE = LIST, L NOMINAL_PIPING_DIAMETER_TABLE = LIST, D BRANCH_TABLE = LIST, B TAP_PROPERTIES_TABLE = DATABASE GASKET_SEPARATION_TABLE = KEYIN THICKNESS_DATA_TABLE = LIST, T MATERIALS_DATA_TABLE = LIST, M FLUID_CODE = VALUE MATERIALS_DESCRIPTION = LIST !BEND_DEFLECTION_TABLE = LIST, BENDEF !PIPE_LENGTH_TABLE = LIST, PIPLEN STANDARD_NOTE = LIST PROMPT_FOR_TAP_ORIENTATION ! ! PDtable_202 items ! MODEL_CODE = LIST VALVE_OPERATOR = LIST ! ! COMMODITY_NAME<===>MODEL_CODES ! ! Pipe/Tube PIPING = PIPE, TUBE ! ! Valves (6Q1C) ! 6Q1C01 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR 6Q1C02 = GATEX, GATEXB, GATEXBB 6Q1C03 = GATCON 6Q1C04 = GATBL ! ! Generic 3-way 6Q1C05 = BAL3P, GLO3W, PLU3W, SLI3W, 3WRV1 ! 6Q1C06 = BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP 6Q1C08 = BAL3P 6Q1C11 = GLOSP, GLO, GLOF, GLOR 6Q1C12 = GLOASP, GLOA 6Q1C13 = GLO3W 6Q1C14 = GLOY, GLOYF, GLOYR 6Q1C16 = PLUSP, PLU, PLUVP, PLUFB, PLUF, PLUR 6Q1C18 = PLU3W 6Q1C19 = PLU4W 6Q1C22 = NEE 6Q1C26 = BFYLP, BFYHP 6Q1C30 = DIA, DIASP, DIAPL, DIAGL 6Q1C32 = KNF 6Q1C33 = SLI 6Q1C34 = SLI3W 6Q1C37 = CKALSP, CKAL, CKST, BDA, HOSA 6Q1C38 = CKLSP, CKSSP, CKL, CKLF, CKLR, CKS, CKSF, CKSR, CKSY, CKLRY 6Q1C39 = CKWF, CKWFSP 6Q1C40 = CKALSP, CKAL 6Q1C41 = CKST 6Q1C42 = CKAST 6Q1C43 = CKYST

RDB Options File

5. Piping Job Specification

105

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
6Q1C50 = CKBP 6Q1C51 = CKAR 6Q1C53 = BDA 6Q1C54 = BDY 6Q1C56 = PIN 6Q1C57 = FLO 6Q1C58 = FOOT 6Q1C62 = TKDR 6Q1C69 = DEL 6Q1C72 = HOS 6Q1C73 = HOSA ! ! Generic Vent/Drain Valve 6Q1C76 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR, BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP ! ! Generic Instrument Root Valve 6Q1C80 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR, BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP ! 6Q1C81 = 3WRV1 6Q1C82 = 4WRV1 ! ! On-line Fittings (6P2C) and In-line Fittings (6Q2C) ! 6Q2C01 = FWN, FLWN, FSO, FL, FPL, FSSSO, FSSL, FSSPL, FLSSO, FLSL, FFIL, FS, FSW, FTHD, FCP 6Q2C03 = FRWN, FRSO, FRPL, FRS, FRSW, FRTHD 6Q2C04 = FEWN 6Q2C06 = FOWNA, FOWNAW, FOWNB, FOWNBW, FOSOA, FOSOAW, FOSOB, FOSOBW, FOSWA, FOSWAW, FOSWB, FOSWBW, FOTHDA 6Q2C08 = FBLD 6Q2C10 = BLSPO 6Q2C11 = BLSPC 6Q2C12 = BDISC 6Q2C13 = BLPAD 6Q2C14 = T1SPA, T2SPA1 6Q2C15 = BLSPA, OPSPA ! ! Generic End 6Q2C16 = FBLD, HDHEMI, HDELIP, HD21, PLUG, CAPBV, CAPOT ! 6Q2C17 = HDHEMI, HDELIP, HD21 6Q2C19 = PLUG 6Q2C21 = CAPBV, CAPOT ! ! Generic Conentric Diameter Change 6Q2C23 = REDC, SWGC, CPLR, INSR1, INSR2 ! ! Generic Eccentric Diameter Change 6Q2C24 = REDE, SWGE ! 6Q2C25 = CPL 6Q2C26 = CPLH 6Q2C27 = REDC 6Q2C28 = REDE 6Q2C32 = CPLR 6Q2C35 = SWGC 6Q2C36 = SWGE 6Q2C39 = UN 6Q2C40 = UNO 6Q2C41 = UND 6Q2C43 = HC 6Q2C44 = BUSH 6Q2C46 = INSR1, INSR2 6Q2C47 = PIPB, PIPB2 6Q2C49 = E5 6Q2C51 = E11 6Q2C53 = E22 ! ! Generic <45 Degree Direction Change 6Q2C55 = E5, E11, E22, E45TLR, PIPB, PIPB2 ! ! Generic 45 Degree Direction Change 6Q2C56 = E45LR, E45, PIPB, PIPB2, E45LT, E453D, E45T3D, E45U, E45ST, E45S, E45L, M451, M452 ! 6Q2C57 = E45 6Q2C59 = E45LR, E45TLR 6Q2C60 = E45LT 6Q2C61 = E453D, E45T3D 6Q2C63 = E45U 6Q2C65 = E45ST

106

_ _______________

RDB Options File

6Q2C66 = E45S 6Q2C68 = E45L 6Q2C73 = E60 ! ! Generic 45-90 Degree Direction Change 6Q2C75 = E90TLR, PIPB, PIPB2 ! ! Generic 90 Degree Direction Change 6Q2C76 = E90LR, E90, E90SR, E90LT, E90R, E903D, E903T3D, E90U, E90ST, E90RST, E90S, E90L, PIPB, PIPB2, E90LT, M901, M902, M903, M9 ! 6Q2C77 = E90 6Q2C79 = E90SR 6Q2C80 = E90LR, E90TLR 6Q2C82 = E90LT 6Q2C84 = E90R 6Q2C86 = E903D, E903T3D 6Q2C88 = E90U 6Q2C90 = E90ST 6Q2C91 = E90RST 6Q2C93 = E90S 6Q2C94 = E90L ! ! On-line Fittings (6P3C) and In-line Fittings (6Q3C) ! 6Q3C01 = R180 6Q3C03 = R180SR 6Q3C05 = R180LR 6Q3C07 = R180CL 6Q3C08 = R180MD 6Q3C09 = R180OP 6Q3C14 = M1, M2, M3, M4 6Q3C16 = M451, M452 6Q3C18 = M901, M902, M903, M904 6Q3C22 = T, TBT 6Q3C24 = TRB, TRBT 6Q3C25 = TRRB 6Q3C27 = TUOR 6Q3C28 = TUOB 6Q3C31 = TST 6Q3C34 = TRI 6Q3C36 = TDRA, TDRAW, TDRB, TDRBW 6Q3C38 = TBA 6Q3C45 = Y 6Q3C47 = L 6Q3C49 = LRB 6Q3C50 = LRRB 6Q3C52 = S90YB 6Q3C53 = S90YRB 6Q3C54 = L90YB 6Q3C55 = L90YRB 6Q3C60 = X 6Q3C62 = XRB 6Q3C63 = XRRB 6Q3C64 = XBA 6Q3C70 = SAD 6Q3C72 = SWOL 6Q3C73 = WOL 6Q3C74 = SOL 6Q3C75 = TOL 6Q3C76 = NOL 6Q3C77 = EOLLR, EOLSR 6Q3C78 = LOL 6Q3C79 = FOLHC 6Q3C80 = RPAD, RPAD2 6Q3C82 = RWELD, RWELD2 6Q3C84 = BWELD, BWELD2, BWELD3 6Q3C88 = NIP 6Q3C89 = NIPIL !6Q3C95 = GASKET !6Q3C97 = STUD !6Q3C98 = NUT ! ! ! VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST ! ! Handwheels !

5. Piping Job Specification

107

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
OP_0 = None Required OP_3 = Handwheel OP_4 = Handwheel if GCP>RCP OP_5 = Handwheel, inclined OP_9 = Wrench, short OP_11 = Wrench, long OP_17 = Lever OP_19 = T-handle, short OP_21 = T-handle, long OP_25 = Handwheel, special OP_27 = Wrench, special OP_29 = Gear, top mounted handwheel OP_31 = Gear, top mounted inclined handwheel OP_33 = Gear, side mounted handwheel OP_35 = Gear, side mounted inclined handwheel OP_39 = Lever, quick-action OP_40 = Post indicator ! ! Actuators ! OP_411 = Diaphragm, type 1 OP_412 = Diaphragm, type 2 OP_413 = Diaphragm, type 3 OP_431 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 1 OP_432 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 2 OP_433 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 3 OP_451 = Regulator type 1 OP_452 = Regulator type 2 OP_453 = Regulator type 3 OP_491 = Single acting cylinder type 1 OP_492 = Single acting cylinder type 2 OP_493 = Single acting cylinder type 3 OP_511 = Doulble acting cylinder type 1 OP_512 = Doulble acting cylinder type 2 OP_513 = Doulble acting cylinder type 3 OP_531 = Pilot operated cylinder type 1 OP_532 = Pilot operated cylinder type 2 OP_533 = Pilot operated cylinder type 3 OP_534 = Pilot operated cylinder type 4 OP_571 = Motor type 1 OP_572 = Motor type 2 OP_573 = Motor type 3 OP_574 = Motor type 4 OP_611 = Digital type 1 OP_651 = Electro-hydraulic type 1 OP_652 = Electro-hydraulic type 2 OP_811 = Weight type 1 OP_851 = Manual type 1 OP_852 = Manual type 2 OP_853 = Manual type 3 OP_854 = Manual type 4 OP_891 = Spring type 1 END_VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST

You can use the following keywords to customize the settings in the RDB options file.

General Items
For piping commodities, you can verify that a material description has been defined in the Short Material Description Library and/or the Long Material Description Library. For piping specialties and instruments, you can verify that a material description has been defined in the Specialty Material Description Library. SHORT_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF If set to ON, the short material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code.

108

_ _______________
If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF. LONG_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF If set to ON, the long material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF. SPECIALTY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF If set to ON, the specialty material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF.

RDB Options File

PDtable_201 items
SERVICE_LIMITS_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of Service Limits Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to use as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use L for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. NOMINAL_PIPING_DIAMETER_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of Nominal Piping Diameter Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to use as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use D for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. BRANCH_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of Branch Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use B for the delivered tables.) The list is filtered to only include the unique tables, where the branch angle is 90 degrees. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. You should not assign the same Branch Table to be used in two different piping materials classes if, for example, one allows intersections at both 45 degrees and 90 degrees, and the other only allows 90 degree intersections. The Reference Data Manager will not detect this problem.

5. Piping Job Specification

TAP_PROPERTIES_TABLE = KEYIN or DATABASE If set to DATABASE, a list of Tap Properties Data Tables (as defined in PDtable_205 of the unapproved Material Reference Database) is displayed.

109

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. GASKET_SEPARATION_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of Gasket Separation Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use G for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. When listing the Gasket Separation Tables, the list of tables is restricted to unique names, excluding the underbar (_) and the pressure rating value that follows. In other words, the list of Gasket Separation Tables will not include the pressure rating (G001 instead of G001_1500). THICKNESS_DATA_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of Thickness Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use T for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. MATERIALS_DATA_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of Materials Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use M for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. FLUID_CODE = VALUE Specify a default fluid code value to be used for the piping materials class. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is that you do not intend to define this data, unless you specify the name of a Fluid Code Table. FLUID_CODE_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of Fluid Code Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix (such as FC) to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. MATERIALS_DESCRIPTION = KEYIN or LIST If set to LIST, a list of materials descriptions (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library) is displayed. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the value.

110

_ _______________
If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. PIPE_LENGTH_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of Pipe Length Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name.

RDB Options File

BEND_DEFLECTION_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> If set to LIST, a list of Bend Deflection Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables.

STANDARD_NOTE = KEYIN or LIST If set to LIST, a list of standard notes (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library) is displayed. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode will to key in the value of the standard note.

PDtable_202 items
MODEL_CODE = KEYIN or LIST If set to LIST, a list of acceptable model codes (determined by the commodity name) is displayed. (See keyword COMMODITY_NAME <===> MODEL_CODES for more information.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file or the list of acceptable model codes is not defined, the default mode is to key in the value. VALVE_OPERATOR = KEYIN or LIST If set to LIST, a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file) is displayed. (See keyword VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST for more information.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file or the list of valve operator types is not defined, the default mode is to key in the value. PROMPT_FOR_TAP_ORIENTATION This keyword is used if you require that all (or some) orifice flanges have two taps oriented 90 degrees apart. By default orifice taps are oriented 180 degrees apart on the outside diameter of the flange. If this keyword is not included in the RDB options list, the relative tap orientation for two taps will always be 180 degrees. COMMODITY_NAME <===> MODEL_CODES This keyword precedes the list of associations between commodity names and their acceptable model codes. This list must be defined to use the LIST option for MODEL_CODE.

5. Piping Job Specification

111

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 The association between a commodity name and the acceptable model codes for that commodity name is defined as follows. <commodity_name> = <model_code_A>,<model_code_B>, ... 6Q1C01 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR 6Q1C02 = GATEX, GATEXB, GATEXBB You can define as many as 50 model codes, separated by a comma, for each commodity name. The delivered RDB options list includes a list of acceptable model codes for the reference data provided with PDS. VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST This keyword precedes the list of valve operator types and their corresponding descriptions. The list of valve operator types is defined as follows. <valve operator type> = <description> OP_0 = None Required OP_3 = Handwheel The delivered RDB options file includes a list of valve operator types for the reference data provided with PDS. The description is for information only to aid the user in selecting the proper valve operator type. END_VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST This keyword must follow the valve operator list as a delimiter.

112

_ _______________
5.3.2 Piping Materials Class Data Command
The Piping Materials Class Data command can be used to create a piping materials class definition in Table 201 of the Material Reference Database or revise and existing piping materials class definition.

Piping Materials Class Data Command

Options
Create The system activates the Create Piping Materials Class Data form. Revise By Keyin The system activates the Revise Piping Materials Class Data form. Key in the name of the piping materials class to revise in the Piping Materials Class field. Revise By List Select the piping materials class to be revised from the displayed list of piping materials classes (as defined in the Unapproved Material Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Materials Class Data form with the data for the selected piping materials class.

5. Piping Job Specification

113

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.3.2.1

Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data


The Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data form is used to create or modity the definition of a piping materials class. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value for all the mandatory fields.

Field Descriptions
The system highlights the mandatory input fields (those that must be specified). Once you define a valid input for a mandatory field the system will drop the highlight for that field. Refer to RDB Options File, page 105 for information on defining list options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Piping Materials Class Data (201), page 62 for more information on the attributes for the Piping Materials Class Data table (201).

Mandatory Input Fields


Piping Materials Class (keyin) Key in up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the piping materials class to be defined. The system verifies that specified piping materials class does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database. Gasket Separation (keyin) Key in the value for the gasket separation for this piping materials class.

OR

114

_ _______________
Gasket Table (keyin or list) Key in the table name or select from the list of tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). The list of Gasket Separation Tables will exclude the pressure rating value. Service Limits (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Service Limits Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Service Limits Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data

Diameter (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Nominal Piping Diameter Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Nominal Piping Diameter Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Branch Table (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Branch Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Branch Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). The list will only include the unique tables, where the branch angle is 90 degrees. You should not assign the same Branch Table to be used in two different piping materials classes if, for example, one allows intersections at both 45 degrees and 90 degrees, and the other only allows 90 degree intersections. The Reference Data Manager will detect this problem. Tap Data (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Tap Properties Data Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Tap Properties Data Tables (as defined in PDtable_205 of the unapproved Material Reference Database). The unapproved tap properties data is referenced, since all specification data within the Material Reference Database is approved in one operation.

Optional Data - Wall Thickness


This data is required for piping commodities, where the schedule or thickness is not explicitly defined in the piping materials class or in a wall thickness table. Corrosion Allowance (keyin) Key in a numeric value, if wall thickness calculations are to be used. Thickness Equation (list) Select one of the displayed wall thickness equations.
ANSI B31.3-1987 ANSI B31.1a-1986 EL01 EJ01

5. Piping Job Specification

The corresponding name for the thickness equation is loaded into the Piping Materials Class Data Table. Thickness Table (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Thickness Data Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Thickness Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

115

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Materials Data Table (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Materials Data Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Materials Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

Optional Data
The following data is not not required and can be defined or not defined based on your company practices. Materials Description (keyin or list) Key in the numeric value for the materials description in the Standard Note Library for this piping materials class or select from the list of materials descriptions (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library). Revision (keyin) Key in up to two alphanumeric characters for the revision number. Revision Date (keyin) Key in up to ten alphanumeric characters for the date. The current date will not be entered automatically. Note that the Reference Data Manager creates and maintains a separate revision management date on the basis of the current date and time which can be used in the reporting of reference data. Fluid Code (keyin list) Define a default fluid code to be used for the piping materials class.

OR

Fluid Code Table (keyin list) Key in the name of the Fluid Code Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Fluid Code Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Materials of Construction (keyin) Key in upt to six alphanumeric characters. Bend Deflect Table (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Bend Deflection Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Bend Deflection Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Pipe Length Table (keyin or list) Key in the name of the Pipe Length Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Pipe Length Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Standard Note Number (keyin or list) Key in the note number in the Standard Note Library for this piping materials class or select from the list of standard notes (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library).

116

_ _______________
5.3.3 Piping Commodity Data Command
The Piping Commodity Data command can be used to create a piping commodity definition in Table 202 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing piping commodity definition.

Piping Commodity Data Command

Options
Create Select the Piping Materials Class for the commodity item to be created from the list of piping materials classes (as defined in the Unapproved Material Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates the Create Piping Commodity Specification Data form. Revise By Keyin Key in the name of the piping materials class for the commodity item to be modified. Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping commodity. Revise By List Select the piping materials class for the commodity item to be revised from the displayed list of piping materials classes and select Accept. Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping commodity. Copy You can use the Copy option in conjunction with the Revise options as a cut-and-paste feature. This command requires that both the source piping materials class data and the destination piping materials class have been created. You can copy a complete piping materials class, including the piping commodity specification data or selectively copy specific commodities. Select the option for the items to be copied. Source and Destination Piping Materials Class - These are active fields that, when selected, display the piping materials class list. Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list, then select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept.

5. Piping Job Specification

Select All - This option copies the specification data for all piping commodities within the selected source piping materials class to the specified destination piping materials class. Select From List - Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. Then select the piping commodity to be copied from the list of all piping commodities within the source piping materials class.

117

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Select Gaskets - Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. The system copies the specification data for all gaskets within the source piping materials class to the destination piping materials class. Gaskets are recognized on the basis of the gasket commodity name, as specified through the Project Data Manager. Select Bolts - Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. The system copies the specification data for all bolts within the source piping materials class to the destination piping materials class. Bolts are recognized on the basis of the bolt commodity name, as specified through the Project Data Manager. Short Commodity Material Description ON/OFF You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Short Material Description Library. Long Commodity Material Description ON/OFF You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Long Material Description Library. If the Material Description toggle is set to ON and no corresponding material description is found for a specified commodity code, the system activates the Add Entry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to Material Description Library, page 128.

118

_ _______________
5.3.3.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data
The Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form is used to create or modify the definition of a piping commodity within a specified piping materials class. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data

Field Descriptions
Refer to RDB Options File, page 105, for information on defining options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Piping Commodity Specification Data (202), page 67, for information on the attributes for the Piping Commodity Specification Data table. Where possible, the system verifies that the specified value is valid for the applicable piping materials class. For example, NPD values are checked against the associated diameters table in the approved Piping Job Spec Table Library. Commodity Type This field can be used to select the type of piping commodity data to be created based on the settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note Library. General Fittings Pipe Bends Orifice Flanges Branch Nipples Branch Reinforcement Valves Piping Tubing Gaskets Bolts Nuts

5. Piping Job Specification

The system will modify the form fields to reflect the data that is specific to that type of component. The system stores the commodity type as the input_form_type within the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table of the Material Reference Database.

119

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Any input fields that are not used for a specific piping commodity type will be deactivated. The General Fittings category will allow input in all the input fields. This form is used for any piping commodity that does not fall within any of the other types.

General Fittings, Pipe Bends, Orifice Flanges, Branch Nipples, Branch Reinforcement, and Valves
Commodity Name (keyin) From NPD - First Size (keyin) To NPD - First Size (keyin) End Preparation - First Size (list) Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) This data is automatically set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type. Table Suffix - First Size (list) Schedule/Thickness - First Size (list) Attribute 10. This data is automatically set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type. Commodity Code (keyin) Key in the commodity code for the piping commodity. When size-dependent commodity codes are required, this will represent a system commodity code and will be used by the Report Manager to reference the sizedependent commodity code in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table. The system automatically translates the specified commodity code to be upper-case. You can use the Implied Data option to specify implied data for this piping commodity. Refer to Commodity Implied Data Command, page 140 for information on project-specific implied data. Refer to Implied Data, page 126 for information on class-specific implied data. The default is that implied data does not apply. For the revise command, the prefixes for implied data are not displayed as part of the commodity code, although the prefix will be loaded in the database. For implied data (project-wide or class-specific), the system will display the toggle setting rather than showing the prefix in the commodity code field. Model Code (keyin or list) Attribute 19. Key in the model code or select the model code from a list of acceptable model codes (as defined by commodity name in the RDB options file). Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) fabrication category (list)

120

_ _______________
Define the following data for any reducing components. This data will not apply to either the orifice flange or branch nipple commodity type. From NPD - Second Size (keyin) Attribute 12. Key in the lowest second size for which this specification data applies. To NPD - Second Size (keyin) Attribute 13. Key in the highest second size for which this specification data applies.

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data

You can optionally define the following fields when two ends of that component require different data. By PDS convention, if you specify a red End Preparation, you must specify the corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness. End Preparation - Second Size (list) Pressure Rating - Second Size (keyin) This data is set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type. Table Suffix - Second Size (list) Schedule/Thickness - Second Size (list) This data is set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type. The following data must be defined for the designated [component types]. The setting is stored in the modifier attribute. Bend Radius (keyin) [Pipe Bend] Key in the bend radius for the pipe bend. Number of Taps (toggle) [Orifice Flanges] Set the toggle for the number of taps (1 or 2) on the orifice flange. If applicable, set the orientation of the taps as 90 degrees or 180 degrees. This toggle only appears for orifice flanges that have two taps. Nipple Length (keyin) [Branch Nipples] Key in length of the branch nipple. Reinforcement Data (toggle) [Branch Reinforcement] Set the toggle for the source of the branch reinforcement data to By System or By User. If you select the by user branch reinforcement option, the commodity option code is automatically defined with a value of 699 (User-defined), as required by PDS. Valve Operator (keyin or list) [Valves] Key in the valve operator type or select the valve operator type from a list of valve operator types. The list of valve operator types and the corresponding descriptions are defined in the RDB options list. Valve Operator Display (toggle) [Valves] Set the toggle to ON or OFF to determine whether the valve operator is displayed in the model. Modifier (keyin) You can define this value for specific piping commodities not covered by the previous list.

5. Piping Job Specification

121

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 You can define the following optional data depending on your requirements. Commodity Option (list) Attribute 4. Max Temperature (keyin) Attribute 5. If no value is specified, the default value (undefined) is assigned automatically. Materials Grade (list) Attribute 25. Standard Note Number (list) Attributes 26 and 27. Select the note for this commodity from the list of standard notes defined in the approved Standard Note Library. PDS Sort Code (keyin) Attribute 20. The specified value is automatically converted to upper-case.

Specification data for piping


You must define the following data for piping. The piping commodity name is defined automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. From NPD - First Size (keyin) To NPD - First Size (keyin) End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list) Joint Quality Factor (keyin) (For wall thickness calculations) In lieu of the schedule/thickness, you can request that the wall thickness be computed automatically by the system by specifying the joint quality factor for wall thickness calculations. The system multiplies the joint quality factor by 100, add a *C prefix to designate that the default calculation is to be used, and loads the value into the schedule/thickness column. For example, if the joint quality factor is 0.95, this value will be *C095. Note that this is not the joint quality factor that is to be used in the branch reinforcement calculations. Commodity Code (keyin) Model Code (toggle) Set the toggle to By System (PIPE) or By User (*FPIPE). Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) Fabrication Category (list) You can optionally define the following data for piping.

122

_ _______________
End Preparation - Second Size (list) Commodity Option (list) Max Temperature (keyin) E, Reinforcement (keyin) Define the joint quality factor (E) for piping for which branch reinforcement calculations apply. The system multiplies the joint quality factor by 100 and loads it in the modifier column.

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data

This is not the joint quality factor that is to be used in the wall thickness calculations for the piping. Purchased Length (keyin) You can key in the purchased length of the piping in sub-units. This value is stored in the PDS sort code attribute. Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) End Preparation - Other (list)

Specification data for tubing


Define the following data for tubing. The tubing commodity name is defined automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. From NPD - First Size (keyin) To NPD - First Size (keyin) End Preparation - First Size (list) Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) Table Suffix - First Size (list) Schedule/Thickness - First Size (list) Joint Quality Factor (keyin) Commodity Code (keyin) Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) Fabrication Category (list) You can optionally define the following data for tubing. End Preparation - Second Size (list) Commodity Option (list) Maximum Temperature (keyin) E, Reinforcement (keyin) Purchased Length (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) End Preparation - Other (list)

5. Piping Job Specification

123

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Specification data for gaskets


Define the following data for gaskets. The gaskets commodity name is defined automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. The system displays the active projects selection of MTO options applicable to gaskets for reference. From NPD - First Size (keyin) To NPD - First Size (keyin) End Preparation - First Size (list) Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) Table Suffix - First Size (list) Commodity Code (keyin) Gasket Thickness (keyin) Key in the gasket thickness to be reported through the Report Manager. This value is loaded into the modifier column. You must define the following specification data for gaskets, when the alternate gasket search option has been enabled for MTO through the Project Data Manager. Otherwise, the input fields will be disabled. Alternate End Preparation (list) Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Alternate Pressure Rating (keyin) Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating. Alternate Table Suffix (list) Select from the list of table suffix values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. You can optionally define the following data on the basis of the user-specific requirements for gaskets. Commodity Option (list) Max Temperature (keyin) Fabrication Category (list) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)

Specification data for bolts


You must define the following data for bolts. The bolts commodity name is defined automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. The system displays the active projects selection of MTO options applicable to bolts for reference. From NPD - First Size (keyin) To NPD - First Size (keyin) Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) Table Suffix - First Size (list) Commodity Code (keyin) Bolt Extension (keyin)

124

_ _______________
You can optionally define the following data on the basis of user-specific requirements for bolts. Commodity Option (list) Fabrication Category (list) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data

Specification data for nuts


You must define the following data for nuts. The commodity name is defined automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. Max Temperature (keyin) Commodity Code (keyin) You can optionally define the following data on the basis of user-specific requirements for nuts. Fabrication Category (list) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)

5. Piping Job Specification

125

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.3.3.2

Implied Data
When defining a piping commodity, you can select the Implied Data option to indicate that the commodity will have an associated implied item that will be included in MTO reports. After selecting the option, set the toggle to Class Specific. This option is intended for implied components that are not unique within the project. A lapjoint flange is an example of the primary component, where the stub-end is the implied component. Refer to Commodity Implied Data Command, page 140 for information on Project Specific implied data. When you select Accept to define a primary component, the system modifies the form display to allow you to define the specification data for the implied component.

When you accept the specification data for the implied component, the system prefixes an asterisk (*) to the commodity code of the primary component to indicate that implied data is present.

Field Descriptions
The following specification data for the implied component are determined by the corresponding data for the primary component. This data is displayed in review only fields. Commodity Name Same as the primary component. Commodity Option The commodity option code for the implied component is set to the primary components commodity option code plus 5000.

126

_ _______________
From NPD same as the primary component. To NPD same as the primary component. Model Code same as the primary component. You can optionally define the following specification data for the implied component based on your reporting requirements. The values for the implied component default to the corresponding values for the primary component, except for the commodity code. End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list) Commodity Code (keyin) Key in the commodity code for the implied item. The system converts this value to upper-case. When size-dependent commodity codes are required, this will represent a somewhat arbitrary value, referred to as the system commodity code, and will be used by the Report Manager to reference the size-dependent commodity code. Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) Fabrication Category (list) Modifier (keyin) Max Temperature (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) PDS Sort Code (keyin) (optional). The system converts the value to upper-case.

Implied Data

5. Piping Job Specification

127

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.3.3.3

Add Entry to Material Description Library


This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in the appropriate Material Description Library (short, long, or specialty). Refer to Material Description Data, page 361, for more information on material descriptions.

Requirements
The Material Description toggle must be set to ON. If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored, unless both of the following conditions are met: The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the material description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project Data Manager. The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description.

Description Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept. The system adds the specified entry to the Material Description Library.

128

_ _______________
5.3.4 Piping Specialty Data Command

Piping Specialty Data Command

The Piping Specialty Data command can be used to create a piping specialty definition in Table 203 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing piping specialty definition. You can also add specialty descriptions to the Material Description Library.

Options
Create Select the type of specialty (Piping Specialty or Valves from the list. Then key in the component number for the specialty item to be created and select Accept. The system activates the Create Piping Specialty Specification Data form. Revise By Keyin Key in the component number of the specialty to be modified and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping specialty. Revise By List Select the piping specialty to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping specialty. Specialty Material Description You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Specialty Material Description Library. If no corresponding material description is found, the system activates the Add Entry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to Material Description Library, page 128.

5. Piping Job Specification

129

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.3.4.1

Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data


The Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form is used to create or modify the definition of a piping commodity within a specified piping materials class. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Field Descriptions
Refer to RDB Options File, page 105, for information on defining options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Piping Specialty Specification Data (203), page 77, for information on the attributes for the Piping Specialty Specification Data table.

Mandatory Input Fields


Piping Component Number (keyin) Key in the piping component number, which uniquely identifies the piping specialty. The system verifies that the piping component number does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database. From NPD - First Size (keyin) Key in the first size value for the piping specialty. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. To NPD - First Size (keyin) Key in the first size value for the piping specialty. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. The TO NPD field is only visible if an applicable specialty type is selected.

130

_ _______________
End Preparation - First Size (list) Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating. Table Suffix - First Size (list) Select from the list of table suffix values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Schedule/Thickness (list) Select from the list of schedule/thickness values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Model Code (keyin) Key in the model code to be used to parametrically define the piping specialty. Physical Data ID (keyin) Key in the ID to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for piping specialties. Sort Code (keyin) Key in the sort code to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for piping specialties. The system will convert the value to uppercase. Fabrication Category (list) Select from the list of fabrication category values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. You must define the following data for any reducing component. NPD - Second Size (keyin) Key in the second size value for the piping specialty. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. You must define the following data for valves. This data is stored in the modifier attribute. Valve Operator (keyin or list) Key in the valve operator type or select the valve operator type from a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file).

Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data

Valve Operator Display ON/OFF (toggle) Set the toggle to determine whether the valve operator will be displayed in the model. Specialty Type (field) This field can be used to select the type of piping specialty data to be created based on settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note Library. Place a data point in this field to activate the Spec Writer Data Form Type pick list, then select the preferred data type.

5. Piping Job Specification

131

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

The system stores the specialty type as the input_form_type within the Piping Specialty Data Table as a code-listed attribute for Standard Note Type 990.

Optional Input Fields


You can optionally define the following data, when two ends of the component require different data. By PDS convention, if you specify the red end preparation, you must specify the corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness. End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list) You can optionally define the following data depending on you requirements for piping specialties. Weight Code (list) Geometric Industry Standard (list) Modifier (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)

132

_ _______________
5.3.5 Instrument Data Command
The Instrument Data command can be used to create an instrument definition in Table 204 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing instrument definition. You can also add descriptions to the Material Description Library.

Instrument Data Command

Options
Create Select the type of instrument (Instruments or Valves) from the list. Then key in the component number for the instrument to be created and select Accept. The system activates the Create Instrument Specification Data form. Revise By Keyin Key in the component number of the instrument to be modified and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Instrument Specification Data form with the data for the selected instrument. Revise By List Select the instrument to be revised from the displayed List of Instruments and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Instrument Specification Data form with the data for the selected instrument. Specialty Material Description You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Specialty Material Description Library. If no corresponding material description is found, the system activates the Add Entry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to Material Description Library, page 128.

5. Piping Job Specification

133

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.3.5.1

Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data


The Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data form is used to create or modify the definition of an instrument. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Field Descriptions
Refer to RDB Options File, page 105, for information on defining options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Instrument Component Specification Data (204), page 81, for information on the attributes for the Instrument Specification Data table. Instrument Component Number (keyin) Key in the component number, which uniquely identifies the instrument. The system verifies that the component number does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database. From NPD - First Size (keyin) Key in the first size value for the instrument. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. To NPD - First Size (keyin) Key in the first size value for the instrument. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. The TO NPD field is only visible if an applicable instrument type is selected. End Preparation - First Size (list) Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.

134

_ _______________
Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating. Table Suffix - First Size (list) Select from the list of table suffix values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Schedule/Thickness (list) Select from the list of schedule/thickness values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Model Code (keyin) Key in the model code to be used to parametrically define the instrument. Physical Data ID (keyin) Key in the ID to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for instruments. Sort Code (keyin) Key in the code to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for instruments. The system will convert the value to upper-case. Fabrication Category (list) Select from the list of fabrication category values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. You must define the following data for any reducing component. NPD - Second Size (keyin) Key in the second size value for the instrument. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.

Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data

Instrument Type (field) This field can be used to select the type of instrument component data to be created based on settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note Library. Place a data point in this field to activate the Spec Writer Data Form Type pick list, then select the preferred data type.

The system stores the specialty type as the input_form_type within the Piping Specialty Data Table as a code-listed attribute for Standard Note Type 990. You can optionally define the following data, when two ends of the component require different data. By PDS convention, if you specify the red end preparation, you must specify the corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness. End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list)

5. Piping Job Specification

135

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 You must define the following data for valves. This information is stored in the modifier attribute. Valve Operator (keyin or list) Key in the valve operator type or select the valve operator type from a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file). Valve Operator Display ON/OFF (toggle) Set the toggle to determine whether the valve operator will be displayed in the model. You can optionally define the following data depending on your requirements for instruments. Weight Code (list) Geometric Industry Standard (list) Modifier (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)

136

_ _______________
5.3.6 Tap Properties Data Command
The Tap Properties Data command can be used to create a tap properties definition in Table 205 of the Material Reference Database or revise and existing tap properties definition.

Tap Properties Data Command

Options
Create Key in the name of the tap table to be defined. The system activates the Create Tap Properties Data form. Revise By Keyin Key in the name of the tap table to be modified. The system activates the Revise Tap Properties Data form with the data for the selected tap table. Revise By List Select the tap table to be revised from the displayed List of Tap Properties Data (as defined in the Unapproved Material Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Tap Properties Data form with the data for the selected tap table.

5. Piping Job Specification

137

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.3.6.1

Create/Revise Tap Properties Data


The Create/Revise Tap Properties Data form is used to create or modity the specification data for taps. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value for all the mandatory fields.

Field Descriptions
Refer to RDB Options File, page 105 for information on defining list options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Tap Properties Data (205), page 85 for more information on the attributes for the Tap Properties Data. Tap Table Name (keyin) Key in up to six characters for the table name. The combination of the tap properties table name, the tap nominal piping diameter, and the tap option code must be unique. Nom Piping Diameter (keyin) Key in the nominal piping diameter for this tap properties definition. Tap Option (list) Select from the list of tap option codes as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. If you do not select a tap option code, the default value (one) is assigned automatically. End Preparation (list) Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.

138

_ _______________
Rating (keyin) Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating. Schedule/Thickness (list) Select from the list of schedule/thickness values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Tap Material Code (keyin) During the tap properties data creation process, if the Short and Long Commodity Description toggles are set to ON, you are allowed to insert Tap Material Code data into the Short Material Description Library. This is the code that may optionally be used by MTO for appending the taps material description to that of the component which has been tapped. If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored, unless both of the following conditions are met: The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the material description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project Data Manager. The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description. This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in the appropriate (short) Material Description Library. Refer to Material Description Data, page 361, for more information on material descriptions.

Create/Revise Tap Properties Data

5. Piping Job Specification

Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept. This code must be a unique index into the projects Material Description Libraries. The system converts the specified tap material code to upper-case, then adds the specified entry into the appropriate Material Description Libraries.

139

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.3.7

Commodity Implied Data Command


The Commodity Implied Data command defines the specification data for implied components in Table 212 or the Material Reference Database. These implied components are reported by MTO with the primary component in situations where the implied data is independent of the piping materials class (used throughout the project).

Options
Create Key in the system commodity code of the implied component to be created. The system activates the Create Piping Commodity Implied Material Data form. Revise By Keyin Key in the name of the piping materials class for the commodity item to be modified. Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping commodity. Revise By List Select the implied component definition to be revised from the displayed list of Commodity Implied Data and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Implied Data form with the data for the implied component definition.

140

_ _______________
5.3.7.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data
The Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data form is used to create or modify the definition of an implied component. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data

Field Descriptions
Refer to RDB Options File, page 105 for information on defining list options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212), page 91 for more information on the attributes for the Piping Commodity Implied Material Data table. System Commodity Code Key in the commodity code for the primary component. The system converts the value to upper-case. For this type of implied data to be reported with the primary component, the specification data for the primary component must have enabled the option in each piping materials class for which this implied data applies. From Diameter (First Size) Key in the lowest first size value for which this implied specification data applies. To Diameter (First Size) Key in the highest first size value for which this implied specification data applies. The to value must equal or exceed the from value.

5. Piping Job Specification

141

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 From Diameter (Second Size) For reducing components, key in the lowest second size value for which this implied specification data applies. In cases where the piping commodity represents both a full-size component and a reducing component, this value should equal the corresponding first size NPD. Otherwise, for a reducing component, this value must be less than the corresponding first size value. To Diameter (Second Size) For reducing components, key in the highest second size value for which this implied specification data applies. The to value must equal or exceed the from value. Commodity Code (keyin) During the commodity implied data creation process, if the Short and Long Commodity Description toggles are set to ON, you are allowed to insert Commodity Code data into the Short and Long Material Description Libraries. If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored, unless both of the following conditions are met: The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the material description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project Data Manager. The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description. This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in the appropriate Material Description Library (short or long). Refer to Material Description Data, page 361, for more information on material descriptions.

Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept. This code must be a unique index into the projects Material Description Libraries.

142

_ _______________
The system converts the specified commodity code to upper-case, then adds the specified entry into the appropriate Material Description Libraries. Quantity (keyin) Key in a whole number or a decimal value for the quantity of the implied component per primary component. Fabrication Category (list) Select from the list of fabrication category values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Standard Note Number (list) You can optionally select from the list of standard notes as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data

5. Piping Job Specification

143

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.3.8

Table Checker
You can use the Table Checker option to perform on-line Table Checker validation for the defined piping commodity specification data. When this option is enabled, table checker validation will be performed for all piping commodities, except: implied data specific to the piping materials class gaskets bolts nuts When you enable this option, the system displays a list of the defined Table Checker reports for the project. Select the report validation to be performed and select Accept.

Refer to Table Checker Form, page 389 for more information on creating a Table Checker report definition.

144

_ _______________
5.4 Piping Job Specification Manager

Piping Job Specification Manager

This command enables you to load all of the database tables which make up the Piping Job Specification portion of the Material Reference Database. You can also extract neutral files of the data contained in the Material Reference Database.

Before Using This Command


Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on creating a project and creating the approved and unapproved Specification/Material Reference Database. You must have installed the applicable reference database files (such as USRDB or DINRDB). Use the Default Project Control Data option to set default settings for Piping Spec Path and Piping Spec Node to point to the location of the neutral files. The default settings are maintained in the Project Control Database. You can also change these settings during the operation of the Piping Job Spec Manager. However, such changes are temporary; they will not update the default locations.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Piping Job Specification Manager option from the Reference Data Manager form. The system displays the Piping Job Specification Manager main form used to select the type of data to process.

5. Piping Job Specification

145

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

The data manipulation procedure for each of the database tables is similar. You can perform the following activities for each of the entities. 2. Select Option Select Unapprove ==> Approve to post the data from the unapproved Specification/Material Reference Database to the approved database.

Accept to Create New Records or Exit Toggle between Submit Immediately to submit the report for immediate processing, or Delayed Submit to specify a time to submit the report for delayed processing. When delayed submission is selected, you will be prompted Accept Time or Respecify Submit Time. Enter the day, hour, and minute, then select AM or PM.

OR

Select the command for the database table to be loaded. The system displays the options for the selected item. The following illustration reflects the screen for Piping Materials Class.

146

_ _______________

Piping Job Specification Manager

Select Option Select the option for the type of action to be performed. Load, Replace, or Replace Commodity Subset from a neutral file. See page 148. Delete existing entries. See page 151. Report on the entity data (create a neutral file). See page 152

5. Piping Job Specification

147

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.4.1

Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset Options


These options enable you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Reference Database. The Replace Commodity Subset option is only available for the Size Dependent Material Data and Project Implied Material Data commands.

Refer to the database descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered PJS and material data. Load adds the contents of the neutral file(s) to the information currently in that database table of the Specification/Material Reference Database. Replace deletes all entries in the respective database table and then loads new entries from the neutral file. Replace Commodity Subset revises (deletes and replaces) previously created sizedependent or implied commodity data for a specific commodity or group of commodity codes specified in a neutral file. This option is only available for the Size Dependent Material Data and Project Implied Material Data commands. The neutral files for the delivered USRDB data are in the directory \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data classes.pmc the neutral file for the Piping Materials Class Data. *.pcd The neutral files for the Piping Commodity Data are stored in a set of files of the format pmcname.pcd. (For example, 1c0031.pcd defines all the commodity items for piping materials class 1c0031.) list.pcd a file that lists the neutral file names of all the delivered pcd files for the different piping materials classes. taps.data the neutral file for Tap Properties Data. implied.data the neutral file for Project Implied Material Data. A set of sample neutral files are delivered in the directory \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data specialty.data a sample neutral file for Piping Specialty Data. instrment.data a sample neutral file for Instrument Data.

148

_ _______________
pcd_size.data a sample neutral file for Size Dependent Material Data. You can copy the files and make changes before loading the information into the database.

Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset Options

Before Using This Command


You can define the variable PD_COMMIT_INTERVAL= in the control.sh file to control the commit interval in loading specification data into the Material Reference Database. This has the same impact as adjusting the -c option in a risload command line. The default commit value is 25. Increasing this variable may improve performance.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Load/Replace (or other load or replace) option. See the description above, for differences in Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset. Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be copied. For Piping Commodity Data you can load or replace a single file or a list of files. To process a list of files, create a list file which list each neutral file on a separate line. The file list.pcd contains a list of all the delivered neutral files. For Size-Dependent or Implied Commodity Data, you can replace specific commodity codes or all the entries in the database. To replace specific commodity codes, create a neutral files which contains only the commodity codes to be replaced. For the Load option, the system displays a dialog box to indicate that the data loaded will be appended to existing data. Select Accept to continue.

2.

5. Piping Job Specification

3.

Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the neutral file(s).

149

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

4.

Accept to Create New Records or Exit Select Accept to begin processing the request. Job Has Been Submitted The system submits the load/replace request as a batch job. Once the job is completed the system sends a mail message indicating the completion status of the load (successful or unsuccessful). The system also creates a set of log files in the \tmp directory. pmc.log Piping Materials Class Data pcd.log Piping Commodity Data specialty.log Piping Specialty Data instrument.log Instrument Data taps.log Tap Properties Data pcd_size.log Size-Dependent Material Data implied.log Project Implied Material Data

These log files contain the following information. The name of the neutral file being loaded The completion status of the load (successful or unsuccessful) The line number that caused the failure if the neutral file was not loaded.

150

_ _______________
5.4.2 Delete Option
This option enables you to delete entries from the Piping Job Specification.

Delete Option

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Delete option. The system displays a list of all the items in the database for the selected class of data.

2. 3.

Select the item to be deleted from the database. Accept to Delete Materials Class Select Accept to begin deleting the data.

5. Piping Job Specification

151

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.4.3

Report Option
The Report options enable you to create neutral files using the information in the Specification/Material Reference database. The order and field lengths of the data in the neutral file is determined by a format file named spec_order.max. This format file is expected to reside in the same network address and directory specified for the report output. A default format file is delivered with the PD_Data product in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format\spec_order.max. If the spec_order.max file is not found at the specified output directory, the system will use the default spec order. If an unapproved Specification/Material Reference database exists for the active project, you can select the database to process: approved or unapproved.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report option from one of the data forms (such as the Piping Commodity Data form). For Piping Commodity Data select the appropriate PCD from the list. 2. Specify Neutral File Name Key in the name of the neutral file to be created. You can change the Node Name and File Path information. 3. Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the neutral file(s). 4. Accept to Create Report Select Accept to create the specified neutral file. Job Has Been Submitted The system creates the neutral file and a log file named specmgr.log.

152

_ _______________
Example spec_order.max File
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 201 202 203 204 205 211 212

Report Option

= = = = = = =

This file contains the spec attribute order and their maximum attribute lengths required for creating spec output neutral files. When creating spec reports the system will default an attribute order and set of attribute lengths. The user can edit these attribute orders and lengths in this file ( spec_order.max ). If this file is in the directory where the software is being run the orders defined in this file will be used as the default attribute order and lengths. 2,16 3,3 4,3 5,10 6,7 7,7 8,8 9,6 10,6 11,6 12,6 13,6 14,6 15,6 16,6 17,6 18,8 19,6 20,6 3,6 4,6 5,7 6,6 7,6 8,6 9,8 10,8 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,8 17,6 18,16 19,6 20,6 21,7 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6 26,6 27,6 2,20 3,6 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,6 8,8 9,8 10,6 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,6 17,8 18,6 19,7 20,6 21,6 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6 2,20 3,6 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,6 8,8 9,8 10,6 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,6 17,8 18,6 19,7 20,6 21,6 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6 3,8 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,8 8,10 2,16 3,8 4,8 5,8 6,8 7,16 8,8 9,8 10,8 2,16 3,8 4,8 5,8 6,8 7,16 8,8 9,6 10,6

5. Piping Job Specification

153

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.5

Piping Job Spec Report Manager


This command activates the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form. It is used to generate reports from the Specification/Material Reference Database with the report definition data. The Piping Job Spec Report Manager stores the report record and location records for each discrimination data file and format file in the Project Control Database. The numbered records are used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.

Options
Report Format Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For more information, see Report Format Form, page 157. Report Discrimination Data Displays the Discrimination Data form, which you can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as well as the file itself. For more information, see Report Discrimination Data Form, page 163. Report Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, and approve report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form, page 173. Report Management Data Displays the Report Management Defaults form, which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the default nodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used for setup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 186.

154

_ _______________
5.5.1 Using the Report Commands
Understanding Report Files and Records
The Piping Job Spec Report Manager uses the discrimination data files, format files, and database records that represent these files to generate reports. The following definitions explain all of the files and records in the reporting process.

Using the Report Commands

Format File and Record


The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outside of the Piping Job Spec Report Manager. It contains special indices identifying what data appears in the report and how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report. Without the format file(s), Piping Job Spec Report Manager reports cannot be processed. A set of basic format files is delivered for each type of reporting. Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file so that it can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, the format record is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file.

Discrimination Data File and Record


The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It is an ASCII file that is created interactively using the Piping Job Spec Report Manager. The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for each discrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same way that the format record is used to access a format file.

Report Output and Record


The Piping Job Spec Report Manager creates a report using the specified format,discrimination, and search criteria data files, and places it in the specified directory on the specified node. The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a report, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file.)

5. Piping Job Specification

155

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Group Workflow
There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use the Report Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the report definition files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and path on each form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default, simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification. The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination data record, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report Discrimination Data options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file, and their corresponding records have been established. Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.

156

_ _______________
5.5.2 Report Format Form
When you select the Report Format option from the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form, the Report Format form is displayed.

Report Format Form

This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the format file in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy a record and its corresponding ASCII format files. The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will be displayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the files location has been entered into the project control database.

Options
Create Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add a new record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page 159. Copy Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of an existing format file from the project control database along with the corresponding ASCII format file. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page 159. Revise Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of an existing format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page 159.

5. Piping Job Specification

157

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format file from the project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reporting cannot be performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form, page 161.

158

_ _______________
5.5.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form
When you select Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form is displayed.

Format Creation/Revision Form

This form creates, copies, or revises a record in the project control database; this record defines the location of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report. Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data.

Field Descriptions
Number A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in the project control database used to identify the record of the format file. Description A description of up to 40 characters for the format file. File Specification The file name of the format file to reference. File Path The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting. File Node The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. This field retains the active setting.

Before Using this Form


You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with the PD_Report product in the win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format directory. The file for Spec Reporting reporting is named piping_rdb.fmt. For more information on the delivered sample format files, see the PD_Report Users Guide.

5. Piping Job Specification

159

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Operating Sequence
1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise. A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record, go to Step 3. 2. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then select Accept. Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information. 3. Specify Report Format Data Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in each field. Then select Accept. The project control database is updated.

160

_ _______________
5.5.2.2 Format Deletion Form
When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

Format Deletion Form

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.

Fields and Options


Number/Description Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. Delete File/Do Not Delete File Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

5. Piping Job Specification

Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.

161

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept. The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

162

_ _______________
5.5.3 Report Discrimination Data Form
When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, the Discrimination Data form is displayed.

Report Discrimination Data Form

This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specified directory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, or deleted as needed. A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in a report. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project control database record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to be associated with a specific report.

Options
Create Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a new discrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created. For more information, see Discrimination Data Creation Form, page 165. Copy Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existing data file. The associated project control database record is also copied. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page 169. Revise Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies discrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discrimination data file, the location of the discrmination file, and the associated record in the project control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page 169.

5. Piping Job Specification

163

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as well as its associated record in the project control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Deletion Form, page 171.

164

_ _______________
5.5.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form

Discrimination Data Creation Form

Commands
Approved Piping Job Spec Defines the database to be reported: approved or unapproved. Search Criteria Defines search criteria for specified attributes in the Specification/Material Reference Database.

Field Descriptions
Number Key in a unique number to name the discrimination data record to be created by discrimination. The number can be up to 24 characters in the Project Control Database. This number is a short name to identify the record of the discrimination data file.

5. Piping Job Specification

Description Key in a description of the discrimination data file with up to 40 characters in the Project Control Database. File Specification Key in the filename of the discrimination data file to create. The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project.

165

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 File Path Displays the disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active setting. File Node Displays the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. This field retains the active setting.

166

_ _______________
5.5.3.2 Search Criteria Form
You can define search criteria to restrict the elements to be reported based on database attributes. The default is no search criteria. This option enables you to define search criteria for specified attributes in the Spec Database.

Search Criteria Form

If you do not restrict the piping materials class attribute for Piping Commodity Data, all piping materials classes will be reported.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Search Criteria option from the Discrimination Data form.

2.

Select Entity Select the database entity that contains the data to be restricted. The system displays the attributes for the selected entity.

5. Piping Job Specification

3.

Select Attribute Select the attribute to be restricted. The system displays the selected attribute and displays a list of operators.

167

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 4. Select Operator Select the required operator to define the search criteria. The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to key in an attribute value. 5. Enter Attribute Value Key in the attribute value. For a sub-string search, key in a string to appear anywhere within the attribute value (do not use wild cards). If the attribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the standard note library. Select the value and select Accept. The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria. 6. Accept or Select And/Or Operator Select AND to specify an additional condition or select OR to specify an alternative condition.

OR Accept the defined search criteria.

168

_ _______________
5.5.3.3 Discrimination Data Revision Form
When you select Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination Data Revision form displays. This form enables you to copy or revise a discrimination data file from the specified directory and its record from the Project Control Database. The copied discrimination data file can then be modified. First, the system displays the Record Number display list as shown below on the left. After you select and Accept the discrimination data file you need, the system then displays the discrimination data identification fields. These fields are used to define the record as shown below on the right.

Discrimination Data Revision Form

Commands
Approved Piping Job Spec Defines the database to be reported: approved or unapproved. Search Criteria Defines search criteria for specified attributes in the Specification/Material Reference Database.

Field Descriptions
Number Key in a unique number to name the discrimination data record with up to 24 characters in the Project Control Database. This number is a short name to identify the record of the discrimination data file. Description Key in a description of the discrimination data file with up to 40 characters in the Project Control Database. File Specification Key in the filename of the discrimination data file to reference.

5. Piping Job Specification

169

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project. File Path Displays the disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active setting. File Node Displays the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. This field retains the active setting. If prompted to... Select Discrimination Data Specify Discrimination Data Do this: Select the record number of the discrimination data file to revise and select Accept. Key in any changes to the discrimination data record displayed in the information fields, and select as many of the Discrimination Data options as necessary to define the discrimination data file.

170

_ _______________
5.5.3.4 Discrimination Data Deletion Form
When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

Discrimination Data Deletion Form

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.

Fields and Options


Number/Description Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. Delete File/Do Not Delete File Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

5. Piping Job Specification

Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.

171

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept. The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

172

_ _______________
5.5.4 Report Form
When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.

Report Form

This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holds specifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description, and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate a report. The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is included in the format file. At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the following information: Report Output The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, and report node, path, and file name. Format The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name. Discrimination Data The report discrimination data number, description, and file location (network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence. Search Criteria The report search criteria number, description, and file location (node, path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.

5. Piping Job Specification

173

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Options
Create Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record and generates a report. For more information, see Report Creation Form, page 175. Revise Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from an existing or revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form, page 178. Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and the corresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form, page 181. Approve Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report. For more information, see Report Approval Form, page 183. Multi-Create Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiple reports to the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form, page 184.

174

_ _______________
5.5.4.1 Report Creation Form
When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.

Report Creation Form

Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records are stored in the project control database, you can use them repeatedly.

Fields and Options


Report Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. Report Title The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report is contained in the format file. Report File Spec The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters). Report File Path The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Dataform. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 186. Report Node The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 186.

5. Piping Job Specification

175

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Report Format File The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select the appropriate format file, and click Accept. Report Discrimination File The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept. Report Search Criteria The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a specification, click Accept without selecting a file. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. Last Revision Number The revision number of the last report generated. This is a read-only field; you cannot edit it. Revised By The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is optional. Revision Description The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. This field is optional. Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save Saves the report output file without printing the report. Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

176

_ _______________
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Create. The Report Creation form is displayed. 2. Specify Report Data Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file. 3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Click Accept to save the report file.

Report Creation Form

4.

5.

5. Piping Job Specification

177

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.5.4.2

Revise Report Form


When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.

This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project control database. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record without generating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report output file without updating the report record.

Fields and Options


Report Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. Report Title The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report is contained in the format file. Report File Spec The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters). Report File Path The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the active settings. Report Node The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This field retains the active settings. Report Format File The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select the appropriate format file, and click Accept. Report Discrimination File The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.

178

_ _______________
Report Search Criteria The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a specification, click Accept without selecting a file. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. Last Revision Number The revision number of the last report generated. This is a read-only field; you cannot edit it. Revised By The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is optional. Revision Description The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. This field is optional. Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save Saves the report output file without printing the report.

Revise Report Form

Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated. Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data Specifies revision of the report data only (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (Revise Report and Data). To revise the report specification without updating the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click Accept. To revise the report output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report and Data without modifying any of the fields, and click Accept. To modify both the report file and the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click Accept. If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title, this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and the report output file is generated.

5. Piping Job Specification

179

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Revise. The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files. 2. Select Report From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept. The fields update to display the selected report file specifications. 3. Revise Report Information Update the report record information as needed. 4. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Click Accept to save the report file.

5.

6.

180

_ _______________
5.5.4.3 Report Deletion Form
When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

Report Deletion Form

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.

Fields and Options


Number/Description Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. Delete File/Do Not Delete File Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

5. Piping Job Specification

Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.

181

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept. The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

182

_ _______________
5.5.4.4 Report Approval Form
When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.

Report Approval Form

Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attribute is set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way for you to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a report is revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.

Options
Number The 24-character unique name (also called short name) of the report record. Description The 40-character description of the report record.

Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Approve. The Report Approval form is displayed. 2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept. The Approval form is displayed. For more information, see the Approve Report section of the PD_Report Users Guide.

5. Piping Job Specification

183

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.5.4.5

Report Multiple Submit Form


When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.

Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.

Fields and Options


Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. Description The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save Saves the report output file without printing the report. Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

184

_ _______________
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create. The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed. 2. Select Reports for Submission From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighed reports are selected; select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report. 3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) or later (Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Click Accept to submit the reports.

Report Multiple Submit Form

4.

5.

5. Piping Job Specification

185

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

5.5.5

Report Management Defaults Form


When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the Report Management Defaults form is displayed.

This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of the report definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.

Fields
Report Path Specifies the default path of the report output files. It is recommended that you not send output reports to your systems temporary (that is, tmp or temp) directory. Report Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which report output files are located. Report Format Path Specifies the default path of the format files. Report Format Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which format files are located. Report Discrimination Data Path Specifies the default path of the discrimination data files.

186

_ _______________
Report Discrimination Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which discrimination data files are located. Report Search Criteria Data Path Specifies the default path of the report search criteria data files. Report Search Criteria Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which report search criteria data files are located.

Report Management Defaults Form

Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data. The Report Management Defaults form is displayed. 2. Accept or Exit In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report output files, format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then click Accept.

5. Piping Job Specification

187

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

188

_ _______________
6. Piping Job Specification Tables

Piping Job Specification Tables

Nonphysical data such as branch calculations or gasket separation are stored in the Spec Table Library or hard-coded in the system. The Spec Tables for US practice are delivered in the following files: \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l - object library \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l.t - text library These libraries contain the Piping Job Specification tables and the other special tables which contain nonphysical data. The data in the Spec Table Library falls into two basic categories. Specification Tables - Referenced in the Piping Materials Class Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. See page 190. RDB Tables - Referenced in the Component Placement and Material TakeOff forms of the Project Data Manager. See page 215. You can use the Piping Job Specification Tables command to create a new Piping Job Specification Table library or to create, modify, or delete tables in an existing library. See page 239.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

189

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.1

PJS Tables and Functions


The following special tables and functions are provided in the Spec Table Library. These table/equation names are defined in the Piping Materials Class Specification Table of the Specification Material Reference Database. Temperature and Pressure Service Limits table Nominal Piping Diameter table Thickness Data table Materials Data table Piping Wall Thickness equation Branch Reinforcement calculation Branch Insertion table Gasket Separation table Fluid Code table

190

_ _______________
6.1.1 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table
The temperature and pressure service limits table includes the sets of temperatures and pressures that define the boundaries of acceptability for a piping materials class. These limits can be dictated by factors such as strength of components and materials used. You must insure that each of the components included in the piping materials class meet the indicated temperature and pressure limits. You can define both positive and negative values for temperature. However, you can only define positive values for pressure. The units of measure for the pressure and temperature values in the table are defined as a part of the table description. The system uses the information in this table to insure:

Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table

The highest temperature from the TDB does not exceed the highest temperature value in the table The lowest temperature in the TDB is not less than the lowest value in the table For a given temperature, the pressure from the table is not less than any of the corresponding pressure(s) from the TDB. This table is limited to 100 temperature and pressure values.

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition LWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One Units= DF, PSIG ! Temperature Pressure WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ END

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

191

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Example
Table_Data_Definition L1001 ! Description= B16.5 CL150-1.1, -20 to 800 ! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One Units= DF, PSIG ! Temperature Pressure -20 285 100 285 200 260 300 230 400 200 500 170 600 140 650 125 700 110 750 95 800 80 END Date=13-Feb-1987

Parameters
Table_Data_Definition (character-6) This parameter specifies the name of the Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table. These tables use the following naming conventions. first character: L second character: the pressure rating of the piping materials class as defined by the following code: 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= CL150 CL300 CL400 CL600 CL900 CL1500 CL2500 8= GRAVHD 9= OTHER A= CL125 F= CL800 G= CL2000 H= CL3000 J= CL4500 K= CL5000 L= CL6000 M= CL9000 N= CL10000 R= CL15000 T= CL20000 V= CL30000

third, fourth, and fifth characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique. Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One This statement tells the system to interpolate between known values for the temperature value. The statement must be included as shown in the table format for the desired interpolation to take place. Temperature (real) This field identifies the maximum temperature value. You can use both positive (+) and negative (-) values. Values are assumed to be positive unless otherwise indicated.

192

_ _______________
Pressure (real) This field identifies the value for pressure corresponding to the previously defined temperature. Negative (-) values are not accepted in this field.

Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

193

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.1.2

Nominal Piping Diameters Table


The NPD Tables consists of the diameters for piping and tubing which are valid within any piping materials class which references this table. The system verifies any NPD input in the Piping Design TDB.

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition DWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0 Units= NPD_IN ! Diam WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW END

This table can also be used to define the equivalency for English and metric diameters. The output column defines the English equivalent for the matching metric size.

Neutral File Format - English/Metric Equivalency


Table_Data_Definition DWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_MM, NPD_IN ! Metric Diam WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW END

194

_ _______________
Examples
Table_Data_Definition D036 ! Description= From 0.5 to 36 ! By=NP Ckd By=DG Rev=0 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0 Units= NPD_IN ! Diam 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 END Date=22-Jan-1987

Nominal Piping Diameters Table

Table_Data_Definition DB001 ! Description= From 6mm to 900mm (0.375 to 36) ! By=aw Ckd By= Rev=1 Date=17_jul 1989 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_MM, NPD_IN ! metric diam, imperial diam 10 0.375 15 0.5 20 0.75 25 1 40 1.5 50 2 80 3 100 4 150 6 200 8 250 10 300 12 350 14 400 16 450 18 500 20 550 22 600 24 650 26 700 28 750 30 800 32 850 34 900 36 END

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

195

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Parameters
Table_Data_Definition (character 6) This field identifies the name of the NPD table. These tables use the following naming conventions: first character: D second, third, and fourth characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique. Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter (integer) This field identifies the value for nominal diameter. You can use the value ET_AL to indicate that any nominal diameter value from the TDB which is equal to or greater than the value in the preceding line is an acceptable nominal diameter for the PMC.

196

_ _______________
6.1.3 Thickness Data Tables
Thickness data is determined as a function of the table name and nominal piping diameter. These tables include the minimum, retirement, thread, and preferred thicknesses required in the calculation of piping wall thickness. The tables provide the actual thickness; not a schedule. Therefore, there must be an individual entry for each diameter. You cannot use an NPD range. PDS requires that the schedule/thickness values be in inches.

Thickness Data Tables

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition TWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN ! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/Thicknesses WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ END

Example
Table_Data_Definition TA501 ! Description= A,0.063CA,0.0071D<=24, 0.0075D>=26 ! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=31-Jan-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN ! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/Thicknesses 0.5 .147 .06 S-160 0.75 .154 .06 S-XS 1 .179 .06 S-XS 1.5 .2 .06 S-XS 2 .154 .06 S-STD 3 .216 .06 S-STD 4 .237 .07 S-STD 6 .28 .1 S-STD 8 .250 .1 S-STD 10 .250 .1 S-STD 12 .250 .1 S-STD 14 .250 .12 S-STD 16 .250 .12 S-STD 18 .250 .12 S-STD 20 .250 .13 S-STD 22 .250 .15 S-STD 24 .250 .15 S-STD 26 .3125 .17 S-10 S-STD 28 .3125 .19 S-10 S-STD 30 .3125 .20 S-10 S-STD -

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

197

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
32 34 36 END .3125 .3125 .3125 .21 .23 .24 S-10 S-STD S-STD S-STD S-XS -

Parameters
Table_Data_Definition - Thickness Data Table Name (character 6) This field identifies the name of the table. These tables use the following naming conventions: first character: T second character: code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size for which threaded components are used in the piping materials class, as defined below. Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels; criteria 2 applies to aluminum alloys, stainless steels, and non-ferrous alloys. A= Criteria 1 with no threaded components B= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter C= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter D= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter F= Criteria 2 with no threaded components G= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter H= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter I= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter Z= Special criteria third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which the table is intended, per the following criteria: 1= None 2= 0.020" 3= 0.030" 4= 0.050" 5= 0.063" 6= 0.10" 7= 0.125" 8= 0.188" 9= 0.250" A= 405 clad B= 410S clad C= 304 clad D= 304L clad E= 316 clad F= 316L clad G= 317 clad H= 317L clad J= 321 clad L= Cement lined M= Epoxy lined N= Glass lined O= Kynar lined P= Polyester lined Q= Polypropylene lined R= PTFE lined S= Saran lined T= Teflon lined U= TK31 lined V= R11 lined W= R15 lined X= R18 lined Y= Other 1 Z= Other 2

fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique. Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter (integer) This parameter identifies the desired value for nominal diameter.

198

_ _______________
Ret Thick - Retirement Thickness (real) This parameter represents the least thickness, exclusive of corrosion allowance, thread allowance, or mill tolerance, which is acceptable for a given NPD. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. This value is only used in piping wall thickness calculations. Thread Thick - Thread Thickness (real) This parameter represents the thickness for threaded pipe that must be added to the calculated wall thickness to account for the presence of threads. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. It is only used in piping wall thickness calculations.

Thickness Data Tables

Min Thick - Minimum Required Thickness (real) This parameter represents the least thickness, inclusive of corrosion allowance and mill tolerance, which is acceptable for a given NPD. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. This value is only used in piping wall thickness calculations.

Preferred Schedule/Thicknesses 1 through 6 (real) These parameters represent the schedules and/or thicknesses you prefer be used as a result of a piping wall thickness calculation. Values in the table are arranged in ascending thickness sequence. The system rounds the calculated wall thickness to the next higher preferred thickness. You are restricted to a limit of six preferred thicknesses. PDS requires that these values be in inches.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

199

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.1.4

Materials Data Table


The Materials Data Table consists of the materials data that is a function of the table name, material grade, wall thickness range, and temperature. These tables include the properties which are required for the calculation of piping wall thickness. You must insure that units of measure used in the Materials Table are consistent with those used in the corresponding Temperature-Pressure Table(s). Note that you can express the mill tolerance as either a thickness percentage or a tolerance value. Only one value can exist per table entry. If values exist for both, the system only uses the mill thickness percentage. The system uses the materials grade and temperature to access the information in the table and provide the values of thickness range, coefficient Y, allowable stress (S), and the applicable mill tolerance. Once the actual thickness is calculated for the component, the calculation software compares that value with the thickness range. If the thickness range is exceeded, the next entry in the materials table for the applicable materials grade and temperature is sought and the calculation process is repeated.

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition MWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6 Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One Units= INT, DF, IN, IN, DEC, PSI, DEC, IN ! Mill Tol ! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % Value WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ END

200

_ _______________
Example
Table_Data_Definition ML01 ! Description= ASTM A53-B, A106, API 5L-B ! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=24-Feb-87 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6 Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One Units= INT, DF, IN, IN, DEC, PSI, DEC, IN ! Mill Tolrnce ! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % Value 142 -20 .4 20000 12.5 142 100 .4 20000 12.5 142 200 .4 20000 12.5 142 300 .4 20000 12.5 142 400 .4 20000 12.5 142 500 .4 18900 12.5 142 600 .4 17300 12.5 142 650 .4 17000 12.5 142 700 .4 16500 12.5 142 750 .4 13000 12.5 142 800 .4 10800 12.5 162 -20 .4 20000 12.5 162 100 .4 20000 12.5 162 200 .4 20000 12.5 162 300 .4 20000 12.5 162 400 .4 20000 12.5 162 500 .4 18900 12.5 162 600 .4 17300 12.5 162 650 .4 17000 12.5 162 700 .4 16500 12.5 162 750 .4 13000 12.5 162 800 .4 10800 12.5 116 -20 .4 20000 12.5 116 100 .4 20000 12.5 116 200 .4 20000 12.5 116 300 .4 20000 12.5 116 400 .4 20000 12.5 116 500 .4 18900 12.5 116 600 .4 17300 12.5 116 650 .4 17000 12.5 116 700 .4 16500 12.5 116 750 .4 13000 12.5 116 800 .4 10800 12.5 END

Materials Data Table

Parameters
Table_Data_Definition - Materials Data Table Name (character 6) This field identifies the number of the table. These tables use the following naming conventions: first character: M second character: the applicable design code, per the following convention: A= ASME Section I [Power Boilers] B= ASME Section III [Nuclear] C= Do not use D= ASME Section VIII-1 [Unfired Vessels]

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

201

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 E= ASME Section VIII-2 [Unfired Vessels] J= ANSI-B31.1 [Power] K= ANSI-B31.2 [Fuel Gas] L= ANSI-B31.3 [Petroleum] M= ANSI-B31.4 [Oil Transport] N= ANSI-B31.5 [Refrigeration] P= ANSI-B31.8 [Gas Transmission] Q= ANSI-B31.9 [Building Services] T= API V= AWWA

third and fourth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique. Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One This statement must be included as shown for interpolation to take place. Interpolation is used for all the output fields, if required. Mat Gr - Material Grade (integer - standard note 145) This code-listed parameter identifies the materials grade. This compound attribute includes the code, specification, grade, temper, and joint efficiency to be used for the component. Temp - Temperature (real) This field identifies the applicable temperature for a set of material properties. Thick - Wall Thickness Range - low (real) Range - Wall Thickness Range - high (real) These fields identify the lower and upper wall thickness bounds for a set of material properties. You can enter positive numbers or blanks. A blank indicates that the properties apply regardless of the thickness of the component. You cannot define this range in terms of schedule. Y - Coefficient Y (real) This parameter represents the coefficient Y corresponding to the previously defined parameters in the line. You can enter a positive number or a blank. S - Allowable Stress (real) This parameter represents the allowable stress corresponding to the previously defined parameters in the line. You can enter a positive number or a blank. S is the basic allowable stress for the material excluding casting, joint or structural grade quality factor (E). Mill Tol % - Mill Thickness Percentage (real) This parameter represents the per cent of the wall thickness that is to be considered as mill tolerance for pipe material. Enter the mill tolerance to be considered for the material as a percent of nominal thickness; such as 12.5%. Mill Tol Value - Mill Thickness Value (real) This parameter represents the actual wall thickness that is to be considered as mill tolerance for plate material. Enter the value of mill tolerance to be considered for the material; such as 0.01 inch.

202

_ _______________
6.1.5 Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations
These equations define formulas for the calculation of piping wall thickness and branch reinforcement to resist positive pressure. The actual equations and their logic are hardcoded in the software. PDS requires that the thickness value be defined in inches. Thickness equations have project unique names which must follow the following convention: first character: E second character: the applicable design code, per the following convention: A= ASME Section I B= ASME Section III C= Do not use D= ASME Section VIII-1 E= ASME Section VIII-2 J= ANSI-B31.1 K= ANSI-B31.2 L= ANSI-B31.3 M= ANSI-B31.4 N= ANSI-B31.5 P= ANSI-B31.8 Q= ANSI-B31.9 T= API V= AWWA [Power Boilers] [Nuclear] [Unfired Vessels] [Unfired Vessels] [Power] [Fuel Gas] [Petroleum] [Oil Transport] [Refrigeration] [Gas Transmission] [Building Services]

Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations

third and fourth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the equation name unique. If the equation name is provided as part of the definition *Cyyy in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Piping Commodity Specification Data table, the equation name must be limited to the format Ex; no third or fourth character can be defined.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

203

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Delivered Equations
The thickness and branch reinforcement logic for the following equations are hardcoded in the software. EJ01 Source - ANSI-B31.1.1986 [Power Piping] Thickness logic from paragraph 104.1, equation 3 Reinforcement logic from paragraph 104.3.1(D)

PD tm = _________ + A 2(SE+Py) EL01 Source - ANSI-B31.3c.1986 [Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping] Thickness logic from paragraph 304.1, equation 3a Reinforcement logic from paragraph 304.3.3 & Code - Appendix H PD t = _________ 2(SE+PY) where P D S E Y A Design pressure Pipe outside diameter Allowable stress read from the Materials table Joint quality factor determined from the wall thickness attribute Cxxx where xxx is 100 times E Coefficient Y read from the Materials table Additional Thickness (in inches)

Refer to the spec access example below for more information on how the wall thickness equation is used to determine the actual wall thickness value.

General Considerations
The following considerations apply to both thickness equations and branch reinforcement calculations. Pressures and temperatures used in thickness/branch reinforcement calculations are derived from data in the Piping Design TDB. Both normal and alternate pressure and temperature conditions are considered. If actual values exist for the normal design or the alternate design pressure/temperatures, the corresponding operating conditions are ignored. If default values exist for BOTH sets of design conditions, both normal and alternate operating conditions are used. At least one complete set of conditions must be defined.

204

_ _______________

Delivered Equations

Once the proper pressure and temperature sets are determined, their units of measure are converted to those used in the Temperature-Pressure Table associated with the Piping Materials Class to which the component belongs. Refer to the descriptions of the Temperature-Pressure Table and Materials Table to insure consistency between units of measure. Conversions are performed using the procedures and conversion factors defined for the Units of Measure in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide. Only positive pressure is considered. The system reports an error if you request a thickness calculation involving a vacuum condition (negative pressure). Independent sets of thickness/reinforcement calculations are carried out for each applicable pressure/temperature set. In each calculation set, table values that are temperature dependent are determined on the basis of the temperature applicable to the calculation set being considered. The thicker calculated thickness is used.

Thickness Equations
The following considerations apply to thickness equations. Thickness calculations are triggered by specifying an equation name in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Piping Commodity Specification Data table. An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. The letters that form this code have the following meaning: C is the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of the component is determined by calculations using the thickness equation defined in the thickness_equation attribute of the Piping Materials Class Data table. yyy is the casting, joint or structural grade quality factor (E) times 100. This factor is one of the parameters used in the thickness calculation. If you are defining a calculation to be performed on a seamless fitting (E=1) but want to match the thickness for the mating welded pipe (E=0.85), the quality factor for the pipe should be entered here. For components with ends having different nominal diameters, independent sets of thickness determinations are performed for each NPD. One or more ends may need to be calculated, as determined by specific *Cyyy entries in the Piping Commodity Specification Data table. The larger thickness (calculated or predefined) is used. For example: A 20" x 10" reducer is defined in the Piping Commodity Table to have a *Cyyy, 20" end and a 0.55" thick, 10" end. The calculation of the 20" end results in a 0.5" thickness. A 0.55" thick reducer is used. A 24" x 20" reducer is defined in the Piping Commodity Table to have a *Cyyy, 24" end and a *Cyyy, 20" end. The calculation of the 24" end results in a 0.6" thickness. The calculation of the 20" end results in a 0.5" thickness. A 0.6" thick reducer is used.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

205

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 All thickness calculations involve a casting, joint, or structural grade quality factor (E). The value for this factor is yyy/100, where yyy is defined in the entry *Cyyy made under the Schedule Thickness attribute for the Commodity Item under consideration.

Branch Reinforcement
The following considerations apply to branch reinforcement calculations. The need to perform a branch reinforcement calculation is triggered by the placement of a generic branch component with the actual item name determined from a branch table. (See Branch Insertion Tables.) the presence of more than one item name in the Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes fields of the applicable branch table. the applicable branch reinforcement being either a reinforcing weld or a reinforcing pad. All calculations involve a casting, joint, or structural grade quality factor (E). The value for this factor is yyy/100, where yyy is defined in the Modifier attribute for entries with an item name of PIPING. The fillet welds joining reinforcing pads to the header and to the branch are considered in determining the available reinforcement area.

Spec Access
The execution of a pipe wall thickness calculation is performed when the variable PIPE_OD_n is encountered in the physical data definition of a pipe or component. Therefore, pipe outside diameter must be calculated or retrieved from a table before the wall thickness can be used as part of a table name. Once the actual thickness is calculated, it is compared against the thickness range in the Materials table and the retirement thickness in the Thickness Data table. The system uses the greater of these values as the uncorroded wall thickness. Then the system adds the corrosion allowance from the PMC, the thread thickness from the wall thickness table, and the mill tolerance from the Materials table. This revised thickness is compared against the minimum thickness value in the Thickness Data table. The larger of these two values is compared against the preferred thickness value in the Thickness Data table, and the next largest preferred value is used for table look-ups and is stored in the design database. If the Thickness Data table uses schedules as preferred thickness, the schedules are translated to an actual thickness by a table look-up from a table of the form MALWT//Term_type//shc_thick//generic_flag//weight_code

206

_ _______________
and output 2 gives the actual wall thickness.

Delivered Equations

Verification of Schedule Thickness


You can set an option in the RDB to determine how the piping segment override schedule/thickness value will be handled during wall thickness calculations. By default, the piping segment schedule/thickness override is used in place of the value determined from the Piping Job Specification.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

207

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.1.6

Branch Insertion Tables


A branch insertion table defines the selection criteria for tee and lateral branches. You must specify the type of wye or cross to be placed in the model and specify the reinforcement data. Branch tables define the reinforcement to be used at tee and lateral branches in the piping system as a function of the acute angle of intersection and the nominal diameters for the intersecting lines. These tables do not include the reinforcement required at Ys and crosses. For them, the required reinforcement must be specified in Piping Design. The types of tee branch connections include branch weld, coupling, threadolet, reducing tee, tee with reducing insert, nipolet, branch weld with reinforcing pad, sockolet, tee, weldolet, tee with reducing bushing, and reducing tee with reducer(s). The system accesses the branch table when placing a component at an intersection when no reinforcement component has been specifically defined. The system uses the information in this table and the header nominal diameter (first size) and branch nominal diameter (second size) to provide the item name of the component to be used at the intersection. Neither interpolation nor extrapolation is allowed.

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition BWWWW_WW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, AN*6, AN*6, AN*6 ! Nom Diam Preferred Branch ! Header Branch AABBCC Codes WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END

208

_ _______________
Example
Table_Data_Definition BA501_90 ! Description= A,0.063CA, Use with TA501 ! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=3 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, AN*6, AN*6, AN*6 ! Nom Diam Preferred Branch ! Header Branch AABBCC Codes 0.75 0.75 6Q3C22 1 0.75 6Q3C24 1 1 6Q3C22 1.5 0.75 6Q3C24 1.5 1 6Q3C24 1.5 1.5 6Q3C22 2 0.75 6Q3C74 2 1 6Q3C74 2 1.5 6Q3C74 2 2 6Q3C22 3 0.75 6Q3C74 3 1 6Q3C74 3 1.5 6Q3C74 > 3 2 6Q3C73 3 3 6Q3C22 4 0.75 6Q3C74 4 1 6Q3C74 4 1.5 6Q3C74 > 4 2 6Q3C73 > 4 3 6Q3C73 4 4 6Q3C22 6 0.75 6Q3C74 6 1 6Q3C74 6 1.5 6Q3C74 > 6 2 6Q3C73 > 6 3 6Q3C73 > 6 4 6Q3C73 6 6 6Q3C22 8 0.75 6Q3C74 8 1 6Q3C74 8 1.5 6Q3C74 > 8 2 6Q3C73 > 8 3 6Q3C73 > 8 4 6Q3C73 > 8 6 6Q3C73 8 8 6Q3C22 10 0.75 6Q3C74 10 1 6Q3C74 10 1.5 6Q3C74 > 10 2 6Q3C73 > 10 3 6Q3C73 > 10 4 6Q3C73 10 6 6Q3C82 10 8 6Q3C82 10 10 6Q3C22 12 0.75 6Q3C74 12 1 6Q3C74 12 1.5 6Q3C74 > 12 2 6Q3C73 > 12 3 6Q3C73 > 12 4 6Q3C73 12 6 6Q3C82 12 8 6Q3C82 12 10 6Q3C82 12 12 6Q3C22 END Date=17-Aug-1988

Branch Insertion Tables

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

209

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Parameters
Table_Data_Definition - Branch Insertion Table Name (character 6) This field identifies the name of the table. This name results from the compounding of the Branch Table entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the acute angle of intersection between the header and the branch. These tables use the following naming conventions: first character: B second character: a code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size for which threaded components are used in the PMC, as defined below. Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels; criteria 2 applies to aluminum alloys, stainless steels and non-ferrous alloys. A= Criteria 1 with no threaded components B= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter C= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter D= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter F= Criteria 2 with no threaded components G= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter H= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter I= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter Z= Special criteria third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which the table is intended, per the following criteria: 1= None 2= 0.020" 3= 0.030" 4= 0.050" 5= 0.063" 6= 0.10" 7= 0.125" 8= 0.188" 9= 0.250" A= 405 clad B= 410S clad C= 304 clad D= 304L clad E= 316 clad F= 316L clad G= 317 clad H= 317L clad J= 321 clad L= Cement lined M= Epoxy lined N= Glass lined O= Kynar lined P= Polyester lined Q= Polypropylene lined R= PTFE lined S= Saran lined T= Teflon lined U= TK31 lined V= R11 lined W= R15 lined X= R18 lined Y= Other 1 Z= Other 2

fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique. The second part of the table name defines the acute angle of intersection. Negative values and values less than 45 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid. However, when dealing with branch reinforcements, negative values and values less than 20 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid (per ANSI B31.1 and ANSI B31.3).

210

_ _______________
The data fields are sorted by header NPD and then by branch NPD. Nom Diam Header - NPD for Run (integer) This field identifies the nominal diameter of the header at the intersection. This is the member with the largest nominal diameter. Nom Diam Branch - NPD for Branch (integer) This field identifies the nominal diameter of the branch member at the intersection. This is the member with the smallest nominal diameter. Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes (character 6) These field identify the commodity item name of the component used to reinforce the intersection. If only one item name is listed, no branch reinforcement calculation is performed. The specified item is placed at the intersection. If two or more item names apply in one line, the system calculates the branch reinforcement thickness. The system tests the listed item names sequentially (from left to right) until the applicable strength criteria are satisfied. Therefore, these codes should be arranged in ascending strength sequence (for example, reinforcing welds, followed by reinforcing pads, followed by weldolets.) Typically, the codes are from one of the following types: Reinforcing elements, such as reinforcing welds and pads. Weld-on components reinforcing the intersection such as saddles and weldolets. Weld-in components actually making the intersection such as laterals and tees.

Branch Insertion Tables

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

211

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.1.7

Gasket Separation Table


These tables define the gasket gap to be used for a given nominal diameter and maximum temperature. For each bolted end, the system uses the applicable table, the NPD of the end, and the maximum temperature for the gasket to be used at the end, to determine the gap thickness to be used at the end. Lines in this table are sorted by NPD first and maximum temperature second.

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition GWWW_WWWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN, DF, IN ! Diam TMx Gaskt Gap WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ END

Example
Table_Data_Definition G001_1500 ! Description= SP-1000 deg F , RJ-1001 deg F ! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=0 Date=24-Jun-1987 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN, DF, IN ! Diam TMx Gaskt Gap 0.5 1000 .125 0.75 1000 .125 1 1000 .125 1.5 1000 .125 2 1000 .125 3 1000 .125 4 1000 .125 6 1000 .125 8 1000 .125 10 1000 .125 12 1000 .125 14 1000 .125 16 1000 .125 18 1000 .125 20 1000 .125 24 1000 .125 0.5 1001 .16 0.75 1001 .16 1 1001 .16 1.5 1001 .16 2 1001 .12 3 1001 .12

212

_ _______________
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 END 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 .12 .12 .16 .16 .19 .22 .31 .31 .38 .44

Gasket Separation Table

Parameters
Table_Data_Definition - Gasket Gap Table Name (character 6) This field identifies the name of the table. This name results from the compounding of the entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the rating of the bolted end to which the gasket gap applies. These tables use the following naming conventions: first character: G next three characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique. The second part of the table name is the rating of the components to which it applies. The characters CL and # are not included in the rating designation. Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter This field identifies the applicable NPD value. The units of measure used to define the NPD must match the NPD units to be used in the Piping model. TMx - Maximum Temperature This field identifies the maximum temperature for the gasket as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 5). (The system must find a match of the commodity item temperature and the value in this column for successful retrieval of data.) The units of measure used to define the temperature must be the same as the units used in the Temperature Pressure Service Limits table. Gasket Gap This field identifies the full gasket gap to be used.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

213

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.1.8

Fluid Code Table


Fluid Code tables can be used to limit the number of fluid codes which are valid for a particular Piping Material Class. A Fluid Code table works much like the Diameters table. Where the Diameters Table contains a valid set of diameters for a PMC, the Fluid Code table contains a set of valid Fluid Codes for a PMC. To use a Fluid Code table, Specify the name of the Fluid Code Table in the fluid_code attribute of the Piping Materials Class definition. Set the Fluid Code Control toggle to Yes on the Piping Data Control form of the Project Data Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information on this form.

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition FC001 ! Description= By Process Vendor ! By=SCC Ckd By=SCC Rev=1 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0 Units= INT 521 522 524 527 530 533 536 539 542 545 550 END Date=12-OCT-90

Parameters
Table_Data_Definition (character 6) This field identifies the name of the Fluid Code table. These tables use the following naming conventions: first and second character: FC third, forth, and fifth characters: numbers from 001 to 999 used to make the table name unique. Fld Cd (integer) This field list the code list numbers for the valid fluid codes from code list set 125.

214

_ _______________
6.2 RDB Tables
The following reference data tables are defined in the Spec Table Library. These tables required to provide basic data for the performance of the software. TNF G02 G04 G06 G07 G11 Table Name COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME BEND_DEFLECTION PIPE_RUN_LENGTH PIPE_LENGTH BOLT_LENGTH WELD_TYPE_TABLE WELD_C10031 DRV_WELD_DEF CommodityCode_BLT (Bolt Commodity Code Table) CommodityCode_GKT (Gasket Diameter Table) FIELD_FIT_LENGTH Component_Mirror_Table Operator_Mirror_Table Default_End_Prep MTO Tables and Functions The system uses the settings in the Component Placement and Material TakeOff forms of the Project Data Manager to determine the applicable names for these basic tables. Refer to Table Formats and Naming Conventions, page 303, for information on the basic conventions used for PDS tables.

RDB Tables

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

215

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.2.1

Commodity Item Name Table (G02)


The commodity item name table is used when placing a component at the vertex of an existing piping segment (in either automatic or manual component placement). It enables you to relate the component types (1 to 70) hard-coded in the software with the applicable Item Names. As the system processes the segment for component placement, it uses the derived Item Name from this table to reference the Piping Commodity Specification data in the Specification Material Reference Database. When placing change of direction components, this table is used in conjunction with the Bend Deflection Table. The table name format that applies to this table is: TNF=G02 COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME

Example
Table_Data_Definition COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME ! Description= Correlation of hardcoded component types and AABBCC codes ! By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=2 Date=16-May-1989 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= INT, AN*6 ! Comp ! Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 > 23 > 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 AABBCC Code PIPING TUBING HOSE 6Q2C23 6Q2C01 6Q2C01 6Q2C76 6Q2C75 6Q2C56 6Q2C55 6Q3C45 6Q3C60 6Q2C47 6Q2C84 6Q3C47 6Q3C49 6Q3C50 6Q3C25 6Q3C47 6Q3C77 6Q3C82 6Q3C80 6Q3C88 6Q2C24 6Q1C76 6Q2C16 6Q2C19 6Q2C21 6Q2C08 -

216

_ _______________
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 END IND 6Q2C49 6Q2C51 6Q2C53 6Q2C06 6Q3C89

Commodity Item Name Table (G02)

The meaning of the various component types is outlined below: Comp Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25-27 28 29 30 31 32-37 38-40 41 42 43 44 45 51-60 61-70 Definition Piping (not used by the software) Tubing (not used by the software) Hose (not used by the software) Concentric diameter change Flange in bends Flange in other components 90 degree directional change 45-90 degree directional change 45 degree directional change < 45 degree directional change True Y Equal size cross (if not equal size, software will handle as a branch) > 90 pipe bend 90 degree reducing elbow Lateral (not used by the software) Reducing lateral Reducing run and branch lateral Reducing run and branch tee Lateral (not used by the software) Elbolet (used by Compute for Elbolet under the Tap command) Reinforcing weld Reinforcing pad Branch nipple vent/drain valve A - C end plug cap blind flange Closing component A - F Instrument indicator A - C 5.625 degree bend 11.25 degree bend 22.5 degree bend Orifice flange In-line nipple Pipe-like commodity item 1 - 10 Pipe-like model code 1 - 10

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

217

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 If you do not want to place one of the above component types as part of automatic component placement, place a hyphen (-) for the Item Name.

218

_ _______________
6.2.2 Bend Deflection Table (G04)
The bend deflection table is used when placing a component at the vertex of an existing piping segment (in either automatic or manual component placement). The system uses the bend angle at the segment vertex to determine the type of component to be placed. This table contains the following data bend angle - low bend angle - high index into the Commodity Item Name table for a full size bend index into the Commodity Item Name table for a reducing bend This table defines which full size and reducing size component types will be placed for a specified angle range. The angle is defined as the smallest angle that the continuation of one pipe run makes with the other run. The component types are defined in the commodity item name table. (See Commodity Item Name Table (G02), page 216.) A value of 0 for the type indicates that no reducing component should be placed for an angle range.

Bend Deflection Table (G04)

The system uses the bend angle to search this table for the matching range of bend angles. The system uses the index into the Commodity Item Name table for either a full size bend or a reducing bend depending upon the nominal piping diameters of the line route segments that form the bend. The system searches for an entry in the table where the angle is greater than or equal to the low bend angle and less than the high bend angle. You can define more than one bend deflection table for a project provided they are given different names. For example, one table can apply to underground piping and the other to aboveground piping. Refer to the Component Placement form in the Project Data Manager for information on defining the bend deflection table for a project or model. The table name format that applies to this table is: TNF=G04 BEND_DEFLECTION

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

219

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Example
Table_Data_Definition BEND_DEFLECTION ! Description= Component type to use as function of angle between runs ! By=EPZ Ckd By=DCG Rev=2 Date=09-Nov-1987 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 2 Units= DEC, DEC, INT, INT ! Angle Comp Type To Use ! Low High Full Red 0.1 44.9 10 0 44.9 45.1 9 0 45.1 89.9 8 0 89.9 90.1 7 14 90.1 179.9 13 0 END

The following listing shows the component types used in this example.
bend angle low high 0.1 44.9 44.9 45.1 45.1 89.9 89.9 90.1 90.1 179.9 index full size 10 ( < 45 trimmed bend) 9 (45 bend) 8 (45-90 trimmed bend) 7 (90 bend) 13 ( > 90 trimmed bend) reducing size N/A N/A N/A 14 (reducing 90 bend) N/A

220

_ _______________
6.2.3 Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06)

Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06)

This table enables you to define the minimum allowable segment run length which can be placed in the model during centerline routing. The values defined in this table do not apply to the segment run automatically created by the software when placing components end to end. The Piping Designer insures that the length of any pipe run of a piping segment exceeds the active segment run length threshold. The threshold is determined from this table as a function of nominal piping diameter. The only exception to this is for the small pipe run required for the offset of an eccentric reducer. This threshold is used to insure that the pipe run between two connected bends exceeds the fabrication length of the two bends. The value for nominal diameter is interpreted as follows: Diam Entry n1 n2 n3 .... n8 n9

Range of Diameters Covered nominal diameter < n1 n1 <= nominal diameter < n2 n2 <= nominal diameter < n3

n8 <= nominal diameter

Using this scheme, you should look on the line following the actual segment NPD to determine the minimum length. Only lengths greater than the minimum length in the table are allowed. For example, if you are placing a segment with 12 inch NPD, you can only place segments greater than .75 inches in length. The table name format that applies to this table is: TNF=G06 PIPE_RUN_LENGTH

Example
Table_Data_Definition PIPE_RUN_LENGTH ! Description= Minimum allowable piping segment run length ! By=DCG Ckd By=GJH Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN, IN ! Diam Min Length 2 0.25 6 0.50 12 0.50 24 0.75 36 1.00 96 1.00 144 1.00 192 1.00 END

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

221

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.2.4

Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07)


This table enables you to define the minimum and preferred allowable pipe lengths which can be placed (manually or by automatic component placement). The Piping Designer insures that the length of any pipe or tube exceeds the pipe length threshold, as defined in this table. The threshold is determined as a function of the nominal piping diameter. This table is used during model creation and model revision activities to verify the nominal or theoretical pipe (or tube) length. Any value for nominal diameter is interpreted as follows: Diam Entry n1 n2 n3 .... n8 n9

Range of Diameters Covered nominal diameter < n1 n1 <= nominal diameter < n2 n2 <= nominal diameter < n3

n8 <= nominal diameter

Using this scheme, you should look on the line following the actual NPD to determine the minimum length. Only lengths greater than the minimum length in the table are allowed. For example, if you are placing a pipe with 12 inch NPD, you can only place pipe runs greater than 3 inches in length. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=G07 PIPE_LENGTH

Example
Table_Data_Definition PIPE_LENGTH ! Description= Minimum and preferred allowable plain piping length ! By=DCG Ckd By=GJH Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN ! Min Preferred ! Diam Length Length 2 2 2 6 2 3 12 2 4 24 3 6 36 3 9 96 3 12 144 6 12 192 6 12 END

222

_ _______________
6.2.5 Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)
The data for bolts and gaskets is a function of nominal diameter, end preparation for each mating flange, and pressure rating for each mating flange. The bolt length table supplies data for machine bolts, stud bolts, and cap screws. It determines the bolt data required for both regular and bolt-thru bolts. This table enables you to define the low and high range for calculated bolt lengths and the corresponding preferred or purchased lengths of the bolt. You can define up to 300 entries in this table. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=G11 BOLT_LENGTH Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on bolt tables and bolt table logic.

Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)

Example
Table_Data_Definition BOLT_LENGTH ! Description= Preferred bolt lengths (maximum of 300 entries) ! By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= IN, IN, IN ! Bolt Length Preferred ! Low High Bolt Length 0.0 1.5 1.5 1.5001 1.75 1.75 1.7501 2 2 2.0001 2.25 2.25 2.2501 2.5 2.5 2.5001 2.75 2.75 2.7501 3 3 3.0001 3.25 3.25 3.2501 3.5 3.5 3.5001 3.75 3.75 3.7501 4 4 4.0001 4.25 4.25 4.2501 4.5 4.5 4.5001 4.75 4.75 4.7501 5 5 5.0001 5.25 5.25 5.2501 5.5 5.5 5.5001 5.75 5.75 5.7501 6 6 6.0001 6.25 6.25 6.2501 6.5 6.5 6.5001 6.75 6.75 6.7501 7 7 7.0001 7.25 7.25 7.2501 7.5 7.5 7.5001 7.75 7.75 7.7501 8 8 8.0001 8.25 8.25 8.2501 8.5 8.5 8.5001 8.75 8.75 8.7501 9 9 9.0001 9.25 9.25 9.2501 9.5 9.5

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

223

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
9.5001 9.7501 10.0001 10.2501 10.5001 10.7501 11.0001 11.2501 11.5001 11.7501 12.0001 12.2501 12.5001 12.7501 13.0001 13.2501 13.5001 13.7501 14.0001 14.2501 14.5001 14.7501 15.0001 15.2501 15.5001 15.7501 16.0001 16.2501 16.5001 16.7501 17.0001 17.2501 17.5001 17.7501 18.0001 18.2501 18.5001 18.7501 19.0001 19.2501 19.5001 19.7501 20.0001 20.2501 20.5001 20.7501 21.0001 21.2501 21.5001 21.7501 22.0001 22.2501 22.5001 22.7501 23.0001 23.2501 23.5001 23.7501 24.0001 24.2501 24.5001 24.7501 25.0001 25.2501 25.5001 25.7501 26.0001 26.2501 26.5001 9.75 10 10.25 10.5 10.75 11 11.25 11.5 11.75 12 12.25 12.5 12.75 13 13.25 13.5 13.75 14 14.25 14.5 14.75 15 15.25 15.5 15.75 16 16.25 16.5 16.75 17 17.25 17.5 17.75 18 18.25 18.5 18.75 19 19.25 19.5 19.75 20 20.25 20.5 20.75 21 21.25 21.5 21.75 22 22.25 22.5 22.75 23 23.25 23.5 23.75 24 24.25 24.5 24.75 25 25.25 25.5 25.75 26 26.25 26.5 26.75 9.75 10 10.25 10.5 10.75 11 11.25 11.5 11.75 12 12.25 12.5 12.75 13 13.25 13.5 13.75 14 14.25 14.5 14.75 15 15.25 15.5 15.75 16 16.25 16.5 16.75 17 17.25 17.5 17.75 18 18.25 18.5 18.75 19 19.25 19.5 19.75 20 20.25 20.5 20.75 21 21.25 21.5 21.75 22 22.25 22.5 22.75 23 23.25 23.5 23.75 24 24.25 24.5 24.75 25 25.25 25.5 25.75 26 26.25 26.5 26.75

224

_ _______________
26.7501 27.0001 27.2501 27.5001 27.7501 28.0001 28.2501 28.5001 28.7501 29.0001 29.2501 29.5001 29.7501 30.0001 30.2501 30.5001 30.7501 31.0001 31.2501 31.5001 31.7501 32.0001 32.2501 32.5001 32.7501 33.0001 33.2501 33.5001 33.7501 34.0001 34.2501 34.5001 34.7501 35.0001 35.2501 35.5001 35.7501 END 27 27.25 27.5 27.75 28 28.25 28.5 28.75 29 29.25 29.5 29.75 30 30.25 30.5 30.75 31 31.25 31.5 31.75 32 32.25 32.5 32.75 33 33.25 33.5 33.75 34 34.25 34.5 34.75 35 35.25 35.5 35.75 36 27 27.25 27.5 27.75 28 28.25 28.5 28.75 29 29.25 29.5 29.75 30 30.25 30.5 30.75 31 31.25 31.5 31.75 32 32.25 32.5 32.75 33 33.25 33.5 33.75 34 34.25 34.5 34.75 35 35.25 35.5 35.75 36

Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

225

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.2.6

Weld Type Table


This table defines the weld type code for a given pair of fabrication category values. The fabrication category values are determined from the connect point data at each of the mating welded ends. The table name format that applies to this table is: WELD_TYPE_TABLE

Example
Table_Data_Definition Weld_Type_Table ! This Table nas NOT been Checked No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= INT, INT, INT ! Fab Cat 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 15 15 15 15 Fab Cat 1 5 7 15 16 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 5 7 15 16 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 7 15 16 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 15 16 17 25 Weld Type 1 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 11 21 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 21 11

226

_ _______________
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 35 35 35 35 35 35 37 37 37 37 37 45 45 45 45 47 47 47 95 95 97 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 16 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 35 37 45 47 95 97 37 45 47 95 97 45 47 95 97 47 95 97 95 97 97 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 12 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 11 21 21 21 21 11 21 21

Weld Type Table

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

227

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.2.7

Weld Clearance Table


This table contains information obtained from the NPD and the Weld Type table, which are retrieved from the piping model. Add a version of this table to the Physical Data Library for each spec. The table name format that applies to this table is: WELD_SpecName

Example
Table_Data_Definition WELD_1C0031 ! Description= Weld Clearance Table ! By=XXX Ckd By=XXX Rev=1 Date=01-22-1999 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4 Units= NPD_IN, INT, NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN ! ! NPD ! From 1 3 5 7 9 9 9 11 END Weld Type From 1 1 1 1 1 21 23 1 Weld Type To 25 25 25 25 20 22 25 25

NPD To 2 4 6 8 10 10 10 12

Radius Increase 6 8 10 6 10 12 14 10

Overall Length 18 24 30 18 18 24 30 30

Parameters
NPD From - NPD To (integer) These parameters identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the weld in NPD units. The To value must equal or exceed the From value. Weld_Type_From - Weld_Type_To (integer) These parameters identify the range of weld type values (from standard note 1100). The To value must equal or exceed the From value. Radius_Increase (integer - NPD Units) This parameter identifies the increase to be applied to the NPD of the weld for use in generating a cylinder to represent the construction tolerance envelope for the weld. Overall_Length (integer) This parameter identifies the length of the cylinder for the weld construction tolerance envelope.

228

_ _______________
6.2.8 Weld Graphics Dimensions Table
This table provides the dimensions used to generate the graphical representation of welds in a DesignReview session. You may customize this table to modify the appearance of weld graphics by weld type and diameter. The table name format that applies to this table is: DRV_WELD_DEF

Weld Graphics Dimensions Table

Example
Table_Data_Definition DRV_WELD_DEF ! Description= WELD GRAPHICS DIMENSIONS ! TNF=G12T By=XXX Ckd By=XX Rev=0 Date= 04-Oct-2000 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4 Units= NPD_IN, INT, NPD_IN, INT, DEC, DEC ! From_NPD From_Weld_Type TO_NPD To_Weld_Type Weld_Dia_Increase Weld_Thickness_NPD_Units 2 6 8 END 10 12 10 7 10 12 22 22 22 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25

Parameters
From NPD - TO _NPD (integer) These parameters identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the weld in NPD units. The To value must equal or exceed the From value. From_Weld_Type - To_Weld_Type (integer) These parameters identify the range of the weld type values (from standard note 1100). The To value must equal or exceed the From value. Weld_Dia_Increase (decimal) This parameter identifies the percentage increase to be applied to the NPD of the weld for use in displaying a cylinder to represent the weld in SmartPlant Review. For example, if the NPD is 6" and the increase is .25, the diameter of the weld cylinder would be 7 1/2" (6 x 1.25 = 7.5). Weld_Thickness (decimal) This parameter identifies the percentage to be applied to the NPD of the weld to determine the thickness of the cylinder. If this table is absent or if there is no NPD range encapsulating the WELD NPD, the weld graphics dimensions will be determined as follows: Diameter = 130% of the NPD at the weld. Thickness = 25% of the NPD at the weld.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

229

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.2.9

Bolt Commodity Code Table


This table is used if the Basis of Bolt Commodity Code is set to Bolt Commodity Code Table in the Project Data Manager. The system uses the bolt length and bolt diameter to find the commodity code in the table. If you define a bolt commodity code which is less than 17 characters, you should code a hyphen (-) in the third column. The table name format that applies to this table is: Cmdty Code_BLT

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_BLT ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4 Units= IN, IN, IN, AN*8, AN*8, AN*8 ! Bolt Bolt Length Bolt Commodity Code ! Diam Low High 1 2 3 WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ END

230

_ _______________
6.2.10 Gasket Diameter Table
This table is used if the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to _GKT. The system uses the NPD to find the gasket outside and inside diameters. The table name format that applies to this table is: Cmdty Code_GKT

Gasket Diameter Table

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_GKT ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN ! Gasket Diameter ! NPD Inside Outside WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

231

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.2.11

Field Fit Length Table


This table defines the pipe length adjustment for a given weld type. The weld type is determined from the connect point data at the mating welded ends. This table is only used if the Field Fit Length option is activated on the Material Takeoff Options form in the Project Data Manager. MTO reads the specified table and increases the pipe length at each welded end of the pipe based on the weld type at that specific end.

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition Fit_Length_Table ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= INT, IN ! Weld Type 1 11 21 22 Adjust. ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ

232

_ _______________
6.2.12 Component Mirror Table
This table is used for components which require non-symmetrical mirroring. It defines a mirror option for a given eden module. This table is called through the use of the Eden keyword TOGGLE_<INT>, where <INT> is an integer value as defined below for Option 1.

Component Mirror Table

Example
Table_Data_Definition Component_Mirror_Table No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= AN*6, INT, INT, INT ! Model Code Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

Parameters
Model Code This columns list the model codes for components which require nonsymmetrical mirroring. The model codes is used as input by the calling Eden module. Option 1 This column represents the TOGGLE_<INT> Eden variable or specific command instruction used to control a non symmetrical mirror operation. This column can have any of the following values. mirror logic in the Eden module. All items with these setting must have a tutorial accessed in the Eden module to allow the user to change the TOGGLE during placement. For example, if Option 1 = 1 check the TOGGLE_1 Eden variable in the Eden module to perform specific logic to compensate for a mirrored component. degrees instead of mirroring it. The Model Code item will be rotated due to a specific non symmetrical definition where there are no non symmetrical connect points involved. the specific item. The item will not be mirrored due to specific non symmetrical definition. In other words, the item is only stocked in one non symmetrical configuration which has non symmetrical connect points involved. Option 2 & Option 3 These columns are not currently used.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

233

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.2.13

Operator Mirror Table


This table is used for operators that require non-symmetrical mirroring. It defines a mirror option for a given eden module. This table is called through the use of the Eden keyword TOGGLE_<INT>, where <INT> is an integer value as defined below for Option 1.

Example
Table_Data_Definition Operator_Mirror_Table ! This Table has NOT been Checked ! No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= AN*6, INT, INT, INT ! Model Code OI_33 OI_35 OI_43 OI_53 A_1033 OP_331 OP_332 OP_333 OP_334 OP_351 OP_493 OP_494 OP_573 OP_574 OP_711 OP_853 OP_854 Option 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Option 2 Option 3 -

Parameters
Model Code This columns list the model codes for operator which support mirroring. The model codes is used as input by the calling Eden module. Option 1 This column represents the TOGGLE_<INT> Eden variable or specific command instruction used to control a non symmetrical mirror operation. This column can have any of the following values. mirror logic in the Eden module. All items with these setting must have a tutorial accessed in the Eden module to allow the user to change the TOGGLE during placement. For example, if Option 1 = 1 check the TOGGLE_1 Eden variable in the Eden module to perform specific logic to compensate for a mirrored component. degrees instead of mirroring it.

234

_ _______________
For example, if Option 1 = 1000 the Model Code item will be rotated due to a specific non symmetrical definition where there are no non symmetrical connect points involved. tell the Mirror command to rotate the component 180 degrees instead of mirroring it. The item is only stocked in one non symmetrical configuration and does not have non symmetrical connect points involved. Option 2 & Option 3 These columns are not currently used.

Operator Mirror Table

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

235

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.2.14

Default End Preperation Table


The Default End Preparation Table is an optional table that can be used to automatically set the end preparation of instruments and piping specialties that are being placed in a piping model. The system looks for a table with the name Default_End_Prep in the spec table library. If the table does not exist in the library, the end prep for the instrument/specialty defaults to the end prep of the connected piping component. If the table exists in the spec table library and the active placement point is connected to previously placed piping or a nozzle, the end preparation for the instrument or piping specialty is set based on entries in the table.

Example
Table_Data_Definition Default_End_Prep ! No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= INT, INT ! !E_P_in 331 392 441 421 E_P_out 441 421 331 391

Data Retrieval
The system performs a table look-up using the active end preparation value. In the table above, the last line (421 391) indicates that the end prep for an instrument/specialty connected to a SWE (421) component, will default to PE (391). If the table does not exist in RDB, the end prep for the instrument/ specialty defaults to the end prep of the connected piping component. In the example above, the instrument/specialty end prep would default to SWE (421).

236

_ _______________
6.2.15 MTO Tables and Functions
The following special tables and functions are used by the system during Material Take-Off. Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on the reporting process. field fit length tables (not currently implemented) preferred bolt length tables preferred bolt length roundoff factor nut allowance table bolt diameter and bolt pattern specification Gasket Outside and Inside diameter tables Bolt Length/Diameter Commodity Code tables

MTO Tables and Functions

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

237

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

238

_ _______________
6.3 Piping Job Specification Tables Command

Piping Job Specification Tables Command

This command enables you to access the library management options for the Piping Job Specification Table Library. You can create a new library file or create, modify, or delete data in an existing Library. You can also create reports of the data in the library and post data from the unapproved library to the approved library. The spec tables for US practice are delivered in the file us_pjstb.l in the RDUSRDB product directory. The system tracks revision dates for table entries when a table is revised. This revision management data is recorded in a separate Table Revision Management Library, named <table_library>.l.r. If the library has been removed or deleted, the software regenerates the library file. With the 4.2 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Piping Job Spec Table Library was increased from approximately 16,000 bytes per table to 20,000 bytes per table. With the 7.1 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Piping Job Spec Table Library was increased from approximately 20,000 bytes to 60,000 bytes or 750 lines.

Before Using This Command


Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Piping Job Spec Table library files in the Reference Database Management Data. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path.

Operating Sequence
The Piping Job Specification Tables command activates the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form used to control the contents of the spec table library.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

239

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.3.1

Options
Create Library used to create a new Piping Job Spec Table Library. See page 242. Compress Library used to compress the Piping Job Spec Table library. See page 242. Unapproved ==> Approved used to copy the unapproved Piping Job Spec Table library to the approved library. See page 242. Create/Interactive used to compile table files and add the resulting code to the Piping Job Spec Table library. You can create a single table or specify a list of tables to be created. See page 243. Create/Batch used to compile and add tables to the library via batch processing. See page 244. Revise used to select a table from the library for editing and compile the revised table definition. See page 245. Delete used to delete a specified table from the library. See page 247. Report used to create a report of the library contents. See page 248. List used to list the files contained in the library. See page 250. Extract used to extract a table file from the library for editing or printing. See page 251.

240

_ _______________
Field Descriptions
Refer to Default Project Control Data, page 53, for information on defining the default location for library files. You can also change the default file locations for each option at any time.

Piping Job Specification Tables Command

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

241

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.3.2

Create Library
This option is used to create a new Piping Job Spec Table Library. It automatically creates the object library (.l), the text library (.l.t), and table revision management library (.l.t.r) for the library that is being created. The system displays the approved and unapproved Piping Job Spec Table Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files. If you specify an existing library file, the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.

6.3.3

Compress Library
This option is used to compress the Piping Job Spec Table library. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.

6.3.4

Unapproved ==> Approved


This option copies the unapproved Piping Job Spec Table library to the approved library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.

242

_ _______________
6.3.5 Create/Interactive Spec Tables
This option enables you to compile tables and add the resulting code to the spec table library. You can create a single table or specify a list of tables to be created.

Create/Interactive Spec Tables

Before Using This Command


To add more than one table to the library, create a list file in the Piping Spec Path directory which identifies the names of the table files to be added. This file should list one filename per line with no directory paths. All of the listed files must reside in the Piping Spec Path directory.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2. 3.

Set the toggle to Single to process a single table file or to List to process a list file. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the table file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library. (Refer to PJS Tables and Functions, page 190, for information on the table formats.)

4.

Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file and begin processing.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

243

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.3.6

Create/Batch Spec Tables


This option enables you to load table files into the Spec Table Library as a batch operation at a specified time.

Before Using This Command


To add more than one table file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of the table files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (filename) per line.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create/Batch option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2. 3.

Set the toggle to Single to process a single table file or to List to process a list file. Specify Filename for Processing Key in the name of the table file or list file to be added to the active library.

4.

Accept to Submit or Set Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the table files.

5.

Accept the file and begin processing. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

244

_ _______________
6.3.7 Revise Spec Tables
This option enables you to revise selected table files from the library. For each table to be edited, select the table, edit the file, and then compile the table and put it back in the library. The system updates the revision date for revised table in the Table Revision Management Library.

Revise Spec Tables

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Revise option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2.

Select Table for Revision Select the table file to be revised and select Accept.

3.

The system extracts the specified table from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.sh file) to enable you to modify the file.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

245

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Make any changes to the displayed file. When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. If an error occurs in revising a table, the editor screen is invoked automatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem. 4. The system redisplays the list of table files. You can select another table to be revised as specified in step 2.

246

_ _______________
6.3.8 Delete Spec Tables
This option enables you to delete tables from the Piping Job Spec Table Library. It also deletes the revision date for the table from the Table Revision Management Library.

Delete Spec Tables

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Delete option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2.

Select Module Name Select the table files to be deleted from the list of tables. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available tables.

3.

Select Module Name, Accept or Exit Accept the selected tables. The system deletes the tables from the Spec Table Library.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

247

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.3.9

Report on Spec Tables


This option creates a report of information in the Spec Table Library. You can create a list file of all the table files in the Spec Table library or create a detailed report of all the tables modified since a specified date.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2.

Set the toggle to Default Report to create a list file of all the table files in the library. OR Set the toggle to Revision Dates Report and key in a revision date to process all tables modified since the specified revision date. The report lists the full contents of the modified tables with individual revision dates per line.

3.

Set the toggle to Report on Unapproved or Report on Approved to define the source of information to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used. Accept to Form Report or Revise Report Parameters Select Accept to form the report using the default parameters, and proceed to step 6. OR Key in the file information (Node Name and File Path) for the location of the neutral file to be created.

4.

248

_ _______________
5. Select Save, Print or Print/Save. For Print or Print/Save, select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer to the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on setting up multiple print queues.

Report on Spec Tables

If you select the Save or Print/Save option, the system creates a file named spec_tables in the default source file location or in the location you specified. 6. Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the request. 7. Accept to Create Report Select Accept to create the specified report file.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

249

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

6.3.10

List Spec Tables


This option displays all the tables for the Spec Table Library with the revision date of each table.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the List option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2.

You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available tables.

250

_ _______________
6.3.11 Extract Spec Tables
This option enables you to extract a table file or set of table files from the Spec Table Library for editing or printing.

Extract Spec Tables

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Extract option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2.

Select the tables from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. You can extract multiple tables at one time. OR Select Extract All to to bulk extract all the tables in one operation. The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default directory for Piping Spec Data. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named PD_tbl_list. If the list file is less than 24 hours old, the system appends the entries to the file, otherwise it overwrites the file.

6. Piping Job Spec Tables

251

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

252

_ _______________
7. Graphic Commodity Data
The graphic commodity data is contained in the following object libraries: Graphic Commodity Library - The delivered file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom.l contains parametric definitions for the components. See page 254.

Graphic Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

Physical Data (Dimensions) Library - The delivered file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim.l contains American dimension data for components. See page 266. Piping Job Specification Table Library - The delivered file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l contains specification tables referenced in the Piping Job Specification. See page 189. Refer to Reference Data Overview, page 23, for an illustration of the relationships among these libraries. When you select a component for placement in the model, the system uses the active parameters (such as piping materials class and nominal diameter) to search the Piping Job Specification (PJS) for the selected item name. If the selected item is found in the PJS database, the system reads the PJS for the parameters required to place the component. Included in this information is the model code (or specialty item number) for the selected component and the names of the spec tables defined for the Piping Materials Class. uses the model code (or specialty item number), derived from the PJS, to access the graphic commodity library. The definitions in the graphic commodity library determine the physical tables required to place the component and call the tables in the physical commodity library. places the symbol graphics in the model design file and writes the nongraphic information for the component in the database. This section describes the graphic commodity data used in placing components in the piping model. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for a detailed description of the actual placement process.

253

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.1

Graphic Commodity Library


The Graphic Commodity Library (GCL) provides data for commodity items, engineered items, and instruments. It is basically a catalog of component data which is accessed to determine physical data based on user specifications (such as NPD and end preparation) assign connect point data from the Piping Job Specification define the parametric shape for the model graphics. The Graphic Commodity Library includes data required for model creation, resymbolization for model presentation, interference detection, and any special functions of the Piping Job Specification, piping industry standards, or company design practices. PDS Piping uses the Eden Parametric Language to define and place components, specialty items, operators, and envelopes. Eden is a high- level language (similar to FORTRAN) which uses information from the Piping Job Specification and model to access parametric and dimensional data. Eden is composed of three major modules Symbol Processors Physical Data Subroutines Parametric Shape Definitions These modules are designed to carry out two functions: data definition and graphic presentation. The data associated with these modules is delivered in the following files: \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom.l - object library \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom.l.t - text library The modular approach provides for more efficient storage of information in these libraries by enabling common information to be shared by different symbols. The first line of each Eden module defines the type of module (such as symbol processor) and the module name. This statement determines a two- character category code to be prefixed to the module name in the object library. This prefix is only used by the system; it should not be keyed-in as part of the module name.

254

_ _______________

Graphic Commodity Library

7. Graphic Commodity Data

The entries in the library use the following prefixes to identify the type of data. SP PD UF MG DG IG SS Symbol Processor Physical Data Definition Module User Function Module Model Parametric Shape Definition Module Detailed Parametric Shape Definition Module Interference Envelope Parametric Shape Definition Module Sub-Symbol Processor Module

Each module must be given a unique name within the graphic commodity library. Refer to the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide for information on creating or modifying these modules.

255

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.1.1

Symbol Processors
A symbol processor is the controlling function or logic used to produce the graphics for a commodity item, piping specialty, instrument, pipe support, or interference envelope. During component placement, the symbol processor accesses the active component design parameters assigns connect points Calls the required physical data modules determines and calls the required parametric shape modules. The system retrieves the active component parameters which are dependent upon a connect point from the PJS in terms of green, red, or tap connect point properties. The symbol definition assigns the data corresponding to these connect point types (green, red, or tap) to the physical connect point numbers (CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4 or CP5). The first line of the Eden module defines the type of module and the module name. The following statement is used in the Eden modules to indicate a symbol processor module. Symbol_Processor module name

This statement tells the system to use the category code SP for the prefix. You should use the following conventions in assigning the module name. The module name is determined by the type of component being placed (commodity item or specialty item). For a commodity item, the system searches for the New Item Name (model code) of the commodity item as the module name. If the New Item Name is blank in the Commodity Item entity, the system searches for the Item Name as the module name. For a specialty item, the system searches for the specialty item name (derived from the PJS) as the module name. For an instrument, the system searches for the instrument name (derived from the PJS) as the module name. The delivered symbol processors are identified in the library with the prefix SP. The following lists the symbol processor SPGAT which is used to control the placement of a gate valve.

256

_ _______________
! REGULAR PATTERN, BOLTED OR MALE ENDS GATE VALVE Symbol_Processor GAT Call Assign_Connect_Point ( GREEN, CP1 ) Call Assign_Connect_Point ( RED, CP2 ) physical_data_source = V1 // Standard_Type Call Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source ) parametric_shape = V1 Call Draw_Parametric_Shape ( parametric_shape ) Valve_Operator = DABS ( Valve_Operator ) If ( Valve_Operator .NE. 0 ) Then If ( Valve_Operator .LT. 1000 ) Then Subcomponent = OP // Valve_Operator Else Subcomponent = A // Valve_Operator EndIf Operator_Orient = FALSE EndIf Stop End

Symbol Processors

7. Graphic Commodity Data

257

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.1.2

Sub-Symbol Processor
A subcomponent call in a symbol processor module indicates a sub-symbol processor. Subcomponents are additions to symbols such as an operator on a valve. The first line of a sub-symbol processor module indicates the module type and the module name. Sub_Symbol_Processor module name

This statement tells the system to use the category code SS for the prefix. The sub-symbol processor name for operators is a concatenation of the characters OP_ and the modifier value from the Commodity Item entity in the PJS database. The value is expressed as a code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator type). If the value is a positive number (such as 3) the operator is placed with the valve. If the value is a negative number (such as -3) the operator is not placed with the valve. (This is useful in segregating large diameter valves which almost always have a valve operator from small diameter valves which frequently do not have an operator.) The symbol processor for the gate valve calls a sub-symbol processor (Subcomponent = OP // Valve_Operator) which places an operator on the valve. The following depicts the subsymbol processor SSOP_3 which is used to control the placement of a hand wheel operator on the valve.

! HANDWHEEL OPERATOR Sub_Symbol_Processor OP_3 If ( Operator_Orient .EQ. TRUE ) Then prompt = 1.0 Call Prompt_to_Orient_Operator ( prompt ) EndIf physical_data_source = OPERATOR_3 Call Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source ) parametric_shape = OP3 Call Draw_Parametric_Shape ( parametric_shape ) Stop End

258

_ _______________
7.1.3 Physical Data Definitions

Physical Data Definitions

7. Graphic Commodity Data

The system uses the physical data definitions to determine the dimension data, weight data, and surface area data using the active design parameters. Physical data modules are identified by the statement Physical_Data_Definition module name

as the first line in the Eden module. This statement tells the system to use the category code PD for the prefix. This prefix is only used by the system; it should not be keyed-in as part of the module name. The module name for a physical data module consists of a symbol type (such as V1, V2,... for valves) and a generic type of geometric industry standard (such as AMS or DIN). You can define multiple physical data modules for the same symbol depending on the type of standard being referenced (for example, V1_AMS for American standards and V1_DIN for European standards). You can manage ten different sets of logic for table naming conventions for the following industry practices. The corresponding table suffix ranges and the suffix for the Piping Eden physical data modules are indicated below. Practice U.S. Practice European - DIN European - British Standard European - Practice A European - Practice B International - JIS International - Australian International - Practice A International - Practice B Company Practice Range 1-99 100-199 200-299 300-399 400-499 500-599 600-699 700-799 800-899 900-999 Suffix AMS DIN BRITISH_STD EURO_A EURO_B JIS AUS INT_A INT_B COMPANY

The geometric industry standard for a component is defined in the Piping Commodity Data table of the Material Reference Database. Each component must be assigned a geometric industry standard if it is to use physical data tables. For most of the delivered symbols, the physical data modules are classified into two categories: specific and generic. The specific physical data module is called by the symbol processor. This module then calls a generic physical data module.

Specific Physical Data Modules


The physical data module PDV1_AMS determines the specific dimensions (face-to-center and face-to-face) and other physical properties for a gate valve. This is the module called by the symbol processor SP_GAT

259

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
Physical_Data_Definition V1_AMS physical_data_source = VALVE_2_AMS Call Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source ) Call Read_Table ( Table_Name_A, input, output ) Surface_Area = Output_1 Wet_Weight = Output_2 F_to_C_Dim_1 = Output_3 If ( Term_Type_1 .EQ. Term_Type_2 ) Then F_to_C_Dim_2 = F_to_C_Dim_1 Else F_to_C_Dim_2 = Output_4 EndIf F_to_F_Dim = F_to_C_Dim_1 + F_to_C_Dim_2 If ( Valve_Operator .LE. 24.0 ) Then Call Read_Table ( Table_Name_W, input, output ) Dry_Weight = Output_1 EndIf Return End

Generic Physical Data Modules


The generic modules contain information which is common to more than one symbol such as flange thickness, gasket separation, and outside diameter. The physical data module V1_AMS calls another physical data module VALVE_2_AMS which contains the generic dimension data for all valves with two connect points.
Physical_Data_Definition VALVE_2_AMS Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_1 If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) Then table_name = BLT // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output ) Facing_OD_1 = Output_1 Thickness_1 = Output_2 Seat_Depth_1 = Output_3 Thickness_1 = Thickness_1 - Seat_Depth_1 CP_Offset_1 = Gasket_Sep_1 If ( Symbology .EQ. MODEL ) Then Thickness_1 = 0.0 Depth_1 = 0.0 Pipe_OD_1 = 0.0 Body_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 Else table_name = MAL_300_5 Depth_1 = Thickness_1 Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_1 Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output ) Pipe_OD_1 = Output_2 Body_OD_1 = Pipe_OD_1 EndIf Else If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. MALE ) Then table_name = MAL // Term_Type_1 // Gen_Flag_Green Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output ) Facing_OD_1 = Output_2 Thickness_1 = 0.0 Depth_1 = 0.0 Seat_Depth_1 = 0.0 CP_Offset_1 = 0.0 Pipe_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 Body_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 Else table_name = FEM // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output ) Facing_OD_1 = Output_1 Depth_1 = Output_2 Seat_Depth_1 = 0.0 Thickness_1 = 0.0

260

_ _______________
If ( symbology .EQ. MODEL ) Then Depth_1 = 0.0 CP_Offset_1 = 0.0 Pipe_OD_1 = 0.0 Body_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 Else CP_Offset_1 = -Depth_1 table_name = MAL_300_5 Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output ) Pipe_OD_1 = Output_2 Body_OD_1 = Pipe_OD_1 EndIf EndIf EndIf If ( Term_Type_2 .EQ. Term_Type_1 .AND. Nom_Pipe_D_1 .EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_2 ) Then Facing_OD_2 = Facing_OD_1 Pipe_OD_2 = Pipe_OD_1 Body_OD_2 = Body_OD_1 Thickness_2 = Thickness_1 Depth_2 = Depth_1 Seat_depth_2 = Seat_Depth_1 CP_Offset_2 = CP_Offset_1 Else Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_2 If ( Gen_Type_2 .EQ. BOLTED ) Then table_name = BLT // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // Gen_Flag_Red Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output ) Facing_OD_2 = Output_1 Thickness_2 = Output_2 Seat_Depth_2 = Output_3 Thickness_2 = Thickness_2 - Seat_Depth_2 CP_Offset_2 = Gasket_Sep_2 If ( Symbology .EQ. MODEL ) Then Thickness_2 = 0.0 Depth_2 = 0.0 Pipe_OD_2 = 0.0 Body_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2 Else Depth_2 = Thickness_2 table_name = MAL_300_5 Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_2 Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output ) Pipe_OD_2 = Output_2 Body_OD_2 = Pipe_OD_2 EndIf Else If ( Gen_Type_2 .EQ. MALE ) Then table_name = MAL // Term_Type_2 // Gen_Flag_Red Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output ) Facing_OD_2 = Output_2 Thickness_2 = 0.0 Depth_2 = 0.0 Seat_Depth_2 = 0.0 CP_Offset_2 = 0.0 Pipe_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2 Body_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2 Else table_name = FEM // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // Gen_Flag_Red Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output ) Facing_OD_2 = Output_1 Depth_2 = Output_2 Seat_Depth_2 = 0.0 Thickness_2 = 0.0 If ( Symbology .EQ. MODEL ) Then Depth_2 = 0.0 CP_Offset_2 = 0.0 Pipe_OD_2 = 0.0 Body_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2 Else CP_Offset_2 = -Depth_2 table_name = MAL_300_5 Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_2 Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output ) Pipe_OD_2 = Output_2 Body_OD_2 = Pipe_OD_2 EndIf

Physical Data Definitions

7. Graphic Commodity Data

261

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
EndIf EndIf EndIf Table_Name_A = Item_Name // Geo_Ind_Std // Term_Type_1 Table_Name_W = Commodity_Code Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_1 Input_2 = Nom_Pipe_D_2 If ( Term_Type_1 .EQ. Term_Type_2 .AND. Nom_Pipe_D_1 .EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_2 ) Then Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // A Else If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. Gen_Type_2 ) Then ! Male X Male or Bolted X Bolted ! or Female X Female Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // A Else If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. MALE ) Then ! Male X Bolted and Male X Female Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // A Else If ( Gen_Type_2 .EQ. MALE ) Then Bolted X Male and Female X Male Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // Term_Type_2 // Else Bolted X Female and Female X

! Bolted

Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // A EndIf EndIf EndIf EndIf Return End

262

_ _______________
7.1.4 Parametric Shape Definitions
The parametric shape definition describes the graphics symbol (such as bend, flange, or valve body) which is placed for the component in the model. Parametric shape definitions are used to place symbol graphics in the model or define interference envelopes. This involves the following major functions defining connect point geometry placing connect points moving the active location a specified distance drawing a specific graphic shape placing a center of gravity location. Parametric shape definitions are divided into three basic types: model parametric shapes, detailed parametric shapes, and interference envelopes. The first line of the Eden module indicates the module type and the module name.

Parametric Shape Definitions

7. Graphic Commodity Data

Model Parametric Shape Definitions


Model parametric shapes are used to define the symbol graphics to be placed in the model. For example, the parametric shaped module for a valve consist of a cylinder, two cones, and a cylinder (flange, valve body, flange). The first line for these modules is of the form Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition module name

This statement tells the system to use the category code MG for the prefix. This prefix is only used by the system; it should not be keyed- in as part of the module name. The module name for a parametric shape module consists of a symbol type (such as V1, V2,... for valves). The parametric shape module MGV1 determines the model graphics for a valve. This is the module called by the symbol processor SPGAT. The parametric shape module MGOP3 determines the model graphics for a hand wheel operator. This is the module called by the sub-symbol processor SSOP_3.

263

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition V1 Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( LINEAR ) Call Place_Connect_Point ( CP1 ) Call Move_By_Distance ( CP_Offset_1 ) Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Depth_1, Facing_OD_1 ) length = F_to_C_Dim_1 - Thickness_1 diameter = 0.0 Call Draw_Cone ( length, Body_OD_1, diameter ) Call Place_Connect_Point ( CP0 ) Call Place_COG_Location ( DRY_COG ) Call Place_COG_Location ( WET_COG ) length = F_to_C_Dim_2 - Thickness_2 Call Draw_Cone ( length, diameter, Body_OD_2 ) Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Depth_2, Facing_OD_2 ) Call Move_By_Distance ( CP_offset_2 ) Call Place_Connect_Point ( CP2 ) Return End

Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition OP3 Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( OPERATOR ) Call Convert_NPD_to_Subunits ( Nom_Pipe_D_1, dia ) dist = dia + Min_Cyl_Dia * 0.5 angle = 90.0 radius = ( Dimension_2 - Min_Cyl_Dia ) * 0.5 Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Dimension_1, Min_Cyl_Dia ) Call Move_by_Distance ( -dist ) Call Rotate_Orientation ( angle, Secondary ) Call Rotate_Orientation ( angle, Normal ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( -radius, Secondary ) Call Draw_Torus ( radius, angle, Min_Cyl_Dia ) Call Draw_Torus ( radius, angle, Min_Cyl_Dia ) Call Draw_Torus ( radius, angle, Min_Cyl_Dia ) Call Draw_Torus ( radius, angle, Min_Cyl_Dia ) Return End

Detailed Parametric Shape Definition


Detailed parametric shapes are used to define more complex symbol graphics to be placed in the model when the model symbology lock is set to detailed. The first line for these modules is of the form Detailed_Parametric_Shape_Definition module name This statement tells the system to use the category code DG for the prefix.

Interference Parametric Shape Definition


Interference parametric shapes are not used during component placement. They are referenced during interference detection to determine the volume (interference envelope) to be compared for clashes with other elements. If a clash is detected during the interference detection process, the interference parametric shape is used to place an interference marker. Refer to the PDS Interference Checker / Manager Reference Guide for more information on interference envelopes.

264

_ _______________
Interference_Parametric_Shape_Definition module name This statement tells the system to use the category code IG for the prefix. If no interference module is found for a component, the system uses the model graphics module to determine the interference parametric shape.

Parametric Shape Definitions

7. Graphic Commodity Data

265

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.2

Physical Data Tables


The physical data tables contain the physical data (dimensions, weights, and surface area) required for symbol creation, interference detection, stress analysis, and MTO reporting. These tables are segregated for commodity item data, engineered item data, and instrument data. Refer to Section 4 for a detailed description of the physical data tables and the table naming conventions used in PDS. The physical data tables for US Practice are delivered in the following files: \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim.l - object library \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim.l.t - text library These libraries contain physical data for American standards. The physical data can be stored in one of ten physical data libraries. The system uses the geometric industry standard for a particular commodity item (or specialty item) to determine which library to reference for the physical data tables. Geometric industry standard is expressed as a code list value from Standard Note Type 575. Code list numbers 2-6999 are reserved for standards that apply to American piping practices. Code list numbers 7000-27999 are reserved for standards that apply to European piping practices. Numbers 28000-31999 are reserved for specific company practices. By segregating data into separate physical data libraries you can access a subset of the total physical data available for a project. You can also build a specific set of physical data for a particular project. The following table types are required for piping and instrument components. Generic dimensional data Generic tables contain data which is not specific to a particular symbol (such as flange outside diameter or flange thickness). These tables are identified by the prefix BLT, FEM, or MAL (for the termination type) and end with the extension .TBL (the table name is independent of the name of the physical data module). Specific commodity data Specific tables contain commodity data which is specific to a particular component (such as dimensions, water weight, and surface area). These specific tables use the model code or commodity code as part of the table name to classify data by symbol type. The system uses the water weight data to compute the wet weight using the specific gravity of the operating fluid. fluid weight = water weight * specific gravity for fluid operating weight = dry weight + fluid weight

266

_ _______________
The surface area data enables the system to perform paint requirement calculations and insulation weight calculations. Specific commodity dry weight data Piping Specialty physical data The dimensions, dry weight, water weight, and surface area for specialty items can be stored in a set of tables or defined at placement. Instrument physical data

Physical Data Tables

7. Graphic Commodity Data

The dimensional data, dry weight, water weight, and surface area for instruments can be stored in a set of tables or defined at placement. You can form the name of a physical data table from attributes for the component (such as geometry standard and end preparation). However, the table name cannot exceed 46 characters.

7.2.1

Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library


The data retrieval from tables in the Physical Data Library is restricted to two independent variables and eight dependent variables. If only one independent variable is required, then nine dependent variables are allowed. If more independent variables are required, the additional independent variable(s) must be a part of the table name. If nominal diameter is one of the independent variables, it must be listed first in the table.

267

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.2.2

Example of Physical Data Look-Up


In order to place the valve described earlier in this section, the system references the following tables.

Generic Tables
The spec access for a six-inch gate valve defines the end preparation at both connect points as Raised Face Flanged End (code list value 21) which is a bolted connection. As shown in the listing for VALVE_2_AMS, the table name for a bolted connection on a two-connect point valve is
table_name= BLT // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green

Using the values from the Piping Job Specification (PMC=1C0031, Item Name=6Q1C01), the actual table name will be BLT_20_150_5 This table returns the outside diameter, flange thickness, and the seating depth for each end of the valve. Note that the termination type (20) is used rather than the actual end preparation value (21).

Specific Tables
The specific tables are used to define the main body of the valve. Refer to Table Requirements, page 315, for an outline of the types of tables which are required to place a valve. Since the termination type is the same at both ends of the valve (bolted), no red connect point data is required. The required tables are found by referring to the Bolted(G) termination type. MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A (P15A) MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B (P15B) - This table is only required if more than eight outputs are necessary to define a commodity item. Commodity Code (P59) Using this information, the dimension tables for a 6" gate valve are: GAT_40_20_150_A This table returns the face-to-center dimension for the valve. Table P15B is not required for a gate valve.

268

_ _______________
VAABAHCCAA This table returns the empty weight of the valve, including the weight of the operator. If the end preparations were different at each end of the valve (such as female threaded by socket welded) then a different set of tables would be required. An additional table look-up is required to access the dimensional data for the valve operator. The following table is required to define the valve operator. MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A (P31A) Using this table name format, the dimension table for a hand wheel operator on a 6" gate valve is: GAT_BLT_150_3_A This table returns the stem length and the wheel diameter for the handwheel operator.

Example of Physical Data Look-Up

7. Graphic Commodity Data

269

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.3
7.3.1

Notes for Graphic Commodity Data


Connect Point Data
As described in the Piping Job Specification description, connect point information for commodity items, piping specialties, and instruments is classified in terms of green and red connect points. The following conventions are used to coordinate the two sets of data: For full-size components, data is only defined for the green connect point and applies to all ends of the component. For size change components, data for commodity items, engineered items, or instruments should be created with the green connect point representing the larger diameter (first size) of the component and the red connect point diameter representing the smaller diameter (second size). If the end preparation is different at each end of the component, the end preparation should be defined to match the green and red connect points. If a component has ends with the same nominal diameter but other end properties which differ, the following rules apply: If the ends have different end preparations (regardless of the values for schedule/thickness) the end(s) whose end preparations have the lowest code list number are designated as the green connect point. If the end preparations are the same but the values for rating, schedule, or thickness differ, the "stronger" ends(s) are designated as the green connect point. Schedule or thickness values should be defined for all applicable components. Refer to PJS Tables and Functions, page 190, for a detailed description of the methods for defining the schedule or thickness value. A flow direction component (such as a check valve) must be defined so that the flow is directed from connect point 1 to connect point 2. A tee type branch must be defined with connect point three on the branch leg of the tee.

The origin of a component must lie between connect point 1 and connect point 2. Flanges should be defined with the green connect point representing the flanged connect point and the red connect point representing the non-flanged connect point.

270

_ _______________
A valve operator is always placed at the component origin of the corresponding valve body.

Notes for Graphic Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

To insure consistency in pipe cut length calculations, the connect points of a component should be located using face-to-face or face- to-center dimension rather than end-to-end or end-to-center dimension. A change of direction component placed by component center must be defined such that connect point 1 is on the primary axis.

7.3.2

Bends and Branches


For bend components (specific and generic), the item name and the new item name must be unique with respect to the angle of the bend. In other words, you specify the angle of the bend by selecting the item name for the corresponding angle of the bend. The number of joints in a mitre is required to compute the stress intensification factor (SIF). The graphics symbol description in the Graphic Commodity Library sets an attribute in the piping design database that defines the number of joints. For miter bend components, the system requires that the item name and the new item name be unique with respect to the number of miter joints of the bend. In other words, the item name specifies the number of miter joints of the bend. For branches (tees and laterals), the system uses the first and second size to access the branch table and determine the item name of the component to be placed at the branch point (intersection). Depending on the active values, the branch table may define a single component, or a set of two or three components.

271

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.3.3

Bolts, Gaskets, and Flanges


The data for the number of bolts and the bolt diameter is available with the flange data in the Physical Commodity Library as a function of nominal piping diameter, pressure rating, termination type, and geometric industry standard. However, the bolt data and the flange data are stored in separate tables. Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for a description of the table access. A lap joint flange is defined with the end preparation at one end as flanged and the other end as lap. The system determines the gasket separation at each connect point of a piping component and an instrument component by the following rules. If the end preparation for the connect point is flanged, the gasket separation for the connect point is set to one-half the Active Gasket Separation. However, some flanged connections (lug, ring type joint, or wafer) have integral gaskets and do not have a gasket separation. In this situation, the gasket separation at each connect point is set to zero. If the end preparation for the connect point is not flanged, the gasket separation for the connect point will be set to zero. Flange data exists in two tables The first table (BLT_Term_Rat_TS) contains the flange data required for modeling activities (such as flange outside diameter and flange thickness). The second table (STUD_Rat_TS) contains flange data required for reporting or analysis activities (such as bolt diameter, number of bolt holes, and nut extension).

272

_ _______________
7.3.4 Pipe, Tubing, and Hose
All tubing (such as fiberglass and copper) is specified in terms of piping outside diameter rather than nominal piping diameter. All commodity item data in the Alphanumeric Commodity Library exists in terms of nominal piping diameter. Mechanical joint and cast iron pipe can have various fixed lengths. Polypropylenelined tube is purchased with flanged ends in various fixed lengths. Piping wall thickness is defined it terms of NPD units rather than model units. A piping converter component (which converts nominal piping diameter from one system of units to another system of units) must be defined in the PJS database for each specific pair of nominal piping diameters. You cannot specify a convertor component for a range of nominal piping diameters. Flexible hose has flanged, screwed, or quick disconnect end preparations.

Pipe, Tubing, and Hose

7. Graphic Commodity Data

273

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

274

_ _______________
7.4 Graphic Commodity Library Manager
This command enables you to create a new graphic commodity library or create and modify data (Eden modules) in an existing library. Refer to Graphic Commodity Library, page 254, for more information on this library. You can compile Eden source code, review and delete object code files, and insert, extract, and delete Eden source files from the library. Select the Graphic Commodity Library Manager command from the Reference Data Manager form.

Graphic Commodity Library Manager

7. Graphic Commodity Data

Options
Create Library Used to create a new Graphic Commodity Library. Compress Used to compress the Graphic Commodity library. Unapproved ==> Approved Used to copy the unapproved Graphic Commodity library to the approved library. Create/Interactive Used to compile Eden source files and insert them in the Graphic Commodity Library. You can create a file or specify a list of files to be created. Create/Batch Used to compile Eden source files and add the files to the library via batch processing. used to compile Eden source files via batch processing. Revise Used to select an Eden module from the library, edit the file, and put the recompiled file back into the library.

275

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Delete Used to remove an Eden module from the library. Report Used to create a report listing the library contents. List Used to display the Eden modules in the library. Extract Used to extract an Eden module from the library for editing or printing. You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the Eden modules to be listed. Full List - Lists all the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library. Sub-string - Limits the list to those Eden modules which contain a specified substring.

276

_ _______________
7.4.1 Create Library
This option is used to create a new Graphic Commodity Library. It automatically creates the object library (.l) and the text library (.l.t) for the library that is being created. The system displays the approved and unapproved Graphic Commodity Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files. If you specify an existing library file, the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.

Create Library

7. Graphic Commodity Data

7.4.2

Compress
This option is used to compress the Graphic Commodity library. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.

7.4.3

Unapproved ==> Approved


This option copies the unapproved Graphic Commodity library to the approved library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.

277

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.4.4

Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data


This option enables you to compile Eden source code and add the resulting code to the graphic commodity library. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created. Refer to the description of the Graphic Commodity Library, page 254, for information on naming conventions for Eden modules.

Before using this command


Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data to the location of the Eden source files. To add more than one Eden file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of the Eden source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. The list file and all of the source files should reside in the source file directory.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create option.

2. 3.

Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the Eden file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library. The system verifies the existence of the specified file.

4.

The system displays the default node name and path for the eden modules, as specified in the Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation.

5.

Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file and begin processing.

278

_ _______________
7.4.5 Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data

Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to compile Eden source code and insert the specified files into the graphic commodity library via batch processing. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created. Refer to the description of the Graphic Commodity Library, page 254, for information on naming conventions for Eden modules.

Before using this command


Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data to the location of the Eden source files. To add more than one Eden file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of the Eden source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. The list file and all of the source files should reside in the source file directory.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Batch Load option.

2. 3.

Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the Eden file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library. The system confirms the existence of the specified file.

4.

The system displays the default node name and path for the eden modules, as specified in the Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation.

279

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 5. Accept or Select Other Option Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the source files. 6. Accept the file and begin processing. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

280

_ _______________
7.4.6 Revise Graphic Commodity Data
This option enables you to select Eden modules from the library, edit the file, and then compile the file and put it back in the library.

Revise Graphic Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

Before using this command


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the Eden modules to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Revise option. The system displays the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library.

2.

Select Module for Revision Select the Eden modules to be revised and select Accept.

281

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 3. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.sh file) to enable you to modify the file.

Make any changes to the displayed file. When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. (If you quit the text editor, the file will not be recompiled.) If the file compiles successfully, the system returns to Step 2. You can select another Eden module to be revised or select Exit. If an error occurs in revising a Piping Eden module or table, the system invokes the editor automatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem.

282

_ _______________
7.4.7 Delete Graphic Commodity Data
This option enables you to delete Eden modules from the graphic commodity library.

Delete Graphic Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

Before using this command


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the Eden modules to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Delete option. The system displays the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library.

2.

Select Module for Deletion Select the Eden modules to be deleted from the list of modules. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.

3.

Accept or Select Other Module Accept the selected modules. The system deletes the modules from the Graphic Commodity Library.

283

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.4.8

Report Graphic Commodity Data


This option enables you to create a list file of all the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity library and their creation dates.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report option from the Data Management form.

2.

Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created or use the displayed defaults. Select Print or Print/Save. Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer to the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting up multiple print queues. If you select the Print/Save option, the system will create a file named piping_eden in the defined default source file location.

3.

4.

Accept to Form Report or Revise Report Parameters Select Accept to create the report file.

284

_ _______________
7.4.9 List Graphic Commodity Data
This option displays a list of Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library. The display includes a description of the type of Piping Eden module, such as Physical Data Definition or Model Parametric Shape, at the end of each line. the revision date of each Piping Eden module. The module names are sorted alphanumerically within the list for each type of Piping Eden module.

List Graphic Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

Before using this command


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the Eden modules to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the List option. The system displays the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library.

2. 3.

You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Select Cancel to exit the form.

285

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.4.10

Extract Graphic Commodity Data


This option enables you to extract an Eden module or set of Eden modules from the Graphic Commodity library for editing or printing.

Before using this command


Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data to the location of the Eden source files. Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the Eden modules to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Extract from the Data Management form.

2.

Select EDEN Module for Extraction Select the modules from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. You can extract multiple files at one time. OR Select Extract ALL to bulk extract all the Piping Eden modules in one operation. The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default eden directory. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named PD_gc_list. If the list file is less than 24 hours old, the system appends the entries to the file, otherwise it overwrites the file.

286

_ _______________
7.5 Physical Data Library Manager

Physical Data Library Manager

7. Graphic Commodity Data

This command enables you to access the library management options for the Physical Data Library. You can create a new library file or create, modify, and delete data in an existing library. You can also create reports of the data in the library and post the contents of the unappoved library to the approved library. Refer to Physical Data Tables, page 266, for more information on this library. The system tracks revision dates for table entries when a table is being revised. This revision management data recorded in a Table Revision Management Library, named <table_library>.l.r. If the library has been removed or deleted, the software will regenerate the library file. This feature can be used to create revision management reports of components that require reconstructing as a result of changes to any dimension tables since a specified date. With the 4.2 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Physical Data Library was increased from approximately 16,000 bytes per table to 20,000 bytes per table. With the 7.1 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Physical Data Library was increased from approximately 20,000 bytes to 60,000 bytes or 750 lines.

Before using this command


Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Physical Data Library and Spec Table Library files in the Default Project Control Data. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Physical Data Library Manager command from the Reference Data Manager form.

287

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

2.

Select Table Library Select the active practice (such as U.S. Practice or European - Din) from the display list and select Accept. The system loads the table list for the selected practice into memory.

3.

You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the physical data tables to be listed. Full List lists all the tables in the Physical Data Library. Sub-string limits the list to those tables which contain a specified substring.

4.

Select Table Data Management Option Select the option to perform.

Options
Create Library Used to create a new Physical Dimension Library. Compress Used to compress the Physical Dimension library. Unapproved ==> Approved Used to copy the unapproved Physical Dimension library to the approved library. Create/Interactive Used to process table files and add the resulting code to the active Physical Dimension library. You can create a single table or specify a list of tables to be created.

288

_ _______________
Create/Batch Used to compile and add table files to the active library via batch processing. Delete Used to remove a table file from the library. Report Used to create a report of the library contents. List Used to display the table files in the active library. Extract Used to extract a table file from the library for editing or printing.

Physical Data Library Manager

Revise Used to select a table file from the library for editing and put the revised file back into the library.

7. Graphic Commodity Data

289

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.5.1

Create Library
This option is used to create a new Physical Dimension Library. It automatically creates the object library (.l), the text library (.l.t), and table revision management library (.l.t.r) for the library that is being created. The system displays the approved and unapproved Physical Dimension Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files. If you specify an existing library file, the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.

7.5.2

Compress
This option is used to compress the Physical Dimension library. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.

7.5.3

Unapproved ==> Approved


This option copies the unapproved Physical Dimension library to the approved library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.

290

_ _______________
7.5.4 Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data
This option enables you to process physical dimension table source files and insert the specified files into the active library. You can process a single table file or specify a list of files to be created. Refer to the description of the applicable table file for information on naming conventions and file formats.

Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

Before using this command


Set the default table path and node in the Default Project Control Data. To add more than one table file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of the table source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. The list file and all the source files should reside in the defined default table directory.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create option.

2. 3.

Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the table file or list file to be processed and added to the active library.

4.

The system displays the default node name and path for the table files, as specified in the Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation.

5.

Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file and begin processing. The system processes the source file and, if successful, it stores the resulting object file in the active library and stores the source file in the associated text library.

291

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.5.5

Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data


This option enables you to process physical dimension table source files and insert the specified files into the active library via batch processing. You can process a single table file or specify a list of files to be created. Refer to the description of the applicable table file for information on naming conventions and file formats.

Before using this command


Set the default table path and node in the Default Project Control Data. To add more than one table file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of the table source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. The list file and all the source files should reside in the define default table directory.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create option.

2. 3.

Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the table file or list file to be processed and added to the active library.

4.

The system displays the default node name and path for the table files, as specified in the Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation.

5.

Accept or Select Other Option Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the source files.

6.

Accept the file and begin processing. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

292

_ _______________
The system processes the source file and, if successful, it stores the resulting object file in the active library and stores the source file in the associated text library.

Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

293

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.5.6

Revise Physical Commodity Data


This option enables you to select a table file from the library, edit the file, and then put it back in the library.

Before using this command


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the tables to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Revise option. The system displays the table files in the active library.

2.

Select Table for Revision Select the table files to be revised and select Accept.

294

_ _______________
3. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.sh file) to enable you to modify the file.

Revise Physical Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

Make any changes to the displayed file. When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. (If you quit the editor, the table is not recompiled.) The system returns to Step 2. You can select another table to be revised or select Exit.

295

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.5.7

Delete Physical Commodity Data


This option enables you to delete a table file or set of table files from the active library. It also deletes the revision dates from the corresponding Table Revision Management Library.

Before using this command


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the tables to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Delete option. The system displays the table files in the active library.

2.

Select Table for Deletion Select the tables to be deleted from the list of tables. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.

3.

Accept or Select Other Option Accept the files and begin processing. The system deletes the table files from the active library.

296

_ _______________
7.5.8 Report Physical Commodity Data
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report option from the Data Management form. The system displays the reporting options on the form.

Report Physical Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to create a report file of all the table files in the active library or those defined by the substring search criteria.

2.

Revise Report Parameters Set the toggle to Default Report to create a report that list the tables in the physical data library. OR Set the toggle to Revision Dates Report and key in a date in the Revision Date field to process all tables modified since the specified revision date. The report lists the full contents of the modified tables with individual revision dates per line.

3.

Set the toggle to Report on Unapproved or Report on Approved to define the source of information to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used. Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created. Select Save, Print or Print/Save.

4. 5.

297

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer to the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting up multiple print queues. If you select the Save or Print/Save option, the system will create a file named <standard>_tables in the default source file location (where <standard> is a prefix depending on the active practice). U.S. Practice European - DIN European - British Standard European - Practice A European - Practice B 6. us din bs eua eub International - JIS International - Australian International - Practice A International - Practice B Company Practice jis aus ina inb cmp

Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the request. Accept to Form Report or Revise Report Parameters Select Accept to create the specified report file.

7.

298

_ _______________
7.5.9 List Physical Commodity Data
This option displays all the table files for the active library with the revision date of each table.

List Physical Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

Before using this command


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the tables to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the List option. The system displays the table files in the active library.

2. 3.

You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Select Cancel to exit the form.

299

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.5.10

Extract Physical Commodity Data


This option enables you to extract a table file out of the active library for editing or printing.

Before using this command


Set the default table path and node in the Default Project Control Data. Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the tables to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Extract from the Data Management form.

2.

Select Table for Extraction Select the tables from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default table directory. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named PD_tbl_list. For example,
The current date and time is: Wed Apr 29 15:59:41 1992 File: File: File: File: File: File: PD_tbl2 PD_tbl3 PD_tbl4 PD_tbl5 PD_tbl6 PD_tbl7 is is is is is is TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_A TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_B TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_C TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_A TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_B TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_C

300

_ _______________
If the list file is less than 24 hours old, the system appends the entries to the file, otherwise it overwrites the file.

Extract Physical Commodity Data

7. Graphic Commodity Data

301

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

302

_ _______________
8. Table Formats and Naming Conventions
Tables are used to store data required for interactive processing of piping and instrument components. This section describes the tables which are included in the physical data libraries. Refer to Physical Data Tables, page 266 for more information on these libraries. Also refer to Piping Job Specification Tables, page 189 for more information on tables.

Table Formats and Naming Conventions

8. Table Formats

303

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.1
8.1.1

Table Conventions
Table Names
Unless otherwise indicated, values for specific and generic parameters are stored in tables whose names are derived from parameters in the PJS. When naming ASCII files in the text libraries, if a dot (.) or a hyphen (-) is included in the Sc/Th column of the piping job specification, the dot or hyphen will be converted to a dollar sign ($) when the table name or ASCII file name is created. The actual character, and not the $, is displayed in all fields representing the actual attribute involved. The following examples illustrate how thicknesses are represented on the basis of the above rule: Actual Characters .25 1 1.375 ASCII equivalent $25 1 1$375

With version 5.0, the Physical Data Library Manager will respect the use of a dash (-) in a table name. This allows you to include a dash in the commodity code for a piping commodity valve, where the commodity code is used to form the name of the dimension table. Commodity codes are read verbatim when they are used to create table names. No conversion of dots (.) or hyphens (-), as described above, takes place. Also note that a dot (.) is not a valid character to include in a table name. For this reason, they should not be included as part of commodity codes for valves.

8.1.2

Comments
You can include any number of comments in a table, using the conventions described below: For single-line comments:
! XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX , or < XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX >

For multi-line comments:


< XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX >

where XXXX... represents the comment text.

304

_ _______________
8.1.3 Revision Markers
Table entries preceded by a karat (>) have been revised since their original release. For example, the section of the table shown below has been revised three times since it was first delivered.

Table Conventions

8. Table Formats

8.1.4

Component Tables
The following conventions apply to the definition of columns in all the tables except tables for specialty items. The following line is required to define the number of input and output columns: No_Inputs x No_Outputs x

The number of input columns must not exceed 2. The number of output columns must not exceed 9; it can be 0. The following statements are used in some tables to indicate that values will be interpolated. Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One

305

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 A definition must be made using the following format regarding the units of measure used in each column of a table: Units= NPD_IN, SF, LB, INT, DEC, IN, RAT, IN, IN, IN

8.1.5

Units
Units are defined for each column of a table as follows: Angle, degrees Angle between runs, degrees Area, DEG DEC FT2 IN2 YD2 MI2 SCM SKM INT LBF3 LB_UKGAL LB_USGAL KIPFT3 USTONFT3 KG_L KG_DM3 KGM3 IN MM IN_DEC MM_DEC GRAIN USTON UKTON MG G NPD_IN NPD_MM PSIG PAG BAR BAR_G ATM INH20

Code-listed attributes Density,

Length, inches Length, millimeter Length, inches decimal Length, mm decimal Mass,

Nominal diameter, inches Nominal diameter, mm Pressure, psig Pressure, pascal gage Pressure, bar Pressure, bar (gage) Pressure, atmospheres Pressure, inches water absolute

306

_ _______________
Pressure, inches water at 32 deg Pressure, inches mercury absolute Pressure, inches mercury at 32 deg Pressure, kg per cm squared (gage) Pressure, kg per cm squared (absolute) Pressure, mm water at 4 deg Pressure, mm mercury at 32 deg Pressure, megaPascal (gage) Rating INH20_32F INHG INHG_32F KG_CM2 KG_CM2_A MMH20 MMHG MPa_g RAT CLxxx and xxx# are expressed as xxx SC_TH_IN SC_TH_MM PSI PA KPA MPA SF SM SMM

Table Conventions

Schedule/thickness, inches Schedule/thickness, millimeters Stress, psi Stress, pascal Stress, kpa Stress, mpa Surface area, square feet Surface area, square meter Surface area, square millimeter Surface area/unit, square feet per foot square meter per meter square millimeter per meter Temperature, degrees Celsius Temperature, degrees Fahrenheit Temperature, degrees Kelvin Temperature, degrees Rankine Unitless alphanumeric

8. Table Formats

SFF SM_M SMM_M DC DF DK DR AN*xx where xx defines the number of characters INT DEC LB KG LBF KGM

Unitless integer Unitless real number Weight, pounds Weight, kilogram Weight/unit, pounds per foot Weight/unit, kilograms per meter

307

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.1.6

Fields (Input/Output Columns)


Attributes can consist of the following field types. The system determines the field type on the basis of data provided in each table. NPD (for nominal diameter) INTEGER2 REAL4 (floating point) AN*x (alphanumeric, where x defines the number of characters up to a maximum of 8)

All entries in the tables are left justified. Field locations and field lengths defined with XXXXs, WWWWs and ZZZZZs in this document are observed. Fractions are not used to define any table value. Adjacent columns in a table are separated by one or more spaces. If a value in a table is not known, a hyphen (-) must be used in the corresponding field. The system interprets this entry as a blank value and displays a blank in reports, drawings, and other data outputs. Real numbers without decimals can be expressed with or without a decimal point. For example, a nominal diameter of twenty inches can be expressed as 20, 20. , or 20.0. For consistency, all delivered tables use the value 20 All alphanumeric values in a table must be enclosed in single quotes ( ). For example, ZZZZZ For tables with only one input column, the generic value ET_AL can be used in the input column. The system translates this entry to indicate that values in the immediately preceding line apply to any input value equal to or greater than the value in the current line.

308

_ _______________
8.1.7 NPD Values
The following table is used to correlate English nominal pipe diameters with their corresponding metric values.

Table Conventions

Nominal Pipe Diameter inches mm 0.125 6 0.250 8 0.375 10 0.500 15 0.750 20 1.000 25 1.250 32 1.500 40 2.000 50 2.500 65 3.000 80 3.500 90 4.000 100 5.000 125 6.000 150 8.000 200 10.00 250 12.00 300

Nominal Pipe Diameter inches mm 14.00 350 16.00 400 18.00 450 20.00 500 22.00 550 24.00 600 26.00 650 28.00 700 30.00 750 32.00 800 34.00 850 36.00 900 38.00 950 40.00 1000 42.00 1050 44.00 1100 46.00 1150 48.00 1200

8. Table Formats

8.1.8

Rating
The following conventions apply to the rating attribute with respect to the naming of data tables: Ratings can be expressed in the PJS in any of the following formats: CLxxxx, xxxx#, or OTxxxx. However, table entries and file names representing the rating exclude the CL, #, or OT characters. This enables the same table to be used regardless of how the rating is defined. In the delivered PJS, these rating formats are used in accordance with the following criteria: CLxxxx refers to an ANSI or API pressure rating xxxx# refers to a pressure rating defined by an organization other than ANSI or API. OTxxxx refers to a rating that meets the applicable ANSI or API rating geometrically but not from a pressure carrying standpoint. An example is a valve supplied with flanged ends meeting the bolting pattern of ANSI CL150 pressure rating but with pressure carrying characteristics different from those of that ANSI rating. Female ends for plastic pipe are usually defined in terms of schedule/thickness and not in terms of rating. To make female ends for plastic pipe follow the rules for other female ends, the applicable schedule/thickness is used as the value for rating. If such rating values contain alphanumeric characters, the system strips all the alpha characters from the rating value and uses only the numeric values in accessing the applicable tables.

309

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 If the rating in the PJS is expressed in alphabetic characters only, the system uses the characters to access a data table. The names of the data tables include all the alphabetic characters included in the PJS. GRAVHD can be used to identify the rating for components rated to sustain a nominal fluid head. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables. OTHER can be used to identify a nonstandard rating value. NONE can be used to identify the rating for components whose ends would normally require the rating value as part of the table name, but for which a rating does not apply. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.

8.1.9

Schedule/Thickness
Schedule or thickness values are shown for all applicable components. In order of preference, schedule and thickness are expressed in terms of: Generic schedules, such as S-STD, S-XS and S-XXS. If the schedule name exceeds the provided field length (for example, S-SDR13.5) it is defined in terms of its wall thickness. Specific schedules, such as S-40, S-60 and S-80. NREQD: This value is used in cases where all of the following conditions apply: The thickness value is not required to purchase the component. Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values. Either stress analysis is not applicable, or the component is considered to be infinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations. Specific wall thicknesses: To insure compatibility between the data tables, the PJS, and wall thickness calculations, thickness is expressed as defined below. Trailing zeroes are not included. Decimal points are not included for numbers without decimals. .xxxx if the thickness is less than 1 inch x if the thickness is an even inch x.xxx if the thickness is 1 inch or larger *Cyyy: The need to perform a thickness calculation is triggered by an entry with the format *Cyyy in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Commodity Item entity. The letters that make up this code have the following meaning: The character C ensures that the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of the component is determined by calculations using the thickness equation defined for the piping materials class in the Default Wall Thickness Equation attribute of the Piping Materials Class entity.

310

_ _______________
MATCH: The need to match the thickness of a component to that of the pipe of the same diameter and of option 1 is triggered by an entry with the format MATCH in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Commodity Item entity. To minimize duplication when the same thickness can be expressed for metallic materials in terms of either a generic or a specific schedule, the following convention is used. For a given nominal diameter, only the schedules shown in the line for that diameter are used in the PJS and in the data tables.

Table Conventions

The characters yyy define the casting, joint or structural grade quality factor (E) times 100. This factor is one of the parameters used in the thickness calculation. If you are defining a calculation for a seamless fitting (E=1) but want to match the thickness for the mating welded pipe (E=0.85), the quality factor for the pipe should be used.

8. Table Formats

311

S-5S

S-10

S-20

S-30

S-60

S-100

S-120

S-140

S-160

S-XXS

_ _______________

312
S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-30 S-30 S-30 S-STD S-STD S-30 S-XS S-XS S-30 S-40 S-60 S-XS S-60 S-60 S-60 S-60 S-60 S-60 S-60 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-XXS S-120 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-140 S-XXS S-140 S-140 S-140 S-140 S-140 S-140 S-140 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-10S S-40 S-40 S-40 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-30 S-30 S-30 S-30 S-30 S-20 S-20 S-20 S-20 S-20 S-20 S-STD S-STD S-STD S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS

S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S

S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S

S-40 S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-40 S-40 S-XS S-40 S-40

S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S

S-80 S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80

S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

NomD 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.750 1.000 1.250 1.500 2.000 2.500 3.000 3.500 4.000 5.000 6.000 8.000 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00 18.00 20.00 22.00 24.00 26.00 28.00 30.00 32.00 34.00 36.00 38.00 40.00 42.00 44.00 46.00 48.00

S-5S

S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD

S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS

_ _______________
8.1.10 Weight Tables
Weight tables are required for the following thicknesses: For components made from pipe material: If the thickness involved is covered by a schedule, tables are required for all commercially available schedules to the full range of their nominal diameter. If the thickness involved is not covered by a schedule, tables are required in 1/16 inch increments from 0.25 to 1.25 inches (inclusive), and from 22 inches to the full range of their nominal diameter. For components made from plate material, tables are required in 1/16 inch increments from 0.25 to 1.25 inches and in 1 inch increments from 12 to 144 inches.

Table Conventions

8. Table Formats

313

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.1.11

Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used to describe the table name formats in this document. (G) (R) BrchTbl Cmdty Code GCP GS MC Op Rat RCP Sc/Th Term TNF TS Type WC Green Red Branch Table Commodity Code Green Connect Point Geometric Industry Standard (from CL575) Model Code Operator/actuator type (from CL550) Pressure Rating Red Connect Point Schedule/Thickness End Preparation (from CL330) Table Name Format Table Suffix (from CL576 and CL577) Termination type (BLT, FEM, or MAL) Weight Code (from CL578)

Refer to Variables for Generic Tables and Variables for Specific Tables for a description of the variables used in table definitions. Generally, values appearing in all uppercase characters (such as BLT or STUD) indicate a hard-coded value.

314

_ _______________
8.2 Table Requirements
This section indicates which tables are required to place a particular type of component (such as a valve or fitting). The table groups listed in this section are used to store data required for interactive processing of piping and instrument components. The applicability of the various table groups is defined as a function of the termination types of the components as defined in the Piping Job Specification (PJS). Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a detailed description of the requirements for specific commodity items, instruments, and miscellaneous piping and instrument items.

Table Requirements

8. Table Formats

Typically, the tables in the table combinations are used to store: The surface area and weight of water for the component. The dimensional parameters for the component. The empty weight of the component and/or data about valve operators.

8.2.1

Tables Required for Piping Components


Valves (6Q1C)
Termination Types Bolted(G) Male(G) Female(G) Bolted(G)-Male(R) Female(G)-Male(R) Applicable Tables MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) MC_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A (if operator code <=24) MC_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) Cmdty Code_WOPD_B (if operator code >24 & <=40)

Bolted(G)-Bolted(R) Bolted(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Bolted(R) Male(G)-Male(R)

Male(G)-Female(R) Male(G)-Bolted(R)

Operators

P15A P15B P59 P60A P25A P25B P59 P60A P26A P26B P59 P60A P26A P26B P59 P60A P27A P27B P59 P60A P31A P31B P60A P60B

315

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.2.1.1

Fittings (6P2C, 6P3C, 6Q2C and 6Q3C)


Termination Types Male(G) Applicable Tables MC_GS_Term(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC

Bolted(G) Female(G) Bolted(G)-Male(R) Female(G)-Male(R) Bolted(G)-Bolted(R) Bolted(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Bolted(R) Male(G)-Male(R)

P11A P11B P51 P15A P15B P52 P25A P25B P61 P26A P26B P62

Male(G)-Bolted(R) Male(G)-Female(R)

Olet fittings

Stubbing fittings

P21A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A P21B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_B P63 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC Excludes olet and stubbing type fittings P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B P64 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC Excludes olet and stubbing type fittings P28A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_A P28B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_B P65 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC P29A MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A Overflow and weight tables do not apply.

Fire and Safety Piping Components (6P4C and 6Q4C)


Termination Types Male(G) Applicable Tables MC_GS_Term(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC

Bolted(G) Female(G) Bolted(G)-Male(R) Female(G)-Male(R) Bolted(G)-Bolted(R) Bolted(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Bolted(R) Male(G)-Male(R)

P11A P11B P51 P15A P15B P52 P25A P25B P61 P26A P26B P62 P21A P21B P63 P27A P27B P64

Male(G)-Bolted(R) Male(G)-Female(R)

316

_ _______________
8.2.1.2 Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C)
P80 P81 Specialty Body Data Operator/Actuator Data

Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C)

8. Table Formats

317

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.2.2

Tables Required for Instrument Components


The following table sets are used for instrument component classes 7P1E (Control Valves and Regulators), 7P2C (Relief Devices), 7P3C (Other in-line Instruments), and 7Q4D (Off-Line Instruments).
I80 I81 Inbody_Specific_AABBCC_MC_n Inbody_Typical_AABBCC_MC_n Inoper_Specific_AABBCC_MC_n Inoper_Typical_AABBCC_MC_n

318

_ _______________
8.3 Generic Tables
This section describes the neutral file formats used to define generic piping and instrument data. The following tables are required to store generic data which applies to both piping and instrument components: TNF G10 G12 G12T STUD_Term_Rat_TS G20 G30 G50 MAL_Term_TS FEM_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS MALWT_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS_WC Attributes Used to Form Table Name BLT_Term_Rat_TS STUD_Rat_TS

Generic Tables

8. Table Formats

These tables are stored in the physical data library. Table format G14, COMPAT_Rat(low)_TS_Rat(high)_TS, which was used with the VAX Piping Design product is not used by the Workstation product. This table format may be included in the physical data library but it will not be accessed by the product.

319

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.3.1

Variables for Generic Tables


The letters P through Z are used in the generic tables to represent the following generic variables. Variable P End Type Bolted Explanation This is the outside diameter of a bolted end of the indicated termination type, rating, and nominal diameter, as defined in the table named "BLT_Term_Rat_TS". This is the outside diameter of a male end of the indicated termination type and nominal diameter, as defined in the table named "MAL_Term_TS". The is the outside diameter of the female end of the component of the indicated termination type, rating, and nominal diameter, as defined in the table named "FEM_Term_Rat_TS". For model graphics, it is desirable for the value of this parameter to be larger than the value of the matching male termination end. However, components such as 90 degree elbows and tees will not place if the value is too large. Therefore, the following values have been defined for this parameter: For PVC and CPVC female ends, use the same as the value of P for the corresponding male termination type. For all other female ends, use 30% of the fitting OD at the female end plus 70% of the matching pipe OD. Q Bolted Male Female Not applicable The value of this variable is "0" for all male ends. This is the depth of socket, as defined in the table named "FEM_Term_Rat_TS". For socketwelded ends, this value is the nominal depth of the socket less 1/16". The actual depth of socket less 1/16" is used to determine a components dimensional parameters. For female threaded ends, this is the thread engagement as defined: in Table 8-1 for components complying with ANSI-B16.12 in Table 8-2 for all other components.

Male

Female

320

_ _______________
R Bolted

Variables for Generic Tables

This is the flange thickness, as defined in the table named "BLT_Term_Rat_TS". This dimension represents the distance from the outermost face of the flange to the back surface of the flange on which the nut rests. It includes any projections of the flange, such as the raised face. For lap-flanged ends, it includes the thickness of the pipe or stub end plus the thickness of the loose flange used. If the Source of Bolt Spec Data is set as a function of termination type, rating, and table suffix in the RDB, the entries for the lap type terminations in the BLT_Term* and STUD_Term* generic tables provide for the addition of wall thickness from the TDB. This parameter is primarily used to calculate stud length. When dealing with specialty components (such as relief valves), you might have to develop many generic tables for precise values. A practical alternative would be to create a table in which values for this parameter are large enough to insure that short studs do not result.

8. Table Formats

Male Female S Bolted

Not applicable. Not applicable. This is the seating depth, as defined in the table named "BLT_Term_Rat_TS". This dimension represents the distance from the outermost surface of the bolted end to the seating surface of the gasket. It will only have a value for small groove, large groove, small female and large female flanged ends, and for mechanical joints. The value of this parameter will be zero for all other bolted ends. Not applicable. Not applicable. This is half of the gasket gap thickness, as defined in the PJS for the applicable piping materials class. Not applicable. Not applicable. This is the diameter of bolts required at a bolted connection, as defined in the table named "STUD_Rat_TS" as a function of the nominal pipe diameter, rating, and table suffix of the applicable bolted end. Not applicable. Not applicable.

Male Female T Bolted

Male Female V Bolted

Male Female

321

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 X Bolted Male Not applicable. This is the wall thickness of the applicable end of a component of the indicated nominal diameter, as defined in the table named "MALWT_Term_Sc/Th_TS_WC". Not applicable. No specific meaning is attached to this variable. Female Z Any

322

_ _______________
Table 8-1. Thread Engagement for Components per ANSI-B16.12
NPD in 1.25 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 Thread Engagement, inches ANSI-B16.12 PDS 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.44 0.44 0.68 0.68 0.77 0.77 0.84 0.84 0.94 0.94 0.96 0.96 1.06 1.06

Variables for Generic Tables

Table 8-2. Thread Engagement for All Other Components


NPD in 0.125 0.25 0.375 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 8 10 12 Thread Engagement, inches, NAVCO ANSI-B1.20.1 Stockham 0.3125 0.2726 0.25 0.4375 0.3945 0.375 0.4375 0.4067 0.375 0.5625 0.5343 0.5 0.5625 0.5533 0.5625 0.6875 0.6609 0.6875 0.6875 0.6809 0.6875 0.6875 0.6809 0.6875 0.75 0.6969 0.75 1.0625 0.932 0.9375 1.125 1.016 1 1.1875 1.071 1.1875 1.094 1.3125 1.187 1.375 1.208 1.4375 1.313 1.625 1.46 1.75 1.61 as Reported By Crane Average 0.25 0.2713 0.375 0.3955 0.375 0.3986 0.5 0.5242 0.5625 0.5602 0.6875 0.6809 0.6875 0.6859 0.6875 0.6859 0.75 0.7367 0.9375 0.9674 1 1.0353 1.0625 1.107 1.125 1.1355 1.25 1.2483 1.3125 1.2985 1.4375 1.396 1.625 1.57 1.75 1.7033 PDS 0.25 0.375 0.375 0.5 0.5625 0.6875 0.6875 0.6875 0.75 0.9375 1 1.0625 1.125 1.25 1.3125 1.4375 1.5625 1.75

8. Table Formats

323

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.3.2

Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10)


This table enables you to define the outside diameter, flange thickness, seating depth, and bolt circle diameter for components with bolted ends. The table name format for this table is: For TNF=G10 BLT_Term_Rat_TS

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition BLT_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=G10 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 4 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! Diam P R S BCD WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END

Example
Table_Data_Definition BLT_20_150_5 ! Description= CL150 raised face flange dimensions ! Source= MSS-SP-42 1/4 & 3/8", ANSI-B16.5-1981 1/2" - 24" & API 605 above 24" ! TNF=G10 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 Date=15-Oct-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 4 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! Diam P R S BCD 0.25 2.5 0.3438 0 1.6875 0.375 2.5 0.3438 0 1.6875 0.5 3.5 0.4375 0 2.375 0.75 3.875 0.5 0 2.75 1 4.25 0.5625 0 3.125 1.25 4.625 0.625 0 3.5 1.5 5 0.6875 0 3.875 2 6 0.75 0 4.75 2.5 7 0.875 0 5.5 3 7.5 0.9375 0 6 3.5 8.5 0.9375 0 7 4 9 0.9375 0 7.5 5 10 0.9375 0 8.5 6 11 1 0 9.5 8 13.5 1.125 0 11.75 10 16 1.1875 0 14.25 12 19 1.25 0 17 14 21 1.375 0 18.75 16 23.5 1.4375 0 21.25 18 25 1.5625 0 22.75 20 27.5 1.6875 0 25

324

_ _______________
24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 END 32 30.9375 32.9375 34.9375 37.0625 39.5625 41.625 44.25 46.25 48.25 50.25 52.8125 54.8125 56.8125 58.8125 61 63 65.9375 67.9375 1.875 1.625 1.75 1.75 1.8125 1.9375 2.0625 2.125 2.1875 2.3125 2.375 2.4375 2.5625 2.6875 2.75 2.8125 2.875 2.9375 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 29.5 29.3125 31.3125 33.3125 35.4375 37.6875 39.75 42.125 44.125 46.125 48.125 50.5625 52.5625 54.5625 56.5625 58.75 60.75 63.4375 65.4375

Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10)

8. Table Formats

325

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.3.3

Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12)


This table defines the number of bolts, the bolt diameter, and the bolt extension for a given NPD, for studs in bolted connections. If the Length Calculation toggle on the Material Takeoff Option form is set to Almost Precise in Project Administrator, the bolt spec data is set as a function of rating and table suffix. The W_n columns are used to classify the bolt extension. The n applies to the value defined in the Piping Commodity Data for the bolt diameter being considered. For example, if the modifier value for the PCD is 0, the value in the W_0 column is used for nut allowance. This capability enables the system to handle special nut allowances, such as when stud tensioning devices are utilized. The table name format for this table is: For TNF=G12 STUD_Rat_TS This table is accessed using values for rating and table suffix derived from the applicable flanged end.

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition STUD_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=G12 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END

Example
Table_Data_Definition STUD_150_5 ! Description= CL150 bolting ! Source= PIPING RDB DATA MANUAL ! TNF=G12 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 0.25 4 0.375 0.5938 0.375 4 0.375 0.5938 0.5 4 0.5 0.6563 1 0.75 4 0.5 0.6563 0.875 1 4 0.5 0.6563 1 -

Date=03-Nov-1987

W_3 -

W_4 -

W_5

326

_ _______________
1.25 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 END 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 16 16 20 20 36 40 44 48 40 44 40 44 48 52 40 44 48 52 56 60 48 52 0.5 0.5 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.875 0.875 1 1 1.125 1.125 1.25 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.875 0.875 1 1 1 1 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.25 1.25 0.6563 0.6563 0.7813 0.7813 0.7813 0.7813 0.7813 0.9063 0.9063 0.9063 1.0313 1.0313 1.1563 1.1563 1.2813 1.3438 1.4688 0.9688 0.9688 0.9688 0.9688 1.0938 1.0938 1.2188 1.2188 1.2188 1.2188 1.3751 1.3438 1.3438 1.3438 1.3438 1.3438 1.4688 1.4688 0.875 1 0.8751 1.125 1 1 1 1.25 1.125 1.125 1.5 1.375 1.625 1.5 1.75 2 2 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.5 1.75 1.75 1.75 2 1.75 1.875 2 2 2 2.125 2 2.125 2.25 2.125 -

Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12)

8. Table Formats

327

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.3.4

Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T)


This table defines the number of bolts, the bolt diameter, and the bolt extension for a given NPD, for studs in bolted connections. If the Length Calculation toggle on the Material Takeoff Option form is set to Precise in Project Administrator, the bolt spec data is set as a function of termination type, rating, and table suffix. The W_n columns are used to classify the bolt extension. The n applies to the value defined in the Piping Materials Class for the bolt diameter being considered. For example, if the modifier value for the PMC is 0, the value in the W_0 column is used for nut allowance. This capability enables the system to handle special nut allowances, such as when stud tensioning devices are utilized. The table name format for this table is: STUD_Term_Rat_TS This table is accessed using values for termination type, rating and table suffix derived from the applicable flanged end.

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition STUD_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= PIPING RDB DATA MANUAL Parameter W_2 equals 50% of applicable stud diameter plus W_0. TNF=G12T By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! !

Example
Table_Data_Definition STUD_20_150_5 Description= CL150 bolting Source= PIPING RDB DATA MANUAL Parameter W_2 equals 50% of applicable stud diameter plus W_0. TNF=G12T By=GJH Ckd By=NP Rev=0 Date=04-Oct-1989 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5 0.5 4 0.5 0.625 1 0.75 4 0.5 0.6875 0.875 1 4 0.5 0.625 1 ! ! ! !

328

_ _______________
1.25 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 END 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 16 16 20 20 36 40 44 48 40 44 40 44 48 52 40 44 48 52 56 60 48 52 0.5 0.5 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.875 0.875 1 1 1.125 1.125 1.25 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.875 0.875 1 1 1 1 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.25 1.25 0.6875 0.625 0.8125 0.8125 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.875 0.9375 0.9375 1 1.0625 1.1875 1.125 1.25 1.375 1.4375 1.0625 1.0625 1.0625 1 1.125 1.125 1.3125 1.25 1.25 1.3125 1.5 1.375 1.375 1.4375 1.375 1.4375 1.5 1.5625 0.875 1 1.125 1.125 1 1 1 1.25 1.125 1.125 1.5 1.375 1.625 1.5 1.75 2 2.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.5 1.75 1.75 1.875 2 1.75 1.875 2 2 2 2.125 2 2.125 2.25 2.125 1.25 1.3125 1.3125 1.4375 1.5 1.6875 1.625 1.8125 1.9375 2.0625 1.4375 1.4375 1.4375 1.375 1.5625 1.5625 1.8125 1.75 1.75 1.8125 2.0625 1.9375 1.9375 2 1.9375 2 2.125 2.1875 -

Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T)

8. Table Formats

329

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.3.5

Generic Table for Male Ends (G20)


This table enables you to define the surface area, water weight, outside diameter, and 1/2 pipe OD for components with male ends. The table name format for this table is: For TNF=G20 MAL_Term_TS

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition MAL_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=G20 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN, SFF, IN, IN ! Unt Sur ! Diam Area P P/2 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END

Example
Table_Data_Definition MAL_300_5 ! Description= Pipe outside diameters ! Source= ANSI-B-36.10M, 36.19M, API-5L, 5LE, 5LP, 5LS & 5LU ! TNF=G20 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=10-Sep-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN, SFF, IN, IN ! Unt Sur ! Diam Area P P/2 0.125 0.106 0.405 0.2025 0.25 0.141 0.54 0.27 0.375 0.177 0.675 0.3375 0.5 0.22 0.84 0.42 0.75 0.275 1.05 0.525 1 0.344 1.315 0.6575 1.25 0.434 1.66 0.83 1.5 0.497 1.9 0.95 2 0.622 2.375 1.1875 2.5 0.753 2.875 1.4375 3 0.916 3.5 1.75 3.5 1.047 4 2 4 1.178 4.5 2.25 5 1.456 5.5625 2.7813 6 1.73 6.625 3.3125 8 2.26 8.625 4.3125 10 2.81 10.75 5.375 12 3.34 12.75 6.375 14 3.67 14 7 16 4.19 16 8

330

_ _______________
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 END 4.71 5.24 5.76 6.28 6.81 7.33 7.85 8.38 8.9 9.42 9.95 10.47 10.99 11.52 12.04 12.57 13.61 14.66 15.71 16.76 17.80 18.85 19.90 20.94 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40

Generic Table for Male Ends (G20)

8. Table Formats

331

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.3.6

Generic Table for Female Ends (G30)


This table enables you to define the outside diameter and depth of socket for female ends. The table name format for this table is: For TNF=G30 FEM_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition FEM_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=G30 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN ! Diam P Q WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END

Example
Table_Data_Definition FEM_420_150_5 ! Description= CL150 socketwelded flange hub O.D. and socketwelded valve O.D. ! Source= ANSI-B16.11 CL3000 for .125 to .375 dias, ANSI-B16.5 above .375 dia. ! TNF=G30 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=29-May-1986 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN ! Diam P Q 0.125 0.486 0.3125 0.25 0.6353 0.3125 0.375 0.7755 0.3125 0.5 0.9443 0.3125 0.75 1.185 0.375 1 1.5018 0.4375 1.25 1.8558 0.5 1.5 2.0988 0.5625 2 2.5813 0.625 2.5 3.0813 0.6875 3 3.725 0.75 END

332

_ _______________
8.3.7 Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50)
This table enables you to define empty weight and wall thickness data for male ends. The table name format for this table is: For TNF=G50 MALWT_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS_WC

Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50)

Neutral File Format


8. Table Formats
Table_Data_Definition MALWT_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=G50 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN, LBF, LBF, IN ! GCP Unit Wt Unit Wt ! Diam Empty Water X WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END

Example
Table_Data_Definition MALWT_300_S$40_5_52 ! Description= Schedule 40 wall thickness ! Source= ANSI-B36.10M-1985 ! TNF=G50 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN, LBF, LBF, IN ! GCP Unit Wt Unit Wt ! Diam Empty Water X 12 53.52 48.5 0.406 14 63.44 58.63 0.438 18 104.67 96.92 0.562 20 123.11 120.45 0.594 24 171.29 174.22 0.688 32 230.08 319.2 0.688 34 244.77 362.25 0.688 36 282.35 405.09 0.75 END

Date=10-Sep-1987

333

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.4

Piping Component Tables


This section describes the table formats used to define component data. The following tables are required to store component-specific data required for interactive processing of piping components: These tables are stored in the physical data library. Use tables P11*-P20* for piping component data based only on green connect point data. TNF P11A P11B P15A P15B Attributes Used to Form Table Name MC_GS_Term(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B

Use tables P21*-P30* for piping component data based on green and red connect point data. For more information, refer to Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A), page 342 and Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Overflow Data (P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B), page 344 . TNF P21A P21B P25A P25B P26A P26B P27A P27B P28A P28B P29A Attributes Used to Form Table Name MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_B MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A

Use tables P31*-P40* for dimensional data based on green connect point data of piping valve operators whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) are equal to or less than 24. TNF Attributes Used to Form Table Name P31A MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A P31B MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B Use tables P51-P58 for non-valve piping component empty weights based on green connect point data. TNF Attributes Used to Form Table Name P51 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC P52 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC

334

_ _______________
Use table P59 for empty weights of piping valves, including weight of operators, whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) are less than or equal to 24, regardless of whether only green connect point or both green and red connect point data applies to the valve. P59 Cmdty Code

Piping Component Tables

Use tables P60* for empty weights of piping valves, weights and centers of gravity of valve operators, model codes of valve operators and for dimensional data of piping valve operators whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) exceed 24 and are less than or equal to 40, regardless of whether only green connect point or both green and red connect point data applies to the valve.

8. Table Formats

P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A P60B Cmdty Code_WOPD_B Use tables P61-P70 for non-valve piping component empty weights based on green and red connect point data. Refer to Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65), page 352 for more information. TNF P61 P62 P63 P64 P65 Attributes Used to Form Table Name MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC

Use tables P80 and P81 for data about piping specialty components defined in the Material Reference Database. Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components, page 354 for more information. P80 P81 Specialty Body Data Operator/Actuator Data

335

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.4.1

Variables for Specific Tables


Letters A through O represent variables which are specific to a component. Variable A End Type Any Explanation For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component, this is the distance from the origin of the component to the outermost face of any of its ends. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component, this is the distance from the origin of the component to the outermost face of the end in the vicinity of PCP1. Bolted Male Female This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. Not applicable. This value can be deduced from the expression E + Q using the values of E and Q from the appropriate tables. For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component, this parameter does not apply. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component, this is the distance from the origin of the component to the outermost face of the end in the vicinity of PCP2. Bolted Male Female This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. Not applicable. This value can be deduced from the expression F + Q using the values of F and Q from the appropriate tables. For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component, this parameter does not apply. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component, this is the distance from the origin of the component to the outermost face of the end in the vicinity of PCP3. Bolted This value is included in the appropriate dimension table.

Any

Any

336

_ _______________
Male Female Not applicable. D Any For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component, this parameter does not apply.

Variables for Specific Tables

This value can be deduced from the expression G + Q using values of G and Q from the appropriate tables.

For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component, this is the distance from the origin of the component to the outermost face of the end in the vicinity of PCP4. Bolted Male Female This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. Not applicable. This value can be deduced from the expression H + Q using values of H and Q from the appropriate tables. For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component, this is the distance from the origin of the component to any of its PCPs. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component, this is the distance from the origin of the component to PCP1. Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression A + T using the values of A and T from the appropriate tables. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component, this parameter does not apply. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component, this is the distance from the origin of the component to PCP2. Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression B + T using the values of B and T from the appropriate tables. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table.

8. Table Formats

Any

Male Female F Any

Male Female

337

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 G Any For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component, this parameter does not apply. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component, this is the distance from the origin of the component to PCP3. Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression C + T using values of C and T from the appropriate tables. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component, this parameter does not apply. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component, this is the distance from the origin of the component to PCP4. Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression D + T using the values of D and T from the appropriate tables. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. These values are used in dimension tables for specific components as required by the component being defined. This is the overall length of the component considering the outermost surface at each end of the component.

Male Female H Any

Male Female I,J,K,L,M,N Any

Any

338

_ _______________
8.4.2
This table enables you to define general parameters for components which require only green connect point data. The table name formats for this table are: For TNF=P11A MC_GS_Term(G)_A For TNF=P15A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A

Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A)

Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A)

8. Table Formats

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! GCP Surf Water Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Area Weight Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! !

Example
Table_Data_Definition GAT_40_20_150_A Description= CL150 gate valve raised face flanged ends Source= ANSI-B16.10-1986 TNF=P15A By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 Date=29-Oct-1987 SN=V1 Par 1=A No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN ! GCP Surf Water Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Area Weight Par 1 0.25 2 0.375 2 0.5 2.125 0.75 2.3125 1 2.5 1.25 2.75 1.5 3.25 2 3.5 2.5 3.75 3 4 4 4.5 5 5 6 5.25 8 5.75 10 6.5 12 7 14 7.5 ! ! ! !

339

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
16 18 20 24 26 28 30 36 END 8 8.5 9 10 11 12 12 14

340

_ _______________
8.4.3 Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B)
This table enables you to define overflow parameters for components to which table name formats P11A and P15A apply. The table name formats for this table are: For TNF=P11B MC_GS_Term(G)_B For TNF=P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B

Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B)

8. Table Formats

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ Par 8=ZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7 Par 8 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! !

341

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.4.4

Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A)


This table enables you to define parameters for components which require both green and red connect point data. The table name formats for this table are: TNF=P21A TNF=P25A TNF=P26A TNF=P27A TNF=P28A TNF=P29A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_A MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 7 Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! Nom Diam Surf Weight Dimensional Parameters ! GCP RCP Area Water Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! !

Example
Table_Data_Definition E90R_39_300_300_A Description= 90 deg long radius reducing elbow beveled ends Source= ANSI-B16.9-1978 TNF=P21A By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=15-May-1986 SN=F84 Par 1=E Par 2=K Par 3=F Par 4=L No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6 Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN, IN, IN, IN ! Nom Diam Surf Weight Dimensional Parameters ! GCP RCP Area Water Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 2 1 3 0.53 3 0.53 2 1.25 3 0.3575 3 0.3575 2 1.5 3 0.2375 3 0.2375 2.5 1.25 3.75 0.6075 3.75 0.6075 2.5 1.5 3.75 0.4875 3.75 0.4875 2.5 2 3.75 0.25 3.75 0.25 3 1.5 4.5 0.8 4.5 0.8 3 2 4.5 0.5625 4.5 0.5625 3 2.5 4.5 0.3125 4.5 0.3125 3.5 2 5.25 0.8125 5.25 0.8125 3.5 2.5 5.25 0.5625 5.25 0.5625 ! ! ! !

342

Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A)

_ _______________
5.25 6 6 6 6 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 9 9 12 12 12 15 15 15 18 18 18 21 21 21 24 24 24 27 27 27 27 30 30 30 30 30 36 36 36 36 36 36 0.25 1.0625 0.8125 0.5 0.25 1.3438 1.0313 0.7813 0.5313 1.5625 1.3125 1.0625 0.5312 2.0625 1.5312 1 2.5937 2.0625 1.0625 3.0625 2.0625 1 2.6875 1.625 0.625 2.625 1.625 1 3.625 2.625 2 1 4.625 3.625 3 2 1 5.625 5 4 3 2 1 5.25 6 6 6 6 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 9 9 12 12 12 15 15 15 18 18 18 21 21 21 24 24 24 27 27 27 27 30 30 30 30 30 36 36 36 36 36 36 0.25 1.0625 0.8125 0.5 0.25 1.3438 1.0313 0.7813 0.5313 1.5625 1.3125 1.0625 0.5312 2.0625 1.5312 1 2.5937 2.0625 1.0625 3.0625 2.0625 1 2.6875 1.625 0.625 2.625 1.625 1 3.625 2.625 2 1 4.625 3.625 3 2 1 5.625 5 4 3 2 1

3.5 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 10 12 12 12 14 14 14 16 16 16 18 18 18 18 20 20 20 20 20 24 24 24 24 24 24 END

3 2 2.5 3 3.5 2.5 3 3.5 4 3 3.5 4 5 4 5 6 5 6 8 6 8 10 8 10 12 10 12 14 10 12 14 16 10 12 14 16 18 12 14 16 18 20 22

8. Table Formats

343

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.4.5

Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Overflow Data (P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B)


This table enables you to define overflow parameters for components to which table name formats P21A, P25A, P26A, P27A and P28A apply. The table name formats for this table are: For TNF=P21B For TNF=P25B For TNF=P26B For TNF=P27B For TNF=P28B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_B

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 7 Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! Nom Diam Dimensional Parameters ! GCP RCP Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7 WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! !

344

_ _______________
8.4.6 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A)
This table enables you to define parameters for valve operators of piping valves whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) are equal to or less than 24. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=P31A MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A

Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A)

8. Table Formats

where Type can have the following possible values: Preparation 2-199 300-399 400-599 Type BLT MAL FEM

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=P31Y By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ Par 8=ZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7 Par 8 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! !

Example
Table_Data_Definition GAT_BLT_150_3_A Description=Stem and handwheel operator Source=PDS Document 2630-33-OP TNF=P31A By=GJH Ckd By=RJW SN=OP3 Par 1=Y1 Par 2=Y2 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Par 1 Par 2 0.25 8.375 3.75 0.375 8.375 3.75 0.5 8.375 3.75 0.75 9.25 4.125 1 11.875 6 1.25 12.5 6 1.5 17.75 10 ! ! ! !

Rev=0

Date=26-Feb-1987

345

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 END 17.813 20.125 22.375 28.188 31.75 35.375 45 52.5 61.125 70.5 79.75 89 97.25 105 112.75 116 123.25 140 145 150 155.5 10 10 12 13.75 13.75 15.5 19.5 19.5 20 24 28 30 30 30 36 36 36 36 36 36 36

346

Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B)

_ _______________

8.4.7

Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B)
This table enables you to define overflow parameters for operators to which table name format P31A applies. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=P31B MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B where Type can have the following possible values:

8. Table Formats

Preparation 2-199 300-399 400-599

Type BLT MAL FEM

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=P31B By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ Par 8=ZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7 Par 8 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! !

347

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.4.8

Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data (P51,P52,P59)
This table enables you to define empty weights for components to which table name formats P51, P52 and P59 apply. The table name formats for this table are: For TNF=P51 For TNF=P52 For TNF=P59 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC Cmdty Code

With version 5.0, the Physical Data Library Manager will respect the use of a dash (-) in a table name. This allows you to include a dash in the commodity code for a piping commodity valve, where the commodity code is used to form the name of the dimension table.

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN, LB ! GCP Weight ! Diam Empty WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ END

Examples
Table_Data_Definition VAABAHCCAA ! Description= CL150 gate valve raised face flanged ends weight ! Source= CRANE catalog for figure 47XU ! TNF=P59 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=29-May-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN, LB ! GCP Weight ! Diam Empty 2 46 2.5 70 3 76 4 110 5 155 6 175 8 310 10 455 12 650 14 860 16 1120

348

Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data (P51,P52,P59)

_ _______________

18 20 24 30 END

1400 2125 3120 4250

Table_Data_Definition E90LR_39_300_S$STD_52 ! Description= 90 deg long radius elbow beveled ends ! Source= Taylor Forge Cat. 722 ! TNF=P51 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN, LB ! GCP Weight ! Diam Empty 0.5 0.17 0.75 0.17 1 0.34 1.25 0.58 1.5 0.84 2 1.5 2.5 3 3 4.7 3.5 6.6 4 8.9 5 15 6 24 8 47 10 83 12 123 14 158 16 207 18 263 20 323 22 392 24 468 26 550 28 625 30 733 32 825 34 36 1061 38 40 42 1442 44 46 48 END

Date=24-Apr-1986

8. Table Formats

349

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.4.9

Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves (P60A)


This table enables you to define empty weights of piping valves, weights and centers of gravity of valve operators, model codes of valves operators and dimensional data of piping valve operators whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550, Operator/Actuator Type) exceed 24 and are less than or equal to 40. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_WOPD_A Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=P60A By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, LB, LB, IN, IN, IN, DEG, IN, IN ! GCP Weight Weight Oper Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Vlv Emp Oper Code Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! !

Example
Table_Data_Definition VAABAHCCGR_WOPD_A Description=Crane 47 gate valve with gear operator 3X-N for 14", 4X-N for 16, 18 & 20", & 6X-N for 24" valve. Par "Y4" includes a 8" mounting adaptor. Source=CRANE catalog for Converto-Gear valve operators TNF=P60A By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=1 Date=01-Dec-1987 SN=VARIES No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, LB, LB, INT, IN, IN, DEG, IN, IN ! GCP Weight Weight Oper Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Vlv Emp Oper Code Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 14 860 75 331 57.625 2.375 0 61.1875 8.75 16 1120 109 331 62 3.625 0 65.9688 10.625 18 1400 126 331 69.8125 4.25 0 73.7188 10.625 20 2125 150 331 80.375 5.5 0 84.2188 10.625 24 3120 248 331 92.75 4.625 0 99.375 15.25 END ! ! ! ! ! !

350

Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves, Overflow Data (P60B)

_ _______________

8.4.10

Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves, Overflow Data (P60B)
This table enables you to define overflow parameters for operators/actuators to which table name format P60A applies. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=P60B Cmdty Code_WOPD_B

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_WOPD_B Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=P60B By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! !

8. Table Formats

Example
Table_Data_Definition VAABAHCCGR_WOPD_B Description=Crane 47 gate valve with gear operator 3X-N for 14", 4X-N for 16, 18 & 20", & 6X-N for 24" valve. Source=CRANE catalog for Converto-Gear valve operators TNF=P60B By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=0 Date=22-May-1987 SN=VARIES No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 7 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 Y10 Y11 Y12 14 3.375 6.6875 12.375 20 0 16 3.625 7.2188 15.25 20 0 18 3.625 7.2188 15.25 24 0 20 3.625 7.2188 15.25 30 0 24 5.375 11.375 18.5 30 0 END ! ! ! ! !

351

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.4.11

Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65)
This table enables you to define empty weights for components to which table name formats P61, P62, P63, P64, and P65 apply: The table name formats for this table are: For TNF=P61 For TNF=P62 For TNF=P63 For TNF=P64 For TNF=P65 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC

Neutral File Format


Table_Data_Definition WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, LB ! Nom Diam Weight ! GCP RCP Empty WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ END

Example
Table_Data_Definition REDC_39_300_S$60_300_S$40_52 ! Description= Concentric reducer beveled ends weight. ! Source= TAYLOR FORGE Cat. 722, weights for schedule 60 fitting ! TNF=P63 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=15-Aug-1986 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, LB ! Nom Diam Weight ! GCP RCP Empty 14 12 92 16 14 125 16 12 125 18 14 173 18 12 173 20 18 278 20 14 278 20 12 278 22 20 22 18 22 14 -

352

Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65)

_ _______________

24 24 END

20 18

397 397

8. Table Formats

353

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.4.12

Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components


Six dimension tables are used for each combination of piping specialty generic name (AABBCC code) and piping specialty model code. The AABBCC code is defined in the PDS Sort Code attribute of the Piping Specialty Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. The tables used to to define the physical data for piping specialty components have the same format as those used to define instrument components. The table names are of the format: EQBODY_SPECIFIC_<PSC>_<MC>_A, _B, _C - Specialty Body Data EQOPER_SPECIFIC_<PSC>_<MC>_A, _B, _C - Specialty Operator/Actuator Data Refer to Instrument Component Tables, page 355 for more information on these tables.

354

_ _______________
8.5 Instrument Component Tables
Six dimension tables are used for each combination of instrument name (pds_sort_code) and instrument model code. Multiple tables are required since tables with one input are limited to nine outputs. The instrument pds_sort_code is defined in the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database (Table 204 attribute 18). (For the delivered examples, the pds_sort_code is the Instrument AABBCC code as defined in the PDS Component Data Reference Guide.) Input to these tables is defined in the physical_data_id attribute of the Instrument Component Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 17). The entries in the tables must agree with the entries in the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. Each table is limited to approximately 60,000 bytes or 750 lines. When the tables are created in the Physical Data Library, you should define the values for the physical units for length, surface area, and weight to match the seed data defined for the project.

Instrument Component Tables

8. Table Formats

8.5.1

Instrument Body (I80 and P80)


Three tables define the instrument body physical and geometric data for each combination of instrument pds_sort_code and the model code in the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. The default prefix for these table names is Inbody. You can specify a user-defined prefix up to 6 characters for the table names. If you use a user-defined prefix, you must revise the appropriate Piping Eden modules for the instruments. The prefix is followed by either Specific or Typical, the instrument pds_sort_code, the model code, and a letter indicating the table (A-C).

355

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_A

The input field is the physical_data_id for the instrument. The first four output fields are the surface area, the dry weight, the water weight, and the number of connect points for the instrument. The remaining output fields are the dimensional parameters P2 through P6, as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.

Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_B

The output fields are the dimensional parameters P7 through P15, as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.

356

_ _______________
Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_C

Instrument Component Tables

8. Table Formats

The output fields are the dimensional parameters P16 through P24, as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.

357

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

8.5.2

Instrument Operator (I81 and P81)


Three tables are required for the instrument operator/actuator geometric data for each combination of instrument pds_sort_code and model code in the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. The default prefix for these table names is Inoper. You can specify a user-defined prefix, up to 6 characters, for the table names. If you specify a user-defined prefix, you must revise the appropriate Piping Eden modules for these instrument operators. The prefix is followed by either Specific or Typical, the instrument pds_sort_code, the model code, and a letter indicating the table (A - C).

Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_A

The first two output fields for this table are the operator weight and the operator type. The operator type must be loaded in the modifier attribute of the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. The operator type is the number (such as 411) representing the operator and not the symbol name (such as OP_411). The remaining output fields are dimensional parameters Y2 through Y8, as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide. For some operators, the first three dimensional parameters, Y2 through Y4, define the center of gravity for the operator in terms of offsets from the instrument center.

358

_ _______________
Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_B

Instrument Operator (I81 and P81)

8. Table Formats

The output fields are the dimensional parameters Y9 through Y17, as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.

Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_C

The output fields are the dimensional parameters Y18 through Y24, as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.

359

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

360

_ _______________
9. Material Description Data
The PDS 3D modules use the Material Description Library and the material data in the Material Reference Database to provide material descriptions for commodity items and specialty items. This data is accessed for Material Take-off (MTO) reporting from the Design Database. Other miscellaneous reporting. Interfaces to a material control system. Stress analysis. Isometric drawing extraction. The alphanumeric commodity data is made up of four major parts:

Material Description Data

Material Tables in the Material Reference Database - These database tables (211 and 212) contain commodity definitions which enable you to further classify the commodity items defined in the Piping Job Specification. This database information tends to be customer-specific. Short Material Description Library - This library contains the short bill-of-material (BOM) descriptions for all piping commodity items and the BOM description addenda for taps. Long Material Description Library - This library contains the long bill-of-material descriptions for all piping commodity items. The long BOM description is only used for requisitions. Specialty Material Description Library - This library contains the bill-of-material descriptions for engineered items, in-line instruments, and pipe supports. The material description data in these files is used for reporting and material control and is not required for the interactive placement of symbols in the model. This data is only accessed during a batch (non-interactive) process.

9. Material Description Data

Commodity Code
The system uses the commodity code as an index to access the descriptions in the material description libraries. You can use the commodity code defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data table (Table 202 attribute 18) or a user-defined commodity code defined in the Size-Dependent Material Data table (Table 211 attribute 7).

361

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

The source of the commodity code and other processing options for reporting are defined for a model with the Material Takeoff Options form of the Project Data Manager. The commodity code represents that set of parameters that completely describe a commodity item, exclusive of nominal piping diameter and thickness. The character length for the commodity code is determined from the character length of the commodity code in the Size Dependent Data table of the database, or from the character length of the commodity code in the Piping Commodity Data table of the database, depending on which is being used to access the material descriptions. The delivered commodity codes use a 10 character code to fully identify the item. The first letter of the commodity code identifies the basic type of component, such as a valve or flange. The remaining characters provide a detailed description of the component. The first character designations are:

362

_ _______________
B D E F G H M N O P Flanged and Misc. Fittings Fire and Safety Components Steam Specialties Flanges Flanged Specialties Strainers Misc. Wetted Components Misc. Non-Wetted Components Tubing and Hose Pipe Q R S T U V W X Y Socket End Fittings Tubing Fittings Socketwelded Fittings Threaded Fittings Underground Fittings Valves Welded Fittings Gaskets Bolting

Material Description Data

Examples
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 _____________________________ P A D A A B C A A E P AD AA BC AAE Pipe Pipe, Plain Ends Seamless X-Strong (s-xs) ASTM A106 Gr. B

9. Material Description Data

V A A B A H C C A A V A A B A H CC AA Valve Gate Valve CL150 Raised Face Flanged Ends Carbon Steel Trim 8 Crane 47 Blank

Refer to Appendix E of the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a complete listing of the delivered commodity codes. You can use the delivered commodity codes or create your own naming scheme. Regardless of the scheme used, all the codes must be unique and there must be an exact match between the commodity code specified for an item in the Material Reference Database and commodity codes used to define the material descriptions in the Material Descriptions Library.

363

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Tap Commodity Codes


The delivered tap codes use a 10 character code to full identify the taps material description addendum. The basic format of the tap commodity code is A BBB CCC DDD where A BBB E if English. the nominal diameter value of the tap such as $50, $75, or 001. The use of leading and trailing zeroes is specific to this table naming convention. ($ represents a decimal point.) End preparation value as defined in code list set 330. user-defined value.

CCC DDD

Example
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 _____________________________ E $ 5 0 4 2 1 0 6 4 E $50 421 064 English NPD = 0.5 inches SWE - socketwelded end unique number

Tri-Clover Commodity Code Logic


The Tri-Clover commodity codes are based on Tri-Clover part numbers, but have been modified so that they are less than 18 characters.

Example
Tri-Clover part number:
BS14AM-4"-316L-PL BS14AM 4" 316L PL = = = = Part Description Size Material Grade Surface Finish Description

364

_ _______________
Tri-Clover commodity code:
BS14AM316LPL

Material Description Data

In the Tri-Clover commodity code, the dashes ("-") and size are removed so that the commodity code is less than 18 characters. The commodity code description lists the full part number.

9. Material Description Data

365

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

9.1

Material Data in the Material Reference Database


The Material Reference Database contains two database tables which contain Material Data. Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item that is dependent on the commodity code, nominal piping diameter, and schedule/thickness. It is used for miscellaneous batch reporting, such as construction cost reports and requisition orders, and interfaces to material control, stress analysis, and isometric drawing extraction. Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specific commodity item that is dependent on both the Piping Commodity Library code and nominal piping diameter range. This data is used strictly for generating implied material for MTO reporting and material control. It is not used for welds, bolts, nuts, or gaskets, but is reserved for other types of implied material, such as caps or stubs, for a specific commodity item. It is also used for reporting the implied components of a commodity item (such as cap screws). Refer to Material Reference Database Structure, page 56, for information on the structure of these database tables. Also refer to the description of the Piping Job Specification Manager, page 145, for information on loading material data into these database tables via neutral files.

366

_ _______________
9.2 Short Material Description Library

Short Material Description Library

This library contains the short bill of materials description for all piping commodity items and the description addenda for taps. The short BOM description is used for MTO reporting and for reporting from the Piping Job Specification. This parameter is required during the creation of the Piping Job Specification. Nominal piping diameter is not included in this description. The short material descriptions are delivered in the files \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_shbom.l - object library The short material descriptions can be up to 240 characters in length.

Neutral Files
You can use neutral files to insert data into the Short Material Description Library or replace existing data. The neutral files for the delivered material descriptions are contained in the text library. You can use the in the following files: The Short Material Description Library is created from two neutral files. (These can be created with a text editor such as EMACS or vi.) A neutral file containing the short material descriptions for commodity items. The neutral file contains unique Commodity Codes followed by at least one space and a description enclosed in single quotes. It also contains the chain wheel descriptions and implied material descriptions associated with a commodity item. The commodity code identifies the Piping Commodity Library code or customers commodity code. The character length for this code is determined from the character length of the commodity code in the Size Dependent Data table of the database, or from the character length of the commodity library code in the Piping Commodity Data table of the database, depending on which is being used to access the material descriptions. For chain wheels the commodity code has the format CHAIN_xx, where xx represents the chain wheel number (for example, CHAIN_12). The chain wheel number is defined in the component and instrument analysis entities of the TDB. A neutral file containing the material description addenda for taps. This file contains the tap code and the text for the tap description. The tap code identifies the unique identification of a tap.

9. Material Description Data

367

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 The following conventions are used to identify different types of information in the material descriptions: All information to the left of the carat () is used in MTO reporting and isometric extraction, but is excluded from Spec reporting. Information appearing in |Pipes| indicates information for Spec descriptions only. This information is excluded from the descriptions for MTO reporting and isometric extraction. Information appearing in [brackets] indicates a label type from the Label Description Library. The system uses the label format to determine the information to be included in the material description for MTO reporting and isometric extraction. The label information is never used in Spec reporting. ||

[]

The following label types are provided in the product delivery: Label No 400 401 402 403 406 407 409 412 414 416 417 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 Data in Label Comp cmdty code Piping sch/thk 1 Tag no Component sch/thk 1 Component sch/thk 1 b Component sch/thk 2 Component sch/thk 2 b Component sch/thk 1 x 2 Component sch/thk 1 x 2 b Component sch/thk 1 x 3 Component sch/thk 1 x 3 b Bonnet length Piping chain length Reinforcing weld size Instr chain length RPAD width x thick Comp NPD 1 Monitor elev length Hydrant cover Blank/spacer thk Source of Data Component Pipe Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component

Data Retrieval
The system uses the commodity code to retrieve the short material descriptions from the Material Description Library.

368

_ _______________
Commodity Material Descriptions
! ! ! DEFINE SHORT DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Thu Apr 23 14:16:58 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_shbom.l

Short Material Description Library

!Cmdty Code ====================================Description======================================== CHAIN_1003 Chainwheel operator each with [422] of total chain length for [426] NPD valve with commodity code [400] CHAIN_1005 Chainwheel operator each with [422] of total chain length for [426] NPD valve with commodity code [400] CHAIN_1251 Chainwheel operator each with [424] of total chain length for valve with tag no [402] DAABAXAABE Monitor, CL150 FFFE, station type, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB0309-21 DAABAXAABF Monitor, CL150 FFFE, station type 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/fog nozzle, Stang BB0309-21 DACBAXABBC Monitor, CL150 FFFE, elevated type, free standing, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet, [427], w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle and two reaction supports, Stang BB2999- DACBAXABBD Monitor, CL300 FFFE, elevated type, supported, 6" CL300 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet, [427], w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB3561 DBAAAXBAAB Fire hydrant, CL125 FFFE, 5" size, counterclockwise open, 4.5" steamer nozzle, two 2.5" hose nozzles equipped w/caps and chains, [428], American Darling B-50-B DCBGDXEADA Hose rack, 300#, FTE, w/valve, wall mount, rt hand w/100 ft hose & fog nozzle Powhatan 30-333 DDAXCJDAAA Spray sprinkler, MTE, filled cone w/rupture disc, 304, Grinnell, Mulsifyre Projector S-1 FAAAAAWAAA Flange, CL150, FFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAAAAAWWAA Flange, CL150, FFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, cement lined, [409]|bore to match| FAAABADIIA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore FAAABADIIF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore FAAABADNPF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore FAAABAOAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore FAAABAOABB Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore FAAABAOFFH Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore FAAABAWAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAAABAWABB Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAAABAWFFH Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAAABAWFFL Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAAABAWGFD Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASME-SA182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAAABAWIIA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAAABAWIIF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAAABAWNPF Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAAABBDAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-XXS bore FAAADAOAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore FAAADAOFFC Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore FAAADAWAAA Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match| FAAADAWFFC Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match| FAAADBDFFC Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-XXS bore FAABBADIIA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore FAABBADIIB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304L, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore FAABBADIIF Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore FAABBAOAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore FAABBAOABB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore FAABBAOFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore FAABBAOFFH Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore FAABBAWAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAABBAWABB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAABBAWFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAABBAWFFH Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAABBAWFFL Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAABBAWIIA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAABBAWIIB Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304L, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAABBAWIIF Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAABBAWNPF Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| FAABBBDAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-XXS bore FAABDADIIJ Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F321, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-80S bore FAABDAOAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore FAABDAOFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore FAABDAWAAA Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match| FAABDAWFFC Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match| FAABDAWFFH Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match| FAABDAWIIJ Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F321, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match| FAADBADIIA Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore FAADBADIIF Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore FAADBAOAAA Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore

9. Material Description Data

369

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
FAADBAOABE FAADBAWAAA FAADBAWABE FAADBAWFFC FAADBAWFFH FAADBAWFFL FAADBAWIIA Flange, Flange, Flange, Flange, Flange, Flange, Flange, CL600, CL600, CL600, CL600, CL600, CL600, CL600, RFFE/BE, RFFE/BE, RFFE/BE, RFFE/BE, RFFE/BE, RFFE/BE, RFFE/BE, ASME-SA105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore ASTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| ASME-SA105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| ASTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| ASTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| ASTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match| ASTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|

Tap Material Descriptions


! ! ! DEFINE SHORT DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Thu Apr 23 12:09:23 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_shbom.l

!Cmdty Code ====================================Description================================ E$12591XXX 0.125" diam hole E$25591XXX 0.25" diam hole E$37591XXX 0.375" diam hole E$50021018 0.5" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap E$50021028 0.5" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap E$50021036 0.5" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap E$50401093 0.5" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap E$50421064 0.5" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap E$50421072 0.5" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap E$50421076 0.5" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap E$50441056 0.5" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap E$50441064 0.5" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap E$50441072 0.5" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap E$50591XXX 0.5" diam hole E$75021018 0.75" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap E$75021028 0.75" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap E$75021036 0.75" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap E$75401093 0.75" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap E$75421064 0.75" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap E$75421072 0.75" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap E$75421076 0.75" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap E$75441056 0.75" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap E$75441064 0.75" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap E$75441072 0.75" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap E$75591XXX 0.75" diam hole E001021018 1" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap E001021028 1" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap E001021036 1" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap E001401093 1" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap E001421064 1" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap E001421072 1" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap E001421076 1" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap E001441056 1" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap E001441064 1" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap E001441072 1" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap E001591XXX 1" diam hole E002021018 2" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap E002021028 2" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap E002021036 2" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap E002401093 2" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap E002421064 2" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap E002421072 2" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap E002421076 2" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap E002441056 2" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap E002441064 2" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap E002441072 2" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap E002591XXX 2" diam hole E003021018 3" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap E003021028 3" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap E003021036 3" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap E003401093 3" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap E003421064 3" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap

370

_ _______________
E003441056 E003441064 E003441072 E003591XXX E004021018 E004021028 E004021036 E004401093 E004421064 E004441056 E004441064 E004441072 E004591XXX 3" 3" 3" 3" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" NPD, NPD, NPD, diam NPD, NPD, NPD, NPD, NPD, NPD, NPD, NPD, diam CL2000 FTE tap CL3000 FTE tap CL6000 FTE tap hole CL150 RFFE tap CL300 RFFE tap CL600 RFFE tap Sch 80 SE tap CL3000 SWE tap CL2000 FTE tap CL3000 FTE tap CL6000 FTE tap hole

Short Material Description Library

9. Material Description Data

371

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

9.3

Long Material Description Library


This library contains the long bill of materials description for all piping commodity items. The long bill of materials description is only used for requisitions. It is usually a very long description such as a paragraph. Nominal piping diameter is not included in the description. This data is used strictly for MTO reporting and material control. The long material descriptions are delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_lgbom.l. The long material descriptions can be up to 500 characters in length.

Neutral Files
The Long Material Description Library is created through a neutral file which contains the long material descriptions for commodity items. The neutral file contains unique commodity codes followed by at least one space and a description enclosed in single quotes. You can use neutral files to insert data into the Long Material Description Library or replace existing data. The commodity code identifies the Piping Commodity Library code or customers commodity code. The character length for this code is determined from the character length of the commodity code in the Size Dependent Data database table, or from the character length of the commodity library code in the Piping Commodity Data table of the PJS database, depending on which is being used to access the material descriptions. The long description can be up to 500 characters. Because this description may include label numbers which are translated to text strings, the reported (compiled) length of the description can be up to 600 characters. Prior to the 5.0 release there was a restriction that no more than 255 characters could be specified per line in the neutral file. This required that long descriptions be continued on multiple lines. With the 5.0 release, a neutral file for long material descriptions may contain up to 600 characters per line.

Data Retrieval
The system uses the Piping Commodity Library code or commodity code to access the text for the long description in the Long Material Description Library.

372

_ _______________
Listing for Long Material Descriptions
! ! ! DEFINE LONG DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Fri Apr 24 10:48:13 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_lgbom.l

Long Material Description Library

!Cmdty Code ====================================Description======================================== DAABAXAABE Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL150 flat face flange end, station type, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB0309-21 or approved equal DAABAXAABF Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL150 flat face flange end, station type 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/fog nozzle, Stang BB0309-21 or approved equal DACBAXABBC Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL150 flat face flange end, elevated type, free standing, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet, w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle and two reaction supports, Stang BB2999-[427] high or approved equal DACBAXABBD Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL300 flat face flange end, elevated type, supported, 6" CL300 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet, w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB3561-[427] high or approved equal DBAAAXBAAB Fire hydrant, CL125 flat face flange end, 5" size, regular rating, ductile iron barrel, bronze trim, bituminous paint below grade, red epoxy paint above grade, counterclockwise open, 4.5" steamer nozzle, two 2.5" hose nozzles equipped w/caps and chains, [428], American Darling B-50-B or approved equal DCBGDXEADA Hose rack w/bronze angle valve, 300#, female threaded end, wall mount, right hand w/100 ft synthetic single jacketed hose, rack nipple & fog nozzle, Powhatan 30-333 or approved equal DDAXCJDAAA Spray sprinkler, male threaded end, filled cone w/rupture disc, .313" orifice, Type 304 stainless steel, Grinnell Fire Protection, Mulsifyre Projector S-1 50-12 or approved equal FAAAAAWAAA Flange, weld neck, flat face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, [409] FAAAAAWWAA Flange, weld neck, flat face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, cement lined, [409] FAAABADIIA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304, Sch 80S bore FAAABADIIF Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F316, Sch 80S bore FAAABADNPF Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-B166 Gr.600 UNS N06600, hot finish, Sch 80S bore FAAABAOAAA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, Sch 160 bore FAAABAOABB Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A350 Gr.LF2, Sch 160 bore FAAABAOFFH Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F5, Sch 160 bore FAAABAWAAA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, [409] FAAABAWABB Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A350 Gr.LF2, [409] FAAABAWFFH Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F5, [409] FAAABAWFFL Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F9, [409] FAAABAWGFD Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASME-SA182 Gr.F11, [409] FAAABAWIIA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304, [409] FAAABAWIIF Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F316, [409] FAAABAWNPF Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-B166 Gr.600 UNS N06600, hot finish, [409] FAAABBDAAA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, XX-strong bore FAAADAOAAA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, Sch 160 bore FAAADAOFFC Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F11, Sch 160 bore FAAADAWAAA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, [409] FAAADAWFFC Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F11, [409] FAAADBDFFC Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F11, XX-strong bore FAABBADIIA Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL300, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304, Sch 80S bore FAABBADIIB Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL300, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304L, Sch 80S bore

9. Material Description Data

373

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

9.4

Specialty Material Description Library


This Library contains the material descriptions for any engineered items or in-line instruments which are reported by MTO or material control. These material descriptions are job specific and are accessed by the specialty items tag number. This data is used strictly for MTO reporting and material control. The specialty material descriptions can be up to 240 characters in length.

Neutral Files
Three neutral files are used to insert data into or replace data for the specialty material descriptions. Material descriptions for engineered items (engineered item number = tag). Material descriptions for instruments. (instrument tag number = tag). Material descriptions for pipe supports. (commodity code = tag). These files contain the specialty tag number and the text for the material description. The specialty tag number is appended by a specialty type which is used to distinguish between engineered items, in-line instruments, and pipe supports. The descriptions in Specialty Material Description Library tend to be customer-specific. The following is a listing of sample neutral files for the specialty data.
! ! ! DEFINE SPECIALTY DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:24 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_spbom.l

!Cmdty Code ====================================Description============================== 38-VI-9 RELIEF CONTROL VALVE. INSTR Instrument PSPECIALTY Piping specialty component PSUPPORT [970] ! ! ! DEFINE SPECIALTY DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:39 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_spbom.l

!Cmdty Code ====================================Description============================== SPECIAL_ENGR SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET. SPECIAL_ENGR 8 SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET. SPECIAL_ENGR @O SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET.

374

_ _______________
! ! ! DEFINE SPECIALTY DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:56 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_spbom.l ====================================Description============================== PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1. 8 PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1. @O PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1. PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 2. 8 PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 2. @O PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 2. PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 3. 8 PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 3. @O PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 3. !Cmdty Code SUPP1 SUPP1 SUPP1 SUPP2 SUPP2 SUPP2 SUPP3 SUPP3 SUPP3

Specialty Material Description Library

Data Retrieval
The system uses the specialty tag number and specialty type to access the text for the material descriptions in the Specialty Material Description Library.

9. Material Description Data

375

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

9.5

Material Description Library Manager


The Material Description Library Manager enables you to create and modify alphanumeric commodity data. You can initialize libraries, create material description data, append new data to existing material description data, revise (delete and replace) existing data, and delete existing data. You can use the copy and paste commands to copy existing library data from another project and make the necessary revisions using the Material Description Library Manager.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Material Description Library Manager from the Reference Data Manager form. The system displays the Material Description Library Manager form.

2.

Select the option for the library to be modified. Short Material Description Library Long Material Description Library Specialty Material Description Library

376

_ _______________
3. The data manipulation options for each of the libraries is similar. You can perform the following activities for each of the libraries.

Material Description Library Manager

Create Library Creates a new (empty) Short Material Description Library, Long Material Description Library, or Specialty Material Description Library. Unapprove ==> Approve Copies data from the unapproved library to the approved library. Load/Revise Interactive Adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in an existing Material Description Library or revises an existing table in the library. Load/Revise Batch Adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in an existing Material Description Library or revises an existing table in the library. Replace Interactive Deletes all entries in the respective Material Description Library file and then loads new entries from a neutral file. Replace Batch Deletes all entries in the respective Material Description Library file and then loads new entries from a neutral file. Report Used to create a report file or a neutral file of the contents of the material description library.

9. Material Description Data

377

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

9.5.1

Create Library
This option is used to create a new Material Description Library. This option is disabled if the library already exists. 1. Select Create Library from the Material Description Library Manager form. The system displays the approved and unapproved Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data.

2.

The system prompts Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files.

9.5.2

Unapproved ==> Approved


This option is used to copy the data in the unapproved material description library to the approved library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the library file to the approved library. If the approved and unapproved library names are the same, the system displays an error message.

378

_ _______________
9.5.3 Load/Revise Interactive

Load/Revise Interactive

This option enables you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Description Library. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data. This option adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in the library or revises an existing table in the library. The neutral files for the delivered RDB data are contained in the delivered material description libraries. Refer to the Report option for information on extracting the neutral files.

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Load/Revise option. Select File Type Select the type of material data to be loaded into the specified library from the display list and select Accept.

9. Material Description Data

3.

Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed.

4.

Accept to Create New Records or Exit Select Accept to begin processing the neutral file. The system begins processing the load/revise request.

379

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

9.5.4

Load/Revise Batch
This option enables you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Description Library via batch processing. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data. This option adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in the library or revises an existing table in the library. The neutral files for the delivered RDB data are contained in the delivered material description libraries. Refer to the Report option for information on extracting the neutral files.

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Load/Revise option. Select File Type Select the type of material data to be loaded into the specified library from the display list and select Accept.

3.

Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed and select Accept.

4.

Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Batch Immediately or Delayed Batch Submit Time. For delayed submission, set the time to process the neutral file.

5.

Select Accept to begin processing. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

380

_ _______________
9.5.5 Replace Interactive

Replace Interactive

This option enables you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Description Library. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data. This option deletes all entries in the respective library file and then loads new entries from the neutral file. The neutral files for the delivered RDB data are contained in the delivered material description libraries. Refer to the Report option for information on extracting the neutral files.

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Replace Interactive option from the Material Description Library form. Select File Type Select the type of material data to be loaded into the specified library from the display list and select Accept.

9. Material Description Data

3.

Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed.

4.

Accept to Create New Records or Exit Select Accept to begin processing the neutral file.

381

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

9.5.6

Replace Batch
This option enables you to load entries from a neutral file into the Material Description Library via batch processing. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data. This option deletes all entries in the respective library file and then loads new entries from the neutral file. The neutral files for the delivered RDB data are contained in the delivered material description libraries. Refer to the Report option for information on extracting the neutral files.

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Replace Batch option from the Material Description Library form. Select File Type Select the type of material data to be loaded into the specified library from the display list and select Accept.

3.

Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed and select Accept.

4.

Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Batch Immediately or Delayed Batch Submit Time. For delayed submission, set the time to process the neutral file.

5.

Select Accept to begin processing. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

382

_ _______________
9.5.7 Report Option
The Report option enables you to create neutral files or report files using the information in the Material Description Library. Refer to the description of the Short Material Description Library, Long Material Description Library, and Specialty Material Description Library for more information on the types of neutral files.

Report Option

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Report option from one of the library forms. Select File Type Select the type of material data to be extracted from the specified library from the display list and select Accept.

9. Material Description Data

3.

Specify Neutral File Name Key in the name of the neutral file to be created. You can change the Node Name and File Path information.

4.

Accept or Toggle to Create Report Select Accept to create the specified neutral file.

5.

Set the toggle to Unapproved Library or Approved Library to define the source of information to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used. Set the toggle to Create Neutral File to create a neutral file which can be revised and reloaded into the library. OR Set the toggle to Create Report to create a report file of the information in the library. The report output is the same as the neutral file except that the system aligns subsequent lines of the material description left-justified to the beginning of the material description rather than the commodity code.

6.

383

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 For the report selection, the system displays the following options.

7.

Select the reporting option. Print / Delete submit the generated report output file to the specified print queue and delete the output file. Print / Save submit the generated report output file to the specified print queue and save the output file. Save save the output file and suppress printing. For either of the Print options, the system displays a list of queues based on information in the project Queue Description Library. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide, for more information on the Queue Description Library and setting up print queues. Select the queue for the required output device.

8.

Select Accept to begin processing the request.

384

_ _______________
10. Table Checker

Table Checker

The Table Checker enables you to verify that all the commodity spec tables, entries, and Eden modules for a piping materials class exist in the graphic data libraries for the project. This process accesses the Eden code for each commodity item in the piping material class and checks that the table names created in the physical dimension modules exist in the project Physical Data Library. This routine checks for the existence of the tables and checks the contents of the tables. For Table Checker to function, there MUST be at least one piping model file created in the project, and it must have a piping materials class (spec) defined in the Active Segment Parameters. The Type 63 settings of the model with the highest alphanumeric name are used as defaults for the Table Checker reports. If weight tables are set to yes for this model, then Table Checker will search for and report on found and missing weight tables. If MTO Bolt Calculation is set to almost precise, Table Checker will search for the almost precise tables (table naming format = G12). If set to precise, Table Checker will search for precise tables (table naming format = G12T).

When the spec contains PIPING/TUBE and PIPE/TUBING, Table Checker will report as per Type 63 data settings. If Component Placement is set to PIPING for Pipe Commodity Name and TUBE for Tube Commodity Name, Table Checker uses these commodity names and searches for PDPIPING and PDTUBE in the Graphic Commodity Library. If there are any other PIPE and TUBING values found in the spec that do not match with Type 63, Table Checker assumes that this is a regular commodity item. It uses the model_code and searches for SPmodel_Code in the Graphic Commodity Library. If Component Placement is set to PIPE for Pipe Commodity Name and TUBING for Tube Commodity Name, Table Checker uses these commodity names and searches for PDPIPE and PDTUBING in the Graphic Commodity Library. If there are any other PIPING and TUBE values found in the spec that do not match with Type 63, Table Checker assumes that this is a regular commodity item. It uses the model_code and searches for SPmodel_code in the Graphic Commodity Library. In such cases, if the model_code of the item is the same as the commodity_name that matches with Type 63 data, the Table Checker may report the same value under both Eden Found and Eden Not Found. In other words, Table Checker reports the commodity_name under Eden Found and the model_code under Eden Not Found.

10. Table Checker

385

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Features
The Table Checker provides the following features. Reports on one piping material class selected from the available entries in the Specification/Material Database. Reports on all valid sizes in the size range for each piping commodity using the Nominal Piping Diameter table for that piping materials class. Reports dimensional tables used during the placement of each piping commodity in the piping materials class. This includes the table names, the types of tables, the existence of those tables (found or not found), and the output values from those tables. Reports Piping Eden modules used during the placement of each piping commodity in the piping materials class. This includes the Piping Eden module names and the existence of those modules (found or not found). Reports dimensional tables used for all piping commodities in the entire report (the piping materials class). This includes the table names, the revision dates for those tables, and the source Dimension Table Library. Reports bolt tables for each piping commodity with bolted ends. Reports Piping Eden modules used for all piping commodities in the entire report (the piping materials class). This includes the Piping Eden module names and the existence of those modules (found or not found). Verifies that a material description exists in the Material Description Library for any piping commodities defined in the Material Reference Database. The commodity code as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table (PDtable_202) or the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table (PDtable_211) is used to verify the material description. Verifies that a material description exists in the Material Description Library for any implied component defined in the Piping Commodity Implied Material Data Table (PDtable_212) of the Material Reference Database. Verifies that a material description exists in the Specialty Material Description Library for any piping specialty or instrument defined in the Material Reference Database. Provides a detailed error report of any tables or table entries that were found missing during the processing of the piping materials class. For tables containing schedule thickness calculations as part of the name, the calculations are replaced with preferred thickness unless no preferred thickness is found for that size or PMC thickness table. If any errors are encountered during execution, the system appends the errors to the end of the report output. In the case of severe errors, it creates a file named RPT_ERR.LOG.

386

_ _______________
Commodity items with option codes greater than 5000 (spec implied components) are not checked.

Table Checker

Format Files
The Table Checker uses report format files to define the report output. It uses the same reporting indices as any other report from the Piping Job Specification data (the C indices). Refer to Format Files in the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on these indices. The following example report formats for the Table Checker are included in the PD_DATA sample directory (\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format/). Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on report type. tbl_chk_1.fmt This report format reports on virtually all data generated by the Table Checker. It is a combination of the following sample report formats: tbl_chk_2.fmt, tbl_chk_3.fmt, and tbl_chk_4.fmt. It reports the piping commodities in the selected piping materials class with the dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used, including a list of all entries read in the dimension tables. It also lists all dimension tables and Piping Eden modules required for those piping commodities, but not available in the Reference Database. tbl_chk_2.fmt This report format reports the dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used by each piping commodity in the applicable piping materials class.

10. Table Checker

tbl_chk_3.fmt This report lists all entries read in dimension tables for the applicable piping materials class. tbl_chk_4.fmt This report format reports a total list of dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used for the applicable piping materials class. It also lists all dimension tables and Piping Eden modules required for those piping commodities, but not available in the Reference Database. tbl_chk_5.fmt This report verifies the reference data for any piping specialties defined in the Reference Database (pdtable_203). tbl_chk_6.fmt

387

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 This report verifies the reference data for any instruments defined in the Reference Database (pdtable_204). Table format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination file is created with the No Piping Material Class button selected.

388

_ _______________
10.1 Table Checker Form
The Report Manager form enables you to generate reports from the project, design, and reference database files with the report definition data. The report record and the location records for each discrimination data file and format file are stored in the project control database. These numbered records are used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.

Table Checker Form

Options
Report Format Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For more information, see Report Format Form, page 392. Report Discrimination Data Displays the Discrimination Data form, which you can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as well as the file itself. For more information, see Discrimination Data Form, page 398. Report Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, and approve report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form, page 406. Report Management Data Displays the Report Management Defaults form, which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the default nodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used for setup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 420.

10. Table Checker

389

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.1

Using the Report Commands


Understanding Report Files and Records
The Table Checker uses the discrimination data files, format files, and database records that represent these files to generate reports. The following definitions explain all of the files and records in the reporting process.

Format File and Record


The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outside of the Table Checker. It contains special indices identifying what data appears in the report and how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report. Without the format file(s), Table Checker reports cannot be processed. A set of basic format files is delivered for each type of reporting. Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file so that it can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, the format record is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file.

Discrimination Data File and Record


The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It is an ASCII file that is created interactively using the Table Checker. The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for each discrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same way that the format record is used to access a format file.

Report Output and Record


The Table Checker creates a report using the specified format, discrimination, and search criteria data files, and places it in the specified directory on the specified node. The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a report, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file.)

390

_ _______________
Group Workflow

Using the Report Commands

There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use the Report Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the report definition files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and path on each form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default, simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification. The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination data record, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report Discrimination Data options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file, and their corresponding records have been established. Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.

10. Table Checker

391

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.2

Report Format Form


When you choose the Report Format option from the Report Manager form, the Report Format form is displayed.

This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the format file in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy a record and its corresponding ASCII format files. The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will be displayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the files location has been entered into the project control database.

Options
Create Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add a new record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page 394. Copy Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of an existing format file from the project control database along with the corresponding ASCII format file. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page 394. Revise Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of an existing format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page 394.

392

_ _______________
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format file from the project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reporting cannot be performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form, page 396.

Report Format Form

10. Table Checker

393

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.2.1

Format Creation/Revision Form


When you choose Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the Format Creation/Revision form is displayed.

This form creates or revises a record in the project control database; this record defines the location of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report. Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data.

Field Descriptions
Number A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in the project control database used to identify the record of the format file. Description A description of up to 40 characters for the format file. File Specification The file name of the format file to reference. Path The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting. Node The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. This field retains the active setting.

394

_ _______________
Before Using this Form
You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with the PD_Data product in the \pddata\sample\format directory. The file for MTO reporting is named piping_#.fmt.

Format Creation/Revision Form

Operating Sequence
1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise. A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record, go to Step 3. 2. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then click Accept. Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information. 3. Specify Report Format Data Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in each field. Then click Accept. The project control database is updated.

10. Table Checker

395

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.2.2

Format Deletion Form


When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.

Fields and Options


Number/Description Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. Delete File/Do Not Delete File Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.

396

_ _______________
2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept. The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

Format Deletion Form

10. Table Checker

397

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.3

Discrimination Data Form


When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, the Discrimination Data form is displayed.

This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specified directory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, or deleted as needed. A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in a report. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project control database record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to be associated with a specific report.

Options
Create Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a new discrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created. For more information, see Discrimination Data Creation Form, page 400. Copy Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existing data file. The associated project control database record is also copied. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page 402. Revise Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies discrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discrimination data file, the location of the discrmination file, and the associated record in the project

398

_ _______________
control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page 402. Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as well as its associated record in the project control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Deletion Form, page 404.

Discrimination Data Form

10. Table Checker

399

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.3.1

Discrimination Data Creation Form


When you select Create from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination Data Creation form is displayed.

This form creates a discrimination data file in a specified directory. It also creates a corresponding record in the project control database. In addition, you can use this form to specify segment and component search criteria. If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search criteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified using the Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.

Fields and Options


Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the discrimination data record in the project control database. Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record in the project control database. File Specification The file name of the discrimination data record to be created. File Path The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active settings.

400

_ _______________
File Node The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file is located. This field retains the active settings. Piping Materials Class Key in up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the piping materials class. Approved Piping Job Spec Defines the database to be reported: approved or unapproved. Select Piping Materials Class Sets the piping materials class(es) in the Specification/Material Reference Database which defines the tables to be checked. No Piping Materials Class When selected, indicates to the system that either the piping specialties or instruments will be verified by Table Checker. Either format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination data is created with the No Piping Materials Class button selected.

Discrimination Data Creation Form

Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Create The Discrimination Data Creation form displays. 2. Specify Discrimination Data In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and node. 3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then select Accept. After including any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file, be sure to select the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms while specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even though you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the discrimination data file is not actually created until you select Accept on the Report Discrimination Data form.

10. Table Checker

401

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.3.2

Discrimination Data Revision Form


When you select Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed.

This form revises an existing discrimination data file. It also copies an existing discrimination data file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. The corresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed. In addition, options are provided for you to modify segment and component search criteria data. If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search criteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified using the Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.

Fields and Options


Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the discrimination data record in the project control database. Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record in the project control database. File Specification The file name of the discrimination data record to be created. File Path The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active settings. File Node The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file is located. This field retains the active settings. Piping Materials Class Select one or more piping materials classes from this list of loaded classes.

402

_ _______________
Approved Piping Job Spec Defines the database to be reported: approved or unapproved. Select Piping Materials Class Sets the piping materials class(es) in the Specification/Material Reference Database which defines the tables to be checked. No Piping Materials Class When selected, indicates to the system that either the piping specialties or instruments will be verified by Table Checker. Either format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination data is created with the No Piping Materials Class button selected.

Discrimination Data Revision Form

Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Copy or Revise. The Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed. 2. Specify Discrimination Data In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and node. 3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then select Accept. After updating any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file, be sure to select the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms while specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even though you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the discrimination data file is not actually updated until you select Accept on the Report Discrimination Data form.

10. Table Checker

403

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.3.3

Discrimination Data Deletion Form


When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.

Fields and Options


Number/Description Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. Delete File/Do Not Delete File Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.

404

_ _______________
2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept. The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

Discrimination Data Deletion Form

10. Table Checker

405

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.4

Report Form
When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.

This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holds specifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description, and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate a report. The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is included in the format file. At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the following information: Report Output The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, and report node, path, and file name. Format The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name. Discrimination Data The report discrimination data number, description, and file location (network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence. Search Criteria The report search criteria number, description, and file location (node, path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.

406

_ _______________
Options
Create Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record and generates a report. For more information, see Report Creation Form, page 408. Revise Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from an existing or revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form, page 411. Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and the corresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form, page 414. Approve Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report. For more information, see Report Approval Form, page 416. Multi-Create Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiple reports to the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form, page 418.

Report Form

10. Table Checker

407

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.4.1

Report Creation Form


When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.

Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records are stored in the project control database, you can use them over and over again as needed.

Fields and Options


Report Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. The Table Checker Report Number must not contain spaces. If there are spaces in the number, the report will not be submitted to the batch queue. Report Title The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report is contained in the format file. Report File Spec The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters). Report File Path The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Dataform. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 420.

408

_ _______________
Report Format File The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select the appropriate format file, and click Accept.

Report Creation Form

Report Node The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 420.

Report Discrimination File The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept. Report Search Criteria The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a specification, click Accept without selecting a file. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. Last Revision Number The revision number of the last report generated. This is a read-only field; you cannot edit it. Revised By The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is optional. Revision Description The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. This field is optional. Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save Saves the report output file without printing the report. Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

10. Table Checker

409

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Create. The Report Creation form is displayed. 2. Specify Report Data Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file. 3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Click Accept to save the report file.

4.

5.

410

_ _______________
10.1.4.2 Revise Report Form
When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.

Revise Report Form

This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project control database. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record without generating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report output file without updating the report record.

10. Table Checker

Fields and Options


Report Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. Report Title The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report is contained in the format file. Report File Spec The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters). Report File Path The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the active settings. Report Node The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This field retains the active settings.

411

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Report Format File The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select the appropriate format file, and click Accept. Report Discrimination File The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept. Report Search Criteria The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a specification, click Accept without selecting a file. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. Last Revision Number The revision number of the last report generated. This is a read-only field; you cannot edit it. Revised By The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is optional. Revision Description The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. This field is optional. Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save Saves the report output file without printing the report. Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated. Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data Specifies revision of the report data only (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (Revise Report and Data). To revise the report specification without updating the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click Accept. To revise the report output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report and Data without modifying any of the fields, and click Accept. To modify both the report

412

_ _______________
file and the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click Accept. If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title, this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and the report output file is generated.

Revise Report Form

Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Revise. The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files. 2. Select Report From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept. The fields update to display the selected report file specifications. 3. Revise Report Information Update the report record information as needed. 4. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Click Accept to save the report file.

5.

6.

10. Table Checker

413

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.4.3

Report Deletion Form


When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.

Fields and Options


Number/Description Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. Delete File/Do Not Delete File Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.

414

_ _______________
2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept. The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

Report Deletion Form

10. Table Checker

415

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.4.4

Report Approval Form


When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.

Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attribute is set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way for you to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a report is revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.

Options
Number The 24-character unique name (as called short name) of the report record. Description The 40-character description of the report record.

Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Approve. The Report Approval form is displayed.

416

_ _______________
2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept. The Approval form is displayed. For more information, see the Approve Report section of the PD_Report Users Guide.

Report Approval Form

10. Table Checker

417

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.4.5

Report Multiple Submit Form


When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.

Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.

Fields and Options


Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. Description The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save Saves the report output file without printing the report. Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

418

_ _______________
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create. The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed. 2. Select Reports for Submission From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighed reports are selected; select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report. 3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) or later (Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Click Accept to submit the reports.

Report Multiple Submit Form

4.

5.

10. Table Checker

419

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.1.5

Report Management Defaults Form


When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the Report Management Defaults form is displayed.

This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of the report definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.

Fields
Report Path Specifies the default path of the report output files. It is recommended that you not send output reports to your systems temporary (that is, tmp or temp) directory. Report Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which report output files are located. Report Format Path Specifies the default path of the format files. Report Format Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which format files are located. Report Discrimination Data Path Specifies the default path of the discrimination data files.

420

_ _______________
Report Discrimination Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which discrimination data files are located. Report Search Criteria Data Path Specifies the default path of the report search criteria data files. Report Search Criteria Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which report search criteria data files are located.

Report Management Defaults Form

Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data. The Report Management Defaults form is displayed. 2. Accept or Exit In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report output files, format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then click Accept.

10. Table Checker

421

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

10.2
21-Apr-92

Sample Table Checker Output


Page: SIZE-INDEPENDENT SPEC DATA __________________________ 1

The following is a listing of selected pages from the table checker output for Piping Materials Class 1C0031.

Description:

Gate valve, CL800, SWE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith 800 1C0031 1st 2nd 3/4IN 1-1/2IN -

Piping Class: Size Range:

Option: End Preparation(s): Rating(s): End geometry standard(s): Body geometry standard: Maximum allowable temperature: Material Grade: Modifier: Fabrication category: Note 1: Note 2: SWE (421) CL800 Default (5) Smith 1 (4625) -9999 A105 (150) 3 CSFF (7)

PDS Reference data AABBCC: Commodity Code: Weight Code: EDEN Modules GATR V1_AMS VALVE_2_AMS V1 OP_3 OPERATOR_3 OP3 6Q1C01 VAUSAHGAAA 490 pcf (52) Tables ______ FEM_420_800_5 GATR_4625_420_800_A VAUSAHGAAA GATR_FEM_800_3_A

422

_ _______________
21-Apr-92 SIZE-INDEPENDENT SPEC DATA __________________________ Description: Gate valve, CL800, SWE, BB, OS&Y, full port, ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith 888 1C0031 1st 2nd 3/4IN Full port (24) SWE (421) CL800 Default (5) Smith 1 (4625) -9999 A105 (150) 3 CSFF (7) 1-1/2IN Page: 2 Piping Class: Size Range:

Sample Table Checker Output

Option: End Preparation(s): Rating(s): End geometry standard(s): Body geometry standard: Maximum allowable temperature: Material Grade: Modifier: Fabrication category: Note 1: Note 2: -

PDS Reference data AABBCC: Commodity Code: Weight Code: EDEN Modules GATF V1_AMS VALVE_2_AMS V1 OP_3 OPERATOR_3 OP3 6Q1C01 VAUSAHGCAA 490 pcf (52) Tables ______ FEM_420_800_5 GATF_4625_420_800_A VAUSAHGCAA GATF_FEM_800_3_A

10. Table Checker

423

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
21-Apr-92 SIZE-INDEPENDENT SPEC DATA __________________________ Description: Gate valve, CL150, RFFE, BB, OS&Y, ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith 815 1C0031 1st 2nd 3/4IN RFFE (221) RFFE (21) CL150 Default (5) ANSI-B16.10 (40) -9999 A105 (150) 3 CSFF (7) 1-1/2IN Page: 3 Piping Class: Size Range:

Option: End Preparation(s): Rating(s): End geometry standard(s): Body geometry standard: Maximum allowable temperature: Material Grade: Modifier: Fabrication category: Note 1: Note 2:

Use at flanged equipment connections. -

PDS Reference data AABBCC: Commodity Code: Weight Code: EDEN Modules GAT V1_AMS VALVE_2_AMS V1 OP_3 OPERATOR_3 OP3 6Q1C01 VAABAHGGAA 490 pcf (52) Tables ______ BLT_20_150_5 GAT_40_20_150_A VAABAHGGAA GAT_BLT_150_3_A STUD_20_150_5

424

_ _______________
21-Apr-92 SIZE-DEPENDENT SPEC DATA ________________________ 1C0031 6Q1C01 Physical Data Generic _______ 1.1715In, 0.4375In 1IN 1.4538In, 0.4375In 1-1/2IN 2.0575In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.5625In Page: SIZE-DEPENDENT SPEC DATA ________________________ 1C0031 6Q1C01 Physical Data Generic _______ 1.1715In, 0.4375In 1IN 1.4538In, 0.4375In 1-1/2IN 2.0575In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.5625In Undefined, Undefined, 1.375In Specific ________ Undefined, Undefined, 1.125In 134 Undefined, Undefined, 1.375In Specific ________ Undefined, Undefined, 1.125In Page: 133 Piping Class: AABBCC: 1st Size Weight ________ 3/4IN 4.5Lb 1IN 6.25Lb 1-1/2IN 12Lb 21-Apr-92 2nd Size ________ 3/4IN

Sample Table Checker Output

Sub-Component _____________ 11In, 4In

13In, 5.5In

16.125In, 5.75In

Piping Class: AABBCC: 1st Size Weight ________ 3/4IN 6.25Lb 1IN 9.75Lb 1-1/2IN 21.75Lb 2nd Size ________ 3/4IN

Sub-Component _____________ 11In, 4In

13In, 5.5In

16.125In, 5.75In

10. Table Checker

425

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
21-Apr-92 TABLES NOT FOUND ________________ Tables Not Found ________________ REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$XS_52 REDE_39_300_S$10_300_S$XS_52 STUD_120_150_5 STUD_120_150_80 STUD_120_300_5 STUD_160_150_5 STUD_160_150_80 Table Library _____________ Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Page: 376

426

_ _______________
21-Apr-92 TABLES FOUND ____________ Tables Found ____________ BALR_3028_420_600_A BALR_FEM_600_9_A BALSP_40_20_150_A BALSP_BLT_150_9_A BFYHP_4200_160_150_A BFYHP_BLT_150_17_A BLPAD_1026_120_150_A BLPAD_1026_120_150_NREQD_52 BLPAD_146_120_150_A BLPAD_146_120_150_NREQD_52 BLSPA_1026_120_150_A BLSPA_1026_120_150_NREQD_52 BLSPA_146_120_150_A BLSPA_146_120_150_NREQD_52 BLSPC_146_120_150_A BLSPC_146_120_150_NREQD_52 BLSPC_146_120_300_A BLSPC_146_120_300_NREQD_52 BLSPO_146_120_150_A BLSPO_146_120_150_NREQD_52 BLSPO_146_120_300_A BLSPO_146_120_300_NREQD_52 BLT_120_150_5 BLT_120_150_80 BLT_120_300_5 BLT_160_150_5 BLT_160_150_80 BLT_20_150_5 Table Library _____________ Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Table Revision Date ___________________ Thu Jan 3 09:46:45 1991 Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 10:16:28 1991 3 10:01:23 1991 3 10:16:28 1991 3 10:08:15 1991 3 10:16:33 1991 3 09:28:00 1991 3 09:28:01 1991 3 09:28:48 1991 3 09:28:51 1991 3 09:28:01 1991 3 09:28:02 1991 3 09:28:49 1991 3 09:28:52 1991 3 09:28:50 1991 3 09:28:53 1991 3 09:28:56 1991 Page: 377

Sample Table Checker Output

10. Table Checker

3 09:28:59 1991 3 09:28:51 1991 3 09:28:54 1991 3 09:28:57 1991 3 09:29:00 1991 3 10:17:06 1991 3 10:17:06 1991 3 10:17:09 1991 3 10:17:23 1991 3 10:17:24 1991 3 10:17:29 1991

427

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
BLT_20_150_80 BLT_20_150_81 BLT_20_300_29 BLT_20_300_5 BLT_20_300_80 CAPBV_5150_300_A CAPBV_5150_300_S$10_52 CAPBV_5150_300_S$STD_52 CAPBV_5150_300_S$XS_52 CAPOT_5375_420_3000_A CAPOT_5375_420_3000_NREQD_52 CKLR_4625_420_800_A CKS_40_20_150_A CKWF_40_120_150_A CPL_41_420_3000_A CPL_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 E45LR_39_300_A E45LR_39_300_S$10_52 E45LR_39_300_S$STD_52 E45LR_39_300_S$XS_52 E45_41_420_3000_A E45_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 E90LR_39_300_A E90LR_39_300_S$10_52 E90LR_39_300_S$STD_52 E90LR_39_300_S$XS_52 E90SR_58_300_A E90SR_58_300_S$STD_52 E90_41_420_3000_A E90_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 10:17:30 1991 3 10:17:31 1991 3 10:17:38 1991 3 10:17:40 1991 3 10:17:42 1991 3 10:10:17 1991 3 10:10:51 1991 3 10:11:03 1991 3 10:11:07 1991 3 10:11:19 1991 3 10:11:22 1991 3 10:09:40 1991 3 10:01:26 1991 3 10:01:12 1991 3 10:06:46 1991 3 10:06:49 1991 3 09:52:46 1991 3 09:54:04 1991 3 09:59:04 1991 3 10:00:12 1991 3 10:06:46 1991 3 10:06:50 1991 3 09:52:47 1991 3 09:54:04 1991 3 09:59:30 1991 3 10:00:12 1991 3 10:11:49 1991 3 10:11:58 1991 3 10:06:47 1991 3 10:06:51 1991

428

_ _______________
EOLLR_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_52 EOLLR_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_A Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 09:39:37 1991 3 09:39:42 1991

Sample Table Checker Output

10. Table Checker

429

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
21-Apr-92 TABLES FOUND ____________ Tables Found ____________ FBLD_254_20_150_NREQD_52 FBLD_35_20_150_NREQD_52 FEM_420_150_5 FEM_420_3000_5 FEM_420_300_5 FEM_420_600_5 FEM_420_800_5 FEM_440_800_5 FOLHC_1575_300_NREQD_420_3000_52 FOLHC_1575_300_NREQD_420_3000_A FOWNAW_66_20_300_300_300_52 FOWNAW_66_20_300_300_A FRSW_6_20_150_420_150_A FRSW_6_20_150_420_150_S$160_52 FRSW_6_20_300_420_300_A FRSW_6_20_300_420_300_S$160_52 FSW_35_20_150_420_150_A FSW_35_20_150_420_150_S$160_52 FSW_35_20_150_420_150_S$XS_52 FSW_35_20_300_420_300_A FSW_35_20_300_420_300_S$XS_52 FWN_165_20_150_300_150_52 FWN_165_20_150_300_A FWN_254_20_150_300_150_52 FWN_254_20_150_300_A FWN_254_20_300_300_300_52 FWN_254_20_300_300_A FWN_35_20_150_300_150_52 Table Library _____________ Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Table Revision Date ___________________ Thu Jan 3 09:44:58 1991 Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 09:48:28 1991 3 10:20:07 1991 3 10:20:10 1991 3 10:20:48 1991 3 10:20:50 1991 3 10:20:51 1991 3 10:21:03 1991 3 09:31:30 1991 3 09:31:44 1991 3 10:12:47 1991 3 10:12:51 1991 3 10:14:14 1991 3 10:14:15 1991 3 10:14:18 1991 3 10:14:19 1991 3 09:48:17 1991 3 09:48:17 1991 3 09:48:20 1991 3 09:48:41 1991 3 09:49:04 1991 3 09:43:17 1991 3 09:43:18 1991 3 09:44:57 1991 3 09:44:57 1991 3 09:44:59 1991 3 09:44:59 1991 3 09:48:13 1991 Page: 378

430

_ _______________
FWN_35_20_150_300_A FWN_35_20_300_300_300_52 FWN_35_20_300_300_A GATF_4625_420_800_A GATF_FEM_800_3_A GATR_4625_420_800_440_800_A GATR_4625_420_800_A GATR_FEM_800_3_A GAT_40_20_150_A GAT_40_20_300_A GAT_BLT_150_3_A GAT_BLT_300_3_A GLOR_4625_420_800_A GLOR_FEM_800_3_A GLO_40_20_150_A GLO_BLT_150_3_A LOL_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_52 LOL_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_A MALWT_300_S$10_5_52 MALWT_300_S$STD_5_52 MALWT_300_S$XS_5_52 MAL_300_5 NEE_5375_420_800_A NEE_FEM_800_3_A NIP_100_300_S$160_52 PLUG_41_300_A PLUG_41_300_NREQD_52 REDC_39_300_300_A REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$10_52 REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 09:48:16 1991 3 09:48:39 1991 3 09:48:41 1991 3 10:09:40 1991 3 10:21:14 1991 3 10:09:39 1991 3 10:09:41 1991 3 10:21:18 1991 3 10:01:27 1991 3 10:01:46 1991 3 10:21:30 1991 3 10:21:32 1991 3 10:09:41 1991 3 10:21:42 1991 3 10:01:28 1991 3 10:21:52 1991 3 09:39:39 1991 3 09:39:44 1991 3 10:22:48 1991 3 10:23:07 1991 3 10:23:10 1991

Sample Table Checker Output

10. Table Checker

Thu Mar 21 15:55:49 1991 Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 10:11:31 1991 3 10:23:25 1991 3 09:27:27 1991 3 10:06:29 1991 3 10:06:37 1991 3 09:52:38 1991 3 09:53:51 1991 3 09:54:02 1991

431

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
REDC_39_300_S$STD_300_S$10_52 REDC_39_300_S$STD_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 09:58:40 1991 3 09:58:52 1991

432

_ _______________
21-Apr-92 EDEN ACCESSED _____________ EDEN Not Found ______________ EDEN Found __________ BALR BALSP BFYHP BLPAD BLSPA BLSPC BLSPO CAPBV CAPOT CKLR CKS CKWF CPL E45 E45LR E45TLR E90 E90LR E90SR E90TLR EOLLR F10_1 F10_2 F122_1 F122_1_AMS F13 F13_AMS F173 F173_AMS F177 F177_AMS F178 F178_AMS F179 F17D F17D_AMS F180 F180_AMS F182 F182_AMS F188 F188_AMS F19 F19_AMS F1A F1A_AMS F25 F25_AMS F27 F27_AMS F28 F39 F39_AMS F47 F47T_AMS F47_AMS F6 Page: 381

Sample Table Checker Output

10. Table Checker

433

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
F6_AMS F8 F8_AMS

434

_ _______________
21-Apr-92 EDEN ACCESSED _____________ EDEN Not Found ______________ EDEN Found __________ FBLD FITTING_1_AMS FITTING_2_AMS FITTING_3_AMS FLANGE_AMS FOLHC FOWNAW FRSW FSW FWN GAT GATF GATR GLO GLOR LOL NEE NIP OLET_1_AMS OP3 OP9 OPERATOR_3 OPERATOR_33 OPERATOR_9 OP_17 OP_3 OP_33 OP_331 OP_332 OP_9 PIPING PLUG REDC REDE RPAD RWELD SOL SWGC SWGE T TRB UN V1 V11 V1_AMS V26 V38 V6 VALVE_2_AMS WOL Page: 382

Sample Table Checker Output

10. Table Checker

435

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
.*****. REPORT ERROR LOG CREATION TIME: Tuesday 04/21/92 15:35 1 - ERROR - EDEN error (-3) for pmc 1C0031 item 6Q1C26 with 1st size 32IN and 2nd size 32IN Error in module MGOP_32768 2 - ERROR - EDEN error (-3) for pmc 1C0031 item 6Q1C26 with 1st size 34IN and 2nd size 34IN Error in module MGOP_32768

Error Codes
The following error codes are used in the reported error messages. -3 -4 -7 Eden Module Not Found Entry Not Found in Table Table Not Found

436

_ _______________
11. Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager

Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager

The Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager provides access to the Tutorial Definition Files (TDFs) used in placing pipe supports in the model. The TDFs define the pipe supports modeling requirements. For more information on TDFs, refer to the Pipe Supports Modeler Reference Guide.

11. TDF Library

437

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

11.1

Support Tutorial Definition Manager


The Support Tutorial Definition Manager is used to create a new Tutorial Definition Library or to create, modify, or delete data in the library. You can also create reports of the data in the library. Select the Support Tutorial Definition Manager from the Reference Data Manager form.

Before using this command


Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library files in the Reference Database Management Data. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path.

Options
Create Library Used to create a new Tutorial Definition Library. Compress Library Used to compress the Tutorial Definition Library. Unapproved ==> Approved Used to copy the unapproved Tutorial Definition Library to the approved library. Create Data Used to compile source files and add the resulting code to the Tutorial Definition Library. You can create a single tutorial definition file or specify a list of tutorial definition files to be created.

438

_ _______________
Revise Data Used to select a tutorial definition file from the library for editing and compile the revised tutorial definition file. Delete Data Used to delete a specified tutorial definition file from the library. Report Data Used to create a report file of the library contents. List Data Used to list the files contained in the library.

Support Tutorial Definition Manager

Extract Data Used to extract a tutorial definition file from the library for editing or printing. Full List/Sub-string Use this toggle to determine the data to be listed. Full List returns all the definition in the Tutorial Definition Library. Sub-string limits the list to those files that contain the substring you enter in the corresponding box. Node Name Key in the node name of the location of the table definition files for pipe supports. File Path Key in the path to the location where you store table definition files for pipe supports.

11. TDF Library

439

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

11.1.1

Create Library
This option is used to create a new Tutorial Definition Library. The system displays the approved and unapproved Tutorial Definition Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files. If you specify an existing library file, the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.

11.1.2

Compress
This option is used to compress the Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.

11.1.3

Unapproved ==> Approved


This option copies the unapproved Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library to the approved library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.

440

_ _______________
11.1.4 Create Data
This option enables you to create a new tutorial definition file. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created.

Create Data

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create Data option.

2. 3.

Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the source file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library.

4.

The system displays the default node name and path for the tutorial definition files as specified in the Default Project Control Data at the bottom of the form. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation.

5.

Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file to begin processing.

If a fatal error occurs while loading files, the Tutorial Definition File Library is left unchanged.

11. TDF Library

441

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

11.1.5

Revise Data
This option enables you to replace an existing tutorial definition file. This option enables you to select a tutorial definition file from the library, edit the file, and then compile the file and put it back in the library.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Revise option. The system displays the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library.

2.

Select Table for Revision Select the tutorial definition files to be revised and select Accept. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor to enable you to modify the file.

442

_ _______________
3. Make any changes to the displayed file.

Revise Data

When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. (If you quit the text editor, the file is not recompiled.)

11. TDF Library

443

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

11.1.6

Report Data
This option enables you to create a report on the contents of the Tutorial Definition Library. This report lists all the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report Data option from the Library/Data Management form.

2.

Set the toggle to Report on Unapproved or Report on Approved to define the source of information to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used. Select the report option: Save, Print/Delete or Print/Save.

3.

For the Print/Delete or Print/Save options, select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. 4. Select Accept to create the report. For the Save or Print/Save options, the system generates a report named ppsm_tdf in the default directory based on the contents of the Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library.

444

_ _______________
11.1.7 List Data
This option displays all the tutorial definition files for the Tutorial Definition Library.

List Data

Operating Sequence
1. Select the List option. The system displays the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library.

2. 3.

You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Select Cancel to exit the form.

11. TDF Library

445

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

11.1.8

Delete Data
This option enables you to delete a tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition Library.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Delete option. The system displays the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library.

2.

Select Table for Deletion Select the tutorial definition file to be deleted from the list of files. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.

3.

Accept or Select Other Table(s) Accept the selected tutorial definition file. The system deletes the tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition Library.

446

_ _______________
11.1.9 Extract Data
This option enables you to extract a tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition Library for editing or printing.

Extract Data

Operating Sequence
1. Select Extract Data from the Library/Data Management form.

2.

Select Table for Extraction Select the tutorial definition file from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. OR Select the Extract All button to extract all the available files. The system pulls the file out of the library and places it in the default directory defined in the Default Project Control Data. See Default Project Control Data, page 53.

11. TDF Library

447

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

448

_ _______________
12. Standard Note Library
The Standard Note Library contains the code list text for code-listed attributes, including standard notes. It enables you to define standard text required to support the piping design effort. The standard code list text is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\std_note.l. The accompanying source listing for this file is contained in the file std_note.l.t. You can add, delete, or revise code list sets in the library to reflect your own practices, terminology, and language. Entries in these files are in the form Standard Note Type xxxx where xxxx is the number of the code list set. Refer to Appendix B for a listing of the delivered Standard Note Library.

Standard Note Library

Neutral File Description


A neutral file is an ASCII text file which contains standard notes or code lists to be placed in the Standard Note Library. An entry is a single input/output record. One entry (or word) is retrieved each time a neutral file is read. The entries in a neutral file must be separated by at least one space. If an embedded blank is contained within an entry, the entire entry must be enclosed in single quotes (). 2 = Hydrogen Gas Entries enclosed in single quotes can take up more than one line. When an entry continues onto a new line, a blank character is automatically appended to the end of the previous line.

Neutral File Format


N499 ; ; ; Piping Notes 1 = Notes Applicable to the Piping Materials Class, 2-199 WWW = ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ WWW = ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ WWW = ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Notes Applicable to a Piping Component, 200-499 WWW = ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ WWW = ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ WWW = ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ

; ;

12. Standard Note Library

449

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
; Notes Applicable to a Piping Specialty, 500-699 WWW = ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Notes Applicable to an Instrument Specialty, 700-899 WWW = ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ; ;

General Rules
EACH standard note type or code list type should be contained in a separate neutral file. Neutral files should have the following basic format:
; ; C100 This is a comment line !!!!!! This file contains a code list for type 100. 1 = Inert Gas 2 = Natural Gas 5 = Oxygen Gas 6 = Standard note or code list descriptions can extend beyond one line of text up to a maximum of 80 characters 12 = Purge Gas 14 = Waste Gas

The first entry in each neutral file should be the note/code TYPE (C100 in the above example). The first letter must be either: C for a codelist set or N for a standard note This character is followed by a number which identifies the specific codelist set or standard note. This number must be a valid short integer. Additionally, this entry should also include the text used for extracting information from the Standard Note Library. This text may contain up to 80 characters. The following numbering conventions are used for standard note type 499: Piping Job Specification: note numbers 1 through 199. Piping Commodity Item: note numbers 200 through 599. Specialty Item: note numbers 600 through 799. Instrument Item: note numbers 800 through 999.

The first entry can contain additional characters following the TYPE, but they are all ignored. You can include the keyword PID_RDB in the neutral file on the line following the standard note type to load the standard note into both the Piping Reference Database and the P&ID Reference Database simultaneously. (Optional) Each note/code entry is comprised of three parts (triplet) which must appear in the following sequence. <Note/Code number> <equal sign> <Note/code description> 2 = Sulfuric Acid

450

_ _______________
The description text must be enclosed in single quotes. The description text can extend for more than one line. Code list description text can contain up to 80 characters. Standard note description text can contain up to 400 characters. The Note/code description text can be on a line by itself. The equal sign must have a blank character on either side of it. The equal sign can be on a separate line by itself. The note/code number must be a valid I*2 integer. The note/code number must begin a new line; it cannot be on the same line with any part of another triplet. - The note/code number can be on a line by itself. The only valid edit you can make to code list 1056 (temperature units) and code list 1064 (pressure units) is to modify the displayed text string. Modifications to this field affect only the display of the text; the actual units (i.e. degrees) cannot be modified. You cannot add any entries to code lists 1056 and 1064.

Standard Note Library

Comments are indicated with a semicolon (;) or exclamation point (!). Any information on a line to the right of either of these characters is considered a comment and is ignored. These comment lines can only occur following a description; they cannot break up a triplet. Valid Comments
; ! 1 = Caustic Comment line. 2 = Sulfur ! Another Comment line. Another Comment line. 3 = Hydrogen Sulfide ; Another Comment line.

Invalid Comments
; 1 = Invalid Comment line. Caustic 2 = ! Invalid Comment line. Sulfur

Any text enclosed in < angle brackets > is considered a comment and is ignored. These comments can appear anywhere in the neutral file except within a description. Blank lines can occur anywhere in a neutral files for readability. These lines are ignored. Each entry can begin at any point along an input line but must be separated from adjacent entries by one or more spaces. Note/code numbers need not be in sequential order.

12. Standard Note Library

451

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Defining Text for Standard Note Types


You can specify the text for the various standard note types by loading the standard note titles as standard note type 999. The specified title will display in a list of standard note types or a list of the selections for a specific standard note type.

452

_ _______________
12.1 Standard Note Library Manager
The Standard Note Library Manager is used to create a new Standard Note Library or to create, modify, or delete data in the library. You can also create reports of the data in the library. Select the Standard Note Library Manager from the Reference Data Manager form.

Standard Note Library Manager

Before using this command


Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Standard Note Library files in the Reference Database Management Data. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path.

Options
Create Library Used to create a new Standard Note Library. Compress Library Used to compress the Standard Note Library. Unapproved ==> Approved Used to copy the unapproved Standard Note Library to the approved library. Create Used to compile source files and add the resulting code to the Standard Note Library. You can create a single standard note set or specify a list of standard notes to be created.

12. Standard Note Library

453

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Revise Used to select a standard note set from the library for editing and compile the revised standard note definition. Report Used to create a report file of the library contents. List Used to list the files contained in the library. Delete Used to delete a specified standard note set from the library. Extract Used to extract a standard note set from the library for editing or printing. Load Database Used to load the contents of the Standard Note Library into the applicable schemas of the projects relational database to support DBAccess reporting of PDS data.

454

_ _______________
12.1.1 Create Library
This option is used to create a new Standard Note Library. It automatically creates the object library (.l) and the text library (.l.t) for the library that is being created.

Create Library

The system displays the approved and unapproved Standard Note Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files. If you specify an existing library file, the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.

12.1.2

Compress
This option is used to compress the Standard Note Library. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.

12.1.3

Unapproved ==> Approved


This option copies the unapproved Standard Note Library to the approved library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.

12. Standard Note Library

455

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

12.1.4

Create Standard Note Type


This option enables you to create a new standard note set by inserting the data in a neutral file into the Standard Note Library. The neutral file enables you to define piping notes required to support the piping design effort. You can define code list sets, or standard notes applicable to: a piping materials class, a piping commodity, a specialty item, or an instrument. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created.

Before using this command


To add more than one standard note type to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of the standard note source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. You can define the default path for standard note neutral files using the Default Project Control Data option. See Default Project Control Data, page 53.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create option.

2. 3.

Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the source file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library.

4.

The system displays the default node name and path for the standard note neutral files as specified in the Default Project Control Data at the bottom of the form. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation.

5.

Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file to begin processing.

If a fatal error occurs while loading neutral files, the Standard Note Library is left unchanged.

456

_ _______________
12.1.5 Revise Standard Note Type
This option enables you to replace an existing standard note type. This option enables you to select a standard note type from the library, edit the file, and then compile the file and put it back in the library.

Revise Standard Note Type

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Revise option. The system displays the standard note types in the Standard Note Library.

2.

Select Module Name Select the standard note types to be revised and select Accept.

12. Standard Note Library

457

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 3. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.sh file) to enable you to modify the file.

Make any changes to the displayed file. When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. (If you quit the text editor, the file is not recompiled.)

458

_ _______________
12.1.6 Report Standard Note Library Contents
This option enables you to create a report on the contents of the Standard Note Library. This report list all the standard note types in the Standard Note Library. Refer to Appendix B for a listing of the report file for the delivered Standard Note Library.

Report Standard Note Library Contents

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Report option from the Data Management form. Set the toggle to Report on Unapproved or Report on Approved to define the source of information to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used. Select the report option: Save, Print/Delete or Print/Save. For the Print/Delete or Print/Save options, select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. 4. Select Accept to create the report. For the Save or Print/Save options, the system generates a report named stnotelib.rpt in the default directory based on the contents of the Standard Note Library.

3.

12. Standard Note Library

459

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

12.1.7

List Standard Note Data


This option displays all the standard note types for the Standard Note Library.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the List option. The system displays the Standard note types in the Standard Note Library.

2. 3.

You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Select Cancel to exit the form.

460

_ _______________
12.1.8 Delete Standard Note Data
This option enables you to delete a Standard note type from the Standard Note Library.

Delete Standard Note Data

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Delete option. The system displays the Standard note types in the Standard Note Library.

2.

Select Note Type Select the Standard note type to be deleted from the list of note types. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.

3.

Accept or Select Other Note Type Accept the selected standard note type. The system deletes the standard note type from the Standard Note Library.

12. Standard Note Library

461

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

12.1.9

Extract Standard Note Type


This option enables you to extract a neutral file from the Standard Note Library for editing or printing.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Extract from the Data Management form.

2.

Select Note Type Select the standard note type from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. The system pulls the file out of the library and places it in the default directory defined in the Default Project Control Data. See Default Project Control Data, page 53.

462

_ _______________
12.1.10 Load Database
Before using this command
You must create the necessary database structure for DBAcess reporting through the Project Administrator. Refer to the description of the Project Setup Manager in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Users Guide for more information. You must specify the maximum length of the text for each standard note type in the Standard Note Library in an ASCII file namedstnote_max_len. This maximum length is used to load the standard note data in the relational database. This is the same file used in the Project Administrator to modify the database structure to support DBAccess. It must reside in the project directory. Entries in this file consist of one line for each standard note type with the following format.
!note type 35 36 max length 15 10 short? *

Load Database

This option loads the contents of the Standard Note Library into the applicable schemas of the projects relational database to support DBAccess reporting of PDS data.

The note type and the maximum length are separated by one or more spaces or tabs. An asterisk (*) following the maximum length indicates that the short version of the standard note data be loaded into the relational database. The default is that the long version be loaded. Comments can be placed anywhere in the file and must be preceded by an exclamation point (!). You can determine which standard note data is loaded or not loaded into the relational database. If the maximum length for a standard note type is defined as zero (0) or the standard note type is not included in stnote_max_len, the data for that standard note type will not be loaded. A default note length file is delivered with the PD_Shell product in the file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\stnote_max_len. These maximum lengths were determined on the basis of the long option of standard note data reporting. To minimize relational database size, you should exercise discretion in specifying the maximum length. The maximum length for any standard note type is restricted to 240 characters by RIS.

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select Load Database from the Data Management form. Select Submit to Batch Immediately to begin processing as soon as you exit the form. OR

12. Standard Note Library

Select Delayed Submit to Batch to specify a day and time to process the request.

463

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 3. Accept the specified time. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

464

_ _______________
13. Label Description Library
The Label Description Library contains the definitions for the following basic types of labels. (The numbers in parentheses indicate the range of label numbers for each group of label types.) Refer to Label Types, page 466 for more information. Drawing View Specific Labels (1-129, 2500-2599) System Reserved Labels (1-29) User Defined Piping/Equipment Labels (30-49) User Defined Structural Labels (70-89) User Defined Miscellaneous Labels (90-109) User Defined Electrical Raceway Labels (110-129) User Defined PLANTGEN Labels (2500-2599)

Label Description Library

13. Label Description Lib.

Drawing View Identification Labels (50-69) User Input Labels (200-219) Displayable Attribute Labels (300-399) Commodity Code Labels (400-899) U.S. practice (400-449) European - DIN (450-499) European - British Standard (500-549) European A - Finnish, French, etc. (550-599) European B - (750-799) International - JIS (600-649) International - Australian (650-699) International A (800-849) International B (850-899) Company practice (700-749)

Isometric Drawing Labels (900-999) Report Labels (1150-2149) Clash Management Labels (2200- 2399) These labels are intelligent graphics which represent information from the non-graphical data (databases, user data, etc.). You can update existing drawing view specific labels (1-49, 70130) to reflect the latest data in the database. The default label description library is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\labels.l. All changes to the library are performed interactively using the Label Description Library Manager.

465

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

13.1
13.1.1

Label Types
Displayable Attribute Labels
Each type of displayable attribute label has a description in the Label Description Library. This description identifies the label characteristics such as level, color code, style, and font, and the attribute data associated with the label. A displayable attribute label consists of the text and optionally, a leader line, a line terminator, and some label enclosure graphics. There are four sub-types of Displayable Attribute Labels: Drawing View Specific Label displayable attribute labels for named model items which are placed in a drawing. Drawing View Identification Label labels with attribute linkages to the Drawing View Data (table 122) that report information about the drawing view such as drawing view name and view scale Drawing View Specific Labels are further divided into subcategories for Piping, Structural, HVAC, and Raceway. Drawing View Specific Labels for Piping and View Independent Labels are divided into sub-ranges for system-defined labels and user labels. PDS delivers Design Review Labels (317-330). These labels are the only ones processed by PDS Design Review. You can create new Design Review labels, but the system will not access them.

13.1.2

Alphanumeric Labels
Alphanumeric labels are non-intelligent user-defined labels. Each type of alphanumeric label has a description in the Label Description Library. This description identifies the label characteristics such as level, color code, style, and font. An alphanumeric label consists of the text and optionally, a leader line, a line terminator, and some label enclosure graphics.

13.1.3

Displayable Attribute Message


Each type of displayable attribute message has a description in the Label Description Library. Unlike the other label types, the description of a displayable attribute message only contains the attribute data. Therefore, you cannot define label description data such as color, weight, style, and text size for a displayable attribute message. A displayable attribute message has all or part of its text derived from the alphanumeric data that is linked to a specified named item in the model.

466

_ _______________
A displayable attribute message can also be used to create a value for another attribute, for example, the Line Number Label attribute. Displayable attribute messages also define the hard-coded values for Design Review labels.

Label Types

A displayable attribute message is displayed temporarily at the terminal either as an identification message or as a reporting message. Some of these messages are displayed in the terminals refresh message fields. Other messages are displayed temporarily in the model. The system does not place any graphics in the model for this type of label. The text size of these labels is always the same regardless of the screen view scale.

13. Label Description Lib.

13.1.4

Commodity Code Attribute Message


Commodity code attribute messages are the same as displayable attribute messages, except they are used for bill of materials reporting. All or part of the messages text is derived from the alphanumeric data in the database. A material description attribute message only contains attribute data; you cannot define label description data such as color, weight, style, and text size. There are 10 categories of Material Description Attribute Messages U.S. practice DIN practice British Standard European practice A European practice B International practice - JIS International practice - Australian International practice A International practice B Company practice

13.1.5

Isometric Drawing Labels


The isometric drawing labels are similar to the commodity code attribute messages and are used by the isometric extraction software.

467

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

13.1.6

Report Labels
A range of report labels (1150-2149) is reserved in the Label Description Library for use in formatting fields in a report. This is accomplished by using the special report indices for the Label Description Library. (Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for information on the report indices.) When report labels are used, you cannot sort on an individual attribute used to form the report label. However, you can sort on the complete report label.

13.1.7

Clash Management Labels


A range of labels (2200-2299) is reserved in the Label Description Library for use by the Envelope Builder in creating the primary description and the secondary description for clash management. The label to be used is determined on the basis of the models discipline and the type of component. The following label numbers are reserved in the Label Description Library for use in clash management. Envelope builders for disciplines other than piping and equipment do not implement the labels reserved below. 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2220 2221 2222 2223 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2260 2262 2261 2263 Piping - primary description for piping specialty - 2 cps Piping - primary description for piping specialty - 3 cps Piping - primary description for piping commodity - 2 cps Piping - primary description for piping commodity - 3 cps Piping - primary description for piping/tubing Piping - primary description for instrument component - 2 cps Piping - primary description for instrument component - 3 cps Piping - primary description for pipe support Piping - secondary description for piping segment Equipment - primary description for equipment Equipment - primary description for nozzle Equipment - secondary description for equipment Equipment - secondary description for nozzle PLANTGEN - pipe PLANTGEN - piping component PLANTGEN - equipment/miscellaneous PLANTGEN - nozzle PLANTGEN - structural/civil PLANTGEN - HVAC PLANTGEN - raceway PLANTGEN - pipe support Raceway - Straight Primary Label Raceway - Straight Secondary Label Raceway - Fitting Primary Label Raceway - Fitting Secondary Label

468

_ _______________
2264 2265 2266 2267 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 Raceway - Panel Primary Label Raceway - Panel Secondary Label Raceway - Ductbank Primary Label Raceway - Ductbank Secondary Label HVAC - Primary Label for Connector HVAC - Secondary Label for Connector HVAC - Primary Label for Fitting HVAC - Secondary Label for Fitting HVAC - Primary Label for Duct HVAC - Secondary Label for Duct HVAC - Primary Label for Diffuser HVAC - Secondary Label for Diffuser HVAC - Primary Label for Grille HVAC - Secondary Label for Grille HVAC - Primary Label for Register HVAC - Secondary Label for Register HVAC - Primary Label for Humidifier HVAC - Secondary Label for Humidifier HVAC - Primary Label for Filter HVAC - Secondary Label for Filter HVAC - Primary Label for Damper HVAC - Secondary Label for Damper HVAC - Primary Label for Coil HVAC - Secondary Label for Coil HVAC - Primary Label for Terminal Device HVAC - Secondary Label for Terminal Device HVAC - Primary Label for Equipment HVAC - Secondary Label for Equipment HVAC - Primary Label for Hood HVAC - Secondary Label for Hood

Label Types

13. Label Description Lib.

The 2 CP clash management labels are used when the number of connect points, excluding taps, is less than or equal to two. The 3 CP clash management labels are used when the number of connect points, excluding taps, is greater than or equal to three. The primary description is limited to 20 characters and the secondary description is limited to 40 characters.

469

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

470

_ _______________
13.2 Label Description Library Manager
The Label Description Library Manager enables you to define the graphic parameters for a label (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label (what information comprises the label). You can create a new (empty) label description library or create, revise, or delete label descriptions in an existing library.

Label Description Library Manager

13. Label Description Lib.

Options
Create Library Used to create a new Label Description Library. Compress Library Used to compress the Label Description library. Unapproved ==> Approved Used to copy the unapproved Label Description library to the approved library. Create Label Data Used to create a new label description and insert it in the Label Description Library. Revise Label Data Used to select a label from the library, edit the file, and put the revised file back into the library. Delete Label Data Used to remove a label description from the library. Report Label Data Used to create a report of the library contents.

471

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

13.2.1

Create Library
This option is used to create a new Label Description Library. This option will be deactivated if the specified library already exists. The system displays the approved and unapproved Label Description Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library file. If you specify an existing library file, the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.

13.2.2

Compress Library
This option is used to compress the Label Description library. Any labels which have been deleted from the library will be removed.

13.2.3

Unapproved ==> Approved


This option copies the unapproved Label Description library to the approved library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.

472

_ _______________
13.2.4 Create Label Data
This option enables you to add a label description of a specified type to the Label description Library.

Create Label Data

13. Label Description Lib.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Create Label Data from the data management form. The system displays a form listing the types of labels which can be created.

2.

Select Option Select the type of label to be created. See Label Types for a description of all the label types and subtypes. The system adds a label number in the range for the selected label type, and activates one of the following screens to enable you to define the description data and/or attribute data for the label to be created. For Drawing View Specific Labels and Drawing View Identification Labels you can define both graphic data and attribute data. For User Input Labels you can define graphic data only. Refer to Create Label Graphic Data, page 475 for more information. For Isometric Drawing Labels, Displayable Attribute Labels, Commodity Code Labels, Report Labels or Clash Management you can define attribute data only. Refer to Create Label Attribute Data, page 478 for more information.

473

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Label Subtypes
Depending on the Option selected, the system may activate one of the following screens to further classify the type of label to be created. Drawing View Specific Labels

Commodity Code Labels

474

_ _______________
13.2.4.1 Create Label Graphic Data
This form enables you to define the graphic parameters for the selected label type.

Create Label Graphic Data

13. Label Description Lib.

Options
Create Label Attribute Data Enables you to specify the attributes which make up the label and the format of the label. Refer to Create Label Attribute Data, page 478 for more information. Mass Annotation Options Enables you so set up the Mass Annotation options for use with PD_Draw. Refer to Mass Annotation Options, page 484 for more information.

Field Descriptions
Label Type Number of the label being created. (This field is filled in automatically by the system.) Label Description Short description for the label (up to 20 characters). Graphics Color Activates the Select Color form used to set the color for the label enclosure, leader line, and line terminator. Graphics Weight Line weight (0-31) for the label enclosure, leader line, and line terminator.

475

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Graphics Style Line Style (0-7) for the label enclosure, leader line, and line terminator. Alternate Style Alternate (centerline) line style (0-7) for name label leader lines. The default is the same as the Graphics Style. Text Color Activates the Select Color form used to set the color for the label text. Text Weight Line weight (0-31) for the label text. Character Size Activates the Define Active Character Size form used to set the character plot size (text height and text width). You can select one of the default settings (A - J) or key in a size. The default settings are defined in the drawings type 63 data. Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting the default sizes. Maximum Length Maximum line length (1-80) for the text. This setting is also used to determine the label enclosure size. Line Spacing Line spacing between label text represented as a fraction of text height (0. - 10.). Also used to determine label enclosure size. Maximum Lines Maximum number of lines in the label text (1-30). Also used to determine label enclosure size. Text Font Font (0-255) for the label text. Enclosure Option Displays a set of options at the bottom of the form for setting the type of label enclosure. The default is No Label Enclosure.

The User Defined Enclosure Option places as a cell, with no Leader Line. When this option is chosen, the Leader Line Option toggle is no longer available. Diameter (Used with Label Enclosure Options 2 and 3) Diameter of the circle enclosure graphic. Cell Name (Used with Label Enclosure Option 8) Name of the Label Enclosure cell. Leader Line Option Toggle to define whether to use a Leader Line for the label. Terminator Char. Character that represents the line terminator symbol in the attached Font Library. Terminator Font Font (0-255) for the line terminator.

476

_ _______________
Underline Spacing Underline spacing below text represented as a fraction of text height (0. - 10.). If this value is 0, no underlining is performed. Label Category The form displays the name label category and the user-defined drawing annotation categories. You can select one of the 20 user-defined drawing annotation categories or use the default category. The default category is that of the name label category. The text for the drawing annotation categories is extracted from the drawing category descriptions (drwcats.txt) in the project directory.

Create Label Graphic Data

13. Label Description Lib.

All of these parameters do not apply to each label type; the system skips over any nonrequired parameters. Once you have defined all the applicable parameters, select Attribute Label Data to specify the attributes which make up the label and the format of the label (or select Accept for graphics only labels). If your project will be using the Mass Annotation command in PD_Draw to simplify label placement, select the Mass Annotation Options command on to set up the Mass Annotation options. Refer to Mass Annotation Options, page 484 for more details.

477

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

13.2.4.2

Create Label Attribute Data


This form enables you to specify the attributes which make up the label and the format of the label. The Line and Item fields are used to define the attributes that make up the label and the order of the attributes within the label.

Set the option at the upper left of the form Insert Data Delete Data Edit Data used to add a line or item to the label description. used to delete a selected line or item from the label description. used to revise a selected line or item in the label description.

Insert Data
1. 2. 3. Set the option to Insert Data. Set the toggle to Insert after or Insert before. Select Line or Item to Insert Data Select a line field to create a new line (before or after) the selected line. OR Select an item field to create a new item in the current line (before or after) the selected item.

478

_ _______________
The system activates a form that displays the Attribute Data Types. The following forms illustrates the displays for a drawing view specific label. (The second form appears when Other Data is selected.)

Create Label Attribute Data

13. Label Description Lib.

4.

Select Option Select the attribute data type for the label. You can select Other Data to select the attribute data type for Raceway data.

479

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 The system displays the attributes for the selected data type.

5.

Enter Data Select the attribute to be reported from the form. The system sets the Format Data automatically. You can modify the total length and the number of decimal places (if applicable). For labels that include an angle value (such as the bend angle of a piping component), select the Angle format to display the value in angle units (such as degrees and minutes). The angle units are determined by the angular format defined through the Project Data Manager. For labels that include a distance attribute (such as the face-to-face dimension of a piping component), you can select Fraction to format decimal attributes as a coordinate readout. This option is restricted to those decimal attributes that represent dimensions. OR For drawing view specific labels, you can select User Keyin Attribute to specify text to be entered by the user at label creation. OR Select Text Only and key in the text for a literal expression to be inserted in the label. OR Select Spacing Only and key in the number of spaces to define spacing between attributes.

480

_ _______________
6. You can only define one user-defined keyin in a specific label. 7. Select one of the Optional Data options to specify a modifier to the active format. Master Units = MicroStation master units, Sub Units = MicroStation sub units. Accept the specified attribute data.

Create Label Attribute Data

Repeat the previous step to add additional attribute text information. This allows you to combine attribute values and pre-formatted text.

13. Label Description Lib.

8.

Delete Data
1. 2. 3. Set the option to Delete Data. Select the line or item to be deleted. Select Accept to delete the highlighted line or item. When you select a line, the system deletes all the associated items.

Edit Data
1. 2. Set the option to Edit Data. Select Item to Edit Select the item to be revised. The system displays the attributes definition form for the selected item. The active setting is highlighted or shown in the display fields. 3. Select an attribute from the form to change the type of data. OR Select the Format Data option. You can modify the total length and the number of decimal places (if applicable). OR For drawing view specific labels, you can select User Keyin Attribute to specify text to be entered by the user at label creation. OR Select Text Only and key in the text for a literal expression to be inserted in the label. OR Select Spacing Only and key in the number of spaces to define spacing between attributes.

481

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 4. Repeat the previous steps to edit additional items. THEN Accept the edits.

Examples
**************** Label Type = 310 **************** Label Name = Line Number Label [1][2][3]-[5]-[7]-[9] Piping Segment Data [1] fluid_code - Character [2] unit_code - Character [3] line_sequence_no - Character 4 - - [5] nominal_piping_dia - Character 6 - - [7] piping_mater_class - Character 8 - - [9] insulation_purpose - Character (3) (2) (16) (7) (6) (3)

**************** Label Type = 317 **************** Label Name = Dgn review segment Line no: [2] Construction status: [4] Nor oper press: [6][7] Nor oper temp: [9][10] Steam out temp: [12][13] Heat tracing: [15] Insulation: [17] Cleaning: [19] Piping Segment Data 1 [2] 3 [4] 5 [6] [7] 8 [9] [10] 11 [12] [13] 14 [15] 16 [17] - Line no: line_number_label - Character (30) - Construction status: construction_stat - Character (15) - Nor oper press: nor_oper_pres - Real (8.2) nor_op_pres_units - Character (10) - Nor oper temp: nor_oper_temp - Real (5.0) nor_op_temp_units - Character (5) - Steam out temp: steam_outlet_temp - Real (5.0) nor_op_temp_units - Character (5) - Heat tracing: heat_tracing_media - Character (5) - Insulation: insulation_thick - Real (5.2) with sub units (ex. ",IN,MM,etc.)

482

_ _______________
18 - Cleaning: [19] cleaning_reqmts - Character (10)

Create Label Attribute Data

13. Label Description Lib.

483

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

13.2.4.3

Mass Annotation Options


Selecting the Mass Annotation Options command activates the Mass Annotation Options form.

This form allows you to specify the following options for use with the Mass Annotation command in PD_Draw: Are Previously Labeled Objects to be Labeled? Are Objects Clipped by Drawing View Bounds to be Labeled? Are Objects Hidden by Other Objects to be Labeled?

Steps
1. 2. Place a data point on the desired selection under each question. Accept the selections and return to the Create Label Graphic Data form.

484

_ _______________
13.2.5 Revise Label Data
This option enables you to revise the graphic data or attribute data for an existing label description.

Revise Label Data

13. Label Description Lib.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Revise from the Data Management form. The system activates the following form which enables you to select the type of label to be modified.

2.

Select Option Select the type of label to be revised. See Label Types for a description of all the label types and subtypes. The system displays the existing label for the selected label type.

3.

Select Label Type Select the specific label description to be revised. Depending on the label type selected, the system displays the graphic data form or the attribute data form. For example, if you select label type 011, the system displays the following form.

485

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

4. 5.

Select the parameter to be modified and key in the new value for that parameter. You can select Attribute Label Data to activate the attribute data form.

6.

Set the option to Insert Data, Delete Data, or Edit Data. The default is Edit Data. Refer to Create Label Attribute Data for information on these options. When finished, select Accept to save the changes and return to the Revise Label Description form. OR Select Cancel to exit without saving the changes.

7.

486

_ _______________
13.2.6 Delete Label Data
This option enables you to delete an existing label description.

Delete Label Data

13. Label Description Lib.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Delete Label Data from the Data Management form. The system activates the following form which enables you to select the type of label to be deleted.

2.

Select Option Select the type of label to be deleted. See Label Types for a description of all the label types and subtypes. The system displays the existing labels for the selected label type.

3.

Select Label Type Select the specific label description to be deleted.

4.

Accept to Delete Label Type xxx Select Accept to delete the selected label type. The system deletes the description and refreshes the selection screen to enable you to delete another label type.

487

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 5. Select Cancel to return to the Data Management form.

488

_ _______________
13.2.7 Report Label Data
This option creates a listing of the label types defined in the Label Description Library.

Report Label Data

13. Label Description Lib.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Label Data from the Data Management menu.

2.

Set the toggle to Unapproved or Approved to define the source of information to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used. Select the reporting option. Print/Delete submits the generated report output file to the specified print queue and deletes the output file. Print/Save submits the generated report output file to the specified print queue and saves the output file. Save saves the output file without printing. For either of the Print options, the system displays a list of queues based on information in the Project Queue Description Library.

3.

4.

Select Accept to submit the report for processing. Report Completed

489

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 For either of the Save options, the system creates a file named LABEL.RPT in the default directory. Portions of the listing for the delivered labels are provided below. A RIS error may be displayed if an Electrical Raceway Database has not been created as part of the PDS database. The error will only be reported the first time the report is run each PDS session.

**************** Label Type = 1 **************** Label Name = Line Number Label Graphics Color = 4 Graphics Weight = 1 Graphics Style = 0 Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 40 Text Space = 0.400000 Number Line = 1 Text Font = 0 Enclosure Option = 9 Cell Enclosure Name = Leader Line = 1 Line Terminator Char = > Text Font = 125 Under Line = 0.000000 [1] Piping Segment Data [1] line_number_label - Character (40)

*************************************** **************** Label Type = 2 **************** Label Name = Piping Component No Graphics Color = 4 Graphics Weight = 1 Graphics Style = 0 Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 20 Text Space = 0.300000 Number Line = 1 Text Font = 0 Enclosure Option = 9 Cell Enclosure Name = Leader Line = 1 Line Terminator Char = > Text Font = 125 Under Line = 0.000000 [1] Piping Component Data

490

_ _______________
[1] piping_comp_no - Character (20) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 200 **************** Label Name = No Label Enclosure Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 10 Text Space = 0.250000 Number Line = 2 Text Font = 0 Under Line = 0.000000 **************** Label Type = 201 **************** Label Name = Rectangle Enclosure Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 10 Text Space = 0.250000 Number Line = 2 Text Font = 0 Under Line = 0.000000 Attribute Data *************************************** **************** Label Type = 300 **************** Label Name = Piping Component ID [1] / [3] Connect Point Piping Component Data [1] commodity_name 2 - / [3] model_code 4 - 5 space(s) 5 - Connect Point - Character (6) - Character (6)

Report Label Data

13. Label Description Lib.

*************************************** **************** Label Type = 301 **************** Label Name = Piping Comp Center [1] / [3] Component Center Piping Component Data [1] commodity_name 2 - / [3] model_code 4 - 5 space(s) - Character (6) - Character (6)

491

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
5 - Component Center *************************************** **************** Label Type = 353 **************** Label Name = Dgn Rvw Weld Label Weld Number: [2] - [4] Weld Type: [6] Piping NPD/OD: [8] - [10] PMC: [12] Weld Attributes 1 - Weld Number: [2] weld_id - Character (16) 3 - - [4] weld_no_A - Character (8) 5 - Weld Type: [6] weld_type_A - Character (20) 7 - Piping NPD/OD: [8] nom_pipe_diam_A - Character (20) 9 - - [10] outside_diam_A - Real (15.4) 11 - PMC: [12] piping_mater_class - Character (16) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 400 **************** Label Name = Comp cmdty code [1] Piping Component Data [1] commodity_code - Character (16)

*************************************** **************** Label Type = 401 **************** Label Name = Pipe sch/thk 1 [1] Piping/Tubing Data [1] schedule_thickness - Character (8)

*************************************** **************** Label Type = 404 **************** Label Name = 1/2CP COMP GCP [1] Piping Component Data [1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM

492

_ _______________
*************************************** **************** Label Type = 405 **************** Label Name = 2CP RED COMP GCP X RCP [1] X [3] Piping Component Data [1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM 2 X [3] CP_2_NOM_PIPE_DIAM *************************************** **************** Label Type = 408 **************** Label Name = 3CP RED COMP GCP x RCP [1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM 2 X [3] CP_3_NOM_PIPE_DIAM *************************************** **************** Label Type = 410 **************** Label Name = 3CP COMP RCP [1] CP_3_NOM_PIPE_DIAM *************************************** **************** Label Type = 950 **************** Label Name = MAL nozzle descr [1] [3] Nozzle Data [1] nominal_piping_dia - Character (9) 2 - 1 space(s) [3] preparation - Character (8) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 951 **************** Label Name = Iso continuation [1][2]-[4][5] Piping Segment Data [1] unit_code [2] line_sequence_no 3 - - [4] fluid_code [5] design_area_number - Character (3) - Character (16) - Character (5) - Character (12)

Report Label Data

13. Label Description Lib.

***************************************

493

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
**************** Label Type = 1150 **************** Label Name = Line ID [1][2]-[4] Piping Segment Data [1] unit_code [2] line_sequence_no 3 - - [4] fluid_code - Character (3) - Character (16) - Character (5)

*************************************** **************** Label Type = 1151 **************** Label Name = Iso no [1][2]-[4][5] Piping Segment Data [1] unit_code [2] line_sequence_no 3 - - [4] fluid_code [5] design_area_number - Character (3) - Character (16) - Character (5) - Character (12)

*************************************** **************** Label Type = 2200 **************** Label Name = Specialty 2cp (1st) [1] Piping Component Data [1] piping_comp_no - Character (20)

*************************************** **************** Label Type = 2201 **************** Label Name = Specialty 3cp (1st) [1] Piping Component Data [1] piping_comp_no - Character (20)

***************************************

494

_ _______________
13.3 Label Library Merger

Label Library Merger

13. Label Description Lib.

The Label Library Merger utility allows PDS users to copy labels from one or two label description libraries into another library and to modify the destination library as necessary. You can only add and remove labels with this command. To edit an existing label or create a new label definition, use the Label Description Library Manager command.

Features
Copy labels from one library to another. Delete an existing label from the destination library. Rename an existing label in the destination library. Compress the destination library. Validate the destination library.

13.3.1

Label Library Merger Interface


This section contains descriptions of the Label Library Merger interface, including information on all dialog boxes and commands. The Label Library Merger commands are available from the toolbar and from menus.

495

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

The Label Library Merger dialog box contains three label description library views. The two views on the left display the contents of the source libraries, and the view on the right displays the contents of the destination library. Each library view is divided into two columns, Number and Description, which display the appropriate data for each label. You can click a heading in any library view to sort the labels by that heading. The bottom pane of the Label Library Merger dialog box is the message window, which displays errors and other informational messages during the library merge workflow.

496

_ _______________
13.3.1.1 File Menu
The commands on the File menu allow you to open libraries, display information in the Message Window, and exit the Label Library Merger.

File Menu

13. Label Description Lib.

13.3.1.1.1

Open Source Label Library 1


This command opens a label description library from which to copy labels. You can key in or browse to the location of a source library. The system displays the label number and description in the Library 1 View.

13.3.1.1.2

Open Source Label Library 2


This command opens a second label description library from which to copy labels. Using a second source library is optional, and not required for the use of this command. The system displays the label number and description in the Library 2 View.

13.3.1.1.3

Open Destination Library


This command opens a new or existing destination library, where labels from the source libraries are copied. The system displays the copied label numbers and descriptions in the Destination Library View. To create a new destination library, browse to the appropriate folder in the Open Destination Library dialog box, type a new library name in the File name text box, and click Open. The system will then create the new label description library in the specified location.

13.3.1.1.4

Information
This command displays information in the Message Window regarding the source and destination libraries.

Example

MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\labels.l Opened as Source Label Library 1 MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\company_labels.l Opened as Source Label Li MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\all_labels.l Opened as Destination Label L

497

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

13.3.1.1.5

Exit
This command closes the Label Library Merger utility.

498

_ _______________
13.3.1.2 Edit Menu
The commands on the Edit menu allow you to modify your selections in the various views on the Label Library Merger dialog box, modify and delete the label information in the destination library, and check the destination library for errors.

Edit Menu

13. Label Description Lib.

13.3.1.2.1

Select All
This command selects all the labels in the active view.

13.3.1.2.2

Unselect All
This command resets selections so that no labels in the active view are selected.

13.3.1.2.3

Invert Selection
This command switches the selection status of the labels in the active view, so that labels that are currently selected become unselected, and labels that are currently not selected become selected.

13.3.1.2.4

Edit Label Number


This command allows users to modify the label number of the selected label in the Destination Library View.

13.3.1.2.5

Edit Label Description


This command allows users to modify the label description of the selected label in the Destination Library View.

13.3.1.2.6

Delete
This command removes the selected labels from the destination library.

13.3.1.2.7

Validate
This command checks the labels in the destination library for valid label numbers, and reports any invalid label numbers in the Message Window.

499

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

13.3.1.2.8

Compress Destination Library


This command removes the deleted labels from the destination library.

13.3.1.2.9

Copy to Destination
This command copies the selected labels from the source libraries to the destination library. The system uses the following criteria to determine label numbers: If there is no label in the destination library with the same label number as the label being copied, the label is copied with its original label number. If there is a label in the destination library with the same label number as the label being copied, the label is copied with a new label number, which is assigned using the following criteria: If there is an unassigned label number in the copied labels category in the destination library, the system assigns the next available label number in that category. If there is no unassigned label number in the copied labels category in the destination library, the system adds 5000 to the label number and copies the label. For example, label number 23 in the source library is copied to label 5023 in the destination library. Label numbers above 5000 generate errors in PDS. The Validate command reports any such label numbers in the Message Window. Refer to Label Description Library, page 465 for more information on label categories.

13.3.1.2.10

Clear Error Messages


This command refreshes the Message Window.

500

_ _______________
13.3.1.3 Help Menu
The commands in the Help menu display online Help and other information about the Label Library Merger utility.

Help Menu

13. Label Description Lib.

13.3.1.3.1

Contents
This command displays the Label Library Merger online Help file.

13.3.1.3.2

About Library Merger


This command displays the About dialog box with information about the Label Library Merger utility, including the version number and copyright date.

501

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

13.3.2

Workflow
This section describes the general workflow for the Label Library Merger utility. 1. Click Start > Programs > PD_Shell > PDS Label Library Merger to start the Label Library Merger utility. The Label Library Merger interface displays.

2. 3.

Click File > Open Source Label Library 1. Browse to the location of the first label description library, select the library, and click Open. The system displays the contents of the library in the Library 1 View.

4.

Repeat the previous two steps for the second label description library. The system displays the contents of the library in the Library 2 View.

5.

Click File > Open Destination Library. You can either open an existing library for update or create a new library. The system displays the contents of the destination library in the Destination Library View.

502

_ _______________
6. 7.

Workflow

Select labels in the existing label description libraries to copy to the destination library. Use CTRL+click to select multiple labels, or SHIFT+click to select a range of labels. Use the selection commands on the Edit menu to select all labels, unselect all labels, or invert your selections. Click Edit > Copy to Destination to copy the selected labels to the destination library. The system displays the copied labels in the Destination Library View.

13. Label Description Lib.

8.

Click Edit > Edit Label Number or Edit > Edit Label Description to modify labels in the destination library as necessary. Click Edit > Validate to check the destination library for errors. The system displays any warnings in the Message View.

9.

10.

Click Edit > Compress Destination Library to compress the destination library. The system displays any warnings in the Message View.

11.

When you are finished modifying the destination library, click File > Exit to exit the Label Library Merger utility.

503

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

504

_ _______________
14. Piping Assembly Library
The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. This function is most useful for a commonly placed group of components. The PAL definition is compiled and stored in Piping Assembly Language object library and its text stored in the text library. A Piping Assembly Library which contain the definitions for basic assemblies (macros) is included in the product delivery. \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\assembly.l The PAL definition must be processed and stored in the Piping Assembly Library.

Piping Assembly Library

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

505

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

14.1

Piping Assembly Language


The Piping Assembly Language provides a set of functions to define the placement operation. You can create a PAL definition outside the PDS environment using a text editor.

14.1.1

PAL Keywords
The following list outlines all the keywords that can be used to create a PAL definition. Keywords followed by a number in (parentheses) such as NPD_A (3221), NPD_B (3222), NPD_C (3223) are used to create form gadgets for defining and placing piping assemblies. The number represents the application command number for the keyword. The key entry field number is this number minus 3000. (Therefore, the key entry field number for NPD_A is 221.)

Formbuilder Guidelines
You can customize forms for the purpose of inputting data in the creation of a piping assembly, such as a control station. You can use the gadget numbers for the corresponding input fields. You must adhere to the following conventions when customizing form input fields for the applicable piping assembly. If not documented, any other gadgets on the form should remain consistent with those delivered by Intergraph. All input fields should be sequenced and must have the following characteristics. The Edit Field Options setting in the Form Builder should be Change Mode.

The characteristics form in the Form Builder should have the following settings. Notify Upon Completion - off (NOT the default) Notify at Initial Selection - off The forms delivered by Intergraph can be used as examples for customization. The following list the form builder data for the standard form gadgets.

506

_ _______________
Help key: gadget number: button: Form Size key: gadget number: button: Exit key: gadget number: button: Accept key: gadget number: button: Message Area A - for messages gadget number: characters: lines deep: edit mode: font size: 251 40 3 review only 12 4002 999 manual 4001 998 manual 403 997 automatic 456 995 automatic

Piping Assembly Language

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

Message Area B - for active segment data display gadget number: characters: lines deep: edit mode: font size: Material description display gadget number: characters: lines deep: edit mode: font size: 150 80 3 review only 12 254 40 3 review only 12

507

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Description
# This keyword is used to specify a description for the piping assembly from within the assembly language file. Place a # in the first column of any line followed by a description of as many as 100 characters. Examples: # Control Station

Commands
COMMAND This keyword is used with other keywords to initiate a defined action. Examples: COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA COMMAND = UPDATE_APP COMMAND = POINT_IN_SPACE CONNECT This keyword defines the active point for the next component placed in the PAL definition. The specified reference point must be defined before using this option. Example: CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A PLACE This keyword defines the type of item to be placed. Refer to the PLACE Command Component keywords for a list of component/instrument types. Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY This keyword is used with the PLACE keyword to set the placement mode to be used in placing the specified component. Refer to the Connect Point keywords for a list of viable placement modes. Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 STEM This keyword is used with an orientation keyword to define the direction of the secondary axis. It can be used at the end of a PLACE statement.

508

_ _______________
Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 , STEM = UP

Piping Assembly Language

PLACE Command Components


FITTING, VALVE, FLANGE, BRANCH, PIPE, SPECIALTY, INSTRUMENT, OPTIONAL, TAP These keywords are used with the PLACE keyword to define the type of item to be placed. Example: PLACE PLACE PLACE PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 BRANCH , 90_DEG , BY CP1 PIPE TO REF_PNT_A OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01, BY CP2

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

RDB_INSTRUMENT, RDB_SPECIALTY These keywords are used to place instruments and specialty items that have been defined in the PJS using the tag number. Example: PLACE RDB_INSTRUMENT, INSVLV1, BY CP1

Connect Point
CENTER, CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4, CP5 ACTIVE_PP FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP1, FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP2, FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP3 These keywords identify the connect point for an operation. They can be used with the BY keyword to indicate the means of placement. Example: PLACE VALVE, 6Q1C38, BY CP1 INLET_ELEVATION This keyword set the starting elevation or point of connection. Example: REF_PNT_A = ACTIVE_PP COORDINATE_1 = INLET_ELEVATION

509

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Orientation
ACTIVE EAST, NORTH, UP WEST, SOUTH, DOWN These keywords identify the orientation direction. Example: PLACE FITTING, 6Q2C01, BY CP1, STEM = UP

No Material TakeOff
NO_MTO=1 This keyword can be used immediately before a PLACE statement to specify that the component is not reportable. The system automatically resets MTO processing after placement.

Assembly End Keywords


ASSEMBLY_END_A, ASSEMBLY_END_B These keywords define an assembly end point as a specified coordinate value. An assembly end definition is used to define the endpoints of an assembly. This is required when the assembly is being placed into a pipe so that the pipe is broken properly and the assembly inserted (as in the case of a valve assembly: flange - valve - flange). Example: ASSEMBLY_END_A = REF_PNT_A

Reference Point Keywords


REF_PNT_A, REF_PNT_B, ... REF_PNT_T ACTIVE_PP, NOZZLE These keywords set reference points at specified coordinate values. You can define up to 20 points on the assembly for future reference in the PAL definition. Example: REF_PNT_A = CP_1 Once a reference point is defined, it can be used by a following statement in the PAL definition to indicate a coordinate location (for example, CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A).

510

_ _______________
Generic End Types
NULL_GEN_TYPE, BOLTED, FEMALE, MALE These keywords specify the generic termination type for use in conditional testing.

Piping Assembly Language

Number of Connect Points


NUMBER_CPS This keyword contains the number of connect points of the component just placed. It can be used in branch placement to determine whether to use CP2 or CP3 as a reference point. Example: IF (NUMBER_CPS .EQ. 2.0) THEN REF_PNT_A = CP2 ELSE REF_PNT_A = CP3 ENDIF

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

Commodity Item Name


ITEM_NAME This keyword defines an item name to be used for placement. Example: ITEM_NAME = xxxxxxx

COMPONENT_TAG (3246) This keyword defines the tag for the component to be placed. You can prompt for the tag or use the tutorial interface using the designated field and command numbers. Example: COMPONENT_TAG = USER_INPUT

UORs per Model Subunit


UORS_PER_SUBUNIT This keyword defines the number of UORs per Subunit defined in the model. It can be used to calculate tap location.

511

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Local Coordinates and Orientation


APP_X, APP_Y, APP_Z These keywords define the active placement point which can be used in the connect to segment and point in space routines. These keywords are initially set to the active placement point of the assembly at the start of the assembly placement. COORDINATE_1 (3191) ... COORDINATE_12 (3203) DIMENSION_1 - DIMENSION_20 These keywords are used to receive user input from the tutorial to define the active placement point. The Coordinate keywords identify actual points and the Dimension keywords identify distances and offsets. The Coordinate keywords are only used for elevation values, not Easting or Northing values. Example: APP_Z = COORDINATE_1 COORDINATE_2 = INLET_ELEVATION LOCAL_X, LOCAL_Y, LOCAL_Z These keywords are defined as the active primary, secondary and normal axis at the time the assembly is placed. They are automatically set internally at the start of placement and cannot be modified.

Dimension Definition
DIMENSION_1 (3141), DIMENSION_2 (3142), ... DIMENSION_20 (3160) The Dimension keywords identify distances and offsets.

Move Specified Distance


MOVE_DISTANCE This keyword moves a specified distance in the direction of the active primary. It is useful in placing a variable length pipe by moving out a specified distanced and calling place pipe. Example: MOVE_DISTANCE = DIMENSION_1 PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_A

512

_ _______________
Load Spec Data
LOAD_SPEC_DATA This keyword reads the spec record for the commodity item and assigns values for the following keywords: TERM_TYPE_1, TERM_TYPE_2, ... TERM_TYPE_5 PR_RATING_1, PR_RATING_2, ... PR_RATING_5 GEN_TYPE_1, GEN_TYPE_2, ... GEN_TYPE_5 Example: LOAD_SPEC_DATA = 6Q1C80 IF ( GEN_TYPE_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_1 OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_1 PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2 ENDIF

Piping Assembly Language

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

Setting First and Second Size


FIRST_SIZE, SECOND_SIZE, NPD_STEP_UP, NPD_STEP_DOWN These keywords set the active first size or second size placement parameter a step down/up in the NPD piping material class table. (The system uses the next entry in the NPD table from the active size as the first/second size for a step up or next higher size and uses the previous entry in the NPD table from the active size as the first/second size for a step down or lower size). This particular statement in PAL is used as the active size (first or second) in the placement of all the following components, until the active size is redefined. If you do not include a line size in the PAL definition, the active size at the time of placement of the piping assembly will be used. Example: FIRST_SIZE = NPD_STEP_DOWN

Coordinates of Component Just Placed


COMPONENT_CENTER, CP_1_LOCATION, CP_2_LOCATION COMPONENT_CENTER_X, _Y, _Z CP_1_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z CP_2_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z These keywords define coordinate values for the component just placed. Example: TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y + DELTA_DISTANCE * UORS_PER_SUBUNIT

513

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Outside Diameter
PIPE_OD_CP1, PIPE_OD_CP2 These keywords contain the pipe outside diameter at each connect point for the component just placed. These values can be used to calculate a tap location. Example: DELTA_DISTANCE = ( PIPE_OD_CP1 - PIPE_OD_CP2 ) / 4.0 FLANGE_OD_CP1, FLANGE_OD_CP2 These keywords contain the flange outside diameter at each connect point for the component just placed. These values can be used to calculate a tap location.

Tutorial Display and Acquisition


DISPLAY_TUTORIAL, DISPLAY, DISPLAY_NUMERIC DISPLAY_TUTORIAL = PALCST PROMPT_MESSAGE = Keyin coordinates and valve data DISPLAY = prompt_message used to display any ascii keyword. DISPLAY_NUMERIC = npd_a used to display any numeric keyword. COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA used to get data from the user at placement via a tutorial. GET_ASCII, GET_DECIMAL, GET_INTEGER These keywords get data of a specified type from a user keyin.

Prompt for ASCII Input


USER_INPUT

Updating Active Place Point


Example: COMMAND = UPDATE_APP

The variables APP_X, APP_Y, and APP_Z are assigned the X, Y, and Z values of the current active placement point. This command is useful for variable distance changes in assemblies, and you need to know the new coordinates.

514

_ _______________
Point in Space
Example: COMMAND = POINT_IN_SPACE The values of the keywords APP_X, APP_Y, APP_Z are used to define the active placement point that is not connected to piping or a piping segment. These keywords need to be set before POINT_IN_SPACE is called.

Piping Assembly Language

Connect to Piping Segment


Example: CONNECT TO APP

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

The command syntax is the same as for connecting to a reference point except that the keywords APP_X, APP_Y, APP_Z are used as the coordinates. These points are assumed to lie on a piping segment whereas a reference point identifies a connect point. The keywords should be set before this command is called.

Orientation of Primary and Secondary


ORIENTATION, PROMPT, ORIENT_SECONDARY, ORIENT_PRIMARY, INVERT ORIENT_PRIMARY = LOCAL_X This statement orients the primary axis to be the same as the primary at the beginning of the assembly placement. ORIENT_SECONDARY = LOCAL_Y This statement orients the secondary to be the same as the secondary at placement. ORIENT_SECONDARY = INVERT This statement allows the secondary to be inverted from its current position. You can also use INVERT for the primary axis.

Placement of BRANCH using Table Lookup


90_DEG, 45_DEG, VARIABLE Example: PLACE BRANCH, 90_DEG , BY CENTER

This statement performs a table lookup on the 90 degree branch table to determine the branch component type given the current first and second size. If the branch is on a piping segment or in free space, then Placement BY CENTER should be used. If you are placing fitting to fitting, you should specify connect point placement (BY CP1).

515

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Placement of OPTION flange


OPTION_RATING, OPTION_END_PREP Example: IF ( END_PREP_A .GE. 2.0 .and. END_PREP_A .LE. 199) THEN OPTION_RATING = RATING_A OPTION_END_PREP = END_PREP_A PLACE OPTIONAL, 6Q2C01 , BY CP2 ENDIF The keywords OPTION_RATING and OPTION_END_PREP values are used to determine which option to use for the specified flange. OPTION_TBL_SUFFIX TBL_SUFFIX_GREEN, TBL_SUFFIX_RED END_PREP_1, END_PREP_2, ... END_PREP_5 TBL_SUFFIX_A (301), TBL_SUFFIX_B (302), ... TBL_SUFFIX_E (305) These keywords provide the ability to select the correct optional flange, when the flange is being placed by its welded end.

Placement of Optional Components


OPTION_CODE Examples: OPTION_CODE = PROMPT OPTION_CODE = 790 This keyword sets the option code for the next component placed. If the PROMPT keyword is used, the system activates the Option Code Selection tutorial at placement to enable the user to select the option code. Otherwise the option code is hard-coded.

Placement of Variable length pipe


Example: PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_E

Logical Marks
CHECK_MARK CHECK_MARK_1 (3161), CHECK_MARK_2 (3163), ... CHECK_MARK_20 (3180)

516

_ _______________
The check marks are logical keywords that can be accessed through the tutorial. They can be used for testing for placement of components, etc. Initially they are all set to true.

Piping Assembly Language

Changing Piping Materials Class within an Assembly


ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS (3205) MATERIALS_CLASS_A (3206), MATERIALS_CLASS_B (3207), MATERIALS_CLASS_C (3208)

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

MATERIALS_CLASS_D (3264), MATERIALS_CLASS_E (3265), ... MATERIALS_CLASS_J (3270) Example: MATERIALS_CLASS_B = USER_INPUT ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS = MATERIALS_CLASS_B The values for materials class can be: - obtained from the tutorial using the predefined fields - defined by prompt (USER_INPUT) - hard-coded in the PAL definition. The values for MATERIALS_CLASS_A, through _J are stored locally until a statement with ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS is executed. At that time, the Materials Class in the active data is updated to the assigned value. This enables you to obtain up to three different classes from the tutorial at the start which can be used as needed in the definition.

Component Attributes
NPD_A (3221), NPD_B (3222), NPD_C (3223) NPD_D (3284), NPD_E (3285), ... NPD_J (3290) These keywords store nominal piping diameter values. END_PREP_A (3231), END_PREP_B (3232) These keywords store end preparation values. RATING_A (3236), RATING_B (3237) These keywords store pressure rating values. SCHEDULE_A (3241), SCHEDULE_B (3242) These keywords store schedule/thickness values.

517

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Setting Bend Angle


ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE (3211) BEND_ANGLE_A (3212), BEND_ANGLE_B (3213), ... BEND_ANGLE_E (3216) Example: BEND_ANGLE_A = PROMPT ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE = BEND_ANGLE_B The values for bend angle can be - obtained from the tutorial using the predefined fields - defined by prompt - hard-coded in the PAL definition The active bend angle in the model is not set until a statement with ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE is executed. At that time, the active bend angle is assigned the appropriate value and the next component placed uses that value. The active bend angle is set to 0 after placement.

Component Group
COMPONENT_GROUP, ON, OFF Example: COMPONENT_GROUP = ON

This statement causes the system to search for the next available component group number. This number is assigned to the component group number attribute of each subsequent component placed until the statement COMPONENT_GROUP = OFF is executed or the assembly is completed.

Local Variables
You can use local variables to store values for use in defining a piping assembly. You can use any alphanumeric string as long as it is not reserved as a keyword.

Test Attribute Values


T12C# - Piping Segment Data T34C# - Piping Component Data T50C# - Pipe Data T67C# - Instrument Component Data You can use these keywords to test specific values of the active segment data or active component data, where # refers to the column (attribute) number for the applicable database table. The active component data is represented by the last component placed or the component to which the user is connected.

518

_ _______________
Pre-Define Attribute Values
T34C# - Piping Component Data T50C# - Pipe Data T67C# - Instrument Component Data You can use these keywords to pre-define specific values for the component to be placed, where # refers to the column (attribute) number for the applicable database table. This functionality is similar to the Pre-Define Component Data option of the Place Component command. If you pre-define a value for fabrication category, the component will be designated as having the fabrication category defined by user versus by system such that reconstructing the component will not override the user value with the value in the Reference Database. Having the ability to pre-define the fabrication category within a control station piping assembly will enable you to automatically override the RDB specification of the fabrication category of a single field component, such as a small diameter control valve, in what would otherwise be a shop spool.

Piping Assembly Language

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

519

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

14.1.2

Placing Taps in Assemblies


The syntax for placing taps in assemblies is outlined below: PLACE TAP , 2.0 , 1 where 2.0 is the tap NPD and 1 is the option code. PLACE TAP BY CPn CPn designates the connect point from which to obtain the tap data. The following PAL definitions should be used to specify the tap location before making the PLACE TAP request. TAP_LOCATION = COMPONENT_CENTER CP_1_LOCATION CP_2_LOCATION COMPUTE_FOR_ELBOLET_USING_CP1 COMPUTE_FOR_ELBOLET_USING_CP2

OR

TAP_LOCATION_X = COMPONENT_CENTER_X CP_1_LOCATION_X +CP_2_LOCATION_X +TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y CP_1_LOCATION_Y +CP_2_LOCATION_Y +TAP_LOCATION_Z = COMPONENT_CENTER_Z CP_1_LOCATION_Z +CP_2_LOCATION_Z +-

+- delta_distance delta_distance delta_distance +- delta_distance delta_distance delta_distance +- delta_distance delta_distance delta_distance

The keywords PIPE_OD_CP1, PIPE_OD_CP2, FLANGE_OD_CP1, and FLANGE_OD_CP2 can be used to calculate the delta distance. These values are based on the component just placed in the assembly. For TAP_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z, the X, Y, and Z represent a local coordinate system that is analogous to the orientation at Connect point 1 of the component flipped to point towards the inside of the component. The tap orientation should also be set before making the PLACE TAP request using the PAL orientation commands. The active orientation at time of placement (tap) is used.

520

_ _______________
14.1.3 Sample Piping Assembly Files
This section presents sample PAL files from the delivered Piping Assembly Library. It lists the files and shows the resulting graphics created by the file. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing piping assemblies with the Place Component command.

Sample Piping Assembly Files

DRAIN
# Drain assembly PAL DRAIN ! ! This assembly will place a drain. The user needs to place a 1" ! sockolet at the point the drain is desired. ! PLACE FITTING, 6Q3C88 , BY CP1 ! ! The data from the component spec is read into the keywords. ! TERM_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the numeric value for end preparation (eg. 21) ! PR_RATING_1 TO 5 gets the pressure rating ! GEN_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the textual value for end preparation (eg. MALE) ! LOAD_SPEC_DATA = 6Q1C76 ! ! This IF statement determines if an optional flange is needed before ! the gate valve is placed. ! IF ( GEN_TYPE_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_1 OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_1 PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2 ENDIF ! ! Places a gate valve. Notice in the spec that this type of gate valve ! is different than a 6Q2C01. ! PLACE VALVE, 6Q1C76 , BY CP1 IF ( GEN_TYPE_2 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_2 OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_2 PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 ENDIF ! ! This command allows the user to pick which component to place. If the ! option command is not used the s/w will choose option 1. In this instance, ! without the OPTION_CODE command will cause an error because there are no ! option 1 attributes available for 6Q2C16. Another possiblilty would be to ! use OPTION_CODE = PROMPT. The user will be prompted for which component is ! desired. ! OPTION_CODE = 163 PLACE FITTING, 6Q2C16 , BY CP1 END

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

521

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Graphics Placed by Drain Assembly

Pump Discharge Assembly


# Pump Discharge PAL PDISC1 ! ! Pump Discharge ! ! DISPLAY_TUTORIAL = PAS010 NPD_A = FIRST_SIZE DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_A NPD_B = SECOND_SIZE DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_B PROMPT_MESSAGE = Enter Reducer First Size DISPLAY = PROMPT_MESSAGE COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA PLACE FLANGE , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 FIRST_SIZE = NPD_A DELTA_DISTANCE = ( PIPE_OD_CP1 * 0.5 - PIPE_OD_CP2 * 0.5) / 2.0 PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C23 , BY CP2 TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y - DELTA_DISTANCE * UORS_PER_SUBUNIT ORIENT_PRIMARY = LOCAL_Y ORIENT_SECONDARY = LOCAL_X PLACE TAP BY CP1 REF_PNT_A = CP1 REF_PNT_B = CP3 CONNECT TO REF_PNT_B NPD_C = SECOND_SIZE DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_C PROMPT_MESSAGE = Enter Branch Size DISPLAY = PROMPT_MESSAGE COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA SECOND_SIZE = NPD_C PLACE BRANCH , 90_DEG , BY CP1 OPTION_CODE = PROMPT PLACE FITTING , 6Q3C88 , BY CP1

522

_ _______________
ORIENTATION = PROMPT PLACE VALVE , 6Q1C80 , BY CP1 CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A PLACE FLANGE , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2 PLACE VALVE , 6Q1C38 , BY CP1 ORIENTATION = PROMPT PLACE VALVE , 6Q1C01 , BY CP1 PLACE FLANGE , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 END

Sample Piping Assembly Files

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

Graphics Placed by Pump Discharge Assembly

523

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

524

_ _______________
14.2 Piping Assembly Library Manager

Piping Assembly Library Manager

The Piping Assembly Library Manager enables you to create a new (empty) piping assembly library or create, revise, and delete piping assembly definitions in an existing library. The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. This function is most useful for a commonly placed group of components. Refer to Piping Assembly Library, page 505, for more information on this library and refer to Piping Assembly Language, page 506, for more information on the PAL files.

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

Before using this command


Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Assembly Library files in the Reference Database Management Data. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path.

14.2.1

Options
Create Library used to create a new Piping Assembly Library. See page 527. Compress used to compress the Piping Assembly library. See page 527. Unapproved ==> Approved used to copy the unapproved Piping Assembly library to the approved library. See page 527.

525

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Create/Interactive Data used to compile Piping Assembly Language source files and insert them in the Piping Assembly Library. See page 528. Create/Batch Data used to compile Piping Assembly Language Source files via batch processing. See page 529. Revise Data used to select an PAL module from the library, edit the file, and put the revised file back into the library. See page 530. Delete Data used to remove an PAL module from the library. See page 532. Report Data used to create a report of the library contents. See page 533. List Data used to display the Eden modules in the library. See page 534. Extract Data used to extract an Eden module from the library for editing or printing. See page 535. Full List / Sub-string You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the assembly data tables to be listed. Full List lists all the assembly definitions in the Assembly Library. Sub-string limits the list to those files which contain a specified substring.

526

_ _______________
14.2.2 Create Library
This option is used to create a new Piping Assembly Library. It automatically creates the object library (.l) and the text library (.l.t) for the library that is being created.

Create Library

The system displays the approved and unapproved Piping Assembly Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files. If you specify an existing library file, the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

14.2.3

Compress
This option is used to compress the Piping Assembly library. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.

14.2.4

Unapproved ==> Approved


This option copies the unapproved Piping Assembly library to the approved library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.

527

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

14.2.5

Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data


This option enables you to compile PAL source code into object code and insert the specified files into the Piping Assembly library. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created. Refer to the description of the Piping Assembly Library for more information on Piping Assembly Language modules.

Before using this command


To add more than one PAL file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of the source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. Set Assembly Path and Assembly Node in the RDB Management Data to the location of the assembly source files.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create/Interactive option.

2. 3.

Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. Specify Filename for Processing Key in the name of the PAL file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library.

4.

The system displays the default node name and path for the location of the PAL files at the bottom of the form. You can use the default options or override the values for this operation.

5.

Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file to begin processing.

528

_ _______________
14.2.6 Create/Batch Assembly Data
This option enables you to compile PAL source code into object code and insert the specified files into the Piping Assembly library. The specified files are submitted to the batch queue PDreference for processing.

Create/Batch Assembly Data

Before using this command


To add more than one PAL file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of the source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. Set Assembly Path and Assembly Node in the RDB Management Data to the location of the assembly source files.

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create/Batch option.

2. 3.

Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. Specify Filename for Processing Key in the name of the PAL file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library and select Accept.

4.

The system displays the default node name and path for the location of the PAL files at the bottom of the form. You can use the default values or override the values for this operation.

5.

Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit set the time and day to process the files.

6.

Accept the file to begin processing. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

529

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

14.2.7

Revise Piping Assembly Data


This option enables you to select a PAL module from the library, edit the file, and then compile the file and put it back in the library.

Before using this command


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Revise option. The system displays the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.

2.

Select Assembly for Revision Select the PAL modules to be revised and select Accept.

530

_ _______________
3. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.sh file) to enable you to modify the file.

Revise Piping Assembly Data

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

Make any changes to the displayed file. When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. (If you quit the text editor, the file is not recompiled.) If an error occurs in revising a piping assembly, the system invoke the editor automatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem. 4. You can select other files to edit or select exit to return to the data management form.

531

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

14.2.8

Delete Piping Assembly Data


This option enables you to delete a PAL module or set of PAL modules from the Piping Assembly Library.

Before using this command


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Delete option. The system displays the table files in the active library.

2.

Select Module for Deletion Select the modules to be deleted from the list of modules. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.

3.

Accept or Select Other Option Accept the modules and begin processing. The system deletes the modules from the Piping Assembly Library.

532

_ _______________
14.2.9 Report Assembly Data
This option enables you to create a list file of all the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.

Report Assembly Data

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Report option from the Data Management form.

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

2.

Revise Report Parameters Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created.

3.

Select Print or Print/Save. Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer to the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting up multiple print queues. If you select the Print/Save option, the system will create a file named assemblies in the default source file location.

4.

Accept to Form Report Select Accept to create the specified report file.

533

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

14.2.10

List Assembly Data


This option displays all the PAL modules for the Piping Assembly Library.

Before using this command


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL modules to be listed.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the List option. The system displays the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.

2. 3.

You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Select Cancel to exit the form.

534

_ _______________
14.2.11 Extract Assembly Data
This option enables you to extract an PAL module out of the Piping Assembly Library for editing or printing.

Extract Assembly Data

Before using this command


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed. Define the node name and path for the location of the PAL files in the Default Project Control Data or using the fields at the bottom of the Assembly Data Management form.

14. Piping Assembly Lib.

Operating Sequence
1. Select Extract from the Data Management form.

2.

Select Assembly for Extraction Select the modules from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default directory specified in the Project Control Data. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named PD_pal_list. If the list file is less than 24 hours old, the system appends the entries to the file, otherwise it overwrites the file.

535

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

536

_ _______________
15. Reference Database Revision Manager
This command creates a set of reports used to coordinate revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which are required in the model. Each of the four reports listed is created in the directory for the applicable model. Creation of any of these reports also generates a summary report. The summary report is created and named according to user-specified information provided on the Reference Database Revision Manager form. Selecting the option to print the summary report will also force the printing of the individual report that initiated the creation of the summary report.

Reference Database Revision Manager

15. Revision Manager

Options
Reference Data Conflict Report Creates a report of piping or instrument components (including piping and tubing) in any model within the project that have any specification data that is in conflict with the appropriate Piping Commodity Data, Piping Specialty Data, or Instrument Data of the Material Reference Database. The RDB Conflict Report file has an extension of .rpt and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.rpt . Refer to the section entitled Hierarchy of Reported Discrepancies found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order of significance of reported problems.

537

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 You should run this report when segment data or RDB data (such as in the Piping Job Specification Database, the Piping Job Spec Tables, and the Physical Dimension Tables) have been changed and you wish to determine which components need to be reconstructed or updated from the RDB. Table Change Report Creates a report of all piping or instrument components (including pipes) in any model within the project that are affected by a change to a specific table for a specific input or set of inputs. Both geometric changes as a result of revisions to dimension tables and changes in weight data as a result of revisions to weight tables are reported. The Table Change Report file has an extension of .tcr and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.tcr . If your project was created with PDS version 6.0, use the Reference Data Conflict Report instead. Reference Data Impact Report Creates a report, based on user-defined search criteria, of the effects of modifying individual component attributes in the current approved RDB. The RDB Impact Report file has an extension of .imp and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.imp . Proposed RDB Changes Report Creates a single report assessing the effect of multiple changes in the unapproved Material Reference Database. The Proposed RDB Changes Report file has an extension of .pcs and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.pcs . This report does not update the model. Print/Delete This option deletes the summary report after it is printed. Selecting this option activates the queue pick list which allows you to select the appropriate print queue. Print/Save This option does not delete the summary report after it is printed. Selecting this option activates the queue pick list which allows you to select the appropriate print queue. Save Saves the report in the model directory, and saves the summary report in the user-specified directory. This option does not print the summary report.

Field Descriptions
Report Node Specifies the node on which the summary report will be created. Report Path Specifies the directory in which the summary report will be created. Report Name Specifies the name that will be used for the summary report file.

538

_ _______________
Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy
The following chart summarizes some of the parameters used in the processing and creation of the reports available form this command:

Reference Database Revision Manager

Discrepancies are reported according to the significance of the problem they represent. In all cases, the most severe problem will be the problem that is reported. The hierarchy of the problems reported is as follows:

15. Revision Manager

1. 2. 3. 4.

Item not found in the spec. Dimension tables have changed. Discrepancy between component connect point NPD and segment NPD. Discrepancy between model and RDB for any of the following attributes: end preparation - green pressure rating - green schedule/thickness - green table suffix - green end preparation - red pressure rating - red schedule/thickness - red table suffix - red commodity code model code modifier geometric industry standard weight code fabrication category materials grade

5.

Weight tables have changed.

539

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

15.1

Reference Data Conflict Report


This option creates a report of piping or instrument components (including piping and tubing) in any model within the project that have any specification data that is in conflict with the appropriate Piping Commodity Data, Piping Specialty Data, or Instrument Data of the Material Reference Database. The output file for this report has an extension of .rpt. This command is used to coordinate between revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which are required in the model. It also reports piping and instrument components that require reconstruction or recalculations as a result of piping segment data changes in the model. The Reconstruct Component command is required for any component which has geometric type specification data revised. The Update from Reference Database command is required for any component which has non-geometric specification data (such as commodity code or weight table) revision. The Re-Compute Thickness command is required for any component which has been reported as requiring calculations as a result of changes in the material tables or thickness tables. You can use the Review Reference Database Revision Management Report command to review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or an update of the specification data as a result of changes to the Material Reference Database. This command allows you to review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or replacement as a result of RDB changes or deletions from the Material Reference Database. In support of this review capability, an indexed file, the RDB Revision Management Component List, is created in the same directory as the model with the name <model_number>.rdb. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on this command. Any component, previously reported as having required reconstructing or updating, which has been deleted from the model, will not be included in any future reports or in the RDB Revision Management Component List. Likewise, the RDB Revision Management Component List will be automatically compressed as part of the report creation process. The system will not report a component as requiring reconstruction or updating from the RDB solely on the basis of the requirement to reconstruct flag being set for the piping segment associated with that component. The Reference Data Conflict Report will clear the requirement to reconstruct (or recalculate) flag if it determines there are no discrepancies for the component associated with that piping segment. The system will not report a component as requiring reconstruction or updating from the RDB as the result of changing any attributes of an Implied Item.

540

_ _______________
Before using this command
You should not access any piping model for an interactive design session while a Reference Database Revision Management report is being created.

Reference Data Conflict Report

Processing Piping Commodities


The system extracts the following data from the model for the purpose of reading piping commodity specification data from the Material Reference Database. This is the same data that is used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping commodity. piping materials class commodity name first size second size option code maximum temperature

The first size and second size are determined from the piping segment data and not from the component itself. If the piping commodity in the model is a branch that was initially placed using a branch table from the Reference Database, the system reads the appropriate branch table from the Piping Materials Class data to determine if there has been a change in the commodity name for the branch. If so, this component is flagged as requiring reconstruction. The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping commodities. That data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk. * end preparation - green * pressure rating - green * schedule/thickness - green * table suffix - green * end preparation - red * pressure rating - red * schedule/thickness - red * table suffix - red * commodity code * model code * modifier * geometric industry standard weight code fabrication category materials grade

15. Revision Manager

Note that user overrides of fabrication category and schedule/thickness will not be included in the report.

541

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping commodity with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end. When a component is placed next to an integral gasket, the gasket thickness is set to zero in the model. As a result, the Reference Data Conflict Report may report a gasket thickness error for such components. The report compares the component gasket thickness in the model (0) with the component gasket thickness defined in the reference data, which may be different from 0, without considering the mating component data. Such errors should be ignored. The system compares the NPD at each connect point of the component with the NPD of the segment. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum: the application of the schedule/override in the model. changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table. Refer to the section entitled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order of significance of reported problems. The RDB Conflict Report does not identify discrepancies between taps placed in the model and the RDB Tap Properties Data tables used to place the taps.

Piping Specialties and Instruments


The system extracts the component number from the model for the purpose of reading piping specialty and instrument specification data from the Material Reference Database. The component number is also used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping specialty or an instrument. For example, instrument_comp_no is used for instruments, and piping_comp_no is used for piping specialties.

542

_ _______________
* end preparation - green * pressure rating - green * schedule/thickness - green * table suffix - green * end preparation - red * pressure rating - red * schedule/thickness - red * table suffix - red * physical data id * model code * modifier * geometric industry standard weight code fabrication category materials grade

Reference Data Conflict Report

The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping specialties and instruments. That data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk.

The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping specialty or instrument with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end. The system compares the green specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points for that component in the model which are designated as having green connect point properties.

15. Revision Manager

The system compares the red specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points, if any, which are designated as having red connect point properties. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum: the application of the schedule/override in the model. changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table. The RDB Conflict Report does not identify discrepancies between taps placed in the model and the RDB Tap Properties Data tables used to place the taps.

543

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Reference Data Conflict Report option. The system activates the Reference Data Conflict form.

2.

Select the extent of the project to be processed. Project process all piping models for the entire project. Piping Design Area process the selected piping design areas. Models process the selected models within a selected design area.

3.

You can key in changes to the Report Node, Report Path, and Report Name for the summary report output or use the default location and name. The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report Management Data of the Report Manager.

4.

Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, or Save. If you will be printing the summary report, select a queue from the pick list. Accept to Submit Job, Restart or Exit Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request.

5.

6.

Select Accept to submit the request for processing.

544

_ _______________
The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The Reference Data Conflict report file has an extension of .rpt and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.rpt . If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report, this report will also be printed.

Reference Data Conflict Report

15. Revision Manager

545

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

15.2

Table Change Report


This option creates a report of all piping or instrument components (including pipes) in any model within the project that are affected by a change to a specific table for a specific input or set of inputs. Both geometric changes as a result of revisions to dimension tables and changes in weight data as a result of revisions to weight tables are reported. The output file for this report has an extension of .tcr. This report should be used only in the following situation: The RBD was revised and you did not reconstruct the affected components. Then you upgraded the project to PDS version 6.0, at which time all components were updated to have the new last_placed_date attribute set to the date the upgrade occurred. You will need to know the date the RDB was modified in order to find which components require reconstruction as a result of the RDB change. This report may return false discrepancies because it will include those items that were placed after the RDB was changed. In short, we recommend using this report only when the RDB is changed prior to upgrading to PDS version 6.0, and affected components have not been reconstructed to reflect the RDB change. The Reconstruct Component command is required for any component which has a dimension table revised and the Update from Reference Database command is required for any component which has a weight table revised.

Processing
The system performs a virtual component placement for each component in a piping model (in a manner similar to that used by the Table Checker) to determine if that component has had any of its geometric or weight data derived from the specified tables. The system searches all piping and instrument components in all piping models within the project for the use of such tables and creates a report. In searching the model for components that have dimensional and weight data derived from the list of revised tables, the first size and second size are determined from the components data - not the piping segment data. This is due to the fact that reconstruction of the component will be required, if the nominal piping diameter of any segment associated with the component differs from the corresponding connect point size. The contents of this report include the following data, which is sorted by the piping model number and the line id within each piping model. piping model number line id component number (if applicable) commodity name (if applicable) model code dimension or weight tables

546

_ _______________
The title page for the report will include the sub-title, Table Change Report. Piping specialties and instruments are excluded from this report when the specification data and the geometry data have been defined by the user (not defined in the Reference Database). You can use the Review Reference Database Revision Management Report command to review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or updating as a result of the components geometric or weight data being changed by a table revision. In support of this review capability, the system creates an indexed file, the RDB Revision Management Component List, in the same directory as the model with the name <model_number>.rdb. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on the Review Reference Data Revision Report command. Any component, previously reported as needing reconstructing or updating, which has been deleted from the model, will not be included in any future reports or in the RDB Revision Management Component List. Likewise, the RDB Revision Management Component List will be automatically compressed as part of the report creation process. Piping and instrument components in any model which do not have a corresponding record in the applicable table of the Piping Design Database are ignored and excluded from the report. These components, if any, are reported through the Database Verification command of the Project Administrator.

Table Change Report

15. Revision Manager

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Table Change Report option. The system displays a list of Physical Data Libraries.

547

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 2. Select Table Library Select the Physical Data Library to process, such as U.S. Practice, DIN, or Company Practice and select Accept. 3. Enter Date for Search ( dd-mmm-yy ) Key in a date (such as 10-Aug-95) in the Revision Date field to list all the tables that have been revised since the specified date. 4. Accept, Re-enter Date or Choose Extent Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-String. For Sub-String, key in a string to limit the tables to be listed. THEN Select Accept to begin processing. The system displays a list of all dimension and weight tables (or those which match a specified substring).

548

_ _______________
5. Select Tables or Exit Select the dimension tables to be considered in the creation of the revision management report. OR You can select Process All to process all the listed tables (those which meet the specified revision date and substring). THEN Select Accept to process the selected tables. For each of the selected tables, the system displays the table data in the Table Data Display form.

Table Change Report

15. Revision Manager

6.

Select Table Entry For each table, you can specify which entries (up to a total of 200 entries) in the table have been revised. Although the performance of the Reference Data Manager in creating the report will not be impacted by the number of dimension table entries that are to be considered for revision management, the list of components in the model will be impacted. For example, if you inadvertently identify entries which had not actually changed, you may create significant, unnecessary work.

549

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

7.

Select the extent of the project to be processed. Project process all piping models in the entire project. Piping Design Area process the selected piping design areas. Models process the selected models within a selected design area.

8.

The summary report path and report node are determined by the settings defined with the Report Manager. You can change the location or name for the summary report output or use the defaults.

9.

Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, or Save. Accept to Submit Job, Restart or Exit Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request.

10.

11.

Select Accept to begin processing the request. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The table change report file has an extension of .tcr and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.tcr . If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report, this report will also be printed.

550

_ _______________
15.3 Reference Data Impact Report
Selecting the Reference Data Impact Report command activates the Search Criteria form.

Reference Data Impact Report

15. Revision Manager

This report is based on user-defined search criteria of attributes such as piping materials class, commodity code, commodity name, option code, maximum temperature, nominal diameter, end preparation, schedule thickness, table suffix, etc. The purpose of this report is to find which components (constrained by your search criteria) will be impacted by a change in the attributes as they exist in the current approved RDB. The RDB Impact Report search criteria are valid for Piping Material Class Data (pdtable_201) and Piping Component Specification Data (pdtable_202). The RDB Impact Report file has an extension of .imp and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.imp . This report does not include a graphical review capability.

15.3.1

Examples
Example 1
As an example, assume that you want to know the impact of changing the vendor for a specific type of valve. You could define the search criteria to find all instances of valves with that specific geometric industry standard that would need to be reconstructed if the vendor were changed.

551

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

Example 2
As a second example, assume that you are working with a project that uses spec A and spec B. Both of these specs contain the value X, for the vendor of gate valves. A model has been created that uses both spec A and B, and valves have been placed from both of these specs. Also, assume that spec B has been modified since the valves have been placed so that the vendor in spec B now has a value of Y (instead of X), and the model has not been updated to reflect this spec change. If the Reference Data Impact Report was run now to determine the impact of changing the vendor X, the system would scan the RDB for all occurrences of vendor X (which, at this time, would be only those placed from spec A), check the portions of the design you specified for occurrences of vendor X, then report the matching occurrences back to you. The resulting report would not list those valves from vendor X that were placed from spec B, because the occurrences of those valves in the model did not match the occurrences in the RDB (due to the model not being updated after the spec change).

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Reference Data Impact Report command from the Reference Data Revision Manager form. The system activates the Search Criteria form, which prompts you to select the attribute to be restricted. 2. Select Attribute Select the attribute to be restricted. After selecting attribute from the attribute display list, the system displays the selected attribute in a separate field and displays a list of operators.

3.

Select Operator Select an operator to define the search criteria. The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to key in an attribute value.

4.

Enter Attribute Value Key in the attribute value. For a sub-string search, key in a string to appear anywhere within the attribute value (do not use wild cards).

552

_ _______________
5. Select the value and select Accept. The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria in the Search Criteria display field. 6. Accept or Select And/Or Operator

Reference Data Impact Report

If the attribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the Standard Note Library.

Select AND to specify an additional condition or select OR to specify an alternative condition.

OR Accept the defined search criteria and activate the Reference Database Revision Manager form.

15. Revision Manager

7.

Revise the search criteria, if necessary, using the Revise Search Criteria option. OR Select the extent of the project to be processed. Project Process all piping models for the entire project.

553

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 Piping Design Area Process the selected piping design areas. Models Process the selected models within a selected design area. 8. You can key in changes to the Report Node, Report Path, and Report Name for the summary report output or use the default location and name. The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report Management Data of the Report Manager. 9. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, or Save. If you will be printing the summary report, select a queue from the pick list. Accept to Submit Job, Restart or Exit Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request. 11. Select Accept to submit the request for processing. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The reference data impact report file has an extension of .imp and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.imp . If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report, this report will also be printed.

10.

554

_ _______________
15.4 Proposed RDB Changes Report
This command creates a report assessing the impact of multiple changes in the unapproved RDB. Selecting this command from the Reference Data Revision Manager form activates the Proposed RDB Changes Report form. You must make changes to the unapproved Material Reference Database in order to assess the effect of these changes. You are responsible for restoring the unapproved Material Reference Database to its original state if you decide not to pursue these changes. Refer to the section entitled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order of significance of reported problems.

Proposed RDB Changes Report

15. Revision Manager

Processing Piping Commodities


The system extracts the following data from the model for the purpose of reading piping commodity specification data from the Material Reference Database. This is the same data that is used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping commodity. piping materials class commodity name first size second size option code maximum temperature

555

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 The first size and second size are determined from the piping segment data and not from the component itself. If the piping commodity in the model is a branch that was initially placed using a branch table from the Reference Database, the system reads the appropriate branch table from the Piping Materials Class data to determine if there has been a change in the commodity name for the branch. If so, this component is flagged as requiring reconstruction. The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping commodities. That data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk. * end preparation - green * pressure rating - green * schedule/thickness - green * table suffix - green * end preparation - red * pressure rating - red * schedule/thickness - red * table suffix - red * commodity code * model code * modifier * geometric industry standard weight code fabrication category materials grade

Note that user overrides of fabrication category and schedule/thickness will not be included in the report. The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping commodity with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end. The system compares the specification data for any connect point of a piping commodity which has been designated as a tap with the appropriate data (either the specification data from the Tap Properties Data in the Reference Database or from another connect point. The system compares the NPD at each connect point of the component with the NPD of the segment. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum: the application of the schedule/override in the model. changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database.

556

_ _______________
changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table. Refer to the section entitled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order of significance of reported problems.

Proposed RDB Changes Report

Piping Specialties and Instruments


The system extracts the component number from the model for the purpose of reading piping specialty and instrument specification data from the Material Reference Database. The component number is also used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping specialty or an instrument. For example, instrument_comp_no is used for instruments, and piping_comp_no is used for piping specialties. The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping specialties and instruments. That data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk. * end preparation - green * pressure rating - green * schedule/thickness - green * table suffix - green * end preparation - red * pressure rating - red * schedule/thickness - red * table suffix - red * physical data id * model code * modifier * geometric industry standard weight code fabrication category materials grade

15. Revision Manager

The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping specialty or instrument with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end. The system compares the specification data for any connect point of a piping specialty or instrument which has been designated as a tap with the appropriate data, i.e. either the specification data from the Tap Properties Data in the Reference Database or from another connect point. Piping specialties and instruments are excluded from this report when the specification data and the geometry data is defined by the user (not defined in the Reference Database). The system compares the green specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points for that component in the model which are designated as having green connect point properties. The system compares the red specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points, if any, which are designated as having red connect point properties. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum:

557

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 the application of the schedule/override in the model. changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Proposed RDB Changes Report option. The system activates the Proposed RDB Changes form.

2.

Select the extent of the project to be processed. Project process all piping models for the entire project. Piping Design Area process the selected piping design areas. Models process the selected models within a selected design area.

3.

You can key in changes to the Report Node, Report Path, and Report Name for the summary report output or use the default location and name.

558

_ _______________
The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report Management Data of the Report Manager. 4. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, or Save. If you will be printing the summary report, select a queue from the pick list. Accept to Submit Job, Restart or Exit 5.

Proposed RDB Changes Report

Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request. 6. Select Accept to submit the request for processing. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The proposed RDB changes report file has an extension of .pcs and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.pcs . If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report, this report will also be printed.

15. Revision Manager

559

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

560

_ _______________
16. Verify RDB Library

Verify RDB Library

For releases prior to the 4.2 PDS release, a problem existed in the Reference Data Manager, such that the binary tree structure in a reference data library (such as the Graphic Commodity Library) could be corrupted without the user immediately detecting any problems with that library. Although the software problem was corrected in the 4.2 PDS release, the data problem that resulted may have persisted beyond that release, particularly if the library has not been compressed. As a final step within the project upgrade process, the system verifies the integrity of the binary tree structure within each of the reference data libraries. If an error is detected, a specific warning message will be reported, both interactively and in the upgrade log. In this event, you should contact Intergraph immediately for assistance in repairing the library. The Verify RDB Library utility has been provided to allow the capability to verify the integrity of the binary tree structure on demand. The Verify RDB Library icon is located in the PD_Shell program group on systems upon which the PD_Data software has been loaded locally; double-click on this icon to activate the command.

Steps
1. Execute the command by double-clicking on the Verify RDB Library icon in the PD_Shell program group.

16. Verify RDB Library

The system activates the Reference Database Library Verification Utility form, and prompts you to select the appropriate project number from the list.

561

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

2.

Select the desired project number, then select the Verify Reference Database Library command. The system begins the verification process and displays the Verifying RDB Library Files message. When processing is complete, the system returns a message similar to the one shown below:

562

_ _______________
A typical output file has been excerpted below. No errors were found in this example.
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l header number keys = 234 tree number keys = 234 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l.t header number keys = 234 tree number keys = 234 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l.r header number keys = 234 tree number keys = 234 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618shbom.l header number keys = 2877 tree number keys = 2877 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618lgbom.l header number keys = 2629 tree number keys = 2629 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618spbom.l Empty file, no keys. Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618note.l header number keys = 4162 tree number keys = 4162 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618note.l.t header number keys = 65 tree number keys = 65 Counting implied keys for code31 Counting implied keys for code35 Counting implied keys for code36 Counting implied keys for code37 Counting implied keys for code50 Counting implied keys for code69 Counting implied keys for code125 . . . Counting implied keys for code2000 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618label.l header number keys = 217 tree number keys = 217 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618assem.l header number keys = 110 tree number keys = 110 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618assem.l.t header number keys = 110 tree number keys = 110 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618gcom.l header number keys = 1509 tree number keys = 1509

Verify RDB Library

16. Verify RDB Library

563

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618gcom.l.t header number keys = 1509 tree number keys = 1509 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l header number keys = 4820 tree number keys = 4820 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l.t header number keys = 4820 tree number keys = 4820 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l.r header number keys = 4820 tree number keys = 4820 Total files with errors : 0

564

_ _______________
Appendix A:

Reference Data Manager Error Messages

Appendix A Reference Data Manager Error Messages


The PDS 3D products share common message files contained in the win32app\ingr\pdshell\msg directory. pdsmc.msg command field messages pdsme.msg error and warning messages pdsmp.msg prompts and messages pdsms.msg status messages.

A. Error Messages

565

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

566

_ _______________
Appendix B:

Codelists

Appendix B Codelists
This section details the codelists used in PDS. The data contained within this appendix is for informational purposes only and may not exactly match the codelists delivered with the product. Subject CL31 CL35 CL36 CL37 CL50 CL69 CL125 CL130 CL145 CL148 CL160 CL180 CL190 CL200 CL210 CL220 CL230 CL330 CL332 CL340 CL360 CL365 CL366 CL380 CL390 CL400 CL420 CL425 CL430 CL499 CL530 CL550 CL570 CL572 CL575 Description Object Types for Orthographic Drawings Approval Status Structural Approval Status HVAC Approval Status Hold Status Equipment Divisions/Form Code Fluid Code/Connector Type Construction Status Materials Grade Piping Materials Class Description Responsibility Fabrication Category Coating Requirements Heat Tracing Requirements Heat Tracing Media Insulation Purpose Cleaning Requirements CP Type/Termination/Preparation Schedule/Thickness Override Safety Classification Stress Analysis Requirements Reporting Requirements Requirement to Reconstruct Piping Component Type Action Option Piping Component Type/Source Piping/Tubing Type Instrument Component Type/Source Piping Notes Accessory/Item Type Operator/Actuator Type Design Standard Wall Thickness Equation Geometry Standard Page 572 573 573 573 574 574 574 578 578 603 611 611 611 612 612 613 613 613 616 618 618 618 618 618 625 625 631 632 632 632 634 634 635 636 636

B. Codelists

567

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 CL576 CL577 CL578 CL990 CL999 CL1010 CL1028 CL1056 CL1064 CL1074 CL1100 CL1162 CL1201 CL1202 CL1203 CL1204 CL1205 CL1207 CL1208 CL1209 CL1310 CL1312 CL1410 CL1605 CL1610 CL1620 CL1630 CL1710 CL1720 CL1900 CL2000 Table Suffix/End Standard - Green Table Suffix/End Standard - Red Weight Code Types of Piping Commodity Data Forms Standard Note Title Area Units Mass Units Temperature Units Pressure Units Density Units Weld Type Force Units Drawing Scale Drawing Size Interference Manager Approval Status Interference Clash Type Interference Manager Action Interference Manager Approval Method Clash Checking Option Clash Checking Volume Filter Option Report Source Report Type Design Review Type Model Status Force Units for FrameWorks Plus Drawing View Direction Drawing View Composition Status Document Source Document Type Isometric Drawing Type PD_Draw Document Type 647 650 654 656 656 657 658 658 658 659 659 659 659 660 660 660 660 661 661 661 661 661 662 662 662 662 662 662 663 665 666

568

_ _______________
Appendix B:

General Comments

B.1

General Comments
Codelist sets in this document define the values for all codelisted attributes used in the PDS Piping Task which are specific to US plant design practices. You can add, delete or revise codelist sets to reflect your own practices, terminology and language. A task user, however, cannot revise a codelist set from a work session. Revisions to a codelist set, can only be made in the General RDB or Standard Note Library. In listings that follow, the maximum number of entries that may be expected for a specific codelist set is shown in parenthesis following the name of the codelist set. For PDS users that wish to modify codelist files delivered with the PDS software to reflect their own practices, two approaches are possible: Make the modifications within the range of codelist numbers defined in the codelist library delivered with the PDS software. This has the advantage of resulting in the best organized set of codelisted definitions. The disadvantage is that numbers added by the User may conflict with numbers added in future versions of software. Increase the maximum number of entries allowed for the codelist set and make additions to it in the range of extended numbers. This will minimize possible conflicts assigned numbers but will require compiling of the codelists and of the associated databases. Values enclosed in brackets [ ] in pages that follow represent descriptive information. The values stored in the codelist sets will exclude this bracketed information from the codelist descriptions. The net length of a codelist entry cannot exceed 50 characters. Other considerations may, however, require that a shorter description be made. For example: For the P&ID Task, the total compressed length of a label part can not exceed 36 characters. The formats of specification type reports for the Instrument Task require that applicable codelist descriptions do not exceed 25 characters.

B. Codelists

B.2

Comments Specific to Units of Measure Codelist Sets


The PDS system of units is derived from the 1980 Edition of API-2564, Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 15 "Guidelines for the Use of the International System of Units (SI) in the Petroleum and Allied Industries".

569

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002 The tables in this document include the following information. Codelist set This is the number of the codelist set that identifies a specific quantity. For example, codelist set 1028 includes the units of measure that apply to the quantity "mass". This is the number that defines a specific unit of measure within a codelist set. For example, codelist number 1 in codelist set 1028 refers to the "lb" units of measure. This code is not explicitly shown in the tables. The unit type equals the number of the codelist set minus 1000. For example, reference to unit type 28 refers to "mass". Entries in this column define the quantity whose units of measure are being defined. Several unit names are provided for a given codelist set. Any of these names can be used to define the quantity. Two sets of columns define the conversion of variables expressed in the units shown under the column "Unit Name" to the unit shown under the column "Destination Unit". The following explanations apply: Codelist no

Unit type

Quantity name

Unit name:

Conversion to destination unit:

The column captioned Destination Unit defines the unit to which the unit included under the column Unit Name will be converted using the value shown under the column Factor. The column captioned Factor provides the actual conversion factor to be used for the conversion. For example, in codelist set 1028, to convert a mass measurement in "lb" to "kg", multiply the value in the former units by the conversion factor, 4.535 924 E-01. In some cases, such as temperature, summation may also be required to effect the desired conversion. All conversion factors are taken or derived from API Publication 2564. Groups of three digits are separated by spaces with no commas. For example, 3.048 000 E-01 = 3.048 000 x 10-1 = 0.3048000. Similarly, 9.290 304 E+02 = 9.290 304 x 102 = 929.0304. An asterisk (*) indicates that all following digits are zeros. If a conversion factor happens to end in several zeros but does not have an asterisk, any subsequent digits would not necessarily be zeros. Most of the conversion factors are shown to six or seven significant figures. Those shown to fewer than six significant figures are limited by the precision of the known or determinable value of a physical property, such as the density of distilled water at a reference temperature.

570

_ _______________
Appendix B: Conversion to first unit in CL: y= A + Bx where, x applies to the value of the variable expressed in the units shown in the column captioned Unit Name. y applies to the value of the variable expressed in the units shown in the first line of the column captioned Unit Name. A is the factor in the column captioned Factor A. B is the factor in the column captioned Factor B. The distinction between upper case and lower case symbols is very important. For example:
K= k= M= m= m= N= n= kelvin kilo= 103 mega= 106 milli= 10-3 (when m is used as a prefix) metre (when m is used alone) newton nano= 10-9

General Comments

Two sets of columns define the conversion of the units shown under the column Unit Name to the first unit shown in that column. The conversion is done per the equation:

B. Codelists

In editing any of the codelist sets for units, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. In all codelist sets for units, a blank space is provided as the first character in the unit name. The blank space is used to silence the units in the formation of labels. Nomenclature: Symbol bar degC g kg m min Pa t Name bar degree Celsius gram kilogram metre minute pascal metric ton Quantity pressure temperature mass mass length time pressure mass

571

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

CL31, Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40)


C31 DF=WRK_DD_CODLST:CODE0031.ENT MAX=999 0031, Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40) Equipment Category Object Types (100-149) The Range of 100-149 for the equipment category is divided into two parts: 101-110 These entries are reserved by INTERGRAPH and may not be changed by the user. 111-149 Codelist entries in this range may be created, revised, and/or deleted by the user. If modified the user must also revise the contents of the file eqp_object.dwg and labels.xxx (where xxx is the drawing type number defined in CL2000 ) in the project directory. 101 110 120 124 128 130 135 140 = = = = = = = = Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Group Nozzle Platform Handrail Penetration Stair Ladder Davit

Piping 205 207 210 215 220 = = = = =

Category Object Types (200-249) Piping Pipe Piping Piping Piping Segment Component Specialty Support

Instrument Category Object Types (250-279) 250 252 255 260 = = = = Control Valves and Regulators Relief Devices Other In-Line Instruments Off-Line Instruments

HVAC Category Object Types (359-399) 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 = = = = = = = = = = = = = HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC Coil Data Connector Data Damper Data Diffuser Data Duct Data DEquipment Data Filter Data Fitting Data Grille Data Hood Data Humidifier Data Register Data Terminal Devices

572

_ _______________
Appendix B:
EERWAY Category Object Types (300-306) 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 = = = = = = = = = EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY Connect Point OneLine Straight Fitting Space Envelope To_Equipment To_Support Eqp Panel Duct Bank

General Comments

CL35, Approval Status (10)


B. Codelists
NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. The following are the requirements in use of the "approval status." 2 reserved for approved 3 reserved for not approved 11-20 reserved for approved 21-30 reserved for not approved 1 = [Blank] 2 = A =Approved 3 = NA=Not approved

CL36, Structural Approval Status (15)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 0= 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = New Existing Future User 1 User 2

CL37, HVAC Approval Status (10)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 2 3 4 = = = = New Existing Dismantle Future

573

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

CL50, Hold Status (10)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Labels always require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 = NH=Not held 2 = H =Hold

CL69, Equipment Divisions/Form Code (99)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of codelist value "All". Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other data displays require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = = = = = = = = A= B= C= D= E= F= H= I= All Vessels Heat transfer Mechanical Civil/Structural Piping Electrical Other

CL125, Fluid Code/Connector Type (999)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values 950-999. 1 = [Blank] 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 40 71 75 79 83 87 91 100 101 103 105 107 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = A AC AE AI AO AP APU AR AS AZ C CA CE CF CLP CPR CZ D DC DCH DGR [Air] [Combustion air] [Aeration air] [Instrument air] [Operational air] [Plant air] [Purge air] [Regeneration air] [Starting air] [Other air] [Refrigerant] [Ammonia refrigerant] [Ethylene refrigerant] [Freon refrigerant] [LP refrigerant] [Propylene refrigerant] [Other refrigerant] [Sewer] [Caustic sewer] [Chemical sewer] [Drain to grade]

574

_ _______________
Appendix B:
109 111 113 115 117 119 121 123 125 127 128 130 = = = = = = = = = = = = DOW DP DPH DS DSP DST DW DWS DX [Blank] [Blank] DZ [Oily water sewer] [Process sewer] [Heated process sewer] [Sanitary sewer] [Press sanitary sewer] [Storm sewer] [Clean water sewer] [Sour water sewer] [Acid sewer] [Storm, oily water or sanitary sewer] [Storm or oily water sewer] [Other sewer] [Foam] [Gas] [Carbon dioxide gas] [Chlorine gas] [Chlorination gas] [Fuel gas] [Flue gas] [Hydrogen gas] [Hydrogen sulphide gas] [Inert gas] [LP gas] [Make-up gas] [Natural gas] [Nitrogen gas] [Oxygen gas] [Purge gas] [Reformed gas] [Synthesis gas] [Sour gas] [Sweet gas] [Waste gas [Other gas] [Solvent] [Glycol] [Furfural] [Dewaxing] [Other solvent] [Chemical] [Chemical injection] [Anhydrous ammonia] [Aluminum chloride] [Aqueous ammonia] [0-50% caustic solution] [Dry chlorine] [Ethylene oxide] [Hydrogen chloride] [Inhibitor A] [Inhibitor B] [Lube oil additives] [Methyl alcohol] [Sulfur] [Liquid sulfur] [Other chemical]

General Comments

161 = F 191 194 197 198 200 203 206 209 212 215 218 221 224 227 230 233 236 239 242 245 250 341 346 351 356 370 401 402 405 409 413 417 421 425 429 433 434 440 444 448 452 460 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = G GCD GCL GCN GF GG GH GHS GI GLP GM GN GNI GOX GP GR GS GSO GSW GW GZ K KG KF KD KZ M [Blank] MAA MAC MAW MC5 MCL MEO MHC MIA MIB MLA MMA MS MSL MZ

B. Codelists

575

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
491 493 495 497 499 500 503 505 507 509 511 513 515 520 521 522 524 527 530 533 536 539 542 545 550 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = O OD ODS OF OFR OFS OH OL OLS OS OSO OSW OWS OZ P [Blank] PA PAS PB PH PHH PHW PL PS PZ [Oil] [Diesel fuel oil] [Dry slop oil] [Flushing oil] [Fuel oil return] [Fuel oil supply] [Hydraulic oil] [Lube] [Lube and seal oil] [Seal oil] [Sour oil] [Sweet oil] [Wet slop oil] [Other oil] [Process] [Special process] [Process w/ rich/lean amine] [Process w/ severe amine] [Process w/ benzene] [Process w/ H2] [Process w/ H2 & H2S] [Process w/ aqueous H2S] [Low temperature process] [Process w/ S] [Other process] [Relief to atmosphere] [Relief to flare] [Other relief] [Steam] [Boiler feed water or steam] [Boiler feed water, steam or condensate] [Steam or condensate] [Extr press CL1500 steam] [High press CL900 steam] [Low press CL150 steam] [Med press CL600 steam] [Nor press CL300 steam] [Superheated steam] [Vacuum steam] [Exhaust CL125 steam] [Other steam] [Steam condensate] [Atmospheric CL125 steam condensate] [Extr press CL1500 steam condensate] [High press CL900 steam condensate] [Low press CL150 steam condensate] [Med press CL600 steam condensate] [Nor press CL300 steam condensate] [Vacuum steam condensate] [Other steam condensate] [Vent] [Vent to atmosphere] [Vent to flare] [Other vent]

581 = RA 591 = RF 610 = RZ 611 613 615 617 621 623 625 627 629 631 633 635 640 641 643 645 647 649 651 653 655 660 721 731 741 750 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = S [Blank] [Blank] [Blank] SE SH SL SM SN SS SV SX SZ SC SCA SCE SCH SCL SCM SCN SCV SCZ V VA VF VZ

576

_ _______________
Appendix B:
751 753 755 757 759 761 763 764 765 767 768 771 772 773 775 777 779 781 783 785 786 789 791 792 795 797 798 801 803 805 807 809 811 812 815 817 819 830 831 835 839 843 847 851 853 860 861 865 869 873 877 881 890 950 951 953 955 956 960 961 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = W WB WBA WBB WC [Blank] WCH WCL WCF WCR WCS WPT [Blank] WDM WFA WFI WFU WG WGL WGR WGS WH WHR WHS WI WIR WIS WK WN WP WR WS WSR WSS WT WU WW WZ X XH XN XSD XS3 XS8 XS9 XZ Y YA YG YH YL YW YZ ODPC OUPC UODPC ODIC OUIC OVPC OSPC [Water] [Boiler feed water] [Ballast water] [Water boiler blowdown] [Cooling water] [Cooling or utility water] [Chlorinated water] [Chlorine in water] [Clarified water] [Cooling water return] [Cooling water supply] [Potable water] [Potable water or instrument air] [Demineralized water] [Aboveground fire water] [Filtered water] [Underground fire water] [Glycol water] [Gland water] [Glycol water return] [Glycol water supply] [Hot water] [Hot water return] [Hot water supply] [Chilled water] [Chilled water return] [Chilled water supply] [Treated water] [Brine water] [Process water] [Raw water] [Sea water] [Sea water return] [Sea water supply] [Test water] [Utility water] [Waste water] [Other water] [Acid] [Hydrofluoric acid] [Nitric acid] [Dilute sulfuric acid] [30% sulfuric acid] [75-80% sulfuric acid] [93-97% sulfuric acid] [Other acid] [Catalyst] [Catalyst addition] [General catalyst] [Catalyst w/ H2] [Catalyst lift lines] [Catalyst withdrawal lines] [Other catalyst] [Off-dwg piping connectors] [Off-unit piping connectors] [Utility off-dwg piping connectors] [Off-dwg instr connectors] [Off-unit instr connectors] [Off-vol piping connectors] [Off-site piping connectors]

General Comments

B. Codelists

577

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
999 = TERM [Terminator piping connector]

CL130, Construction Status (15)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values 2, 3 and 8. In addition, codelist values 4-7 must imply an "existing" construction status. Codelist values 9-15 inherit the color symbology from the construction status of the item previously placed in the model. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = = = = = = = = [Blank] New Existing Revamp Relocate Temporary Dismantle Future

CL145, Materials Grade (4500)


NOTE: Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 = [Blank] Irons, 10 = 12 = 15 = 16 = 17 = 18 = 19 = 20 = 21 = 22 = 23 = 25 = 30 = 31 = 32 = 35 = 40 = 41 = 42 = 43 = 44 = 45 = 46 = 47 = 48 = 55 = 60 = 62 = 70 = 75 = 76 = 10-99 A47-32510 A47-35018 A48-20 A48-25 A48-30 A48-35 A48-40 A48-45 A48-50 A48-55 A48-60 A74 A126-A A126-B A126-C A197 A278-20 A278-25 A278-30 A278-35 A278-40 A278-50 A278-60 A278-70 A278-80 A338 A395-Ductile A395-Ferritic Ductile A571 AWWA-C110-Ductile AWWA-C151-Ductile

578

_ _______________
Appendix B:
Carbon 110 = 114 = 116 = 118 = 120 = 122 = 124 = 135 = 140 = 142 = 144 = 150 = 160 = 162 = 164 = 170 = 180 = 182 = 183 = 184 = 185 = 186 = 187 = 188 = 190 = 191 = 192 = 193 = 194 = 195 = 200 = 202 = 210 = 212 = 214 = 216 = 218 = 220 = 230 = 234 = 240 = 241 = 242 = 243 = 244 = 245 = 250 = 252 = 254 = 264 = 266 = 270 = 272 = 274 = 276 = 280 = 282 = 284 = 290 = 293 = 295 = Steels, 100-499 API-5L-A API-5L-A25 API-5L-B API-5L-X42 API-5L-X46 API-5L-X52 API-5L-X65 A36 A53-A A53-B A53-Type F A105 A106-A A106-B A106-C A120 A134-A36 A134-A283-A A134-A283-B A134-A283-C A134-A283-D A134-A285-A A134-A285-B A134-A285-C A134-A570-30 A134-A570-33 A134-A570-36 A134-A570-40 A134-A570-45 A134-A570-50 A135-A A135-B A139-A A139-B A139-C A139-D A139-E A179 A181-CL60 A181-CL70 A211-A570-30 A211-A570-33 A211-A570-36 A211-A570-40 A211-A570-45 A211-A570-50 A216-WCA A216-WCB A216-WCC A234-WPB A234-WPC A283-A A283-B A283-C A283-D A285-A A285-B A285-C A333-1 A333-6 A334-1

General Comments

B. Codelists

579

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
298 300 302 305 310 312 320 321 322 323 325 327 334 340 342 344 346 350 352 354 356 360 361 362 363 364 365 370 372 375 380 390 392 394 396 398 400 402 404 406 408 410 420 422 424 426 428 430 432 434 436 438 440 442 444 446 448 460 464 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = A334-6 A350-LF1 A350-LF2 A352-LCB A369-FPA A369-FPB A381-Y35 A381-Y42 A381-Y46 A381-Y48 A381-Y50 A381-Y52 A420-WPL6 A515-55 A515-60 A515-65 A515-70 A516-55 A516-60 A516-65 A516-70 A520-30 A520-33 A520-36 A520-40 A520-45 A520-50 A524-I A524-II A537-CL1 A587 A671-CA55 A671-CB60 A671-CB65 A671-CB70 A671-CC60 A671-CC65 A671-CC70 A671-CD70 A671-CE55 A671-CE60 A671-CK75 A672-A45 A672-A50 A672-A55 A672-B55 A672-B60 A672-B65 A672-B70 A672-C55 A672-C60 A672-C65 A672-C70 A672-D70 A672-E55 A672-E60 A672-N75 A691-CMS75 A691-CMSH70

580

_ _______________
Appendix B:
Low and Intermediate Alloy Steels, 500-899 510 = A182-F1 512 = A182-F2 514 = A182-F5 516 = A182-F5a 518 = A182-F6a Cl.1 519 = A182-F6a Cl.2 520 = A182-F6a Cl.3 521 = A182-F6a Cl.4 523 = A182-F6b 524 = A182-F7 526 = A182-F9 528 = A182-F11 530 = A182-F12 532 = A182-F21 534 = A182-F22 536 = A182-F22a 540 = A202-A 542 = A202-B 550 = A203-A 552 = A203-B 554 = A203-D 556 = A203-E 560 = A204-A 562 = A204-B 564 = A204-C 576 = A217-C5 578 = A217-C12 580 = A217-CA15 582 = A217-WC1 584 = A217-WC4 586 = A217-WC5 588 = A217-WC6 590 = A217-WC9 600 = A225-A 602 = A225-B 610 = A234-WP1 614 = A234-WP5 616 = A234-WP7 618 = A234-WP9 620 = A234-WP11 622 = A234-WP12 624 = A234-WP22 630 = A302-A 632 = A302-B 634 = A302-C 636 = A302-D 644 = A333-3 646 = A333-4 648 = A333-7 650 = A333-8 652 = A333-9 664 = A334-3 666 = A334-7 668 = A334-8 670 = A334-9 680 = A335-P1 682 = A335-P2 684 = A335-P5 686 = A335-P5b 687 = A335-P5c 690 = A335-P7

General Comments

B. Codelists

581

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
692 694 696 698 700 702 710 720 722 724 730 740 742 744 746 748 750 752 754 756 758 760 761 770 771 774 775 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 794 798 800 802 804 806 808 810 812 814 816 817 820 822 830 832 835 840 842 850 852 854 860 862 864 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = A335-P9 A335-P11 A335-P12 A335-P15 A335-P21 A335-P22 A350-LF3 A352-LC1 A352-LC2 A352-LC3 A353 A369-FP1 A369-FP2 A369-FP3b A369-FP5 A369-FP7 A369-FP9 A369-FP11 A369-FP12 A369-FP21 A369-FP22 A385-7 Cl.1 A385-7 Cl.2 A387-2 Cl.1 A387-2 Cl.2 A387-5 Cl.1 A387-5 Cl.2 A387-9 Cl.1 A387-9 Cl.2 A387-11 Cl.1 A387-11 Cl.2 A387-12 Cl.1 A387-12 Cl.2 A387-21 Cl.1 A387-21 Cl.2 A387-22 Cl.1 A387-22 Cl.2 A420-WPL3 A420-WPL8 A426-CP1 A426-CP2 A426-CP5 A426-CP5b A426-CP7 A426-CP9 A426-CP11 A426-CP12 A426-CP15 A426-CPCA15 A426-CP21 A426-CP22 A553-Type I A553-Type II A645 A671-CF70 A671-CF71 A672-L65 A672-L70 A672-L75 A691-CM65 A691-CM70 A691-CM75

582

_ _______________
Appendix B:
866 868 870 872 874 876 878 = = = = = = = A691-0.5Cr A691-1Cr A691-1.25Cr A691-2.25Cr A691-3Cr A691-5Cr A691-9Cr Stainless Steels, 900-1324 920 = A167-301 922 = A167-302 923 = A167-302B 926 = A167-304 927 = A167-304L 930 = A167-305 932 = A167-308 934 = A167-309 935 = A167-309S 938 = A167-310 939 = A167-310S 942 = A167-316 943 = A167-316L 946 = A167-317 947 = A167-317L 950 = A167-321 952 = A167-347 954 = A167-348 960 = A182-F10 964 = A182-F304 965 = A182-F304H 966 = A182-F304L 968 = A182-F310 970 = A182-F316 971 = A182-F316H 972 = A182-F316L 974 = A182-F321 975 = A182-F321H 978 = A182-F347 979 = A182-F347H 982 = A182-F348 983 = A182-F348H 990 = A240-X8M 992 = A240-302 994 = A240-304 995 = A240-304L 996 = A240-304H 998 = A240-305 1000 = A240-309S 1004 = A240-310S 1006 = A240-316 1007 = A240-316L 1010 = A240-317 1011 = A240-317L 1014 = A240-321 1016 = A240-347 1018 = A240-348 1020 = A240-405 1022 = A240-410 1023 = A240-410S 1026 = A240-429 1028 = A240-430 1040 = A268-TP329

General Comments

B. Codelists

583

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
1044 1046 1048 1050 1051 1054 1056 1060 1061 1064 1065 1066 1070 1071 1072 1074 1076 1078 1079 1080 1082 1084 1085 1088 1089 1092 1095 1100 1102 1104 1106 1108 1110 1112 1113 1114 1116 1118 1120 1122 1124 1126 1128 1130 1140 1141 1144 1146 1148 1149 1152 1154 1156 1160 1162 1163 1166 1167 1170 1171 1174 1175 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = A268-TP405 A268-TP409 A268-TP410 A268-TP430 A268-TP430Ti A268-TP443 A268-TP446 A269-TP304 A269-TP304L A269-TP316 A269-TP316L A270-TP316L A312-TP304 A312-TP304H A312-TP304L A312-TP309 A312-TP310 A312-TP316 A312-TP316H A312-TP316L A312-TP317 A312-TP321 A312-TP321H A312-TP347 A312-TP347H A312-TP348 A351-CA15 A351-CF3 A351-CF3A A351-CF3M A351-CF8 A351-CF8A A351-CF8C A351-CF8M A351-CF10 A351-CF10MC A351-CN7M A351-CH8 A351-CH10 A351-CH20 A351-CK20 A351-HK30 A351-HK40 A351-HT30 A358-304 A358-304L A358-309S A358-310S A358-316 A358-316L A358-321 A358-347 A358-348 A376-16-8-2H A376-TP304 A376-TP304H A376-TP316 A376-TP316H A376-TP321 A376-TP321H A376-TP347 A376-TP347H

584

_ _______________
Appendix B:
1178 1179 1190 1191 1192 1194 1196 1198 1199 1200 1202 1204 1205 1206 1207 1210 1220 1222 1224 1226 1228 1230 1232 1234 1240 1241 1244 1245 1248 1249 1252 1253 1260 1262 1264 1266 1268 1270 1272 1280 1282 1284 1300 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = A376-TP348 A376-TP348H A403-WP304 A403-WP304H A403-WP304L A403-WP309 A403-WP310 A403-WP316 A403-WP316H A403-WP316L A403-WP317 A403-WP321 A403-WP321H A403-WP347 A403-WP347H A403-WP348 A409-TP304 A409-TP309 A409-TP310 A409-TP316 A409-TP317 A409-TP321 A409-TP347 A409-TP348 A430-FP304 A430-FP304H A430-FP316 A430-FP316H A430-FP321 A430-FP321H A430-FP347 A430-FP347H A451-CHP10 A451-CHP20 A451-CPF8C A451-CPF8M A451-CPF10MC A451-CPH8 A451-CPK20 A452-TP304H A452-TP316H A452-TP347H ASME SA479-316L and Copper Alloys, 1325-1549 AISI-CDA Alloy 377 B42 Cl.C10200, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2 B42 Cl.C10200, drwn, NPD 2.5-12 B42 Cl.C12000, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2 B42 Cl.C12000, drwn, NPD 2.5-12 B42 Cl.C12200, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2 B42 Cl.C12200, drwn, NPD 2.5-12 B43 Cl.C23000, annld B61 Cl.C92200 B62 Cl.C83600 B68 Cl.C10200, annld B68 Cl.C12000, annld B68 Cl.C12200, annld B75 Cl.C10200, annld B75 Cl.C10200, hrd drwn B75 Cl.C10200, light drwn B75 Cl.C12000, annld

General Comments

B. Codelists

Copper 1325 = 1330 = 1331 = 1334 = 1335 = 1338 = 1339 = 1342 = 1346 = 1350 = 1354 = 1356 = 1358 = 1362 = 1363 = 1364 = 1368 =

585

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
1369 1370 1374 1375 1376 1380 1381 1382 1386 1387 1392 1393 1398 1399 1404 1408 1410 1412 1414 1416 1418 1422 1430 1432 1434 1436 1438 1440 1442 1450 1452 1456 1458 1462 1463 1466 1467 1472 1474 1476 1478 1480 1482 1484 1486 1488 1490 1492 1494 1496 1498 1500 1502 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = B75 Cl.C12000, hrd drwn B75 Cl.C12000, light drwn B75 Cl.C12200, annld B75 Cl.C12200, hrd drwn B75 Cl.C12200, light drwn B75 Cl.C14200, annld B75 Cl.C14200, hrd drwn B75 Cl.C14200, light drwn B88 Cl.C10200, annld B88 Cl.C10200, drwn B88 Cl.C12000, annld B88 Cl.C12000, drwn B88 Cl.C12200, annld B88 Cl.C12200, drwn B96 Cl.C65500, annld B152 Cl.C10200, annld B152 Cl.C10400, annld B152 Cl.C10500, annld B152 Cl.C10700, annld B152 Cl.C12200, annld B152 Cl.C12300, annld B169 Cl.C61400, soft B283 Cl.C11000 B283 Cl.C37700 B283 Cl.C46400 B283 Cl.C48500 B283 Cl.C63900 B283 Cl.C65500 B283 Cl.C67500 B402 Cl.C70600, annld B402 Cl.C71500, annld B466 Cl.C70600, annld B466 Cl.C71500, annld B467 Cl.C70600, annld, <=4.5in OD B467 Cl.C70600, annld, >4.5in OD B467 Cl.C71500, annld, <=4.5in OD B467 Cl.C71500, annld, >4.5in OD B584 Cl.C86200 B584 Cl.C86300 B584 Cl.C86400 B584 Cl.C86500 B584 Cl.C86700 B584 Cl.C90300 B584 Cl.C90500 B584 Cl.C92200 B584 Cl.C92300 B584 Cl.C95200 B584 Cl.C95300 B584 Cl.C95500 B584 Cl.C95600 B584 Cl.C97300 B584 Cl.C97600 B584 Cl.C97800 and Nickel Alloys 1550-1774 B127-400 (N04400) hot rolled plt annld B127-400 (N04400) hot rolled plt AR B160-200 (N02200) annld B160-200 (N02200) hot fin B160-201 annld B161-200 (N02200) annld, <=5in OD B161-200 (N02200) annld, >5in OD

Nickel 1560 = 1561 = 1564 = 1565 = 1568 = 1572 = 1573 =

586

_ _______________
Appendix B:
1574 1576 1577 1578 1582 1586 1587 1590 1591 1594 1595 1596 1600 1601 1604 1605 1606 1607 1610 1611 1614 1615 1616 1620 1624 1626 1628 1630 1632 1634 1636 1638 1642 1643 1646 1648 1650 1652 1654 1656 1658 1660 1664 1666 1670 1672 1676 1680 1684 1688 1700 1702 1704 1706 1708 1710 1714 1718 1722 1724 1726 1728 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

General Comments

B161-200 (N02200) stress rlvd B161-201 (N02201) annld, <=5in OD B161-201 (N02201) annld, >5in OD B161-201 (N02201) stress rlvd B162-200 (N02200) hot rolled plt annld B162-201 (N02201) hot rolled plt annld B162-201 (N02201) hot rolled plt AR B164-400 (N04400) annld forged B164-400 (N04400) hot fin B165-400 (N04400) annld, <=5in OD B165-400 (N04400) annld, >5in OD B165-400 (N04400) stress rlvd B166-600 (N06600) annld B166-600 (N06600) hot fin B167-600 (N06600) cold drwn annld, <=5in OD B167-600 (N06600) cold drwn annld, >5in OD B167-600 (N06600) hot fin/hot fin annld, <=5in OD B167-600 (N06600) hot fin/hot fin annld, >5in OD B168-600 (N06600) hot rolled plt annld B168-600 (N06600) hot rolled plt AR B333-B (N10001) sln annld plt B333-B (N10001) sln annld sheet B333-B-2 (N10665) sln annld B335-B-2 (N10665) sln annld B366-WPHB (N10001) B366-WPHX (N06002) B366-WPN (N02200) B366-WPNC (N04400) B366-WPNC1 (N06600) B366-WPNL (N02201) B366-WPNLWX B366-WPNWX B407-800 (N08800) cold drwn annld B407-800 (N08800) hot fin/hot fin annld B407-800H (N08810) cold drwn sln annld/hot fin B443-625 (N06625) annld B444-625 (N06625) annld B446-625 (N06625) annld B464-20Cb (N08020) annld A494-CW-12M-1 A494-CW-12M-2 A494-CY-40 B574-C-4 (N06455) sln annld B574-C-276 (N10276) sln annld B575-C-4 (N06455) sln annld B575-C-276 (N10276) sln annld B581-G (N06007) sln annld B582-G (N06007) sln annld B612-200 (N02200) hot rolled plt AR B619-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld B619-B (N10001) sln annld B619-B-2 (N10665) sln annld B619-C-4 (N06455) sln annld B619-C-276 (N10276) sln annld B619-G1 (N06007) sln annld B619-X (N06002) sln annld B620-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld B621-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld B622-B (N10001) sln annld B622-B-2 (N10655) sln annld B622-C-4 (N06455) sln annld B622-C-276 (N10276) sln annld

B. Codelists

587

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
1730 = B622-G (N06007) sln annld 1732 = B622-X (N06002) sln annld Aluminum Alloys 1775-2299 1780 = B26-356.0 temper T6 1782 = B26-356.0 temper T71 1784 = B26-443.0 temper F 1790 = B209-1060 temper 0 1792 = B209-1060 temper H12 1794 = B209-1060 temper H14 1796 = B209-1060 temper H112 1798 = B209-1100 temper 0 1800 = B209-1100 temper H12 1802 = B209-1100 temper H14 1804 = B209-1100 temper H112 1806 = B209-3003 temper 0 1808 = B209-3003 temper H12 1810 = B209-3003 temper H14 1812 = B209-3003 temper H112 1814 = B209-3004 temper 0 1816 = B209-3004 temper H32 1818 = B209-3004 temper H34 1820 = B209-3004 temper H112 1822 = B209-5050 temper 0 1824 = B209-5050 temper H32 1826 = B209-5050 temper H34 1828 = B209-5050 temper H112 1830 = B209-5052 temper 0 1832 = B209-5052 temper H32 1834 = B209-5052 temper H34 1836 = B209-5052 temper H112 1838 = B209-5652 temper 0 1840 = B209-5652 temper H32 1842 = B209-5652 temper H34 1844 = B209-5652 temper H112 1846 = B209-5083 temper 0 1848 = B209-5083 temper H321 1850 = B209-5086 temper 0 1852 = B209-5086 temper H32 1854 = B209-5086 temper H34 1856 = B209-5086 temper H112 1858 = B209-5154 temper 0 1860 = B209-5154 temper H32 1862 = B209-5154 temper H34 1864 = B209-5154 temper H112 1866 = B209-5254 temper 0 1868 = B209-5254 temper H32 1870 = B209-5254 temper H34 1872 = B209-5254 temper H112 1874 = B209-5454 temper 0 1876 = B209-5454 temper H32 1878 = B209-5454 temper H34 1880 = B209-5454 temper H112 1882 = B209-5456 temper 0 1884 = B209-5456 temper H321 1886 = B209-6061 temper T4 1888 = B209-6061 temper T4, wld 1890 = B209-6061 temper T6 1892 = B209-6061 temper T6, wld 1894 = B209-6061 temper T651 1896 = B209-Alclad 3003 temper 0 1898 = B209-Alclad 3003 temper H12

588

_ _______________
Appendix B:
1900 1902 1904 1906 1908 1910 1912 1914 1916 1918 1920 1922 1930 1932 1934 1936 1938 1940 1942 1944 1946 1948 1950 1952 1954 1956 1958 1960 1962 1964 1966 1968 1970 1972 1974 1976 1978 1980 1982 1984 1986 1988 1990 1992 1994 2010 2012 2014 2016 2018 2020 2022 2024 2026 2028 2030 2032 2034 2036 2038 2040 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = B209-Alclad B209-Alclad B209-Alclad B209-Alclad B209-Alclad B209-Alclad B209-Alclad B209-Alclad B209-Alclad B209-Alclad B209-Alclad B209-Alclad 3003 3003 3004 3004 3004 3004 6061 6061 6061 6061 6061 6061 temper temper temper temper temper temper temper temper temper temper temper temper H14 H112 0 H32 H34 H112 T4 T4, wld T6 T6, wld T451 T651

General Comments

B210-1060 temper B210-1060 temper B210-1060 temper B210-3003 temper B210-3003 temper B210-3003 temper B210-3003 temper B210-5052 temper B210-5052 temper B210-5052 temper B210-5083 temper B210-5083 temper B210-5086 temper B210-5086 temper B210-5086 temper B210-5086 temper B210-5154 temper B210-5154 temper B210-5456 temper B210-5456 temper B210-6061 temper B210-6061 temper B210-6061 temper B210-6061 temper B210-6063 temper B210-6063 temper B210-6063 temper B210-6063 temper B210-6063 temper B210-Alclad 3002 B210-Alclad 3003 B210-Alclad 3003 B210-Alclad 3002 B221-1060 temper B221-1060 temper B221-1100 temper B221-1100 temper B221-3003 temper B221-3003 temper B221-5052 temper B221-5053 temper B221-5086 temper B221-5154 temper B221-5454 temper B221-5456 temper B221-6061 temper B221-6061 temper B221-6061 temper B221-6061 temper

0 H14 H112 0 H14 H18 H112 0 H32 H34 0 H112 0 H32 H34 H112 0 H34 0 H112 T4 T4, wld T6 T6, wld T4 T4, wld T5, wld T6 T6, wld temper 0 temper H14 temper H18 temper H112 0 H112 0 H112 0 H112 0 0 0 0 0 0 T4 T4, wld T6 T6, wld

B. Codelists

589

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
2042 2044 2046 2048 2050 2052 2054 2056 2070 2072 2074 2076 2078 2080 2082 2084 2086 2088 2090 2092 2094 2096 2098 2100 2102 2104 2106 2108 2110 2112 2114 2116 2118 2120 2122 2124 2126 2128 2130 2140 2142 2144 2146 2148 2150 2152 2160 2162 2164 2166 2168 2170 2172 2174 2176 2178 2180 2182 2184 2186 2188 2190 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = B221-6063 temper B221-6063 temper B221-6063 temper B221-6063 temper B221-6063 temper B221-6063 temper B221-Alclad 3003 B221-Alclad 3003 B241-1060 temper B241-1060 temper B241-1100 temper B241-1100 temper B241-3003 temper B241-3003 temper B241-3003 temper B241-5052 temper B241-5083 temper B241-5083 temper B241-5086 temper B241-5086 temper B241-5454 temper B241-5454 temper B241-5456 temper B241-5456 temper B241-5462 temper B241-5462 temper B241-6061 temper B241-6061 temper B241-6061 temper B241-6061 temper B241-6061 temper B241-6063 temper B241-6063 temper B241-6063 temper B241-6063 temper B241-6063 temper B241-6063 temper B241-Alclad 3003 B241-Alclad 3003 B247-3003 temper B247-3003 temper B247-5083 temper B247-5083 temper B247-5083 temper B247-6061 temper B247-6061 temper B345-1060 temper B345-1060 temper B345-3003 temper B345-3003 temper B345-3003 temper B345-5083 temper B345-5083 temper B345-5086 temper B345-5086 temper B345-6061 temper B345-6061 temper B345-6061 temper B345-6061 temper B345-6061 temper B345-6063 temper B345-6063 temper T4 T4, wld T5 T5, wld T6 T6, wld temper 0 temper H112 0 H112 0 H112 0 H18 H112 0 0 H112 0 H112 0 H112 0 H112 0 H112 T4 T4, wld T6, <NPD 1 T6, =>NPD 1 T6, wld T4 T4, wld T5 T5, wld T6 T6, wld temper 0 temper H112 H112 H112, wld 0 H112 H112, wld T6 T6, wld 0 H112 0 H18 H112 0 H112 0 H112 T4 T4, wld T6, <NPD 1 T6, =>NPD 1 T6, wld T4 T4, wld

590

_ _______________
Appendix B:
2192 2194 2196 2198 2200 2202 2220 2222 2224 2226 2228 2230 2232 2234 2236 2238 2240 2242 2244 2246 2248 2250 2252 2254 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = B345-6063 temper T5 B345-6063 temper T5, wld B345-6063 temper T6 B345-6063 temper T6, wld B345-Alclad 3002 temper 0 B345-Alclad 3002 temper H112 B361-WP1060 temper 0 B361-WP1060 temper H112 B361-WP1100 temper 0 B361-WP1100 temper H112 B361-WP3003 temper 0 B361-WP3003 temper H112 B361-WP5154 temper 0 B361-WP5154 temper H112 B361-WP6061 temper T4 B361-WP6061 temper T4, wld B361-WP6061 temper T6 B361-WP6061 temper T6, wld B361-WP6063 temper T4 B361-WP6063 temper T4, wld B361-WP6063 temper T6 B361-WP6063 temper T6, wld B361-AP Alclad 3003 temper 0 B361-AP Alclad 3003 temper H112

General Comments

B. Codelists

Other Materials 2300-2999 2310 = B337-1 2311 = B337-2 2313 = B337-3 2317 = B337-7 2320 = C76-CLIII 2325 = C443 2350 = C700 2400 = D1785-PVC1120 2402 = D2467-PVC1120 2440 = F439-CPVC4120 2442 = F441-CPVC4120 Gaskets 3000-3999] 3051 = G51 [Flat, 3052 = G52 [Flat, 3076 = G76 [Flat, 3077 = G77 [Flat, 3078 = G78 [Flat, 3079 = G79 [Flat, 3101 = G101 [Flat, 3102 = G102 [Flat, 3103 = G103 [Flat, 3111 = G111 [Flat, 3112 = G112 [Flat, 3154 = G154 [Flat, 3171 = G171 [Flat, 3175 = G175 [Flat, 3189 = G189 [Flat, 3195 = G195 [Flat, 3204 = G204 [Flat, 3210 = G210 [Flat, 3231 = G231 [Flat, 3234 = G234 [Flat, 3236 = G236 [Flat,

org fib, nitrile binder] org fib, nitrile binder, full face] graph] graph, full face] graph, 304 tang reinf] graph, 304 wire mesh reinf] asb] asb, full face] asb, wire mesh reinf] blue-asb] blue-asb, full face] Buna-N] Hypalon] Kel-F] neoprene] polyethylene] Teflon] Viton] soft-iron] 304] 321/347

591

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
3241 = G241 3244 = G244 3246 = G246 3251 3256 3261 3262 3266 3267 3271 3272 3276 3277 3281 3282 3286 3306 3307 3311 3312 3316 3317 3321 3322 3326 3327 3331 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = G251 G256 G261 G262 G266 G267 G271 G272 G276 G277 G281 G282 G286 G306 G307 G311 G312 G316 G317 G321 G322 G326 G327 G331 [Corr, soft-iron] [Corr, 304] [Corr, 321/347 [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, PTFE-J, asb-F] Teflon-J, blue-asb-F] soft-iron-J, graph-F] soft-iron-J, asb-F] low-C-steel-J, graph-F] low-C-steel-J, asb-F] 304-J, graph-F] 304-J, asb-F] 321/347-J, graph-F] 321/347-J, asb-F] I600-J, graph-F] I600-J, asb-F] I800-J, graph-F soft-iron-J, graph-F] soft-iron-J, asb-F] low-C-steel-J, graph-F] low-C-steel-J, asb-F] 304-J, graph-F] 304-J, asb-F] 321/347-J, graph-F] 321/347-J, asb-F] I600-J, graph-F] I600-J, asb-F] I800-J, graph-F

3356 = G356 3361 = G361 3366 = G366 3403 3404 3408 3429 3435 3436 3441 3451 3452 3463 3466 3468 3473 3476 3477 3488 3491 3493 3498 3551 3552 3556 3563 3566 3568 3569 3573 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = G403 G404 G408 G429 G435 G436 G441 G451 G452 G463 G466 G468 G473 G476 G477 G488 G491 G493 G498 G551 G552 G556 G563 G566 G568 G569 G573

[Inlaid corr, soft-iron-J, asb-chords] [Inlaid corr, low-C-steel-J, asb-chords] [Inlaid corr, 304-J, asb-chords [O [O [O [O [O [O [O [BX [BX [BX [BX [BX [BX [RX [RX [RX [RX [RX [RX ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, Buna-N] butyl] EDPM] nitrile] Saran] synthetic rubber] Viton soft-iron, 90 BHN max] lo-C, 120 BHN max] 304, 140 BHN max] 316, 140 BHN max] 321, 140 BHN max] I-X-750 soft-iron, 90 BHN max] lo-C, 120 BHN max] 304, 140 BHN max] 316, 140 BHN max] 321, 140 BHN max] I-X-750 soft-iron, 90 BHN max] lo-C, 120 BHN max] 5Cr-0.5Mo, 130 BHN max] 304, 140 BHN max] 316, 140 BHN max] 321, 140 BHN max] 347, 140 BHN max] I-X-750

[Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag

ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring,

592

_ _______________
Appendix B:
3601 3602 3606 3608 3610 3613 3616 3618 3619 3623 3651 3653 3655 3657 3659 3661 3663 3665 3669 3671 3673 3675 3677 3679 3681 3683 3685 3689 3691 3693 3695 3699 3701 3703 3705 3709 3711 3713 3715 3719 3721 3723 3725 3729 3731 3733 3735 3739 3741 3743 3745 3749 3751 3753 3755 3761 3763 3765 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = G601 G602 G606 G608 G610 G613 G616 G618 G619 G623 G651 G653 G655 G657 G659 G661 G663 G665 G669 G671 G673 G675 G677 G679 G681 G683 G685 G689 G691 G693 G695 G699 G701 G703 G705 G709 G711 G713 G715 G719 G721 G723 G725 G729 G731 G733 G735 G739 G741 G743 G745 G749 G751 G753 G755 G761 G763 G765 [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, soft-iron, 90 BHN max] lo-C, 120 BHN max] 5Cr-0.5Mo, 130 BHN max] 9Cr-1Mo, 130 BHN max] 410, 170 BHN max] 304, 140 BHN max] 316, 140 BHN max] 321, 140 BHN max] 347, 140 BHN max] I-X-750 304-W, 304-W, 304-W, 304-W, 304-W, 304-W, 304-W, 304-W, 304-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W, I600-W, I600-W, I600-W, I600-W, I600-W, I600-W,

General Comments

[Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd,

mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] blue-asb-F, CS-CR] Teflon-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 304-IR] graph-F, CS-CR, 304-IR] asb-F, CS-CR, 304-IR] Teflon-F, CS-CR, 304-IR mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] crodidolite asb-F, CS-CR] Teflon-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 316-IR] graph-F, CS-CR, 316-IR] asb-F, CS-CR, 316-IR] Teflon-F, CS-CR, 316-IR mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] Teflon-F, CS-CR] mica/gra-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR] graph-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR] asb-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR] Teflon-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] Teflon-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 321-IR] graph-F, CS-CR, 321-IR] asb-F, CS-CR, 321-IR] Teflon-F, CS-CR, 321-IR mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] Teflon-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 347-IR] graph-F, CS-CR, 347-IR] asb-F, CS-CR, 347-IR] Teflon-F, CS-CR, 347-IR mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, I600-O&IR] graph-F, I600-O&IR] asb-F, I600-O&IR

B. Codelists

593

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
3771 3773 3775 3781 3783 3785 = = = = = = G771 G773 G775 G781 G783 G785 [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, I800-W, I800-W, I800-W, I800-W, I800-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, I800-O&IR] graph-F, I800-O&IR] asb-F, I800-O&IR Bolting 4000-4999] 4011 = B11 [A193-B5, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-3] 4012 = B12 [A193-B5, lub, w/A194-3] 4014 = B14 [A193-B5, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4] 4015 = B15 [A193-B5, lub, w/A194-4] 4021 = B21 [A193-B6, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-6] 4022 = B22 [A193-B6, lub, w/A194-6] 4031 = B31 [A193-B7, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-2H] 4032 = B32 [A193-B7, lub, w/A194-2H] 4033 = B33 [A193-B7 zinc coated w/A194-2H zinc coated] 4035 = B35 [A193-B7 galv w/A194-2H galv] 4038 = B38 [A193-B7M, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-2H] 4039 = B39 [A193-B7M, lub, w/A194-2H] 4041 = B41 [A193-B8 Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8] 4042 = B42 [A193-B8 Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8] 4044 = B44 [A193-B8C Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8C] 4045 = B45 [A193-B8C Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8C] 4046 = B46 [A193-B8 Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8] 4047 = B47 [A193-B8M Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8M] 4048 = B48 [A193-B8M Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8M 4050 = B50 [A193-B8T Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8T] 4051 = B51 [A193-B8T Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8T] 4061 = B61 [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-3] 4062 = B62 [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-3] 4064 = B64 [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4] 4065 = B65 [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-4] 4066 = B66 [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-7] 4067 = B67 [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-7] 4068 = B68 [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8M] 4069 = B69 [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-8M] 4071 = B71 [A307-B w/A563-A] 4074 = B74 [A320-L7, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4] 4075 = B75 [A320-L7, lub, w/A194-4] 4076 = B76 [A320-B8, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8] 4077 = B77 [A320-B8, lub, w/A194-8] 4078 = B78 [A320-B8, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-B8] 4079 = B79 [A320-B8, lub, w/A194-B8] 4080 = B80 [A320-B8T Cl.1 >=1.5" lub, w/A194-B8] 4081 = B81 [A320-B8T Cl.1 lub, w/A194-B8] 4082 = B82 [A325 w/A325] 4084 = B84 [A453-660, >=1.5" lub, w/A453-660] 4085 = B85 [A453-660, lub, w/A453-660 4500 = Undefined Materials for British Standards - Ranges used 6000-7999 carbon steel pipes and tubes BS3601 6000 = BS3601:BW320 6001 = BS3601:ERW320 6002 = BS3601:ERW360 6003 = BS3601:ERW430 6004 = BS3601:S360 6005 = BS3601:S430 6006 = BS3601:SAW430

594

_ _______________
Appendix B:
steel pipes 6010 = 6011 = 6012 = 6013 = 6014 = 6015 = 6016 = 6017 = 6018 = 6019 = 6020 = 6021 = 6022 = 6023 = 6024 = 6025 = 6026 = 6027 = 6028 = 6029 = steel pipes 6030 = 6031 = 6032 = 6033 = steel pipes 6040 = 6041 = 6042 = 6043 = 6044 = 6045 = 6046 = 6047 = 6048 = 6049 = 6050 = 6051 = 6052 = 6053 = 6054 = 6055 = steel pipes 6060 = 6061 = 6062 = 6063 = 6064 = 6065 = 6066 = 6067 = 6068 = 6069 = 6070 = 6071 = 6072 = 6073 = 6074 = and tubes BS3602 part 1 1987 BS3602:PART 1:HFS360:Cat 1 BS3602:PART 1:HFS360:Cat 2 BS3602:PART 1:HFS430:Cat 1 BS3602:PART 1:HFS430:Cat 2 BS3602:PART 1:HFS500Nb:Cat 1 BS3602:PART 1:HFS500Nb:Cat 2 BS3602:PART 1:CFS360:Cat 1 BS3602:PART 1:CFS360:Cat 2 BS3602:PART 1:CFS430:Cat 1 BS3602:PART 1:CFS430:Cat 2 BS3602:PART 1:CFS500Nb:Cat 1 BS3602:PART 1:CFS500Nb:Cat 2 BS3602:PART 1:ERW360:Cat 1 BS3602:PART 1:ERW360:Cat 2 BS3602:PART 1:ERW430:Cat 1 BS3602:PART 1:ERW430:Cat 2 BS3602:PART 1:CEW360:Cat 1 BS3602:PART 1:CEW360:Cat 2 BS3602:PART 1:CEW430:Cat 1 BS3602:PART 1:CEW430:Cat 2 and tubes elevated temp prop BS3602 part 2 BS3602:PART 2:SAW410:cat 1 BS3602:PART 2:SAW410:cat 2 BS3602:PART 2:SAW460:cat 1 BS3602:PART 2:SAW460:cat 2 and tubes low temp prop BS3603 1977 BS3603 HFS410 LT 50 Cat 1 BS3603 HFS410 LT 50 Cat 2 BS3603 CFS410 LT 50 Cat 1 BS3603 CFS410 LT 50 Cat 2 BS3603 ERW410 LT 50 Cat 1 BS3603 ERW410 LT 50 Cat 2 BS3603 CEW410 LT 50 Cat 1 BS3603 CEW410 LT 50 Cat 2 BS3603 HFS503 LT 100 Cat 1 BS3603 HFS503 LT 100 Cat 2 BS3603 CFS503 LT 100 Cat 1 BS3603 CFS503 LT 100 Cat 2 BS3603 HFS509 LT 196 Cat 1 BS3603 HFS509 LT 196 Cat 2 BS3603 CFS509 LT 196 Cat 1 BS3603 CFS509 LT 196 Cat 2 and tubes elevated BS3604:HFS620-460 BS3604:CFS620-460 BS3604:ERW620-460 BS3604:CEW620-460 BS3604:HFS620-460 BS3604:CFS620-460 BS3604:ERW620-460 BS3604:CEW620-460 BS3604:HFS620-440 BS3604:CFS620-440 BS3604:ERW620-440 BS3604:CEW620-440 BS3604:HFS620-440 BS3604:CFS620-440 BS3604:ERW620-440 temp prop BS3604 Cat 1 Cat 1 Cat 1 Cat 1 Cat 2 Cat 2 Cat 2 Cat 2 Cat 1 Cat 1 Cat 1 Cat 1 Cat 2 Cat 2 Cat 2

General Comments

B. Codelists

595

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 6080 6081 6082 6083 6084 6085 6086 6087 6088 6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 6094 6095 6096 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = BS3604:CEW620-440 BS3604:HFS621 Cat BS3604:CFS621 Cat BS3604:ERW621 Cat BS3604:CEW621 Cat BS3604:HFS621 Cat BS3604:CFS621 Cat BS3604:ERW621 Cat BS3604:CEW621 Cat BS3604:HFS660 Cat BS3604:CFS660 Cat BS3604:HFS660 Cat BS3604:CFS660 Cat BS3604:HFS622 Cat BS3604:CFS622 Cat BS3604:HFS622 Cat BS3604:CFS622 Cat BS3604:HFS625 Cat BS3604:CFS625 Cat BS3604:HFS625 Cat BS3604:CFS625 Cat BS3604:HFS629-470 BS3604:CFS629-470 BS3604:HFS629-470 BS3604:CFS629-470 BS3604:HFS629-590 BS3604:CFS629-590 BS3604:HFS629-590 BS3604:CFS629-590 BS3604:HFS762 Cat BS3604:CFS762 Cat BS3604:HFS762 Cat BS3604:CFS762 Cat Cat 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat 1 1 2 2 2

1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2

SS pipes and tubes for pressure purposes BS3605:1973 6110 = BS3605 304S14 6111 = BS3605 304S18 6112 = BS3605 304S59 6113 = BS3605 304S22 6114 = BS3605 304S25 6115 = BS3605 316S14 6116 = BS3605 316S18 6117 = BS3605 316S59 6118 = BS3605 316S22 6119 = BS3605 316S26 6120 = BS3605 321S18 6121 = BS3605 321S59(1010) 6122 = BS3605 321S59(1105) 6123 = BS3605 321S22 6124 = BS3605 347S18 6125 = BS3605 347S59 6126 = BS3605 347S17 plates BS1501 part 1 1980 6200 = BS1501-141 360A 6201 = BS1501-151 360A 6202 = BS1501-151 400A 6203 = BS1501-151 430A 6204 = BS1501-151 360B 6205 = BS1501-151 400B 6206 = BS1501-151 430B 6207 = BS1501-154 360A

596

_ _______________
Appendix B:
6208 6209 6210 6211 6212 6213 6214 6215 6216 6217 6218 6219 6220 6221 6222 6223 6224 6225 6226 6227 6228 6229 6230 6231 6232 6233 6234 6235 6236 6237 6238 6239 6240 6241 6242 6243 6244 6245 6246 6247 6248 6249 6250 6251 6252 6253 6254 6255 6256 6257 6258 6259 6260 6261 6262 6263 6264 6265 6266 6267 6268 6269 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = BS1501-154 BS1501-154 BS1501-161 BS1501-161 BS1501-161 BS1501-161 BS1501-161 BS1501-161 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-164 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-223 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 400A 430A 360A 400A 430A 360B 400B 430B 360A RT 360A LT0 360A LT20 360B RT 360B LT0 360B LT20 400A RT 400A LT0 400A LT20 400B RT 400B LT0 400B LT20 460A RT 460A LT0 460A LT15 460A LT30 460B RT 460B LT0 460B LT15 460B LT30 490A RT 490A LT0 490A LT15 490A LT30 490B RT 490B LT0 490B LT15 490B LT30 400A RT 400A LT0 400A LT20 400A LT30 400A LT40 400A LT50 400B RT 400B LT0 400B LT20 400B LT30 400B LT40 400B LT50 430A RT 430A LT0 430A LT20 430A LT30 430A LT40 430A LT50 430B RT 430B LT0 430B LT20 430B LT30 430B LT40 430B LT50 460A RT 460A LT0

General Comments

B. Codelists

597

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 6275 6276 6277 6278 6279 6280 6281 6282 6283 6284 6285 6286 6287 6288 6289 6290 6291 6292 6293 6294 6295 6296 6297 6298 6299 6300 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-224 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 BS1501-225 460A 460A 460A 460A 460B 460B 460B 460B 460B 460B 490A 490A 490A 490A 490A 490A 490B 490B 490B 490B 490B 490B 460A 460A 460A 460A 460B 460B 460B 460B 490A 490A 490A 490B 490B 490B LT20 LT30 LT40 LT50 RT LT0 LT20 LT30 LT40 LT50 RT LT0 LT20 LT30 LT40 LT50 RT LT0 LT20 LT30 LT40 LT50 LT20 LT30 LT50 LT60 LT20 LT30 LT50 LT60 LT20 LT30 LT50 LT20 LT30 LT50

steel plates BS1501 part 2 1988 6310 = BS1501-243 6311 = BS1501-271 6312 = BS1501-281 6313 = BS1501-620 6314 = BS1501-621 6315 = BS1501-622-515 6316 = BS1501-622-690 6317 = BS1501-660 6318 = BS1501-503 6319 = BS1501-510 6320 = BS1501-828 steel plates BS1501 part 3 1973 6321 = BS1501-403S17A 6322 = BS1501-405S17A 6323 = BS1501-304S12A 6324 = BS1501-304S15A 6325 = BS1501-304S49A 6326 = BS1501-321S12A 6327 = BS1501-321S49A 6328 = BS1501-347S17A 6329 = BS1501-347S49A 6330 = BS1501-316S12A 6331 = BS1501-316S16A

598

_ _______________
Appendix B:
6332 6333 6334 6335 6336 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 6342 6343 6344 6345 6351 6352 6353 6354 6355 6356 6357 6358 6359 6360 6361 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = BS1501-316S37A BS1501-316S49A BS1501-320S17A BS1501-310S24A BS1501-NA15A BS1501-NA16A BS1501-460S52A BS1501-304S62A BS1501-304S65A BS1501-304S87A BS1501-347S67A BS1501-316S62A BS1501-316S66A BS1501-316S82A BS1501-403S17B BS1501-405S17B BS1501-304S12B BS1501-304S15B BS1501-304S49B BS1501-351S12B BS1501-351S49B BS1501-347S17B BS1501-347S49B BS1501-316S12B BS1501-316S16B BS1501-316S37B BS1501-316S49B BS1501-320S17B BS1501-310S24B BS1501-NA15B BS1501-NA16B BS1501-460S52B BS1501-304S62B BS1501-304S65B BS1501-304S87B BS1501-377S67B BS1501-316S62B BS1501-316S66B BS1501-316S82B BS1501-460S52A LT70

General Comments

B. Codelists

steel forgings to BS1503 1980 6380 = BS1503 164-490 6381 = BS1503 221-410 6382 = BS1503 221-430 6383 = BS1503 221-460 6384 = BS1503 221-490 6385 = BS1503 221-510 6386 = BS1503 221-530 6387 = BS1503 221-550 6388 = BS1503 223-410 6389 = BS1503 223-430 6390 = BS1503 223-460 6391 = BS1503 223-490 6392 = BS1503 223-510 6393 = BS1503 224-410 6394 = BS1503 224-430 6395 = BS1503 224-460 6396 = BS1503 224-490 6397 = BS1503 224-510

599

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
6398 6399 6400 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 6407 6408 6409 6410 6411 6412 6413 6414 6415 6416 6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 6422 6423 6424 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429 6430 6431 6432 6433 6434 6435 6436 6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443 6444 6445 6446 6447 6448 6449 6450 6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 245-420 620-440 620-540 621-460 660-460 271-560 622-490 622-560 622-650 625-520 625-590 503-490 509-690 410S21 420S29 403S17 405S17 304S11 304S31 304S51 347S31 347S51 321S31 321S51-490 321S51-510 316S11 316S13 316S31 316S33 316S51 320S33 310S31 164-490E 221-430E 221-460E 221-490E 221-510E 221-530E 221-550E 223-410E 223-430E 223-460E 223-490E 223-510E 224-410E 224-430E 224-460E 224-490E 224-510E 245-420E 620-440E 620-540E 621-460E 660-460E 271-560E 622-490E 622-560E 622-650E 625-520E

600

_ _______________
Appendix B:
6457 6458 6459 6460 6461 6462 6463 6464 6465 6466 6467 6468 6469 6470 6471 6472 6473 6474 6475 6476 6477 6478 6479 6480 6481 6482 6483 6484 6485 6486 6487 6488 6489 6490 6491 6492 6493 6494 6495 6496 6497 6498 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 625-590E 410S21E 420S29E 403S17E 405S17E 304S11E 304S31E 304S51E 347S31E 347S51E 321S31E 321S51-490E 321S51-510E 316S11E 316S13E 316S31E 316S33E 316S51E 223-410-LT10 223-410-LT20 223-410-LT50 223-430-LT10 223-430-LT15 223-430-LT40 223-460-LT0 223-460-LT10 223-460-LT20 223-490-LT0 223-490-LT10 223-510-LT0 224-410-LT10 224-410-LT20 224-410-LT50 224-430-LT10 224-430-LT15 224-430-LT40 224-460-LT0 224-460-LT10 224-460-LT20 224-490-LT0 224-490-LT10 224-510-LT0

General Comments

B. Codelists

6499 = BS1503 503-490-LT80 6500 = BS1503 509-690-LT196 6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506 6507 6508 6509 6510 = = = = = = = = = = BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 BS1503 304S11-LT196 304S31-LT196 347S31-LT196 321S31-LT196 321S51-490 321S51-510 316S11-LT196 316S13-LT196 316S31-LT196 316S33-LT196

steel casting to BS1504 1976 6520 = BS1504-161 grade 430A 6521 = BS1504-161 grade 480A

601

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
6522 6523 6524 6525 6526 6527 6528 6529 6530 6531 6532 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 6542 6543 6544 6545 6546 6547 6548 6549 6550 6551 6552 6553 6554 6555 6556 6557 6558 6559 6560 6561 6562 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = BS1504-161 grade 540A BS1504-161 grade 430E BS1504-161 grade 480E BS1504-161 grade 430A-LT40 BS1504-245A BS1504-245B BS1504-245A-LT50 BS1504-503-LT60 BS1504-621A BS1504-622A BS1504-622E BS1504-623A BS1504-625A BS1504-625E BS1504-629A BS1504-660A BS1504-420C29A BS1504-425C11A BS1504-304C15A BS1504-304C15A-LT196 BS1504-304C12A BS1504-304C12A-LT196 BS1504-347C17A BS1504-347C17A-LT196 BS1504-315C16A BS1504-315C16A-LT196 BS1504-316C12A BS1504-316C16A BS1504-316C71A BS1504-318C17A BS1504-316C16E BS1504-316C71E BS1504-316C12A-LT196 BS1504-316C16A-LT196 BS1504-316C71A-LT196 BS1504-317C12A BS1504-317C16A BS1504-364C11A BS1504-332C11A BS1504-310C40A BS1504-330C11A

steel bars and billets for bolting BS1506 1986 6570 = BS1506-162 6571 = BS1506-253 6572 = BS1506-253-LT100 6573 = BS1506-509-650 6574 = BS1506-509-650-LT196 6575 = BS1506-509-690 6576 = BS1506-509-690-LT196 6577 = BS1506-630-790 6578 = BS1506-630-790-LT100 6579 = BS1506-630-790-LT75 6580 = BS1506-630-860 6581 = BS1506-630-860-LT100 6582 = BS1506-630-690 6583 = BS1506-630-690-LT100 6584 = BS1506-631-850 6585 = BS1506-670-860 6586 = BS1506-671-850 6587 = BS1506-681-820 6588 = BS1506-410S21-690

602

_ _______________
Appendix B:
6589 6590 6591 6592 6593 6594 6595 6596 6597 6598 6599 6600 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 6613 6614 6615 6616 6617 6618 6619 6620 6621 6622 6623 6624 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = BS1506-410S21-720 BS1506-410S21-760 BS1506-410S21-750 BS1506-410S21-770 BS1506-416S29 BS1506-286S31 BS1506-286S31-LT196 BS1506-304S31 BS1506-304S31-LT196 BS1506-304S51 BS1506-304S61 BS1506-304S61-LT196 BS1506-304S71 BS1506-304S71-LT196 BS1506-303S22 BS1506-316S31 BS1506-316S31-LT196 BS1506-316S33 BS1506-316S33-LT196 BS1506-316S51 BS1506-316S53 BS1506-316S61 BS1506-316S61-LT196 BS1506-316S63 BS1506-316S63-LT196 BS1506-316S65 BS1506-316S65-LT196 BS1506-316S67 BS1506-316S67-LT196 BS1506-321S31 BS1506-321S31-LT196 BS1506-321S51-490 BS1506-321S51-520 BS1506-347S31 BS1506-347S31-LT196 BS1506-347S51

General Comments

B. Codelists

7999 = undefined

CL148, Piping Materials Class Description (31999)


NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-7999 are reserved for values that apply to US practices. Codelist numbers 8000-31999 are reserved for values that apply to practices in other countries. 1 = [Blank] US Piping Material Class Irons, F 2 = [FAY1W8] [8F0002] 3 = [FDYLW8] [8F0003] 6 = [FDYLU9] [9F0006] Carbon 14 = 16 = 19 = 31 = 32 = 33 = 35 = Steels, C [CAA5UA] [AC0014] [CAA5VA] [AC0016] [CAALV1] [1C0019] [CAC5C1] [1C0031] [CAC5C2] [2C0032] [CAC5C4] [4C0033] [CAC5G1] [1C0035] Descriptions, 2-7999 Gravity Head, Gray CI Gravity Head, DI Cement Lined AWWA 150# MJ, DI Cement Lined

CL125 CL125 CL150 CL150 CL300 CL600 CL150

FFFE, FFFE, FFFE, RFFE, RFFE, RFFE, RFFE,

CS, Brnz Trim Brnz Trim CS Cement Lined CS, Trim 8 CS, Trim 8 CS, Trim 8 CS, Trim 8

603

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
43 45 48 49 50 51 65 66 73 74 75 76 105 106 146 153 171 176 177 182 183 185 186 320 389 390 391 394 395 396 397 400 401 402 403 405 407 458 459 460 461 548 549 551 557 564 577 593 600 601 602 609 610 611 618 619 620 630 722 723 724 730 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [CAC5Q1] [CAC5R1] [CAC5U1] [CAC7C1] [CAC7C2] [CAC7C4] [CAC8C1] [CAC8C2] [CAC9C1] [CAC9C2] [CAC9C4] [CAC9C5] [CAD7K1] [CAD7K2] [CAF5S1] [CAF7J1] [CAFYC1] [CAH5C1] [CAH5C2] [CAH5G1] [CAH5G2] [CAH7C1] [CAH7C2] [CALYC2] [CAU5P4] [CAU5P5] [CAU5P6] [CAU5Q2] [CAU5Q4] [CAU5Q5] [CAU5Q6] [CAU5R2] [CAU5R4] [CAU5R5] [CAU5R6] [CAU5RF] [CAU7C6] [CAYYC1] [CAYYC2] [CDA1U1] [CDA5U1] [CJD7K1] [CJD7K2] [CJD7K5] [CJD8K2] [CJD9K1] [CJE7C2] [CJE9C2] [CJF5C1] [CJF5C2] [CJF5C4] [CJF7C1] [CJF7C2] [CJF7C4] [CJF9C1] [CJF9C2] [CJF9C4] [CJH7C4] [CJL7C2] [CJL7C4] [CJL7C5] [CJL9C2] [1C0043] [1C0045] [1C0048] [1C0049] [2C0050] [4C0051] [1C0065] [2C0066] [1C0073] [2C0074] [4C0075] [5C0076] [1C0105] [2C0106] [1C0146] [1C0153] [1C0171] [1C0176] [2C0177] [1C0182] [2C0183] [1C0185] [2C0186] [2C0320] [4C0389] [5C0390] [6C0391] [2C0394] [4C0395] [5C0396] [6C0397] [2C0400] [4C0401] [5C0402] [6C0403] [FC0405] [6C0407] [1C0458] [2C0459] [1C0460] [1C0461] [1C0548] [2C0549] [5C0551] [2C0557] [1C0564] [2C0577] [2C0593] [1C0600] [2C0601] [4C0602] [1C0609] [2C0610] [4C0611] [1C0618] [2C0619] [4C0620] [4C0630] [2C0722] [4C0723] [5C0724] [2C0730] CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1) CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL600 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL600 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL900 RFFE, CS, Trim 8 CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 9 CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 9 CL150 RFFE, CS, SS/TFE Trim CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 13 CL150 RFFE, CS, 316 Trim CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8 CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8 CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8 CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8 CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8 CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8 CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, 316 Trim CL600 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ASME-I) CL900 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ASME-I) CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ASME-I) CL300 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1) CL600 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1) CL900 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1) CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1) CL300 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.3) CL600 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.3) CL900 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3) CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3) CL800 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3) CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 8 CL150 BE, CS CL300 BE, CS CL150 FFFE, Galv CS, Brnz Trim CL150 FFFE, Galv CS, Brnz Trim CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12 CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12 CL900 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12 CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12 CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12 CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 9 CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 9 CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL600 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL600 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL600 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL600 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, Trim 8 CL300 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL600 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL900 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL300 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12

604

_ _______________
Appendix B:
731 732 785 794 800 803 841 842 = = = = = = = = [CJL9C4] [CJL9C5] [CJU7C6] [CJV5C6] [CJV7C6] [CJV7K6] [CPD5D1] [CPD5D2] [4C0731] [5C0732] [6C0785] [6C0794] [6C0800] [6C0803] [1C0841] [2C0842]

General Comments

CL600 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL900 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 8 CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 8 CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12 CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 12 CL150 RFFE, Low Temp CS, Trim 2 CL300 RFFE, Low Temp CS, Trim 2

Low and Intermediate Alloy Steels, L 1669 = [LPFYG2] [2L1669] CL300 RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, 316 Trim 1670 = [LPTYG2] [2L1670] CL300 RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, 316 Trim 1671 = [LPH5B1] [1L1671] CL150 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 1672 = [LPH5B2] [2L1672] CL300 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 1673 = [LPH5B4] [4L1673] CL600 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 1677 = [LPH7B1] [1L1677] CL150 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 1678 = [LPH7B2] [2L1678] CL300 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 1679 = [LPH7B4] [4L1679] CL600 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 1691 = [LPH9B4] [4L1691] CL600 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 1864 = [LPU5B6] [6L1864] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 1868 = [LPU5P5] [5L1868] CL900 BE/RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ASME-I) 1869 = [LPU5P6] [6L1869] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ASME-I) 1874 = [LPU5Q5] [5L1874] CL900 BE/RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1) 1875 = [LPU5Q6] [6L1875] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1 1882 = [LPU5R6] [6L1882] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3 1885 = [LPU7B6] [6L1885] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3013 = [LTC5B1] [1L3013] CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3014 = [LTC5B2] [2L3014] CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3027 = [LTC7B1] [1L3027] CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3028 = [LTC7B2] [2L3028] CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3029 = [LTC7B4] [4L3029] CL600 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3040 = [LTC8B1] [1L3040] CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3041 = [LTC8B2] [2L3041] CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3042 = [LTC8B4] [4L3042] CL600 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3048 = [LTC9B1] [1L3048] CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3049 = [LTC9B2] [2L3049] CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3193 = [LTH7B5] [5L3193] CL900 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3203 = [LTH9B2] [2L3203] CL300 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, NACE, Trim 8 3204 = [LTH9B4] [4L3204] CL600 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, NACE, Trim 8 3390 = [LTU7B6] [6L3390] CL1500 BE/RJFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8 3725 = [LVC7B1] [1L3725] CL150 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8 3726 = [LVC7B2] [2L3726] CL300 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8 3746 = [LVC9B1] [1L3746] CL150 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8 3747 = [LVC9B2] [2L3747] CL300 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8 3748 = [LVC9B4] [4L3748] CL600 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8 3749 = [LVC9B5] [5L3749] CL900 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8

B. Codelists

Stainless Steels, S 3977 = [SAC3T1] [1S3977] 3978 = [SAC3T2] [2S3978] 3979 = [SAC3T4] [4S3979] 3980 = [SAC3T5] [5S3980] 3984 = [SAD3C1] [1S3984] 3985 = [SAD3C2] [2S3985] 3988 = [SAD3E1] [1S3988] 3989 = [SAD3E2] [2S3989] 3991 = [SAD3F1] [1S3991] 4104 = [SAFYG1] [1S4104] 4218 = [SAM3T6] [6S4218] 4396 = [SBD3C2] [2S4396] 4488 = [SBF3U1] [1S4488] 5135 = [SED5C1] [1S5135]

CL150 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8 CL300 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8 CL600 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8 CL900 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8 CL150 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 12 CL300 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 12 CL150 RFFE, 304, Trim 2 CL300 RFFE, 304, Trim 2 CL150 RFFE, 304, Trim 2 CL150 RFFE, 304, 316 Trim CL1500 RJFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8 CL300 RFFE, 304L/316 Valves, Trim 12 CL150 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 2 CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12

605

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
5187 5188 5189 5197 6246 6247 6258 6449 6450 6457 = = = = = = = = = = [SEF3C1] [SEF3C2] [SEF3C4] [SEF3G1] [SHJ3B2] [SHJ3B4] [SHJ5B2] [SHV3B5] [SHV3B6] [SHV5B6] [1S5187] [2S5188] [4S5189] [1S5197] [2S6246] [4S6247] [2S6258] [5S6449] [6S6450] [6S6457] CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12 CL300 RFFE, 316, Trim 12 CL600 RFFE, 316, Trim 12 CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12 CL300 RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim CL600 RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim CL300 RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim CL900 BE/RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim CL1500 BE/RJFE, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim CL1500 BE/RJFE, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim

Copper Alloys, K Nickel Alloys, N 7540 = [NGF5G1] [1N7540] CL150 RFFE, Inconel 600, Inconel Trim Aluminum Alloys, A Other Materials, X 7687 = [XCY1W8] [8X7687] Gravity Head, Vitrified Clay 7689 = [XEY1W8] [8X7689] Gravity Head, Reinforced Concrete 7733 = [XTY1U9] [9X7733] SCH-80, SE, PVC European Piping Material Class Descriptions, 8000-9999 8000 = Carbon steel 8001 = Stainless steel 8002 = Forged steel 8010 = Ferritic steel 8011 = Austenitic steel 8020 = Plastic 8021 = Fiber glass 8030 = Glass lined 8031 = Cement lined 8032 = Chloroprene (CR) lined 9999 = Undefined The names of Piping Materials Classes are determined as follows:

o A list includes possible Piping Materials Classes. It consists of six ch names which are established on the basis of the naming convention ABCDEF. meaning of each of the characters in this code is defined below. Corresp values are given in the lists included in subsequent pages. A.......materials group B.......materials type C.......detail features D.......corrosion allowance or type of lining E.......service description F.......pressure rating

o The name of a Piping Materials Class is then determined from the conventi FAXXX, where: F.......pressure rating A.......material group XXX.....sequence number from list in 2090-41-SN MATERIALS GROUP AND TYPE: (1st and 2nd character)

606

_ _______________
Appendix B:
Irons, F A= Gray iron D= Ductile iron G= Ferritic ductile iron J= Austenitic ductile iron Z= Other 1 Carbon Steels, C A= CS D= CS, galvanized G= CS, jacketed J= CS, killed M= CS, killed, jacketed P= CS, low temp X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Low A= C= D= G= J= M= N= P= Q= R= S= T= U= V= X= Y= Z= and Intermediate Alloys, L 2Ni-1Cu 3.5Ni 5Ni 9Ni C-0.5Mo 0.75Cr-0.5Mo 1Cr-0.5Mo 1.25Cr-0.5Mo 2Cr-0.5Mo 2.25Cr-1Mo 3Cr-1Mo 5Cr-0.5Mo 7Cr-0.5Mo 9Cr-1Mo Other 1 Other 2 Other 3

General Comments

B. Codelists

Stainless Steels, S A= 304 B= 304L C= 304H D= 310 E= 316 F= 316L G= 316H H= 321 J= 321H K= 410S L= CHP10 M= CHP20 N= CPF10MC O= CPH8 P= CPK20 Q= UNS S31200 R= UNS S31250 S= UNS S31500 T= UNS S31803 U= UNS S32304 V= UNS S32550 W= Alloy 20 X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3

607

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
Copper Alloys, K A= Brass F= Bronze K= Copper P= 90Cu-10Ni R= 70Cu-30Ni X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Nickel Alloys, N A= Low C Ni D= Monel E= K-Monel F= R-Monel G= Inconel 600 H= Inconel 601 J= Inconel 625 L= Incoloy 800 M= Incoloy 800H N= Incoloy 801 P= Incoloy 802 Q= Incoloy 825 T= Hastelloy B U= Hastelloy C V= Hastelloy G X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Aluminum Alloys, A C= 3002 aluminum D= 3003 aluminum E= 3004 aluminum F= 5050 aluminum G= 5052 aluminum Q= 6061 aluminum R= 6063 aluminum S= Alclad X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Other Materials, X A= Asbestos cement B= Borosilicate glass C= Clay, vitrified D= Concrete, prestressed E= Concrete, reinforced F= CPVC G= Epoxy/Glass fib J= Furan/Carbon K= Furan/Glass fib L= Kynar N= Nylon P= Polyester/Glass fib Q= Polyethylene, high dens R= Polyethylene, low dens S= Polypropylene T= PVC U= Teflon V= Titanium

608

_ _______________
Appendix B:
W= X= Y= Z= Zirconium Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 MATERIALS CLASS DETAILS: (3rd character) A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H= J= K= L= M= N= 0= P= Q= R= S= T= U= V= W= X= Y= Z= Std FF, std trim Std FF, other Std RF, std trim Std RF, SS trim Std RF, Monel trim Std RF, other Std RF, other RFSF, std trim RFSF, SS trim RFSF, Monel trim RFSF, other RTJ, std trim RTJ, SS trim RTJ, Monel trim RTJ, other MJ, std trim MJ, SS trim MJ, Monel trim MJ, other BE, std trim BE, SS trim BE, Monel trim BE, other Other 1 Other 2

General Comments

B. Codelists

CA OR LINING TYPE: (4th character) 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H= J= L= M= N= O= P= Q= R= S= T= None 0.020" 0.030" 0.050" 0.063" 0.10" 0.125" 0.188" 0.250" 405 clad 410S clad 304 clad 304L clad 316 clad 316L clad 317 clad 317L clad 321 clad Cement lined Epoxy lined Glass lined Kynar lined Polyester lined Polypropylene lined PTFE lined Saran lined Teflon lined

609

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
U= V= W= X= Y= Z= TK31 lined R11 lined R15 lined R18 lined Other 1 Other 2 SERVICE: (5th character) A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H= J= K= L= P= Q= R= S= T= U= V= W= X= Y= Z= Process, hottest (-20 to 1500+/- degF) Process, hotter (-20 to 1000+/- degF) Process, hot (-20 to 800 degF) Process, cold (-20 to -50 degF) Process, colder (-20 to -150 degF) Process, coldest (-20 to -425 degF) Process, other Category M Acid Caustic/Amine LPG Steam ASME-I Steam B31.1 Steam B31.3 Fuel gas, fuel oil Lube oil, seal oil Category D Firewater Sewer Instrument Other 1 Other 2

RATING: (6th character) 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= A= F= G= H= J= K= L= M= N= R= T= V= CL150 CL300 CL400 CL600 CL900 CL1500 CL2500 GRAVHD OTHER CL125 CL800 CL2000 CL3000 CL4500 CL5000 CL6000 CL9000 CL10000 CL15000 CL20000 CL30000

610

_ _______________
Appendix B:

General Comments

CL160, Responsibility (25)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 16 25 = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] By Contractor By Owner By A By B By C By D By E By Equip Vendor By Vendor By Piping By Instruments By Others

B. Codelists

CL180, Fabrication Category (99)


NOTE: Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 5 7 15 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] CSSF, Contractor supplied, shop fabricated CSFF, Contractor supplied, field fabricated SSSF, Shop supplied, shop fabricated SSFF, Shop supplied, field fabricated FSSF, Field supplied, shop fabricated FSFF, Field supplied, field fabricated ASSF, A supplied, shop fabricated ASFF, A supplied, field fabricated BSSF, B supplied, shop fabricated BSFF, B supplied, field fabricated OSSF, Owner supplied, shop fabricated OSFF, Owner supplied, field fabricated

CL190, Coating Requirements (99)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] None Galv PS1.04 PS1.07 PS1.08 PS1.09 PS1.10 PS1.11 PS1.12 PS1.13 PS2.03 PS2.05 PS4.01 PS4.02 PS4.03 PS4.04 PS4.05

611

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 40 = = = = = = = = = = = PS8.01 PS9.01 PS10.01 PS10.02 PS11.01 PS12.01 PS13.01 PS14.01 PS16.01 PS18.01 Varies

CL200, Heat Tracing Requirements (10)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 2 3 4 = = = = [Blank] NT [Not heat traced] HT [Heat traced] PHT [Partially heat traced]

CL210, Heat Tracing Media (60)


NOTE: Codelist numbers 3-39 have been reserved for heat tracing media used for non-jacketed pipe heat tracing. Codelist numbers 40-60 have been reserved for heat tracing media used for jacketed pipe heat tracing. It is important that this allocation be respected. 1 = [Blank] 2 = N [None] For Non Jacketed Pipe Heat Tracing, 3-39 3 = E [Electric] 10 = FA [Heat transfer fluid A] 11 = FB [Heat transfer fluid B] 12 = FC [Heat transfer fluid C] 16 = I [Impedance] 17 = MI [Magnetic induction] 18 = SKE [Skin effect] 20 = SH [Steam high pressure, CL900] 21 = SL [Steam low pressure, CL150] 22 = SM [Steam medium pressure, CL600] 23 = SN [Steam normal pressure, CL300] 24 = SS [Steam superheated] For Jacketed Pipe Heat Tracing, 40-60 40 = FAJ [Heat transfer fluid A] 41 = FBJ [Heat transfer fluid B] 42 = FCJ [Heat transfer fluid C] 50 = SHJ [Steam high pressure, CL900] 51 = SLJ [Steam low pressure, CL150] 52 = SMJ [Steam medium pressure, CL600] 53 = SNJ [Steam normal pressure, CL300] 54 = SSJ [Steam superheated]

612

_ _______________
Appendix B:

General Comments

CL220, Insulation Purpose (40)


1 2 3 4 5 11 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 30 32 34 40 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] N P H HS HF AS C CV CS CH CF S SV R11 R15 R18 Varies [Not insulated] [Personnel protection insulated] [Hot insulated] [Hot insulated with sound attenuation] [Hot insulated with fire protection] [Anti-sweat insulated] [Cold insulated] [Cold insulated vacuum type] [Cold insulated with sound attenuation] [Cold and hot insulated] [Cold insulated with fire protection] [Sound attenuation insulated] [Sound attenuation insulation with vapor barrier] [Refractory lined, insulation] [Refractory lined, insulation/erosion] [Refractory lined, erosion]

B. Codelists

CL230, Cleaning Requirements (99)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15 = = = = = = = = [Blank] None CC1 CC2 CC3 CC4 CC5 Varies

CL330, CP Type/Termination/Preparation (999)


NOTE: Use 2-199 for bolted types; 300-399 for male types and 400-599 for female types. Refer to Reference Data Manager (PD_DATA) Reference Guide for additional data. 1 = [Blank] 2 = FE Use 11-15 for ends without integral gaskets. 10 = FFTP (11-19) 11 = FFFE 16 = FFFEWG Use 21-25 for ends without integral gaskets. 20 = RFTP (21-29) 21 = RFFE 26 = RFFEWG [Flanged end] integral gaskets; 16-19 for ends with [Flat-face flanged termination type] [Flat-face flanged end] [Flat-face flanged end with integral gasket] integral gaskets; 26-29 for ends with [Raised-face flanged termination type] [Raised-face flanged end] [Raised-face flanged end with integral gasket]

Use 31-35 for ends without integral gaskets; 36-39 for ends with integral gaskets. 30 = RJFTP (31-39) [RTJ-face flanged termination type] 31 = RJFE [RTJ-face flanged end]

613

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
Use 41-45 for ends without integral gaskets. 40 = TMFTP (41-49) 41 = STFE 42 = LTFE 43 = SMFE 44 = LMFE Use 51-55 for ends without integral gaskets. 50 = GFFTP (51-59) 51 = SGFE 52 = LGFE 53 = SFFE 54 = LFFE integral gaskets; 46-49 for ends with [Tongue/male-face flanged termination type] [Small-tongue-face flanged end] [Large-tongue-face flanged end] [Small-male-face flanged end] [Large-male-face flanged end] integral gaskets; 56-59 for ends with [Groove/female-face flanged termination type] [Small-groove-face flanged end] [Large-groove-face flanged end] [Small-female-face flanged end] [Large-female-face flanged end]

Use 61-65 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 66-69 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 60 = FFLFTP (61-69) [Flat-face lap-flanged termination type] 61 = FFLFE [Flat-face lap-flanged end] Use 71-75 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 76-79 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 70 = RFLFTP (71-79) [Raised-face lap-flanged termination type] 71 = RFLFE [Raised-face lap-flanged end] Use 81-85 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 86-89 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 80 = RJFLFTP (81-89) [RTJ-face lap-flanged termination type] 81 = RJLFE [RTJ-face lap-flanged end] Use 91-95 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 96-99 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 90 = TMFLFTP (91-99) [Tongue/male-face lap-flanged termination type] 91 = STLFE [Small-tongue-face lap-flanged end] 92 = LTLFE [Large-tongue-face lap-flanged end] 93 = SMLFE [Small-male-face lap-flanged end] 94 = LMLFE [Large-male-face lap-flanged end] Use for 100 101 102 103 104 101-105 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 106-109 lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. = GFFLFTP (101-109)[Groove/female-face lap-flanged termination type] = SGLFE [Small-groove-face lap-flanged end] = LGLFE [Large-groove-face lap-flanged end] = SFLFE [Small-female-face lap-flanged end] = LFLFE [Large-female-face lap-flanged end] gaskets; 116-119 for ends thru-bolted termination type] thru-bolted end] thru-bolted end with integral gasket]

Use 111-115 for ends without integral with integral gaskets. 110 = FFTBTP (111-119)[Flat-face 111 = FFTBE [Flat-face 116 = FFTBEWG [Flat-face

Use 121-125 for ends without integral gaskets; 126-129 for ends with integral gaskets. 120 = RFTBTP (121-129)[Raised-face thru-bolted termination type] 121 = RFTBE [Raised-face thru-bolted end] 126 = RFTBEWG [Raised-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket] Use 131-135 for ends without integral gaskets; 136-139 for ends with integral gaskets. 130 = RJTBTP (131-139)[RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type] 131 = RJTBE [RTJ-face thru-bolted end]

614

_ _______________
Appendix B:
Use 151-155 for ends without integral with integral gaskets. 150 = FFTBCSTP (151-159)[Flat-face 151 = FFTBCSE [Flat-face 156 = FFTBCSEWG [Flat-face

General Comments

Use 141-145 for ends without integral gaskets; 146-149 for ends with integral gaskets. 140 = MRJTBTP (141-149)[Male RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type] 146 = MRJTBEWG [Male RTJ-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket] gaskets; 156-159 for ends

thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination ty thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end] thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end with integ

Use 161-165 for ends without integral gaskets; 166-169 for ends with integral gaskets. 160 = RFTBCSTP (161-169)[Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination 161 = RFTBCSE [Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end] 166 = RFTBCSEWG [Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end with int

Use 171-175 for ends without integral gaskets; 176-179 for ends with integral gaskets. 170 = RJTBCSTP (171-179)[RTJ-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination typ 171 = RJTBCSE [RTJ-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end] Use 181-185 for ends without integral gaskets; 186-189 with integral gaskets. 180 = FFFTBTP (181-189)[Flat-full-face thru-bolted 181 = FFFTBE [Flat-full-face thru-bolted 186 = FFFTBEWG [Flat-full-face thru-bolted 190 = MJTP 191 = MJE 300 = MTP for ends

termination type] end] end with integral gasket]

B. Codelists

(190-199)[Mechanical joint termination type] [Mechanical joint end] (301-399)[Male termination type]

Use 301-309 for welded ends only 301 = BE [Beveled end] 302 = OLET [Olet beveled end] Use 311 321 331 341 351 355 361 371 381 Use 391 393 395 311-319 for welded ends only = TBE [Tapered and beveled end] = MFE [Male flared end] = MTE [Male threaded end] = MGE [Male grooved end] = MQCE [Male quick connect end] = MCE [Male clamp end] = MFRE [Male ferrule end] = MHE [Male hose end] = SPE [Spigot end] 391-399 for welded ends only = PE (391-399)[Plain end] = 3"FFPE [Plain end, 3" field fit] = 6"FFPE [Plain end, 6" field fit] (401-409)[Socket termination type] [Socket end]

400 = STP 401 = SE

Use 421-429 for welded ends only 420 = SWTP (421-429)[Socketwelded termination type] 421 = SWE [Socketwelded end]

615

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
440 = FTTP 441 = FTE 460 = FGTP 461 = FGE 470 = FCTP 471 = FCE 480 = FQCTP 481 = FQCE 500 = FFRTP 501 = FFRE 520 = FHTP 521 = FHE 540 = BLTP 541 = BLE 542 = MJBE 590 = HTP (441-449)[Female threaded termination type] [Female threaded end] (461-469)[Female grooved termination type] [Female grooved end] (471-479)[Female clamp termination type] [Female clamp end] (481-489)[Female quick connect termination type] [Female quick connect end] (501-509)[Female ferrule termination type] [Female ferrule end] (521-529)[Female hose termination type] [Female hose end] (541-549)[Bell end termination type] [Push-on bell end] [Mechanical joint bell end] (581-599)[Hole end termination type]

Use 591-599 for welded ends only 591 = HCE [Circular hole end] 600 = NTP 601 = NE 650 = UDTP 651 = UD (600-605)[Null termination type] [Null end] (651-659)[User defined termination type] [User defined end] (When a "UD" preparation end is detected by the system in the piping materials class, it will prompt the User to define the actual CP preparation to use. The value provided by the User will be used for initial placement of the component as well as for subsequent recreations of the piping system.)

CL332, Schedule / Thickness Override


NOTE: Schedule/thickness override values for metric projects must have codelist values between 499 and 1000. 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] .0625 .125 .1875 .25 .3125 .375 .4375 .5 .5625 .625 .6875 .75 .8125

616

_ _______________
Appendix B:
23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 100 101 102 103 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 130 131 132 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = .875 .9375 1 1.0625 1.125 1.1875 1.25 1.3125 1.375 1.4375 1.5 1.5625 1.625 1.6875 1.75 1.8125 1.875 1.9375 2 2.0625 2.125 2.1875 2.25 2.3125 2.375 2.4375 2.5 2.5625 2.625 2.6875 2.75 2.8125 2.875 2.9375 3 S-5S S-10S S-40S S-80S S-10 S-20 S-30 S-40 S-60 S-80 S-100 S-120 S-140 S-160 S-STD S-XS S-XXS

General Comments

B. Codelists

617

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

CL340, Safety Classification (99)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4 SC5 SC6 SC7 SC8 SC9

CL360, Stress Analysis Requirements (15)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 = [Blank] 2 = ANR =Analysis not required 3 = ATBP=Analysis to be performed 4 = AC =Analysis completed

CL365, Reporting Requirements (25)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 = Reportable by MTO 2 = Not Reportable by MTO

CL366, Requirement to Reconstruct (10)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Labels always require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 0 = None 1 = reconstruct 2 = re-calculate

CL380, Piping Component Type (2500)


1 = [Blank] 2 = Piping 3 = Piping 4 = Piping [Primary single line] [Secondary single line] [Primary double line]

618

_ _______________
Appendix B:
5 = Piping 6 = Hose 8 = Tubing 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 39 43 47 49 50 51 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 67 68 70 71 73 74 75 79 86 89 90 93 97 98 99 117 119 120 122 124 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Double line] Gate valve Extended body gate valve Conduit gate valve Blank gate valve 3-way valve Ball valve [2-way] 2-way valve 3-way ball valve Globe valve [2-way] Angle globe valve [2-way] 3-way globe valve Y globe valve Plug valve [2-way] 4-way valve 3-way plug valve 4-way plug valve Needle valve Butterfly valve Diaphragm valve Knife gate valve Slide valve [2-way] 3-way slide valve Angle valve Check valve Wafer check valve Angle check valve Stop check valve Angle stop check valve Y stop check valve Backflow preventer Automatic recirculation valve Angle blowdown valve Y blowdown valve Pinch valve Float valve Foot valve Tank drain valve Deluge valve Hose valve Angle hose valve Vent/drain valve Instrument root valve 3-way instrument root valve 4-way instrument root valve Flange Reducing flange Expander flange Orifice flange Blind flange Open spectacle blank Closed spectacle blank Blank disc Blind spacer Tapered spacer Open spacer End Head

General Comments

B. Codelists

619

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
135 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 148 151 152 155 156 157 159 160 162 163 165 167 169 171 172 173 175 176 177 179 181 182 184 189 191 192 193 195 196 198 200 202 204 206 207 209 210 216 218 220 222 223 224 229 231 233 237 239 240 242 243 246 249 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Plug Cap Diameter change Concentric diameter change Eccentric diameter change Coupling/connector Half coupling Concentric reducer Eccentric reducer Reducing coupling Concentric swage Eccentric swage Union Orifice union Dielectric union Hose connection Bushing Reducing insert Pipe bend 5.625 deg elbow 11.25 deg elbow 22.5 deg elbow <45 deg direction change 45 deg direction change 45 deg elbow 45 deg LR elbow 45 deg long tangent elbow 45 deg 3D elbow 45 deg union elbow 45 deg street elbow 45 deg short elbow 45 deg long elbow 60 deg elbow 45-90 deg direction change 90 deg direction change 90 deg elbow 90 deg SR elbow 90 deg LR elbow 90 deg LR long tangent elbow 90 deg reducing elbow 90 deg 3D elbow 90 deg union elbow 90 deg street elbow 90 deg reducing street elbow 90 deg short elbow 90 deg long elbow 180 deg return 180 deg SR return 180 deg LR return 180 deg close return 180 deg medium return 180 deg open return Miter 45 deg miter 90 deg miter Tee Reducing branch tee Reducing run and branch tee On-run union tee On-branch union tee Street tee Reducing instrument tee

620

_ _______________
Appendix B:
251 253 260 262 264 265 267 268 269 270 275 277 278 279 285 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 297 299 303 304 310 312 313 315 316 317 318 319 320 324 325 327 338 339 340 344 345 346 352 353 354 374 380 513 515 516 517 518 519 521 523 524 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Drip ring tee Basin tee True Y Lateral Reducing branch lateral Reducing run and branch lateral 90 deg short Y-branch 90 deg reducing short Y-branch 90 deg long Y-branch 90 deg reducing long Y-branch Cross Reducing branches cross Reducing run and branches cross Basin cross Saddle Sweepolet Weldolet Sockolet Thredolet Nippolet Elbolet Latrolet Endolet Reinforcing pad Reinforcing weld Buttweld Branch nipple In-line nipple Gasket Stud Nut Fire monitor Elevated fire monitor Remotely operated fire monitor Foam monitor Elevated foam monitor Remotely operated foam monitor Fire hydrant [2-way] Fire hydrant w/monitor nozzle [2-way] 3-way fire hydrant Hose reel Hose rack station Foam chamber Wet sprinkler Pre-action sprinkler Spray sprinkler Eye wash Safety shower Safety shower and eye wash Siamese [2-way] 90 deg siamese [2-way] Flame arrestor Hammer arrestor Vent silencer In-line silencer Vent Exhaust head Breather vent Free vent w/o screen Free vent w/screen

General Comments

B. Codelists

621

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
525 527 529 533 535 540 542 544 546 548 552 556 557 559 561 563 564 565 567 569 571 576 582 583 584 586 588 590 611 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Motor operated valve Mixing T Spray nozzle Removable spool Swing elbow Expansion joint Hinged expansion joint Swivel joint Mechanical coupling Flexible hose Sample cooler Strainer/filter Single basket strainer Duplex basket strainer T strainer Y strainer Temporary strainer Basket strainer Cone strainer Flat plate strainer Sump strainer Filter Steam trap Float steam trap Inverted bucket steam trap Thermostatic steam trap Thermodynamic steam trap Impulse steam trap Generic component

613 = Pip seg heat tracing brk/comp 2 747 748 749 750 823 824 825 833 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 909 911 913 923 927 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Air utility station Nitrogen utility station Water utility station Steam utility station Vent/drain detail 1 Vent/drain detail 2 Vent/drain detail 3 Vent/drain detail H Connection detail 1 Connection detail 2 Connection detail 3 Connection detail 4 Connection detail 5 Connection detail 6 Connection detail 7 Connection detail 8 Anchor 1-way support 2-way support Spring support Damping support

1008 = Tie-in marker 1018 1019 1020 1038 1039 = = = = = Utility connector Drain connector Utility station connector TRM off-dwg piping connector TLM off-dwg piping connector

622

_ _______________
Appendix B:
1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1047 1049 1053 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1079 1083 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = TTM off-dwg piping connector TBM off-dwg piping connector FRM off-dwg piping connector FLM off-dwg piping connector FTM off-dwg piping connector FBM off-dwg piping connector Utility off-dwg pip connector To off-vol piping connector From off-vol piping connector TRM off-unit piping connector TLM off-unit piping connector TTM off-unit piping connector TBM off-unit piping connector FRM off-unit piping connector FLM off-unit piping connector FTM off-unit piping connector FBM off-unit piping connector To off-site piping connector From off-site piping connector

General Comments

B. Codelists

1108 = Piping node marker 1117 = Terminator piping connector Entries above 1500 are reserved for DIN components. 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Valve generic Angle plug valve Non-return valve Check valve Valve with continous action 4-way globe valve 4-way valve,generic Steam throttling angle valve Steam throttling 3-way globe valve Butterfly valve with continous action [Blank] [Blank] Globe valve with continous action Gate valve with continous action Plug valve with continous action Angle globe valve with continous action Free wheel check valve Safety check valve Fire safety butterfly valve Aeration and deaeration armature Angle ball valve 4-way ball valve Taper plug valve Taper angle plug valve 3-way taper plug valve 4-way taper plug valve Flat seal bottom Blank disk Flange connection Screwed connection Angle diaphragm valve

1533 = Safety valve 1534 = Safety valve regulated with spring 1535 = Safety valve regulated with weight

623

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1587 1588 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Angle safety valve Angle safety valve regulated with spring Rupture disk Aeration with screw cap Inspection glass Aeration with plug Flanged aeration 90 deg earation 180 deg earation Tapered filter Discharge valve with blind flange Discharge valve Discharge with blind flanged gate valve Discharge with gate valve Bellow expansion joint Lyra expansion joint 90 degree elbow for JP T connection for JP Flange between JP Valve for connecting JP media Blindflange JP Skewed connection JP Y connection JP flanged connection segment/comp type 1 flanged connection segment/comp type 2 flanged connection segment/comp type 3 flanged connection segment/comp type 4 Flange from JP to normal pipe Valve for JP media supply Flange connection for JP Bypass for JP media Flange for bypassing JP Syphon Ball linkage Mixing component Flow straightener [Blank] Spring clip Fire extinguishing equipment powder Fire extinguishing equipment halogen Fire extinguishing equipment carbonic acid Fire extinguishing equipment foam Fire extinguishing equipment floor connection Fire extinguishing equipment overhead conn. Fire extinguishing connector Fire extinguishing water supply Fire brigade accessory Hydrant ground floor Hydrant overhead Wall hydrant Sprinkler equipment Flooding spray equipment Spraying equipment Refrigerating unit Globe valve with open function Angle valve with open function Clamp joint Taper pipe thread [Blank] Socket joint Taper pipe joint Cool box

624

_ _______________
Appendix B:
1602 = Ball float valve 1603 = Ball check valve 1604 = Flanged joint

General Comments

CL390, Action (40)


1 = [Blank] 2 3 5 6 10 11 15 16 18 19 20 24 30 31 34 35 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = NO NC CSO CSC LO LC FO FC FL FLO FLC FI EO EC DEO DEC [Normally open] [Normally closed] [Car seal open] [Car seal closed] [Locked open] [Locked closed] [Fail [Fail [Fail [Fail [Fail [Fail open] closed] locked] locked open] locked closed] indeterminate] open] close] to open] to close]

B. Codelists

[Energize to [Energize to [De-energize [De-energize

CL400, Option (999)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of the indicated codelist ranges. The number of codelist numbers used in this codelist set must not exceed 5000. 1 = [Blank] 2 = Bypass PMC Use to bypass PMC access Types Options, 11-19 11 = Type 1 12 = Type 2 13 = Type 3 14 = Type 4 15 = Type 5 16 = Type 6 17 = Type 7 18 = Type 8 19 = Type 9 Valve Type Options, 21-60 21 = Red port 24 = Full port 27 = Tight SO 30 = Dbl disc 32 = Y pattern 33 = Wafer 34 = Lug 36 = Single flange 38 = 1/8" hole 39 = Non lube 40 = 3/16" hole

[Reduced port valve] [Full port valve] [Tight shutoff valve] [Double disc valve] [Y pattern valve] [Wafer valve] [Lug pattern] [Single flange valve] [1/8" diam hole in flapper] [Non-lubricated valve] [3/16" diam hole in flapper]

625

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
41 42 43 44 45 46 48 49 50 56 57 58 59 60 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 1/4" hole Lube Quick close Quick open Al chk Excess flow Limit stop Hor chk Vert chk Tap lcn G Tap lcns G & Tap lcns G & Tap lcns G & Tap lcns G & [1/4" diam hole in flapper] [Lubricated valve] [Quick closing valve] [Quick opening valve] [Alarm check valve] [Excess flow check valve] [Limit stop valve] [Horizontal check valve] [Vertical check valve] [Tap at location G] [Tap at locations G & H] [Tap at locations G & I] [Tap at locations G & J] [Tap at locations G & K]

H I J K

Valve Operator Options, 61-100 61 = HW op [Handwheel] 64 = WR op [Wrench operator] 67 = LV op [Lever operator] 70 = T op [T-handle operator] 73 = GTM op [Gear operator, top mounted handwheel] 76 = GSM op [Gear operator, side mounted handwheel] 79 = EM op [Electric motor operator] 82 = ESHW op [Extended stem and handwheel] 88 = ESGTM op [Extended stem and gear operator, top mounted handw 91 = EXGSM op [Extended stem and gear operator, side mounted hand 100 = Post ind [Post indicator] Bend 121 124 127 130 133 134 136 Head 141 143 145 Radius Options, 121-140 = 1D bend [1D pipe bend] = 1.5D bend [1.5D pipe bend] = 3D bend [3D pipe bend] = 4D bend [4D pipe bend] = 5D bend [5D pipe bend] = 6D bend [6D pipe bend] = 10D bend [10D pipe bend] Type Options, 141-150 = Hemi hd = Ellip hd = 2:1 hd

[Hemispherical head] [Ellipsoidal head] [2:1 elliptical head]

Miter Options, 151-160 151 = 1 cut 152 = 2 cuts 153 = 3 cuts 154 = 4 cuts

[1-cut miter] [2-cuts miter] [3-cuts miter] [4-cuts miter]

Miscellaneous Options, 161-170 161 = Housing [Housing] 163 = After vlv [After isolating valve] 165 = Match branch nipple [Match branch nipple] 167 = Straight ends [Straight ends] 168 = Hor [Horizontal] 169 = Vert [Vertical] Flange 171 = 173 = 175 = 177 = 179 = Type Options, 171-200 WN [Weld neck flange] LWN [Long weld neck flange] SO [Slip-on flange] LJ [Lap joint flange] PL [Plate flange]

626

_ _______________
Appendix B:
181 183 185 187 189 191 193 195 196 197 = = = = = = = = = = SS-SO SS-LJ SS-PL LS-SO LS-LP Filler Socket SW SW Red Thd End Options, 201-400 FE FFFE FFFEWG RFFE RFFEWG RJFE STFE LTFE SMFE LMFE SGFE LGFE SFFE LFFE FFLFE RFLFE RJLFE STLFE LTLFE SMLFE LMLFE SGLFE LGLFE SFLFE LFLFE FFTBE FFTBEWG RFTBE RFTBEWG RJTBE MRJTBEWG FFTBCSE FFTBCSEWG RFTBCSE RFTBCSEWG RJTBCSE FFFTBE FFFTBEWG MJE

General Comments

[Short-stub-end, slip-on flange] [Short-stub-end, lap joint flange] [Short-stub-end, plate flange] [Long-stub-end, slip-on flange] [Long-stub-end, lap joint flange] [Filler flange] [Socket flange] [Socketwelded flange] [Socketwelded reducing flange] [Threaded flange]

Bolted 202 = 211 = 216 = 221 = 226 = 231 = 241 = 242 = 243 = 244 = 251 = 252 = 253 = 254 = 261 = 271 = 281 = 291 = 292 = 293 = 294 = 301 = 302 = 303 = 304 = 311 = 316 = 321 = 326 = 331 = 346 = 351 = 356 = 361 = 366 = 371 = 381 = 386 = 391 = Male 401 402 411 421 431 441 451 455 461

[Flanged end] [Flat-face flanged end] [Flat-face flanged end w/ integral gasket] [Raised-face flanged end] [Raised-face flanged end w/ integral gasket] [RTJ-face flanged end] [Small-tongue-face flanged end] [Large-tongue-face flanged end] [Small-male-face flanged end] [Large-male-face flanged end] [Small-groove-face flanged end] [Large-groove-face flanged end] [Small-female-face flanged end] [Large-female-face flanged end] [Flat-face lap-flanged end] [Raised-face lap-flanged end] [RTJ-face lap-flanged end] [Small-tongue-face lap-flanged end] [Large-tongue-face lap-flanged end] [Small-male-face lap-flanged end] [Large-male-face lap-flanged end] [Small-groove-face lap-flanged end] [Large-groove-face lap-flanged end] [Small-female-face lap-flanged end] [Large-female-face lap-flanged end] [Flat-face thru-bolted end] [Flat-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket] [Raised-face thru-bolted end] [Raised-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket] [RTJ-face thru-bolted end] [Male RTJ-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket] [Flat-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end] [Flat-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end w/ integra [Raised-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end] [Raised-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end w/ integ [RTJ-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end] [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end] [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket] [Mechanical joint end]

B. Codelists

End Options, 401-500 = BE = OLET = TBE = MFE = MTE = MGE = MQCE = MCE = MFRE

[Beveled end] [Olet beveled end] [Tapered and beveled end] [Male flared end] [Male threaded end] [Male grooved end] [Male quick connect end] [Male clamp end] [Male ferrule end]

627

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
471 481 491 493 495 = = = = = MHE SPE PE 3"FFPE 6"FFPE End Options, 501-696 SE SWE FTE FGE FQCE FFRE FHE BLE MJBE HCE [Male hose end] [Spigot end] [Plain end] [391-399] [Plain end, 3" field fit] [Plain end, 6" field fit] Female 501 = 521 = 541 = 561 = 581 = 601 = 621 = 641 = 642 = 691 = [Socket end] [Socketwelded end] [Female threaded end] [Female grooved end] [Female quick connect end] [Female ferrule end] [Female hose end] [Push-on bell end] [Mechanical joint bell end] [Circular hole end]

User Defined Null End Options, (697-697) 697 = NE [Null end] User Defined End Options, 699-699 699 = UD [User defined] Mixed End Options, 701-717 701 = FE x MJE 702 = FE x BE 703 = FE x PE 705 = BE x MTE 706 = BE x PE 707 = BE x SWE 708 = BE x FTE 709 = OLET x FTE 710 = MTE x PE 711 = PE x MTE 712 = PE x SWE 713 = PE x FTE 714 = SWE x FTE 715 = OLET x SWE 716 = MTE x FTE 717 = FE x FTE

[Flanged end by mechanical joint end] [Flanged end by beveled end] [Flanged end by plain end] [Beveled end by male threaded end] [Beveled end by plain end] [Beveled end by socketwelded end] [Beveled end by female threaded end] [Olet beveled end by female threaded end] [Male threaded end by plain end] [Plain end by male threaded end] [Plain end by socketwelded end] [Plain end by female threaded end] [Socketwelded end by female threaded end] [Olet beveled end by socketwelded end] [Male threaded end by female threaded end] [Flanged end by female threaded end]

The following options have been modified to include mm in lengths and add British metric pressure ratings (PN). Nipple 720 = 721 = 722 = 723 = 724 = 725 = 726 = 727 = 728 = 729 = 730 = 731 = 732 = 733 = 734 = 735 = Options, 718-755 3.0"(75mm) BE 3.0"(75mm) MTE 3.0"(75mm) PE 3.0"(75mm) BE x MTE 3.0"(75mm) BE x PE 3.0"(75mm) MTE x PE 4.0"(100mm) BE 4.0"(100mm) MTE 4.0"(100mm) PE 4.0"(100mm) BE x MTE 4.0"(100mm) BE x PE 4.0"(100mm) MTE x PE 5.0"(125mm) BE 5.0"(125mm) MTE 5.0"(125mm) PE 5.0"(125mm) BE x MTE

[3.0" [3.0" [3.0" [3.0" [3.0" [3.0" [4.0" [4.0" [4.0" [4.0" [4.0" [4.0" [5.0" [5.0" [5.0" [5.0"

long, long, long, long, long, long, long, long, long, long, long, long, long, long, long, long,

BE] MTE] PE] BE x MTE] BE x PE] MTE x PE] BE] MTE] PE] BE x MTE] BE x PE] MTE x PE] BE] MTE] PE] BE x MTE]

628

_ _______________
Appendix B:
736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 5.0"(125mm) BE x PE 5.0"(125mm) MTE x PE 6.0"(150mm) BE 6.0"(150mm) MTE 6.0"(150mm) PE 6.0"(150mm) BE x MTE 6.0"(150mm) BE x PE 6.0"(150mm) MTE x PE 7.0"(175mm) BE 7.0"(175mm) MTE 7.0"(175mm) PE 7.0"(175mm) BE x MTE 7.0"(175mm) BE x PE 7.0"(175mm) MTE x PE 8.0"(200mm) PE 9.0"(225mm) PE 1O.0"(250mm) PE 11.0"(275mm) PE 12.0"(300mm) PE HEX Options, 756-849 CL25 PN2.5 CL50 CL75 86# CL100 CL125 CL150 175# PN6 PN10 CL200 PN16 CL250 275# CL300 350# PN25 PN40 CL400 PN64 CL600 PN100 CL800 CL900 PN160 1000# PN250 PN320 PN400 CL1500 CL2000 CL2500 CL3000 CL4500 CL5000 CL6000 CL9000 CL10000 CL15000 [5.0" long, BE x PE] [5.0" long, MTE x PE] [6.0" long, BE] [6.0" long, MTE] [6.0" long, PE] [6.0" long, BE x MTE] [6.0" long, BE x PE] [6.0" long, MTE x PE] [7.0" long, BE] [7.0" long, MTE] [7.0" long, PE] [7.0" long, BE x MTE] [7.0" long, BE x PE] [7.0" long, MTE x PE] [8.0" long, PE] [9.0" long, PE] [10.0" long, PE] [11.0" long, PE] [12.0" long, PE] [Hexagon]

General Comments

B. Codelists

Rating 756 = 757 = 758 = 759 = 760 = 761 = 762 = 763 = 764 = 765 = 766 = 767 = 768 = 769 = 770 = 773 = 774 = 775 = 776 = 777 = 778 = 781 = 782 = 785 = 789 = 790 = 792 = 794 = 795 = 796 = 797 = 801 = 805 = 809 = 813 = 815 = 817 = 821 = 823 = 827 =

629

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002
831 835 836 838 840 = = = = = CL20000 CL30000 SCH 40 SCH 80 GRAVHD Thickness Options, 851-869 851 = 0.0625"(2mm) thck 852 = 0.125"(3mm) thck 853 = 0.1875"(4mm) thck 854 = 0.25"(6mm) thck 855 = 0.3125"(8mm) thck 856 = 0.375"(9mm) thck 857 = 0.4375"(10mm) thck 858 = 0.5"(12mm) thck 859 = 0.5625"(14mm) thck 860 = 0.625"(16mm) thck 861 = 0.6875"(18mm) thck 862 = 0.75"(20mm) thck 863 = 0.8125"(21mm) thck 864 = 0.875"(22mm) thck 865 = 0.9375"(24mm) thck 866 = 1.0"(25mm) thck End Finish Options, 870-879 870 = 63 Ra 871 = 60-100 Ra 873 = 80-150 Ra 875 = 200 Ra 877 = Stock Gasket 880 = 881 = 882 = 883 = 884 = 885 = 886 = 887 = 894 = Options, 880-899 F gskt FFF gskt C gskt FDJ gskt CDJ gskt R gskt SW gskt MSS gskt SP gskt

[63 Ra finish] [60-100 Ra finish] [80-150 Ra finish] [200 Ra finish] [Stock-finish]

[Flat gasket] [Flat full face gasket] [Corrugated gasket] [Flat double jacketed gasket] [Corrugated double jacketed gasket] [Ring gasket] [Spiral-wound gasket] [MSS-SP-44 gasket] [Special gasket]

Stud & Nut Options, 900-909 900 = Spec bolt ID Basis Options, 910-910 910 = ID basis Code 912 915 922 923 924 929 930 933 937 945 949 950 955 Options, 911-989 = ANSI-B16.12 = ANSI-B16.15 = ANSI-B16.22 = ANSI-B16.23 = ANSI-B16.24 = ANSI-B16.36 = ANSI-B16.42 = ANSI-B1.20.3 = ANSI-B1.20.7 = ASTM-A74 = AWWA-C110 = AWWA-C115 = AWWA-C151

[Special bolting]

[Dimensions based on inside diameter]

[Cast iron drainage fittings] [Cast bronze fittings] [Copper solder joint pressure fittings] [Copper solder joint drainage fittings] [Bronze flanges] [Orifice flanges] [Ductile iron flanges and fittings] [Dryseal pipe threads] [Hose coupling screw threads] [Cast iron soil pipe and fittings] [Iron fittings] [Iron pipe and fittings] [Ductile iron pipe]

630

_ _______________
Appendix B:
960 961 962 970 975 979 980 981 = = = = = = = = AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub API-5LE API-6A API-605 MSS-SP-44-NB MSS-SP-44-B

General Comments

[Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175] [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175] [Steel slip-on flanges CL275] [Polyethylene fittings] [Wellhead flanges and fittings] [API-605 flanges] [MSS non-blind flanges] [MSS blind flanges]

Vendor 990 = 991 = 992 = 993 = 994 = 995 = 996 = 997 = 998 = 999 =

Options, 990-999 Tube-Turn Dow Aloyco Yarway Teledyne Farris 1 R & G Sloane American DI Pipe Gladding McBean [Vitrified clay S-XS pipe and fittings] Taylor Forge ITT VALVES

B. Codelists

European DIN Standards 1001 = Spacer length 10 mm 1002 = Spacer length 15 mm 1003 = Spacer length 20 mm 1004 = Spacer length 25 mm 1005 = Spacer length 30 mm 1006 = Spacer length 35 mm 1007 = Spacer length 40 mm 1008 = Spacer length 45 mm 1009 = Spacer length 50 mm 1010 = Spacer length 60 mm 1011 = Spacer length 70 mm 1012 = Spacer length 80 mm 1013 = Spacer length 90 mm 1014 = Spacer length 100 mm

CL420, Piping Component Type/Source (25)


NOTE: This codelist defines the type of piping component involved and the source of the data used in its definition. In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 0 = Piping cmdty component from PMC 1 = Piping cmdty component from User 2 = Piping flanged cmdty component from PJS 3 = Piping cmdty component from branch table 4 = Piping specialty component from PJS 5 = Piping specialty component from User - spec data input 6 = Piping specialty component from User - no spec data input 7 = Branch reinforcement from user 8 = Branch reinforcement from branch table

631

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide April 2002

CL425, Piping/Tubing Type (25)


NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 = Piping 2 = Tubing 3 = Hose

CL430, Instrument Component Type/Source (25)


NOTE: This codelist defines the type of instrument component involved and the source of the data used in its definition. In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 0 = Instr specialty component from PJS 1 = Instr specialty component from User - spec data input 2 = Instr specialty component from User - no spec data input

CL499, Piping Notes (999)


1 = [Blank] Notes Applicable to the Piping Materials Class, 2-199 3 = Valve and flange protectors required. 22 = Valves shall be in accordance with NACE MR-01-75. 50 = The Manufacturer shall be consulted for special bolting requirements where both the design temperature is above 800 degF and the valve bonnet is insulated. 54 = Unions shall not be used. 56 = Gasket seating surfaces shall have 125 Ra surface finish. 57 = Unions shall not be used. Gasket seating surfaces shall have 125 Ra surface finish. 58 = Unions shall not be used. Gasket seating surfaces shall have 125 Ra surface finish. Valves shall be in accordance with NACE MR-01-75. 60 = All welds shall use compat